JP2019055028A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a performance effect.SOLUTION: It is possible to display a specific display (e.g., an active display in which a display position can be switched, and a reservation display) corresponding to a variable display in a mode accompanied by an operation. It is possible to change a display mode (e.g., a display color) of the specific display. It is possible to execute a suggestive performance (e.g., a first change performance) for suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display. It is possible to change the display mode of the specific display at different ratios according to an operation mode of the specific display (e.g., a display position (an advance position or a retreat position) when the suggestive performance is executed (e.g., the display mode of the specific display is changed at a ratio of 100% when the display position of the specific display subjected to the execution of the first change performance is the advance position, while the display mode of the specific display is not changed when it is the retreat position). Thereby, it is possible to cause a player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 50

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area (also referred to as a “start prize”), the game machine is predetermined. Some prize balls are paid out to the player. Further, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) when a game medium wins in a specific winning area (also referred to as “starting area”). Some are configured to be able to be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of information becomes the specific display result.

  The advantageous state means an advantageous state for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the advantageous state is, for example, a state in which the variable winning means (for example, a big prize opening) is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a game medium (a big hit gaming state), or a state advantageous for a player. A predetermined game value such as a state where the right is generated or a condition where a premium game medium payout condition is easily established.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When a big win occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game medium shifts to an advantageous state (a big hit gaming state) where the game medium is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. An opening time (for example, 30 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses.

  In addition, there is a display capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, a hold display corresponding to a variable display that has not been executed yet, an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed). For example, there is a display in which the hold display is always rotated (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-212136 A (FIG. 67)

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, only the specific display operates, so that the effect of production cannot be enhanced.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect.

  (Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.), and is accompanied by an operation. Specific display corresponding to variable display in a mode (for example, a mode in which the display position is switched to the advance position or the retreat position, a display mode in which the eyes are opened from the expressionless display mode, and a display mode in which sweat is circulated) (For example, an active display corresponding to a change during execution, a hold display corresponding to a change that has not yet been started) can be displayed, and a display mode (for example, display color (white, blue, red) is displayed. Specific display means (for example, steps S663B and S667B in the production control microcomputer 100) that can change the shape, pattern, position, range, etc. The active display is displayed, the hold display is displayed by performing steps S3911, S3929, and the display mode of the specific display is changed by performing step S4713), and the change of the display mode of the specific display is suggested Suggestive effect execution means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the change effect is set in step S4506, and the change effect (first change effect, second change effect)) can be executed, and step S8004 The process table corresponding to the change effect is selected and the change effect is executed by performing steps S8006 and S8105), and the detection means (for example, the game area 9010) used for the game can be detected. For example, the out sphere detector 907 shown in FIGS. 0), a signal line (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 156) to which a detection signal from the detection unit is transmitted, and a reception unit for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board 9011 and the main board 9011 side) And a predetermined connection section provided in the error detection means, an abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, the CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 157), and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, Normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first starting winning port, ordinary variable winning ball device 906B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 9050A to 9050D serving as general winning regions, and special variable winning ball device 907 serving as a big winning port A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, or the like) for paying out game media based on winning a prize, etc., and a predetermined state (for example, a normal state or the like) different from the advantageous state. Specifically, the number of game media (for example, the number of shot balls) detected by the detection means in the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are all off) and the payout means in the predetermined state Predetermined information (for example, performance information in FIG. 136, etc.) calculated based on the number of game media paid out (for example, the number of winning balls by winning at each winning opening) can be displayed (for example, performance display Information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 160), and when the abnormality detection means detects an abnormality in the reception state, the display by the information display means is limited (for example, FIG. 158). As shown in FIG. 159, an error is notified and the performance display is limited, etc., and the specific display means is a specific display operation mode (for example, a display position (advance position, Avoid position). Other operation modes such as operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward or rightward) may be used. ) Can change the display mode of the specific display at different ratios (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the steps S4707 to S4709 to display the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect. When the position is the advance position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the retreat position, the specific display The display mode is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%). According to such a configuration, the player can be focused on the operation mode of the specific display.

  (Means 2) In the means 1, the specific display means displays the specific display in a mode with an operation regardless of whether the display mode is changed (for example, the display position (advance position, The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is shown in FIG. 46C). By executing step S4508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 5, when the operation frequency is high, the change effect (first change effect, second change effect) is compared with the case where the operation frequency is low. It may be easy to execute. According to such a configuration, the player can be focused on the operation mode of the specific display.

  (Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the specific display means can display a specific display by switching between a specific operation mode (for example, an advance position) and a non-specific operation mode (for example, a retracted position) (for example, The production control microcomputer 100 can execute steps S4704, S4709, and S4710), and the display mode of the specific display is changed when the operation mode of the specific display when the suggestion effect is executed is the specific operation mode. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4707 to S4713 to display the specific display when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. It is also possible to change the mode). According to such a configuration, the player can be focused on the operation mode of the specific display.

  (Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the suggestion effect executing means includes a plurality of types including a first suggestion effect (for example, a first change effect) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a second change effect). Any of the suggested effects can be executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes one of the changed effects by performing steps S8004, S8006, and S8105), and the specific display means is The specific display can be displayed by switching between a specific operation mode (for example, advance position) and a non-specific operation mode (for example, retraction position) (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs steps S4704, S4709, and S4710). When the first suggestion effect is executed, the specific display is performed when the operation mode of the specific display is the specific operation mode. The display mode can be changed (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4707 to S4713 so that the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change production is the advance position. On the other hand, when the second suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of the operation mode of the specific display (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control). By executing steps S4711 to S4713, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of whether the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the second change effect is the advanced position or the retracted position. It may be) According to such a configuration, the production effect can be improved.

  (Means 5) It is possible to suggest that any one of the means 1 to 4 is controlled to be in an advantageous state depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs processing in steps S3906 and S3924. By determining the display mode pattern using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in 39, the reliability of the big hit is suggested by the display mode (white <blue <red) is suggested), and the specific display is displayed by the operation mode of the specific display It is possible to suggest whether the aspect changes (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the operation frequency using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 46C in step S4508, Confidence that the display mode of the specific display changes depending on the operation frequency (low frequency <high frequency It may be suggesting) that. According to such a configuration, the production effect can be improved.

  (Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the suggestion effect executing means is the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed (for example, the first hold shown in FIGS. 52 (1) to (2)). The suggestion effect (for example, the second change effect shown in FIGS. 52 (1) and 52 (2)) and the changed specific display in a state where the changed specific display is displayed. Is a suggestive effect (for example, FIGS. 52 (1), (4)) that suggests a change in the display mode of another different specific display (for example, the second hold display 53 shown in FIGS. 52 (1), 52). , (5) can be executed in a mode (for example, a mode in which the arrow Y flies as shown in FIG. 52 (1)) at least partially in common. Good. According to such a configuration, the content of the production can be surprising, and the production effect can be improved.

  (Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the specific display means displays a specific display (for example, a hold display, an active display) corresponding to the variable display at least in a normal mode (for example, “white”), A first specific mode (for example, “red”) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (for example, a direction suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, Display in any display mode including, for example, “white”, “red”, and the second special suggestion mode as shown in FIG. A display execution means that can execute the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 53 (5) and 53), the second special suggestion The special zone effect suggested in the mode can be executed. The specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then displays the display mode of the specific display when an effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed. The second specific mode can be changed to the first specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the hold display 53 displayed in the second special suggestion mode is displayed 5 seconds after the special zone effect is started. It can be changed to “red”. According to such a configuration, a sense of expectation for the specific mode can be enhanced.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the following means C1-means C4. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-118314, there is a gaming machine that displays information on the number of balls (the number of hit balls, the number of out balls) and the number of prize balls (base value). Are known. However, for example, there is a possibility that inaccurate information is displayed when the out sphere is not accurately detected. In view of this point, it is desired to provide a gaming machine that can prevent display of inaccurate information.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc.) that can execute a game and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.),
Detection means (for example, the out ball detector 90710 shown in FIGS. 156, 160, etc.) capable of detecting a game medium (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) used in the game;
A signal line (for example, a signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 156) to which a detection signal from the detection unit is transmitted;
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, and the like);
An abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, the CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 157);
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 906B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 9050A to 9050D serving as a general winning region, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on winning a special variable winning ball device 907
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like, specifically, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag is all off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of balls to be struck) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth) For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 160) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible).
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection unit, the display by the information display unit is limited (for example, an error is notified and the performance display is limited as shown in FIGS. 158 and 159).
According to this, it is possible to prevent the information display means from performing inaccurate display.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection unit, the display state by the information display unit is changed to indicate that the abnormality in the reception state has been detected (for example, as shown in FIGS. 158 and 159) For example).
According to this, it can confirm, without providing a new display means.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The abnormality detection means can detect disconnection of the signal line (for example, can be detected by monitoring a signal input from the out-sphere detector 90710),
It is possible to notify the outside (for example, a game effect lamp 909, speakers 908L and 908R, a card unit display device, a calling lamp device, a hall computer, etc.) that the disconnection of the signal line has been detected.
According to this, it can recognize, without performing door opening operation | work.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to C3,
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 is configured as a unit that can be placed on the game board 902 as shown in FIG. 160 (B)).
According to this, maintenance becomes easy. In addition, different models can be used in common.

  Moreover, the form which implements invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B1-means B9 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Predetermined conditions (effective start winning or first starting winning opening, reaching to the second starting winning opening, reach in a specific period (1 minute, 2 minutes or 5 minutes after the general winning) after the game medium enters the general winning area When the state is established, there is provided an effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect F (prefetching notice effect), specific effect G (variation result notice effect)). This is a characteristic gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to be interested in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area, and the specific effect is obtained after the gaming medium enters the general winning area. It is possible to increase interest until it is executed.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
Execute a notification effect to execute a notification effect that identifiable that the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area (any one of the characters A to C appears immediately after winning the general winning opening) A gaming machine further comprising means.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
In addition, as the notification effect for informing that the state after the game medium has entered, it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. Includes an effect that is difficult to grasp and an effect that makes it easy for the player to grasp whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, there is an effect of outputting a sound effect for a relatively short period of time (for example, about 0.5 to 2 seconds) immediately after the game medium enters the general winning area, and as the latter effect, the general winning area There is an effect in which the character is continuously displayed on the image display device until a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) elapses immediately after the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B2,
The notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not it is the specific period (the specific period (character display period) varies depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of the game until the specific effect is executed can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period varies depending on the form of the notification effect (the display period when the character A appears is 1 minute, the display period when the character B appears is 2 minutes, and the display when the character C appears) (The period will be 5 minutes)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by paying attention to the aspect of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to the means B4 may be as follows, for example.
First, based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) has a predetermined time period (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes). Any specific period is selected, and an effect mode (for example, the type of character displayed on the image display device 905) is determined based on the selected specific period, and a notification effect (character is specified for the specific period) is determined. The effect to be displayed) is executed.
For example, when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected, the first effect mode (for example, display of the character A) is performed more than when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio. In addition, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, display of the character B) is more effective than when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio.
In addition, when the specific period and the effect mode of the notification effect correspond to one to one (if character A is fixed for 1 minute, character B is 2 minutes, character C is fixed for 3 minutes) ), Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) determines one of the predetermined effect aspects. The notification effect (the effect of displaying the character for a specific period) may be executed according to the determined effect mode.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
The variable display means is based on a start condition based on the entry of a game medium into the start winning area (when the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, a game ball wins the first start winning opening (effective start winning). ), The start condition (controlled by the big hit game state) is established after the game ball wins (effective start win) at the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number does not reach the upper limit. The variable display is executed based on the fact that the special display game is not executed).
The effect execution means corresponds to the variable display game to be notified in the start winning memory display area 905H for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form) characterized in that a hold change effect for changing a display part from a normal mode to a special mode is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, the game medium enters the general winning area by creating an interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. It is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific performance is executed.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
A gaming machine of means B5,
Holding information corresponding to variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed in response to the presence of a variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) Display information) on the display device (image display device 905) is further provided, the holding information display control means (effect control CPU90120),
The notice effect is for notifying the display result of variable display corresponding to the hold information according to the form of the hold information (if the start winning determination result specifying command is a command that specifies “big hit”, The display part corresponding to the command is a pending change effect in which the normal mode (for example, blue or red) is changed to the special mode (for example, gold) at a higher rate than the command for designating “out”. It is a gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine of means B6,
The effect execution means displays the object (characters A to C) on the display device so as to be able to specify that the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area is specified (to the general winning opening) (Any of the characters A to C appear immediately after winning)
The notice effect is an effect that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information (the display portion corresponding to the special game that is held by the displayed character performing some action) The game machine is characterized in that the production is changed from a normal mode to a special mode.
According to this, it is possible to suggest the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and the advance notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied by the common object, and the game to the general winning area It is possible to further enhance the interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific performance.
Specifically, it is possible to recognize that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information by creating an effect in which the mode of the hold information also changes with a change in the display mode of the object (for example, a predetermined action). Become.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B7,
In the gaming machine, the specific effect is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period (the specific effect F and the specific effect G are not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period). is there.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B8,
There are a plurality of the general winning areas (four from the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D),
The specific period varies depending on the general winning area where the game medium has entered (if the first general winning port 9050A or the second general winning port 9050B has been won, the specific period is specified for 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes) It can be a period (characters A to C can appear), but when winning in the third general prize 50C or the fourth general prize opening 9050D, only a period of 5 minutes from the general prize can be a specific period (only character C It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can appear)).
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B10-means B21 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Motion detection means (operation button 9030 and effect control CPU 90120) capable of detecting the player's motion;
A specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo-continuation effect) is detected when the player's motion (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stopping operation, all symbol stopping operation) is detected by the motion detecting means after the game medium enters the general winning area. An effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a notice effect and a chance eye notice effect) is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 50th effect form to the 53rd effect form). .
According to this, after the game medium enters the general winning area, the specific effect is executed in response to the player's action, so that it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
A gaming machine of means B10,
It is notified in a identifiable manner that the game medium has entered the general winning area (in the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 904000 is increased every time a winning is made to the general prize opening. In the effect form and the 53rd effect form, a notice effect (“cut-in”, “pseudo-run”, “chance eye”) that can be executed every time a prize is entered into the general winning opening is determined, and the character 904000a corresponding to the determination result is determined. Up to 904000c (displayed) A notification effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a notification effect is further provided.
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B12 is
A gaming machine of means B11,
Depending on the type of action (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for enabling execution of the specific effect, the notification effect mode ("cut-in" character 904000a, "pseudo ream" The gaming machine is characterized in that the character 904000b and the character “chance” (904000c) are different.
According to this, the player can recognize which type of operation can perform the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B13 is
A gaming machine of means B11 or means B12,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning port 9050A of the left game area 9010A or When winning in the second general winning opening 9050B, it is notified at a higher rate than when winning in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D in the right game area 9010B). It is a gaming machine.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B14 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B13,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the mode of the notification effect varies (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 9050A or the second general prize opening 9050B is awarded). In this case, either the “cut-in” character 904000a or the “pseudo-ream” character 904000b can be displayed, and when the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is won, One of the characters “Cut-in” 904000a and “Chance eyes” 904000c can be displayed).
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B15 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B14,
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the general winning a prize was won in the normal state). In the case (when winning in the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B in the left gaming area 9010A), when winning in the general winning opening in the probability change state or the short time state (the first gaming area 9010B in the right gaming area 9010B) 3) the general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means B16 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B15,
The form of the notification effect varies depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, the characters 904000a and “pseudo” in the normal state are displayed. (The “continuous” character 904000b can be displayed, and the “cut-in” character 904000a and the “chance eye” character 904000c can be displayed in the probability variation state or the short time state.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means B17 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B16,
The effect execution means can execute the specific effect when the predetermined action is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (in the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, (Pseudo-announcement effect can be executed when winning more than 2 times in the prize opening, and chance-notice effect can be executed when winning more than 3 times in the general prize opening)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B18 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B17,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The execution ratio of the specific effect varies depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 9050A or the second general prize opening 9050B). When winning, the notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when winning in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B19 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B18,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the types of specific effects that can be executed differ (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 9050A or the second general prize opening). When winning in 9050B, either cut-in notice effect or pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed, and when winning in the third general prize opening 9050C or the fourth general prize opening 9050D, cut-in notice effect And any chance chance notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B20 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B19,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the execution ratio of the specific effect varies (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, when a general winning opening is won in the normal state) In the case of winning in the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B in the left game area 9010A), in the case of winning in the general winning opening in the probability changing state or in the short time state (third general in the right game area 9010B) (When winning in the winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is notified to enable execution of a specific effect at a higher rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means B21 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B20,
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, in the normal state, the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous effect). Any one of the notice effects can be executed, and in the case of the probability change state or the short time state, either the cut-in notice effect or the chance eye notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B22-means B28 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B22 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
The general winning area when the variable display is being executed (within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed or has been decided to be executed) When the game medium enters and when the variable display is not executed (the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is determined to be executed during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) The gaming machine (27th effect form to 30th effect form pachinko) characterized in that the ratio of the specific effect to be executed differs depending on when the game medium enters the general winning area during the period when the game is not performed. A gaming machine 901).
According to this, when the variable display is executed and when the variable display is not executed, the execution ratio of the specific effect is different, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means B23 is
A gaming machine of means B22,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
In the gaming machine (27th effect form, 29th effect form pachinko gaming machine 901), the specific effect is an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point giving effect). is there.
According to this, even when variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B24 is
A gaming machine of means B22,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect), and the general winning area when the variable display is not executed This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 28th effect form and the 30th effect form), which is not executed when a game medium enters.
According to this, when variable display is executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B25 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
The general winning area when the variable display is being executed (within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed or has been decided to be executed) When the game medium enters and when the variable display is not executed (the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is determined to be executed during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) A different specific effect is executed when a game medium enters the general winning area during a period when the game is not performed (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form). ).
According to this, when the variable display is being executed and the case where the variable display is not being executed are different different specific effects, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. .

The gaming machine of means B26 is
A gaming machine of means B25,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
When the game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is executed, effects related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) Is executed as the specific production,
When a game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is not executed, an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point giving effect) is executed as the specific effect. This is a characteristic gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form).
According to this, when the variable display is executed, the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area can be further enhanced, and also when the variable display is not executed, the general winning area It is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when a game medium enters the game.

The gaming machine of means B27 is
Any one of the gaming machines (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form) selected from the means B22 to the means B26,
Depending on the state when the game medium has entered the general winning area when the variable display is executed, the ratio of the specific effect to be executed is different (for example, a special game at the time of winning a general winning opening) Whether or not the game is executed, the number of reserved memory at the time of winning the general prize opening, and the gaming state at the time of winning the general prize opening is the normal state, or the probability change state or the short time state Depending on the classification of whether or not, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to give interest to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B28 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B22 to the means B27 (27th effect form to 32nd effect form pachinko gaming machine 901),
When the variable display is executed, different specific effects are executed according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (for example, a special game is executed when winning the general winning opening) Whether the game is in the normal state, the probability change state, or the short-time state. Depending on the category, etc., different types of specific effects are executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to give interest to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B29-means B39 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 86), a winning rate at a start winning opening in a gaming machine is calculated, and a character wearing clothes of different colors according to the calculated winning rate. A gaming machine that executes an effect display to be displayed has been proposed. However, it is necessary not only to display information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the start winning opening on the information display means, but also to make the information more easily visible. The invention according to the means B29 to the means B39 is made in view of the above circumstances, and is to make it easy to visually recognize information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B29 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. And
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Display means (image display device 905),
The information display means displays effect information (for example, a decorative symbol and a fourth symbol) different from the entry information in an area where visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as exemplified in FIG. 95), Is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B30 is
A gaming machine of means B29,
The information display means can display the approach information regardless of the aspect of the effect information (as illustrated in FIG. 95, whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed and the fourth symbol is also displayed. Regardless of whether or not is variably displayed, the number of wins to the general winning opening, the number of winning to the first starting winning opening, the number of winning to the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. In addition, the number of winnings displayed can be updated according to the winnings at each winning award)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, approach information can be visually recognized irrespective of the aspect of effect information.

The invention according to means B31 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. And
Error detection means (abnormality detection sensor group 9026) for detecting errors (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.);
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Display means (image display device 905),
The information display means sends error information (for example, an error message) for notifying the occurrence of the error to an area where visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIGS. 95 and 96). Is displayed in a second area β) that is different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B32
A gaming machine of means B31,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as illustrated in FIG. 96, regardless of whether an error message is displayed or not, a general winning a prize opening). The number of winnings, the number of winnings at the first start winning opening, the number of winnings at the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and displayed according to the winnings at each winning opening. The number of winnings can be updated)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention according to means B33 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. And
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Display means (image display device 905),
The information display means displays a display result of variable display (for example, a display result of a final decoration symbol (final stop symbol) or a fourth symbol) executed based on the fact that the game medium has entered the start area, and the entry information. Is displayed in a region where the visibility of the game is not hindered (second area β different from the first area α in which the number of winnings at each winning opening is displayed as illustrated in FIG. 95). It is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B34 is
A gaming machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the approach information even when the variable display is executed (as illustrated in FIG. 95, whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed, Regardless of whether or not the 4th symbol is variably displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. Displayed and the number of winning prizes displayed can be updated according to the winnings at each winning award)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
This makes it possible to visually recognize the entry information even when variable display is being executed.

The invention according to means B35 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B34,
Operable operation means (operation button 9030);
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the entry information on the information display means in accordance with the operation of the operation means (as shown in FIG. 58, to each winning mouth based on the setting by the operation button 9030 And a presentation control CPU 90120 for setting whether or not to display the winning information related to the number of winnings in the first area α.
According to this, it becomes possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the entry information.

The invention according to means B36 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B35,
An operation means (operation button 9030) operable by the player;
Aggregation period setting means for setting the aggregation period of the entry information in accordance with the operation of the operation means (production control CPU 90120 for setting the aggregation period based on the setting by the operation button 9030 as illustrated in FIG. 99); A gaming machine characterized by further comprising:
According to this, the total period can be set according to the player's judgment.

The invention according to means B37 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B36,
It further comprises a game state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling a game state (a big hit game state, a probability change state, a short time state, a low base state, a high base state, etc.)
The information display means can display the entry information according to the gaming state (as illustrated in FIG. 98, the number of winnings in the low base state and the number of winnings in the high base state can be displayed separately. Is)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information corresponding to the gaming state.

The invention according to means B38 is
A gaming machine of means B37,
Variable display means for performing variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on the fact that the game medium has entered the start area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B),
The gaming state control means includes a low-frequency state (a low base state in which high opening control for the second starting prize opening is not executed) and a high-frequency state (first 2) A high base state in which high opening control for the start winning a prize is being executed)
The information display means includes the entry information relating to the period controlled to the low frequency state (the number of general winnings in the low base state exemplified in FIG. 98) and the entry relating to the period controlled to the high frequency state. Information (such as the number of general winnings in the high base state illustrated in FIG. 98) can be displayed.
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information according to the low frequency state and the entry information according to the high frequency state.

The invention according to means B39 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B38,
Notification is made when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as exemplified in FIG. 99, when the set number of winnings per set period is less than a predetermined reference value, the fact is notified) A gaming machine further comprising notification means (image display device 905) for displaying a message.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition.

  Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions related to means B40 and means B41 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIGS. 85 and 86), when a player receives a game start by inputting a password, the winning rate at the start winning opening in the gaming machine is calculated. There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes an effect display for displaying a character wearing clothes of different colors according to the calculated winning rate. However, it has not been possible for only a person other than the player (for example, a store clerk in the game hall) to confirm information relating to the entry of the game medium into the entry area such as the start prize opening. The invention according to the means B40 and the means B41 is made in view of the above situation, and is intended to enable only a person other than the player (for example, a store clerk in the game hall) to confirm the information.

The invention according to means B40 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having an entry area (for example, a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter. A gaming machine 901),
A granting unit (for example, a game control microcomputer 90100) for granting a gaming value (for example, a prize ball) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the entry area;
A specific operation means (for example, a mode switch 9031, a reset button) that is disabled by the player;
Informing means for informing cumulative value information (for example, the number of payouts of each general prize port, the number of payouts of each start prize port, and the total number of payouts shown in FIG. 70) regarding the accumulated value of the game value given by the giving means ( For example, an image display device 905)
The notifying means notifies the cumulative value information based on the operation of the specific operating means (for example, information on the winning number management table is displayed when the mode changeover switch 9031 is operated to enter the maintenance mode). (Display in 905)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, only a person other than the player (for example, a shop clerk) can confirm the information.

  The “specific operation means that cannot be operated by the player” may be any means that can be operated by, for example, a game shop clerk or a game machine inspector / inspector.

The invention according to means B41 is
A gaming machine of means B40,
There is an effect execution means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) for executing effects related to the game,
The notifying means notifies the cumulative value information in a manner corresponding to the aspect of the effect executed by the effect executing means (for example, the character appearing during the notice effect or the reach effect uses the information in the winning number management table). Display aloud or output sound)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to easily recognize which type of gaming machine information is based on the notification mode.

  Further, the modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions related to means B42 to means B51 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 120), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up on the effect display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the counted number reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memory in the memory is generated. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187, the number of entered balls is uniformly counted up by one by entering the game balls into the normal winning opening. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. The invention according to the means B42 to the means B51 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to increase the interest of games in gaming machines having a general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B42 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect in which the effect mode is changed stepwise in accordance with the entry of the game medium into the general winning area (specific effect D in which the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is increased stepwise from a minimum of 0 to a maximum of 10). Specific execution execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that can be executed,
According to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (a distinction between a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed and a period during which the special symbol variable display is not being executed, etc.) The rate at which the effect mode changes in the effect is different (the rate at which the effect of increasing the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 by one step is different).
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form).
According to this, the interest rate when the game medium enters the general winning area is increased by changing the ratio of the change in the production mode in the specific effect according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means B43 is
A gaming machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). Is what
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 34th effect form) characterized in that the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different.
According to this, according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different, so that the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B43,
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) ) And the display result of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (a jackpot symbol, an off symbol), the rate of change of the production mode in the specific effect is made different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the rate of change of the production mode in the specific production may be different (for example, it changes at a high rate when it becomes a big hit symbol, and changes at a lower rate when it becomes a loss symbol). .

The gaming machine of means B44 is
A gaming machine of means B42 or means B43,
The variable display means (image display device 905) terminates the variable display based on the start condition (previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). And the variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative design) is executed based on the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit gaming state) ,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol);
A notice effect (prefetching notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display as a target of the prefetching notice effect). Further comprising a notice effect executing means (effect control CPU90120) executed before)
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect The ratio of the change in the effect mode in the specific effect varies according to the variable display count until the variable display is executed), and the pachinko gaming machine of the 35th effect form 901).
According to this, depending on the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed, the ratio of the change in the effect mode in the specific effect varies. The entertainment of the production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B44,
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect Effect in the specific effect depending on the variable display count until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (big hit symbol, off symbol) You may make it the ratio in which an aspect changes differ. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) is executed within a predetermined range when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed. In the case of being within (for example, 2 times or less), the rate of change in the effect mode in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (high in the case of a big hit symbol) It may be changed at a rate, and when it becomes an outlier design, it may be changed at a lower rate).

The gaming machine of means B45 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B42 to the means B44,
Reach effect execution means (effect control CPU90120) for executing a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When a game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state in the reach change), and after the execution of the reach effect When the game medium enters the general winning area (when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is after reaching the reach state in the reach variation), the rate of change of the production mode in the specific effect is different. Is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 36th effect form).
According to this, when the game medium enters the general winning area before execution of the reach effect, and when the game medium enters the general winning area after execution of the reach effect, the effect mode changes in the specific effect. Different ratios can further enhance the interest of specific effects.

The gaming machine of means B46 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B42 to the means B45,
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D);
Depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (when a game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, and the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D). The game machine (the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 37th effect form) is characterized in that the rate of change in the effect mode in the specific effect differs.
According to this, the interest rate of the specific effect can be further enhanced by changing the ratio of the change of the effect mode in the specific effect according to the general winning area where the game medium has entered.

The gaming machine of means B47 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect in which the effect mode is changed stepwise in accordance with the entry of the game medium into the general winning area (specific effect D in which the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is increased stepwise from a minimum of 0 to a maximum of 10). Specific execution execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that can be executed,
According to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (a distinction between a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed and a period during which the special symbol variable display is not being executed, etc.) The stage in which the production mode changes in production is different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) for increasing the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is different).
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form).
According to this, depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means B48 is
A gaming machine of means B47,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). Is what
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) , A gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 39th effect form) characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different.
According to this, depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different, and thus the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B48,
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) ) And the display result of the variable display (a jackpot symbol, a loss symbol) executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage of changing the presentation mode in the specific effect is different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production may be different (for example, the number of stages changes when the jackpot symbol is changed, and the number of stages changes when it becomes a loss symbol). good.

The gaming machine of means B49 is
A gaming machine of means B47 or means B48,
The variable display means (image display device 905) terminates the variable display based on the start condition (previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). And the variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative design) is executed based on the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit gaming state) ,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol);
A notice effect (prefetching notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display as a target of the prefetching notice effect). Further comprising a notice effect executing means (effect control CPU90120) executed before)
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect The stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs according to the variable display frequency until the variable display is executed), and the pachinko gaming machine of the 40th production form 901).
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production varies depending on the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice production is executed. The entertainment of the production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B49,
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect Effect in the specific effect depending on the variable display count until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (big hit symbol, off symbol) You may make it the stage in which an aspect changes differ. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) is executed within a predetermined range when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed. In the case of within (for example, 2 times or less), the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production varies depending on the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the announcement production (for example, when it becomes a big hit symbol) It is also possible to change the number of stages, and change the number of stages to a smaller number if the pattern is out of place.

The gaming machine of means B50 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B47 to the means B49,
Reach effect execution means (effect control CPU90120) for executing a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When a game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state in the reach change), and after the execution of the reach effect The stage in which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different when the game medium enters the general prize area (when the timing when the game ball wins the general prize opening is after reaching the reach state in the reach variation). Is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 41st effect form).
According to this, when the game medium enters the general winning area before execution of the reach effect, and when the game medium enters the general winning area after execution of the reach effect, the effect mode changes in the specific effect. Different stages can further enhance the interest of specific effects.

The gaming machine of means B51 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B47 to the means B50,
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D);
Depending on the general winning area into which the game medium has entered (when a game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, and the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D). The game machine (the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 42nd effect form) is characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game ball is won in any of the above.
According to this, the stage in which a production | presentation aspect changes in a specific production differs according to the general winning area | region where the game medium approached, and can further enhance the interest of a specific production.

  Moreover, the form which implements invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B52-means B56 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 120), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up on the effect display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the counted number reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memory in the memory is generated. In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, an effect (a count-up display) is executed every time a game ball enters the normal winning opening. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, when a game medium does not enter the general winning area, it is necessary to grasp this, but this is not considered in the prior art. The invention according to the means B52 to the means B56 is made in view of the above situation, and it is possible to grasp that the game medium does not enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B52 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When the number of game media entering the general winning area in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in 10 minutes in which a game is detected is 0, A special effect (when there are less than 3 winning prizes in the general winning opening in 30 minutes, which is detected as being in the middle) and an image imitating the form of the general winning opening and "There is no general winning prize." The game machine is characterized by comprising specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect E) for displaying a notification image 902200 including characters on the image display device 905.
According to this, it is possible for the player and the game hall to grasp that the number of game media entering the general winning area is less than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means B53 is
A gaming machine of means B52,
Setting means for setting whether or not execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means is permitted (an effect of determining whether or not to execute the specific effect E based on the game field setting and the player setting in the display setting table) Control CPU90120),
Clerk operation accepting means (display changeover switch 9032) for accepting a setting operation by the clerk,
When the setting operation is accepted by the store clerk operation accepting unit, the setting unit performs a setting for permitting execution of the specific effect (based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032, the specific effect E (notifying that there is no general prize) , Notification that the number of general prizes is small)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the intention of a game hall can be reflected regarding whether or not to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B54 is
A gaming machine of means B52 or means B53,
Storage means (a winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122) for storing the number of game media entering into the general winning area (winning number for 30 minutes);
The number of entries stored in the storage means is not held at the time of power interruption (the value of the winning number counter area is erased by power interruption).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control burden for maintaining the memory of the number of entries at the time of power interruption.

The gaming machine of means B55 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B52 to the means B54,
Depending on the state of the gaming machine, the rate at which the specific effect is executed is different (for example, the specific effect E is executed at a different rate between the normal state and the probability change state or the time-short state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of specific production can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B56 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B52 to the means B55,
Different specific effects are executed in accordance with the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed in a different manner in the normal state and in the probability variation state or the time-short state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of specific production can be further enhanced.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B57-means B64 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 136), during the execution of a big hit game, the number of prize balls (given value) obtained by entering the game medium into the big prize opening, There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes an effect of displaying a numerical image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (given value) obtained when a game medium enters a normal winning opening (general winning area). In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intention of the game hall or the player is not reflected as to whether or not an effect is executed when a game medium enters the general winning area. The invention according to the means B57 to B64 is made in view of the above situation, and reflects the intention of the game hall and the player as to whether or not the presentation is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area. The purpose is to make it possible.

The gaming machine of means B57 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When a game medium enters the general winning area, a specific effect (displays information in the winning number management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, by the setting of the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030. Based on the setting, the object is increased every time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed, the specific effect A: the change result notice effect, the specific effect B: the look-ahead Notification means (image display device 905) capable of executing a notice effect);
A gaming machine comprising: setting means (mode change switch 9031, display change switch 9032, and operation button 9030) for setting whether or not execution of the specific effect is permitted by the specific effect execution means. .
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall or the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B58 is
A gaming machine of means B57,
It further comprises clerk operation accepting means (mode change switch 9031, display change switch 9032) for accepting a setting operation by the clerk,
When the setting operation is accepted by the store clerk operation accepting unit, the setting unit performs a setting for permitting execution of the specific effect (based on the setting of the mode switch 9031, the number-of-wins management table) Based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032, the object is increased every time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed, and the specific effect A : Enables execution of change result notice effect, Specific effect B: Enables prefetch notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the intention of a game hall can be reflected regarding whether or not to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B59 is
A gaming machine of means B57 or means B58,
A player operation receiving means for receiving a setting operation by the player;
When the setting operation is accepted by the player operation accepting means, the setting means performs a setting for permitting the execution of the specific effect (based on the setting by the operation button 9030 during the demonstration screen display, Based on the setting by the operation button 9030 in the demonstration screen display, which increases the object every time a game ball enters the game, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed. Can be executed, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the player's intention regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B60 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B59,
The specific effect notifies the number of game media entering the general winning area in a predetermined period (a period controlled to the big hit gaming state) so that the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls can be specified. The game machine is characterized in that the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls are displayed separately.
According to this, the playability in a predetermined period can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B61 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B60,
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect (executes the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form) when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches a predetermined number. It is a featured gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B62 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B61,
The specific effect executing means executes different specific effects according to the number of game media entering the general winning area (executes effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form). It is.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B63 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B62,
The specific effect is an effect of notifying the number of game media entering the general winning area in an identifiable manner (increasing the object each time a game ball enters the general winning port)
When a game is not being performed on the gaming machine (the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and the start winning port specifying command, the general winning port specifying command, and the big winning port winning command are received for a predetermined period of time. An effect control CPU 90120 that makes a game end determination based on the absence of the game medium, and notifies that it is possible to specify that the number of game media entering the general winning area in the specific effect is 0 (game end determination is performed). In the event that the object corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 is deleted)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to prevent other players from grasping the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B64 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B63,
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized in that display information (an object corresponding to the number of winnings in a general winning opening) corresponding to the number of entering game media into the general winning area is displayed.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp the number of game media entering the general winning area.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B65-means B77 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 112), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during a big hit, one aspect of the start memory display changes, and the start memory There has been proposed a gaming machine that notifies whether the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display is “winning” or “out of game”. In a gaming machine having such a general winning opening, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening. The invention according to the means B65 to the means B77 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to enhance the interest of the game in a gaming machine having a general winning opening.

The gaming machine of means B65 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or short-time state) , The ratio of executing the specific effect is different (in the normal state, the specific effect is executed at a higher rate than the probability change or the short time state)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 having a first effect form to a fourth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B66 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or short-time state) , Execute different specific effects (specify the specific effect A in the normal state, and execute the specific effect B in the probability change or short-time state)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 having a fifth effect form to a twelfth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B67 is
A gaming machine of means B65 or means B66 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the tenth effect form to the twelfth effect form),
In the first game state (normal state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes the first entry number,
In the second game state (probability change or short-time state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes a second entry number different from the first entry number. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B68 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after reaching reach state of reach change) and when during the second period (before reach reach state of reach change or reach change) The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the game medium entering the general winning area (after the reach fluctuation state is established, it is specified at a higher period than the reach fluctuation period or before the reach fluctuation state is established. Production is performed)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the thirteenth effect form to the sixteenth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B69 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after reaching reach state of reach change) and when during the second period (before reach reach state of reach change or reach change) Different specific effects are executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the specific effect A is executed after the reach state is established, and the specific effect B is executed before the reach state is established. The specific effect A is executed, and the specific effect B is executed during a period other than the reach change or before the reach state of reach change is established)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 having a 17th effect form to a 24th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B70 is
A gaming machine of means B68 or means B69 (14th effect form to 16th effect form, 22nd effect form to 24th effect form pachinko gaming machine 901),
During the first period (after the reach state of reach variation is established), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes the first entry number,
During the second period (a period other than reach fluctuation or before reach reach is reached), the number of game media entering the general winning area is a second entry number different from the first entry number. In some cases, the specific effect is executed.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B71 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B70 (in the second effect form, the sixth effect form, the tenth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the fourteenth effect form, the eighteenth effect form, and the twenty-second effect form). Pachinko machine 901),
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a game medium enters each of the plurality of general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B72 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B71 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the fifth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the seventeenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form),
The variable display means includes a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the big hit gaming state after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) is variably displayed based on the fact that
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol) )When,
Pre-start determination means for performing a pre-start determination to determine whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the start condition is satisfied (control to a big hit gaming state based on a big hit determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning) And a game control microcomputer 90100) for determining whether or not to perform,
The specific effect executing means is
Based on the pre-start determination, an effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state is applied to the specific effect (specific effect B) before the start condition for the variable display to be targeted is satisfied. It is a gaming machine characterized by being executed as
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by notifying that the advantageous state is controlled before the variable display start condition is established.

The gaming machine of means B73 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B72 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the first effect form to the 24th effect form)
The variable display means includes a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the big hit gaming state after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) is variably displayed based on the fact that
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol) )When,
Start time determination means for performing start time determination to determine whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the start condition is satisfied (for the big hit determination stored when starting variable symbol variable display) A game control microcomputer 90100) for determining whether to control the jackpot gaming state based on a random number,
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that, based on the determination at the start time, an effect of notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state (a change result notice effect) is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B74 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B73 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the third effect form and the fifteenth effect form),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution ratio of the specific effect varies depending on the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the frequency of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B75 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B74 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 11th effect form and the 23rd effect form),
The game machine is characterized in that a specific effect is executed in accordance with the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the frequency of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B76 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B75 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the fourth effect form, the eighth effect form, the twelfth effect form, the sixteenth effect form, the twentieth effect form, and the twenty-fourth effect form). Because
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D);
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the order of entry of game media into the plurality of general winning areas is a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the order in which the game media enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B77 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B76 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 4th effect form, the 8th effect form, the 12th effect form, the 16th effect form, the 20th effect form, and the 24th effect form) Because
There are other winning areas different from the general winning area (first starting prize opening, second starting prize opening),
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the order of entry of game media into the general prize area and the order of entry of game media into the other prize areas is a specific order. .
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the order of entry of the game media into the general winning area and other winning areas.

  Moreover, the form which implements invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means A1-means A9 shown below. Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a windmill and a large number of game nails are provided on the surface of the game board to change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In this type of gaming machine, the passing rate of the winning opening and the passing gate varies depending on the adjustment of the game nail provided on the game board, and the game ball payout rate is designed by adjusting the game nail or the like. Sometimes. However, since it was not possible to recognize from the outside of the gaming machine what adjustments were made to the game nails and the like, it was difficult to determine whether or not the payout rate was as designed. The invention according to the means A1 to the means A9 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of recognizing what adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.)
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal variable winning ball device 906B serving as a second starting winning port, a special variable winning ball device 907 serving as a large winning port, a normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first starting winning port, and a general winning area) A game value (for example, a game ball, a slot machine medal, etc.) is paid out by winning a prize at the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D, displaying a predetermined symbol combination on the active line of the slot machine, etc. Predetermined information (for example, combination (relation ratio), combination ratio, machine discount, etc.) related to the game value provided on the main board (for example, the main board 9011, the main board of the slot machine) that controls the game. ) Can be displayed (for example, a display monitor 9029, a slot machine display monitor, etc.), and a door frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 903, a slot). In response to the occurrence of an error that can be released by opening the door frame of the machine (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 118). The display of the ream (ream ratio) ratio is stopped).
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information when the error is canceled as the door frame is opened.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.),
When the error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 118, etc.) occurs, the restriction (for example, display of the role combination (relationship) role ratio is stopped) is performed.
According to the above configuration, the player can be prevented from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.),
When the door frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 903, a slot frame of a slot machine, etc.) is opened after the error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 118) occurs. In addition, the restriction (for example, the display of the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio) is performed.
According to the above configuration, the player can be prevented from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A3 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 9029, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is provided on the condition that the error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 118, etc.) has not occurred. The predetermined information (for example, a combination (connection ratio), a combination ratio, a machine discount, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, the player can be prevented from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A4 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.),
A predetermined time (for example, a measurement time t measured by a measurement timer in the display restriction confirmation processing of FIG. 116, etc.) after canceling the error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 118). ) Elapses, the predetermined information (for example, a combination (combination ratio), a combination ratio, a machine discount, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, the player can be prevented from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A5 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 9029, the display monitor of the slot machine, and the like) displays a plurality of the predetermined information (for example, a combination (continuity ratio), a combination ratio, a machine ratio, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). It is possible to switch and display each.
According to the said structure, the increase in a member can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A6 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 9029, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) has a predetermined unit (for example, the number of prize balls) as the predetermined information (for example, a combination of consecutive (continuous ratio), a ratio of roles, a machine discount, etc.). Information for every 60000).
According to the above configuration, the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A7 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 9029, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is information (for example, for each predetermined unit) as the predetermined information (for example, a combination (relation ratio), a combination ratio, a machine discount, etc.) The short-term service group (run ratio) and the short-term role ratio) and cumulative information (for example, the cumulative service group (run ratio), the cumulative role ratio) are switched and displayed.
According to the said structure, the information for every predetermined unit and cumulative information can be compared.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A8 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.)
The information display means (eg, display monitor 9029, slot machine display monitor, etc.) includes the main board (eg, main board 9011, slot machine main board, etc.), and is caulked board case (eg, board case). 90201, 202).
According to the above configuration, fraud can be prevented.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding display control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display mode pattern determination lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change timing determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows operation frequency determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change production execution lottery table, an execution object determination lottery table, and an operation frequency determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change in effect control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display position switching lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of an effect display apparatus when a change effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of an effect display apparatus when a change effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of an effect display apparatus when performing the 2nd change effect in the modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the case of displaying a hold display in the 2nd special suggestion aspect in the modification 2. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in another example. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) The figure which shows the winning number information managed by the winning number management table, (b) The figure which shows the winning number information managed by the display control table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between game hall setting and player setting. It is explanatory drawing in the case of performing a display setting with the operation button which a player can operate. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the object corresponding to the winning to a general winning opening. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the number of wins to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each production performed according to a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a fluctuation result notice effect and a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 1st effect form-a 4th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 5th production form-the 8th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 9th effect form-a 12th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 13th effect form-the 16th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 17th effect form-the 20th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 21st effect form-the 24th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form. It is a figure which shows the number-of-wins information managed by the number-of-wins management table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a point provision effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 27th effect form-the 30th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a gauge update effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 33rd effect form-the 36th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 37th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 38th effect form-the 41st effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 42nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a non-winning alert | report effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 43rd effect form-the 46th effect form. It is a figure which shows the appearance ratio of character AC in the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is a figure which shows the display period of character AC in the 47th effect form-the 49th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending | holding change effect in the 47th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change result notice effect in the 48th effect form. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each production in the 47th production form and the 48th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 50th production form and the 51st production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of continuous hit operation alerting | reporting and cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation alert | report and pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation alert | report and pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all the symbol stop operation alerting | reporting, and a chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all the symbol stop operation alerting | reporting, and a chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of each announcement effect for every general winning opening in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode of an error message. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which does not display winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the item example of the number-of-wins information which can be displayed on a 1st area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting method of a total period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information, and the setting which does not display winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information, and the setting which does not display winning number information. It is a block diagram which shows in detail the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the memory map of the built-in ROM area in CPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the use area program area and non-use area program area in a built-in ROM area. It is a table | surface which shows the calling instruction used in a built-in ROM area. It is a figure which shows the other structure of the use area program area and non-use area program area in a built-in ROM area. (A) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the first interrupt processing, (B) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the second interrupt processing, and (C) is a processing procedure of the third interrupt processing. FIG. (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor, (B-1)-(B-5) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data memorize | stored in the storage area of the ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a combination (ream ratio) and ratio related process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a role combination (ream ratio) and role ratio display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a display restriction confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a display switching control process. It is a table | surface which shows the kind of error in a gaming machine. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt processing is executed and the display state of the monitor, etc., and (B) is the signal flow and monitor when the first interrupt processing is executed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship with display states, such as. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning of each LED of the display part in a display monitor. It is a perspective view of the main board | substrate with which the display monitor is arrange | positioned by the 1st display monitor arrangement | positioning aspect. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the frame for game machines to which the main board | substrate was attached open | released from the outer frame. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. It is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a blade-type variable winning ball device. It is the front view which looked at the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the game board from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the counter of the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired bonuses, and the number of consecutive acquired bonuses. (A)-(D) are the front views which simplified the modification of the main board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing regarding performance information. It is explanatory drawing regarding performance information. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special figure process (special figure process process). It is a flowchart which shows an example of a state control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit release process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing after big hit release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is explanatory drawing explaining a state change switching waiting time. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining a state change switching waiting time. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a state control process. It is explanatory drawing explaining a state change switching waiting time. It is a structural example of an out sphere detector. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error notification process. It is an example of the display mode which alert | reports an error. It is an example of the display mode which alert | reports an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a performance information update process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a performance information update process. It is an example of the arrangement position of an out sphere detector.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. “Variable display is synchronized” means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red, and the type of big hit (the display color may be different depending on whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit). When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (display color different from the outlier) For example, it is displayed in blue when it is off, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. The display color of the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d is assimilated with the background image when the display is turned off. In order to prevent the image from becoming invisible, the display color (for example, black) different from the background image is desirable.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is provided a holding storage display unit 18c for displaying either the first holding memory number or the second holding memory number. For example, the reserved memory display unit 18c displays the first reserved memory number in the low base state, and displays the second reserved memory number in the high base state. Note that the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be individually displayed. Moreover, you may comprise so that the total pending memory display part which displays the total pending memory number which is the total number of the 1st pending memory number and the 2nd pending memory number may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not been met. Moreover, when comprised in that way, while a 1st hold | maintenance memory and a 2nd hold | maintenance memory are displayed side by side in order of winning to the 1st start winning opening 13 and the 2nd starting winning opening 14, in the total holding storage display part, So that it can be recognized whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue). It may be configured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold storage display unit 18c performs hold display for the hold storage that has not yet been changed, and during the period from the start of the change display to the hold storage to the end thereof. The hold display for the storage is continuously displayed on the active display unit 18d different from the hold storage display unit 18c. In other words, the active display unit 18d displays an active display (a variable display-corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed.

  Hereinafter, the holding memory display unit 18c, the active display unit 18d, and the range surrounding the holding storage display unit 18c and the active display unit 18d may be collectively referred to as an “interface image”. This interface image is displayed regardless of whether there is an on-hold display or an active display, but is deleted in a specific situation (for example, during a big hit gaming state or a specific effect such as super reach). Is. Hereinafter, the hold display and the active display may be collectively referred to as “specific display”.

  Specifically, mole characters are displayed as a hold display and an active display on the hold storage display unit 18c and the active display unit 18d. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 1, one active display and three hold displays are displayed.

  In addition, “white”, “blue”, and “red” are provided as display modes of the specific display, and the reliability with respect to being a big hit in the corresponding fluctuation is different. For example, the reliability for the big hit is red> blue> white.

  The display mode of the specific display can be changed by performing a predetermined change effect. As the change effect, there are provided a first change effect in which the hammer is swung down toward the target specific display and a second change effect in which an arrow flies toward the target specific display. The display mode of the specific display hit or the specific display hit by the arrow is changed.

  Further, as the display position of the specific display, the advance position that appears to jump out from the ground (for example, the display position of the first hold display in FIG. 1) and the retreat position that appears to be submerged in the ground (for example, FIG. 1 active display and display positions of the second and third hold display). The display position of each specific display is controlled to be switched randomly. For example, the frequency (operation frequency) at which the display position is switched is determined for each change, and the display position is switched based on the determined operation frequency.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. Note that the movable member 78 may be operated not only in the movable object notice effect, but in, for example, a pseudo-ream effect or a super reach effect.

  Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. The effect blade roles 79a and 79b operate, for example, when a notice effect (effect blade effect notice effect) is executed. In addition, not only the effect blade role notice effect but also the effect blade role 79a, 79b may be operated in a pseudo-ream effect or a super reach effect, for example.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is higher (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of displaying a special symbol is higher than that in the normal state. In the high probability state.), The probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a probable big hit is made, the game is shifted to a so-called probable state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is changed to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (ie, a special symbol). The display shifts to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that the variable display execution condition in the display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the transition is made to the high base state, the transition is also made to the short time state (special symbol short time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to the short time state in this way, the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol is increased (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory is reduced). It is possible to reduce the situation that an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 53 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 53 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 53 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 53 has a numeric data update range selection / setting function (initial value selection / setting function and upper limit selection / setting function), numeric data update rule selection / setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 53 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED / lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED / lamp driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED and the lamp. Further, a current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (usually big hit, probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, small hit or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 53 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 53 to update the random R value.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21) ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the normal symbol process in step S27, the normal symbol variation display is executed based on the detection of the passing of the game ball to the gate 32, and the variation display result is derived and displayed, or the normal symbol variation display result is displayed. When the winning is won, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be opened or closed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without reaching reach).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that when the gaming machine is configured such that the big hit types are all probable big hits, the small hits may not be provided. In addition, when all big hit types are probabilistic big hits, if you are configured to provide a small hit, suddenly probable big hits that do not involve a short-time state (high base state) just by shifting to a probable state (high probability state). Is preferably provided.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 6, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used when the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability change big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, the re-variation is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to presence / absence of effects such as pseudo-ream and slip effects.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, normal CA3-1, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, and fluctuation with normal reach and pseudo-continuity. It is classified into a normal CA 3-2 that is a variation pattern type including a pattern and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of deviation, a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve reach, pseudo-ream or slip effect, and a variation pattern that does not involve reach but involves a pseudo-ream or slip effect. Includes non-reach CA2-2, which is a variation pattern type including, non-reach CA2-3, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of a shortened variation that does not involve reach, pseudo-ream, or slip production, and a variation pattern that includes only normal reach Normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type, normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and a variation pattern with normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation Normal CA2-6, which is a variation pattern type that includes, and a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into a certain super CA2-7.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 53 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probable variation big hit, or a sudden probable big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is set to “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, eight determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In the jackpot type determination table 131b, two judgment values are assigned to “sudden probability variation jackpot” (a ratio of 2/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie. It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, a sudden probability variation big hit (two round big hit) as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given, and the game There are cases where it is determined as a normal big hit and a probable big hit (15 round big hit) as the second specific gaming state that gives a game value larger than the value, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed However, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of jackpots include “normal jackpot”, “probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”. In this embodiment, the case where the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in this embodiment. Not limited to those. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a five-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types, “normal jackpot”, “probability big hit”, and “sudden probability big hit”. However, the number is not limited to three, for example, four or more types. A big hit type may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state and shifts to a short time state (high base state) after the big hit gaming state ends (see steps S167 and 168 described later). Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, the time reduction state ends when the variable display is ended 100 times (see steps S168 and S137 to 140 described later). In this embodiment, even if a big hit occurs after the transition to the time reduction state and before the execution of the 100 fluctuation displays, the time reduction state ends (see step S132 described later).

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state and is shifted to a probable change state (high probability state) after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the jackpot is changed to the probable change state) The state is also shifted to the short time state (high base state) (see steps S169 and S170 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times of opening the big prize opening is smaller than in “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 seconds is allowed twice). Is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, in “normal big hit” and “probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in “sudden probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long. It is extremely short, 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big winning opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the sudden probability variation big hit gaming state, the state is shifted to the probability variation state (high probability state) (in this embodiment, the state is shifted to the probability variation state and the time reduction state (high base state). (See steps S169 and S170 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and corresponding to the “normal big hit”, “probability variable big hit”, and “sudden probable big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random value (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, and FIG. 9B used when the big hit type is “probable big hit”. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of “ordinary big hit” or “probable big hit”, the value of random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 150 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, with respect to the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream, super reach and pseudo ream A variation pattern type that is not accompanied is assigned.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, it is different from the case of controlling to the big hit state by normal big hit or probable big hit. The variation pattern type can be determined.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 10C shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135 </ b> C used when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time-short state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a loss symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, the case where the game state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state and the case where the separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> C are used for the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more are shown. However, the common variation pattern type determination table may be used for the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state and the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10C, a case is used in which the variation pattern type determination table 135C for probability variation / shortening time is used regardless of the total number of stored storages. As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of loss variation pattern determination tables (tables having different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the effects such as the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect) regardless of the total number of reserved storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means that, as shown in this embodiment, for example, the variable display result is not accompanied by a reach, and is not accompanied by an effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect. It is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) used when a big hit is not made.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), The variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined. When the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 (Or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 or 1), the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table. It may be determined.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of effects such as pseudo-ream and sliding effects, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes the special PG 1-1 and the special PG 2-1, which are fluctuation patterns that do not involve the pseudo ream and the slide effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes the pseudo ream and the slide effect. Special PG1-2, special PG1-3, and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot start designation command is used. Specifically, in the case of “normal big hit”, the big hit start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and in the case of “normal big hit”, the big hit start 2 designation command (A002 (H)) is used. In the case of “sudden probability change big hit” or “small hit”, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (A003 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a special winning opening) indicating a display of the number of times (round) indicated by XX while the special winning opening is open. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special prize opening (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round in the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big prize opening opening for designating round 1 is transmitted, and when the tenth round in the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “normal big hit” is ended. Command A 302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, specifying the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command). The big hit end 2 designation command (A302 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “probability big hit” is ended. Command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden probable big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time-short state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is in the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the hold memory information, an effect control command (first hold memory number addition designation indicating that the hold memory number has increased or decreased for the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number, respectively). Command, second reserved memory number addition designation command) is transmitted, but the form of the reserved memory information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, the following types of reserved memory Information may be transmitted.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as the reserved storage information, and in the one command, which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is increased is specified, and the increased number of reserved memories is increased (The first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as the hold storage information, and in the one command, which of the first hold storage and the second hold storage is increased is specified, and the total number of the hold storage is set to the EXT data. May be set and transmitted.

(3) Designate which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is won as the hold storage information (whether the first hold storage or the second hold storage has increased). In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The total pending storage number may be set as EXT data for transmission.

(4) Designating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated as the hold memory information In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The increased reserved memory number (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 22), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit or a value for designating the type of the big win is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly promising big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is being used, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-described variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and is assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9 (A) to (D) and FIG. 10 (C). A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of the determined determination value.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a probabilistic state, a short time state, or out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Note that the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 even when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the “usual big hit” is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “probable big hit” is made at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big win at the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started. There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 fluctuation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a pre-reading notice effect, which will be described later, is executed for the variation display determined at the time of winning when the variation pattern type is Super CA 2-7 or Super CA 3-3. Only when it is determined that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 are the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, (Variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs in the short time state (high base state), or when the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 is made during the big hit game. Except when it occurs (see steps S1215A and S1216A), a winning determination process is executed each time a start winning is generated, the symbol designation command shown in FIG. 15 is transmitted, and the fluctuations shown in FIGS. A category command is sent. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the prefetching notice effect based on the received symbol designation command and variation category command.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the microcomputer for game control 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of stored pending memories) is confirmed. The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 30), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special prize opening (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S312. FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process that is executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of one reserved memory is 4 is confirmed (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 53 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1214A). In the process of step S1214A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 21, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown where random numbers such as jackpot determination random numbers are stored in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer as reserved storage, but the predetermined information stored as the reserved storage is It is not limited to random values. For example, it may be determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit based on a big hit determination random number or the like, and the determination result may be stored as a hold storage in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. .

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time-short flag indicating that the gaming state is the time-short state (high base state) is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1220A. If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1220A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, a prize presentation effect process is executed in which a fluctuation display result and a fluctuation pattern type when a fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are preliminarily determined at the start prize (step). S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218A), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219A). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S1218A and S1219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol every time the first start winning opening 13 is won and the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218A to S1220A is executed, the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1217A is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  However, if the winning effect processing in step S1217A is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S1215A or step S1216A, the CPU 56 transmits only the first reserved memory number addition designation command in step S1220A. The control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variation category command) is not performed. In addition, when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217A is not executed, the determination result at the time of winning is set as a value indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified (for example, “FF (H)”) as EXT data. A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1215A is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, the process of step S1217A is performed only when the gaming state is the low base state. Winning effect processing is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1216A is executed, and there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13, step S1217A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The award winning directing process is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S1217A only in the big hit gaming state, and may be shifted to step S1217A and the winning effect processing may be executed in the small hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after it is notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is informed that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the jackpot is finished. Specifically, it is a state in which the processes from the big winning opening opening pre-process (see step S305) to the big hit end process (see step S307) in the special symbol process are executed.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process that is executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). Whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S1211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and the value of the aggregated reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 53 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1214B). In the process of step S1214B, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes winning effect processing (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218B), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219B). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S1218B and S1219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol each time the start winning prize is received at the second start winning opening 14 and the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218B to S1220B is executed, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1217B is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a second reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  In the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1215A may be performed, and if the time is short, the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be performed. That is, only when it is in the normal state (low base state), the winning effect processing in step S1217B may be executed to transmit the symbol designation command and the variation category command.

  Also, in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed if the big hit game is being played. Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). .

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217A and S1217B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 8A. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small win is made, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number is. By doing so, the variation display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is performed, and the pre-reading announcement effect is performed based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. To do.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state). It is confirmed whether or not (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are matched (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If there is a probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit before, the normal state has changed to the probability variation state.) For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing at step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (first) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217B is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state and whether or not it is a time reduction state (specifically, whether or not a probability variation flag or a time reduction flag is set). Determine. It should be noted that there are a plurality of times during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the engine is in a promiscuous state and the short-time state at the time of starting winning, until the start of the variable display based on the starting winning. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S225 and whether or not the state is the short time state and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state may change to a probable state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is a probability change state or a time saving state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 214 or less (ie, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, since the range of determination values is shared with respect to at least the variation pattern type that becomes “super-reaching”, it is determined whether or not “super-reaching” is detected. be able to.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 uses the symbol designating command for EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “small hit”. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251, and determines that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251) in step S 232 described later. It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first 1D) shown in FIG. Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”. If there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1217B is executed), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “01 (H)” indicating the “normal big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “probability big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that the “sudden probability change big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “sudden probability change big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot type determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined as “ordinary big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (ie, 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “probability big hit”, the thresholds 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines “suddenly promising big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S232 described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”is set to the EXT data of the variable category command.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . For example, although the production control microcomputer 100 does not specifically show which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a prefetch notice effect described later may be executed.

  23 and 24 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0 and the customer waiting demo designation command has not yet been transmitted, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last execution of the variable display (steps). S51A). Note that whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last executed variation display is performed is set, for example, by setting a value corresponding to 30 seconds to a predetermined timer when it is first determined as Y in step S51, This can be determined by checking whether the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have elapsed, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a customer waiting demonstration designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51B), and ends the process. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51B, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started. Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted 30 seconds after the last executed variation display is finished, and a customer waiting demonstration display is started. For example, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started after one minute has elapsed.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the case where the second special symbol variation display is preferentially executed as shown in this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number (random R) is determined in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing the value with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state may be executed, and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the probability variation state (high probability state) (specifically, in step S220) Only the processing may be executed, and the processing in steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time-short state background designation command when only the time-short flag indicating the time-short state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction) for each timer interrupt. The designation command or the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in this order. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for determining the big hit that has been extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and previously stored in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining that it is a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is in a non-probable change state (normal state). Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are changed A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. There is also.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as the special symbol stop symbol To do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S95). In this embodiment, the time reduction flag is set when shifting to the short-time state at the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit, and the short-time state is also set at the end of the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit. Because of this, the hour / short flag is set. Therefore, if it is determined as Y in step S95, the control is performed in the time-saving state together with the probability change state after the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit in addition to the case where the control is only in the time-saving state after the big hit game based on the normal big hit game. There are times when it has been.

  If the time flag is not set (N in Step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storage is 3 or more (Step S96). If the total pending storage number is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 10A) is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total pending storage number is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S99 is executed and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short-time state, a loss variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100, which will be described later, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S102. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of a shortened change may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in the probability variation state and the short time state, and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage (see FIG. 10). 10 (B)) is a different table, but a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a probabilistic change state or a short time state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1). May not display the variation display of the shortened variation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and selects it in the process of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as tables used for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S101). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S101. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S100 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 10). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable to pre-determine whether or not “non-reach” will occur and perform a pre-reading notice effect.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 13) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, if the type of the big hit is “normal big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . Further, when the big hit type is “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is “probable big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. . When neither “normal big hit” nor “probability big hit” (that is, “sudden probability big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S116), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S1122, which will be described later, for example. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S1121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  Next, if the reserved memory number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. Is reset (step S132), and a control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “normal jackpot”, a jackpot start 1 designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is “probable big hit”, a jackpot start 2 designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit” is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) Based on the determination.

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, “15 times in case of“ normal big hit ”or“ probable big hit ”, 2 times in case of“ suddenly promising big hit ”) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S135). . The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of normal big hit or probability change big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by −1 (step S138). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start command (command A003 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, when it is “ordinary big hit”, a big hit end 1 designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and when it is “probable big hit”, a big hit end 2 designation command (command A302 (H)) is transmitted. ) Is transmitted, and in the case of “sudden probability change big hit”, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command (command A303 (H)) is sent. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot game to be ended this time is based on the normal jackpot (step S166). Whether or not the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended, specifically, whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. This can be determined by checking. If the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended (Y in step S166), the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  If the big hit game based on the normal big hit is not finished (that is, if the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit or the sudden probability variation big hit is finished), the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag to change the gaming state to the probability changed state. In addition to the transition (step S169), the time reduction flag is set to shift the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  In this embodiment, since the above processing is executed, the game state is controlled as the normal state (low probability / low base state) when it is controlled to the probabilistic state. ), Short-time state (low probability / high base state), and probability variation state (high probability / high base state).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  33 to 35 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622). In this case, for example, if the jackpot start 1 designation command is received, the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag is set. If the jackpot start 2 designation command is received, the jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) (step S623), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S626). In this case, for example, when a jackpot end 1 designation command is received, the jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag is set. When a jackpot end 2 designation command is received, the jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A303 (H)) (step S627), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command reception flag. (Step S628).

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the received symbol designation command in the symbol designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S651). S652).

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the received variation category command in the variation category command storage area formed in the RAM (step S653). S654).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 has the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S656). Further, the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received first reserved storage number addition designation command. The first start winning prize command storage area formed in the RAM is stored in an empty first storage area (step S657).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S658), the effect control CPU 101 has the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S659). Further, the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received second reserved storage number addition designation command. Then, the second start winning prize command storage area formed in the RAM is stored in a free first storage area (step S660).

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the start winning prize and the storage area for active display. Among these, FIG. 36A shows a specific example of the command storage area at the first start winning prize, FIG. 36B shows a specific example of the command storage area at the second start winning prize, and FIG. Shows a specific example of the storage area for active display. As shown in FIG. 36A, an area (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the first start winning command storage area. Yes. Further, in the second start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218A to S1220A of the first start port switch passing process and steps S1218B to S1220B of the second start port switch passing process of FIG. 20, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start is shown. When there is a start winning at the winning opening 14, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number) within one timer interruption Three commands (addition designation command) are transmitted as a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, in each of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the first start prize command storage area and the second start prize command storage area, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation A storage area is secured so that commands can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command within one timer interrupt. When a command and a variable category command are received, they are temporarily stored in the symbol designating command storage area and the variable category command storage area, respectively. When the pending storage number addition designation command is received, if the first pending storage number addition designation command is received, it is understood that the first pending storage number is incremented by one. If the first reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the first stored memory number addition designation command is received together with the temporarily stored symbol designation command and the variable category command. When the first reserved memory number addition designation command is stored in the first start winning command storage area and the second reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the second reserved memory is stored together with the temporarily stored symbol designation command and variable category command. The number addition designation command is stored in the second start prize command storage area (in FIG. 36, the first start prize command is stored). An example is shown in which commands are stored in all the storage areas 1 to 4 of the pay area, and commands are stored only in the storage area 1 of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the second start winning command storage area. Have been).

  Note that each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 is sequentially displayed in steps S664 and S668, which will be described later, at the timing when the variation display of the effect symbol is started each time the variation display of the effect symbol is started. Deleted. In this case, in this embodiment, since the change display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, first, the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36B are deleted. . Next, if the second reserved memory does not newly occur, only the first reserved memory is stored, and therefore, the first time shown in FIG. The contents stored in the first storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area are deleted, and the contents of the first starting winning command storage area are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 36 (A), when the variable display of a new effect symbol is started, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in the storage area 2 is deleted. The command is shifted to the storage area 1, each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2, and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3.

  In this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved storage number addition designation command received when the start prize is generated are also referred to as a start prize command when they are comprehensively expressed. In addition, among the commands at the time of starting winning a prize, a reserved memory number addition designation command which is a command for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased is comprehensively expressed. In some cases, it is also referred to as reserved storage information. Also, a symbol designating command, which is a command indicating whether or not the big hit or the small hit is determined in the winning effect processing at the time of starting winning (see FIG. 22), the determination result of the big hit type, the determination result of the variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  In the first start winning command storage area, the second start winning command storage area, and the active display storage area, information relating to the display mode of the specific display (hold display, active display) is stored. Specifically, “display mode pattern”, “change timing”, and “operation frequency” are stored.

  The “display mode pattern” is a change pattern of the display mode of the specific display, and any one of Pt1 to Pt4 is stored. Pt1 is a display mode pattern that does not change from white, Pt2 is a display mode pattern that changes from white to blue, Pt3 is a display mode pattern that changes from white to blue and then changes to red, and Pt4 Is a display mode pattern that changes from white to red. Note that the number of changes in the display mode is not limited to once or twice, and a display mode pattern in which the display mode can be changed three or more times may be provided. Moreover, the display mode pattern (For example, the display mode pattern from which a display is started in blue and red) may be provided that is started from a display mode other than white.

  The “change timing” is a timing at which the display mode of the specific display changes, and is stored when the display mode pattern (display mode pattern other than Pt1) changes. Specifically, “active” indicating that it is the timing displayed as the active display, “first” indicating that it is the timing displayed as the first hold display, and the second One of “second” indicating that it is the timing displayed as the hold display of “3” and “third” indicating that it is the timing displayed as the third hold display is stored The

  “Operation frequency” refers to the frequency of switching the display position of the hold display (advance position, retreat position), and either “high frequency” with a high switching frequency or “low frequency” with a low switching frequency. Stored.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S662). Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the high base state flag indicating the high base state is set (step S663A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S664. If not set, the first hold display and the active display are updated (step S663B). Specifically, the active display in the active display unit 18d is deleted, and the first hold display is shifted one by one (for example, the first first hold display in the hold storage display unit 18c is shifted to the active display unit 18d. In the case where the second to fourth hold display sections 18c are lit on, the second hold display that has been displayed is shifted to the first display area, The first hold display displayed on the third is shifted to the second display area, and the first hold display displayed on the fourth is shifted to the third display area).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 updates the active storage area (step S663C). Specifically, the display mode pattern, the change timing, and the operation frequency information stored in the first storage area of the first start winning command storage area are stored in the active storage area.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 uses the start winning command stored in the first storage area of the first start winning command storage area (design designation command, variable category command, and first reserved memory number addition designation). Command) and information related to the display mode of the specific display (display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency) are deleted, and the content of the command storage area at the time of the first start winning prize is shifted (step S664).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S665), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S666). Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the high base state flag is set (step S667A), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S668. If it is set, the second hold display is updated (step S667B). Specifically, the active display in the active display unit 18d is deleted, and the second hold display is shifted one by one (for example, the first second hold display in the hold storage display unit 18c is shifted to the active display unit 18d. In the case where the second to fourth on-hold storage display portion 18c is lit on, the second on-hold display displayed on the second is shifted to the first display area, The second hold display displayed on the third is shifted to the second display area, and the second hold display displayed on the fourth is shifted to the third display area).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 updates the active storage area (step S667C). Specifically, the display mode pattern, the change timing, and the operation frequency information stored in the first storage area of the second start winning command storage area are stored in the active storage area.

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control receives the command at the time of the start winning (the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the first reserved memory number addition designation) stored in the first storage area of the second start prize winning command storage area. Command) and information regarding the display mode of the specific display (display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency) are deleted, and the contents of the command storage area at the time of the second start winning prize are shifted (step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 uses a background screen in the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a background screen with a blue background color). (Step S670). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / low base state), the effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as the normal state) is displayed by displaying the background screen corresponding to the normal state. (Also referred to as a normal performance mode). If the production control CPU 101 is set, the high base state flag is reset (steps S671A and S671B), and the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 18c is switched from the second hold display to the first hold display. (Step S671C).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction state background designation command (step S672), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen in the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, a background screen of a green background color). (Step S673). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short time state (low probability / high base state), the effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as the short time state) is displayed by displaying the background screen according to the short time state. (Also referred to as a time reduction effect mode). Further, if it is not set, the effect control CPU 101 sets the time reduction state flag (steps S674A and S674B), and switches the hold display to be displayed on the hold storage display unit 18c from the first hold display to the second hold display (step). S674C).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S676), the effect control CPU 101 uses a background screen in the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the probability change state (for example, a background screen with a red background color). (Step S677). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability / high base state), an effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as the probability variation state) is displayed by displaying a background screen corresponding to the probability variation state. (Also referred to as a probability variation effect mode). Further, the production control CPU 101 proceeds to step S674A.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S679). For example, if the effect control command received is a customer waiting demonstration designation command, a customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received is set. Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold display control process for controlling the display mode of the hold display (step S800A). Hereinafter, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display may be referred to as “prefetching notice effect”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the hold display control process. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a new start winning has occurred and a new start winning command has been received (step S3901). Specifically, if a new command is stored in the first start prize command storage area or the second start prize command storage area shown in FIG. 36, a new start prize will be generated and a new start prize will be given. It can be determined that the command has been received. If no new start winning command has been received, the hold display control process is terminated.

  If a new start winning command has been received, it is determined whether or not the high base state flag is set (step S3902). If it is not set (if the base state is low), a new hold is made. It is determined whether or not the storage is the first pending storage (step S3903). Specifically, when the storage area storing the new start winning command is the first start winning command storage area, it is determined that the new hold memory is the first hold memory. If it is the second hold storage, the hold display control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the first hold storage, it is determined whether or not the display mode pattern of all the first hold displays is Pt1 (step S3904). Specifically, when display mode patterns other than Pt1 are stored in the first start winning prize storage area shown in FIG. 36A, all the first hold display mode patterns are not Pt1. If the display mode pattern other than Pt1 is not stored in the first start winning prize storage area, it is determined that the display mode patterns of all the first hold displays are Pt1. When the first hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1 exists, the display mode pattern of the new first hold display is determined as Pt1 (step S3905), while the first hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1 exists. If not, a display mode pattern determination lottery for determining a new display mode pattern of the first hold display is performed (step S3906). Specifically, a display mode pattern determination lottery is performed using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram of a display mode pattern determination lottery table. In the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 39, the display mode patterns (Pt1 to Pt4) are determined according to the winning determination result (probability big hit or normal big hit, sudden probability change big hit (surprise big hit) or small hit, super reach off, etc.). ) Is assigned, but in the example shown in FIG. 39, the ratio of assigned decision values is shown in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for display mode pattern determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  FIG. 39A is a first display mode pattern determination lottery table used when the number of reserved memories is 1, and FIG. 39B is the first display used when the number of reserved memories is two or more. It is a display mode pattern determination lottery table. Here, “the number of reserved memories” means the first reserved memory number when the newly generated reserved memory is the first reserved memory (that is, when the display mode pattern determination lottery in step S3906 is executed). That is, when the newly generated reserved memory is the second reserved memory (that is, when the display mode pattern determination lottery of step S3924 is executed), it is the second reserved memory number.

  First, the first display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 39A will be described. For example, when the winning determination result is a probable big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), Pt1 is 20% and Pt2 is 30%. Pt4 is determined at a rate of 50%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is suddenly a big hit or a small win (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), Pt1 is 25% and Pt2 is 35%. , Pt4 is determined at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach (when the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), Pt1 is a ratio of 50%. , Pt2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and Pt4 is determined at a rate of 20%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is other, Pt1 is determined at a rate of 90% and Pt2 is determined at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific display can be changed only once per change. Therefore, when the number of reserved storage is 1, Pt3 whose number of changes is 2 is changed. The configuration is not selected. If the display mode of the specific display can be changed a plurality of times during one change, Pt3 may be selectable even when the number of reserved storage is one.

  Next, the second display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 39B will be described. For example, when the winning determination result is a probable big hit or a normal big hit (when the design designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), Pt1 is 10% and Pt2 is 20%. Pt3 is determined at a rate of 30% and Pt4 is determined at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is suddenly a big hit or a small win (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), Pt1 is 15% and Pt2 is 20%. , Pt3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and Pt4 is determined at a rate of 35%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), Pt1 is 40%. Pt2 is determined at a rate of 30%, Pt3 at a rate of 20%, and Pt4 at a rate of 10%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is other, Pt1 is determined at a rate of 90% and Pt2 is determined at a rate of 10%.

  Thereby, the expectation degree for every display mode pattern is Pt1 <Pt2 <Pt3 <Pt4. In addition, the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode of the hold display is white <blue <red. In addition, it is good also as providing the display mode pattern which can be selected only when it becomes a big hit or when it becomes a specific big hit. Further, a display mode (for example, rainbow) that can be changed only in the display mode pattern may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode pattern is determined at the same rate in the case where the winning determination result is a probable big hit and the normal big hit, but the display mode pattern is determined at a different rate. It may be determined. Similarly, the display mode patterns may be determined at different rates depending on whether the winning determination result is a sudden probability change big hit or a small win.

  Moreover, it is good also as the ratio which determines a display mode pattern changing with finer conditions. For example, the display mode patterns may be determined at different ratios based on the type of reach effect indicated by the variable category command, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuations, or the number of pseudo-continuations.

  After step S3905 or step S3906, when the display mode pattern other than Pt1 is determined, the effect control CPU 101 executes a change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing of the display mode of the specific display (step S3905). N of S3907, S3908). Specifically, the change timing determination lottery is performed using the change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram of a change timing determination lottery table. In the change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 40, according to the determination result at the time of winning (probability big hit or normal big hit, sudden probability change big hit (surprise big hit) or small hit, super reach out, etc.) and the number of reserved memories (1 to 4) The determination values corresponding to the change timings (active, first, second, third) are assigned. In the example shown in FIG. 40, the assigned determination values are used to simplify the explanation. The percentage of is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, random numbers for change timing determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  Here, “the number of reserved memory” means the first reserved memory number when the newly generated reserved memory is the first reserved memory (that is, when the change timing determination lottery of step S3908 is executed). That is, when the newly generated reserved memory is the second reserved memory (that is, when the change timing determination lottery of step S3926 is executed), it is the second reserved memory number.

  FIG. 40A is a first change timing determination lottery table used when the number of changes is 1 (that is, when the display mode pattern is Pt2 or Pt4), and FIG. 40B shows the number of changes. 2 is a second change timing determination lottery table used when 2 is 2 (that is, when the display mode pattern is Pt3).

  First, the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. For example, when the number of stored memories is “4” and the winning determination result is a probable big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), “third” is 40%, “second” is determined at 30%, “first” is determined at 40%, and “active” is determined at 10%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “4” and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), “third” Is 37%, "second" is 33%, "first" is 17%, and "active" is 13%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “4” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designation command is C400 (H), and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H). ), “Third” is determined at a rate of 13%, “second” is determined at a rate of 17%, “first” is determined at a rate of 33%, and “active” is determined at a rate of 37%. The

  For example, if the number of reserved memories is “4” and the determination result at the time of winning is “other”, “third” is a ratio of 10%, “second” is a ratio of 20%, and “first "Is determined at a rate of 30%, and" active "is determined at a rate of 40%.

  Also, for example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is a probable big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "Is determined at a rate of 50%," first "is determined at a rate of 30%, and" active "is determined at a rate of 20%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), “second” Is determined at a rate of 40%, "first" at a rate of 35%, and "active" at a rate of 25%.

  For example, when the number of reserved storage is “3” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H). ), “Second” is determined at a rate of 25%, “first” is determined at a rate of 35%, and “active” is determined at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the number of stored memories is “3” and the determination result at the time of winning is “other”, “second” is a ratio of 20%, “first” is a ratio of 30%, and “active” is It is determined at a rate of 50%.

  Further, for example, when the number of reserved memories is “2” and the winning determination result is a probable big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "Is determined at a rate of 70%, and" active "is determined at a rate of 30%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “2” and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), “first” Is determined at a rate of 60% and "active" is determined at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “2” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)) ), “First” is determined at a rate of 40%, and “active” is determined at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “2” and the determination result at the time of winning is “other”, “first” is determined at a rate of 30% and “active” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “1”, “active” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Next, the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. For example, when the number of stored memories is “4” and the winning determination result is a probable big hit or a normal big hit (when the design designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), “third” and The combination of “second” is 30%, the combination of “third” and “first” is 25%, and the combination of “third” and “active” is 20% The combination of “second” and “first” is 13%, the combination of “second” and “active” is 7%, and “first” and “active” The combination is determined at a rate of 5%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “4” and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), “third” And the combination of “second” is 20%, the combination of “third” and “first” is 25%, and the combination of “third” and “active” is 25%. In terms of the ratio, the combination of “second” and “first” is 15%, the combination of “second” and “active” is 10%, “first” and “active” Is determined at a rate of 5%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “4” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designation command is C400 (H), and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H). ), The combination of “third” and “second” is 5%, the combination of “third” and “first” is 10%, “third” and “ The combination of “active” is 15%, the combination of “second” and “first” is 25%, the combination of “second” and “active” is 25%, The combination of “first” and “active” is determined at a rate of 20%.

  For example, when the number of reserved storage is “4” and the determination result at the time of winning is “other”, the combination of “third” and “second” is 5%, and “third” and “1” "Person" combination at 7%, "Third" and "Active" combination at 13%, "Second" and "First" combination at 20%, The combination of “second” and “active” is determined at a rate of 25%, and the combination of “first” and “active” is determined at a rate of 30%.

  Also, for example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is a probable big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "And" first "combination at 50%," second "and" active "combination at 30%, and" first "and" active "combination at 20% It is decided.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), “second” And “first” combination at a rate of 40%, “second” and “active” at a rate of 35%, “first” and “active” at a rate of 25% ,It is determined.

  For example, when the number of reserved storage is “3” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H). ), The combination of “second” and “first” is 25%, the combination of “second” and “active” is 35%, “first” and “active” Are determined at a rate of 40%.

  For example, if the number of reserved storage is “3” and the determination result at the time of winning is “other”, the combination of “second” and “first” is 20%, “second” and “active” ”Is determined at a rate of 30%, and the“ first ”and“ active ”combination is determined at a rate of 50%.

  For example, when the number of reserved storage is “2”, the combination of “first” and “active” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reliability for the big hit is high as the display mode changes at an early timing after the hold display is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, conversely, The configuration may be such that the reliability for the big hit is lower as the display mode changes at an earlier timing after the hold display is started.

  In this embodiment, the change timing is determined using the change timing determination table shown in FIG. 40. However, the change timing is determined at a different rate based on which display mode is changed. It is also good to do. For example, when changing to red, it is possible to determine the change timing at a later timing (for example, “active”) at a higher rate than when changing to blue.

  In the present embodiment, the change timing is determined at the same rate in the case where the winning determination result is a probable big hit and the normal big win, but the change timing is determined at a different rate. It is good as well. Similarly, the change timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small win.

  Moreover, it is good also as the ratio which determines a change timing changing with finer conditions. For example, the change timing may be determined at a different ratio based on the type of reach effect indicated by the change category command, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, or the number of pseudo-continuous.

  After execution of step S3907 Y or step S3908, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determination result (display mode pattern and change timing) in the first start winning command storage area (step S3909), and the operation frequency is low. Store (step S3910). Then, a new first hold display is started in white (step S3911).

  When the high base state flag is set in step S3902, it is determined whether or not the new hold memory is the second hold memory (step S3921). Specifically, when the storage area storing the new start winning command is the second start winning command storage area, it is determined that the new hold memory is the second hold memory. If it is the first hold storage, the hold display control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the second hold storage, it is determined whether or not the display mode pattern of all the second hold displays is Pt1 (step S3922). Specifically, when display mode patterns other than Pt1 are stored in the second start winning prize storage area shown in FIG. 36B, the display mode patterns of all second hold displays are not Pt1. If the display mode pattern other than Pt1 is not stored in the second start winning prize storage area, it is determined that the display mode patterns of all the second hold display are Pt1. When the second hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1 exists, the display mode pattern of the second second hold display is determined as Pt1 (step S3923), while the second hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1 exists. If not, a display mode pattern determination lottery for determining a new display mode pattern of the second hold display is performed (step S3924). Specifically, a display mode pattern determination lottery is performed using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  After step S3923 or step S3924, when the display mode pattern other than Pt1 is determined, the effect control CPU 101 executes a change timing determination lottery to determine the change timing (N in step S3925, S3926). . Specifically, the change timing determination lottery is performed using the change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  After execution of step S3925 Y or step S3926, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determination result (display mode pattern and change timing) in the second start winning command storage area (step S3927), and sets the operation frequency to a low frequency. Store (step S3928). Then, a new second hold display is started in white (step S3929).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. Therefore, if the display result designation command is received without receiving the variation pattern command, the variation of the representation symbol The display will not start.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8002. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 43, when the received display result designation command indicates “ordinary big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. A combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as symbols is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates “probable big hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses 3 symbols as stop symbols. A combination of performance symbols arranged with the same odd number of symbols is determined.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. Further, in this embodiment, when the probability variation big hit is made, the left middle right is stopped and displayed with the odd number symbols aligned, so that the odd number symbol is likely to become the probability variation big hit. Such a symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable symbol. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the normal big hit, the left middle right is stopped and displayed with the even symbols aligned, so it is recalled that the even symbols are not probable big hits (normally big hits). . Such a symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a non-probable symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect (notice effect excluding the pre-read notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect, a character notice effect, or a serif notice effect) on the effect display device 9 during the variation display of the effect symbol. The notice effect setting process for determining whether or not to set the effect aspect of the notice effect is executed (step S8003).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 executes an operation frequency determination process for determining the operation frequency of the specific display (hold display, active display) (step S8003A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects the change pattern, the notice effect when executing the notice effect, and the process table according to the change effect when executing the notice effect (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 44 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. If it is determined to execute the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect in step S8004.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, and sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect part is executed (step S8006). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the operation frequency determination process. In the operation frequency determination process, the effect control CPU 101 performs a process (steps S4500 to S4506) for determining whether or not to execute the change effect in the starting fluctuation, the type of the change effect when executed, and the specific display of the execution target. After the execution, processing (steps S4507 to S4511) for determining the operation frequency of each specific display is executed.

  First, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a red specific display is displayed (step S4500), and if it is displayed, the process proceeds to step S4507. Thus, in the present embodiment, since the display mode is changed only for a single specific display, when the red specific display (specific display of the most reliable display mode) is already displayed, Even if the change effect is executed, no further change in the display mode can be expected. Therefore, the change effect cannot be executed. In addition, even if it is a case where the change of the further display aspect cannot be anticipated, it is good also as being able to perform a change production, and if it is a game machine which can change the display aspect of a some specific display, it is the most reliable. Even if a specific display of a high display mode is displayed, the change effect may be executable.

  When the red specific display is not displayed, the effect control CPU 101 executes a change effect execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the change effect in the starting variation (step S4501). Specifically, a change effect execution lottery is performed using the change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram showing a change effect execution lottery table. In the change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 46 (A), the presence / absence of execution of the change effect and the type of change effect when it is executed according to the presence / absence of the change of the specific display in the start change (schedule change in the change). Although determination values corresponding to (first change effect, second change effect) are assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 46 (A), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown to simplify the explanation. Has been. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for change effect execution lottery, and determines the decision item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  It should be noted that the presence / absence of a change in the specific display in the starting change is indicated in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 (if the starting change is a change based on the first reserved memory, the first start winning command In the case where the storage area and the starting variation are based on the second reserved memory, the determination is made based on the second start winning command storage area). At this time, since the start winning command storage area is not updated (steps S664 and S668) based on the start of fluctuation, information regarding the fluctuation to be started is stored in one of the start winning command storage areas. It is stored in the eye storage area. Therefore, whether “active” is stored as the change timing in the first storage area, “first” is stored as the change timing in the second storage area, or change in the third storage area If “second” is stored as the timing or “third” is stored as the change timing in the fourth storage area, it is determined that there is a change plan.

  For example, when there is a change schedule, execution of the first change effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and execution of the second change effect is determined at a rate of 30%. When there is no plan to change, the first change effect is executed at a rate of 3%, the second change effect is executed at a rate of 7%, and the change effect is not executed at a rate of 90%. The

  Thus, any change effect is always executed when there is a change schedule. That is, the display mode can be changed only when the change effect is executed.

  Further, in this way, when there is a change plan, the first change effect is executed at a higher rate than the second change effect, and when there is no change plan, the second change effect is the first change effect. Is configured to run at a higher rate. Thereby, the display mode of the specific effect is changed at a higher rate when the first change effect is executed than when the second change effect is executed. Therefore, the presence / absence of a change in the display mode of the specific display is suggested depending on the type of the change effect.

  In the present embodiment, the first change effect and the second change effect are provided as the types of change effects, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a change effect that always changes the display mode of the specific display may be provided at the time of execution.

  In the present embodiment, the operation frequency is determined after determining the type of change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation frequency of the specific display is determined before the type of the change effect, and the type of the change effect is determined based on the operation frequency (for example, if the frequency is low, the second change effect is easily selected). Also good.

  After step S4501, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the change effect (step S4502). If not, the process proceeds to step S4507. When executing the change effect, it is determined whether or not there is a change plan (step S4503). When there is no change plan (that is, when the change effect is executed but the display mode does not change), the blue specific display is performed. Is displayed (step S4503A), and if not, an execution target determination lottery for determining a specific display of the execution target of the change effect is executed (step S4503B). Specifically, the execution target determination lottery is performed using the execution target determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram showing an execution target determination lottery table. In the execution target determination lottery table shown in FIG. 46 (B), the execution target of the change effect according to the number of reserved memories (active display, first hold display, second hold display, third hold display) In the example shown in FIG. 46B, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for execution target determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  Here, the “pending storage number” is the first holding memory number when the starting variation is a variation based on the first holding memory, and when it is a variation based on the second holding memory. This is the second reserved memory number. At this stage, the subtraction storage number subtraction (steps S662 and S666) based on the start of fluctuation is not performed.

  For example, when the number of reserved storage is “4”, the active display is targeted for execution at a rate of 40%, and the first pending display is targeted for execution at a rate of 20%. It is determined at 20% that the current hold display is to be executed, and at 20% that the third hold display is to be executed.

  For example, when the number of reserved storage is “3”, the active display is targeted for execution at a rate of 60%, and the first pending display is targeted for execution at a rate of 20%. It is determined at a rate of 20% that the pending display is to be executed.

  For example, when the number of reserved storage is “2”, the active display is determined to be executed at a rate of 80%, and the first held display is determined to be executed at a rate of 20%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “1”, it is determined at a rate of 100% that the active display is to be executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the active display is easily set as the execution target. As a result, a player can be given a sense of expectation for the variation during execution.

  In the present embodiment, only the on-hold display that is already displayed can be determined as the execution target of the change effect, but here, the execution target of the change effect (the so-called “gase effect”) whose display mode does not change is set. In order to make a determination, the display may be a pending display that is not displayed. For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” (that is, when only the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed when the change effect is executed) Also, the third hold display can be determined as the execution target of the change effect, and when the third hold display is determined as the execution target, the change effect is displayed in the display area of the third hold display. It may be performed (the hammer swings if it is the first change effect, and the arrow passes if it is the second change effect).

  In S4503A, when the blue specific display is displayed, the blue specific display is determined as the execution target of the change effect (step S4504). Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has already changed to blue will further change. It should be noted that even when a specific display whose display mode has already changed to blue is displayed, a change effect (a change effect in which the display mode does not change) that uses another specific display (white specific display) as an execution target (So-called “gase effect”) may be executed. However, even if the specific display that has already changed to blue is already displayed, it is possible that the player will be stressed by frequently performing a gasse effect with another specific display as an execution target. It is done. Therefore, even if it is a configuration that can execute a gaze effect whose execution target is a specific display that is different from the specific display that has already changed to blue, a change effect that has a specific display that has already changed to blue as an execution target. It is desirable to run at a high rate.

  In step S4503, if there is a change schedule, the specific display (active display, hold display) that is the change schedule is determined as the execution target of the change effect (step S4505). As described above, at this time, since the start winning command storage area is not updated (steps S664 and S668) based on the start of the change, the specific display corresponding to the storage area 1 changes. If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 2 is scheduled to change, “first” is selected. If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 3 is scheduled to change, “second” is selected. If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 4 is to be changed, “third” is determined as the execution target of the change effect.

  After executing one of steps S4503B, S4504, and S4505, the effect control CPU 101 sets the type of change effect to be executed and the specific display of the execution target (step S4506). The change effect is executed by selecting a process table corresponding to the change effect of the contents set here in step S8004 and executing step S8006 or step S8105 described later.

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control specifies a hold specific value K for specifying the number of hold display (that is, the first hold display if K = 1, and 2 if K = 2). “1” is set to the hold display of the eye, the third hold display if K = 3, and the fourth hold display if K = 4 (step S4507), and the operation frequency of each specific display is set. An operation frequency determination lottery for determination is executed. Specifically, the operation frequency determination lottery is performed using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 46C is an explanatory diagram showing an operation frequency determination lottery table. In the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 46C, whether or not the display mode of the specific display is scheduled to change (scheduled change of the Kth hold display) and change effect (change effect to the Kth hold display). The determination values corresponding to the operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) are assigned according to the case, but in the example shown in FIG. 46C, the ratio of the assigned determination values is set to simplify the explanation. It is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for operation frequency determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  The presence / absence of a change in the display mode of the specific display is determined with reference to the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. Specifically, if the hold specific number K = 1, “active” is stored as the change timing in the first storage area, or if the hold specific number K = 2, the change timing in the second storage area. If the “first” is stored, or if the hold specific number K = 3, the “second” is stored as the variation timing in the third storage area, or the hold specific number K = 4 For example, when “third” is stored as the variation timing in the fourth storage area, it is determined that there is a change schedule.

  The “change effect” is determined based on the type of change effect set in step S4506 and the execution target. For example, if the hold specific number K = 1, the active display is set as an execution target, and if the hold specific number K = 2, the first hold display is set as the execution target, the hold specific number K = 3 if the second hold display is set as the execution target, and if the hold specific number K = 4, the third hold display is set as the execution target It is determined that the change effect is executed.

  For example, when there is a change schedule and the first change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 20% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 80%. When there is a change schedule and the second change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 30% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 70%.

  For example, when there is no change schedule and the first change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 40% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 60%. When there is no change schedule and the second change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 45% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 55%. When there is no change schedule and the change effect is not executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 90% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 10%.

  In this way, the operation mode of the specific display that is the execution target of the change effect is configured such that the higher frequency is more easily determined than the lower frequency. Therefore, the specific display whose operation mode is high in frequency is more likely to be a target for executing the change effect than the low-frequency specific display.

  In addition, the specific display with the change schedule is configured to determine the high frequency as the operation frequency more easily than the specific display without the change schedule. Therefore, the presence or absence of a change is suggested depending on the operation frequency.

  In the present embodiment, a high frequency and a low frequency are provided as the operation frequency. However, a fixed operation frequency that can be selected only when a change effect is executed may be provided. The player is notified that the change effect is executed by performing the fixed operation frequency.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the specific display with the change schedule is selected as the operation frequency at a higher rate than the specific display without the change schedule. It is not limited. For example, when a specific display with a planned change is displayed, a higher frequency is selected as an operation frequency at a higher rate than when a specific display with a planned change is not displayed (that is, a change is made). Even if there is a specific display without a plan, if a specific display with a change schedule is displayed as another specific display, a high frequency may be easily selected as the operation frequency). Moreover, it is good also as selecting a high frequency with a high ratio, so that it is the specific display currently displayed in the position close | similar to the specific display with a change plan.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the operation mode of the K-th hold display (step S4509). For example, if K = 1, in the first storage area, if K = 2, in the second storage area, if K = 3, in the third storage area, if K = 4 In the fourth storage area, “high frequency” or “low frequency” is stored as the operation mode. The reserved specific number K and the reserved memory number (if the variation to be executed is a variation based on the first reserved memory, the first reserved memory number, and if the variation to be executed is a variation based on the second reserved memory, the second reserved memory number. ) Are equal to each other (step S4510). If they are not equal, 1 is added to the reserved specific number K (step S4511), and the process proceeds to step S4508 again. In this way, the operation frequency for all the stored storages is determined one by one. The operation frequency determination process is terminated when the hold specific number K and the hold storage number become the same value.

  In step S4508, an operation mode other than the operation frequency may be determined instead of or in addition to the operation frequency. For example, it may be determined whether the mole displayed as the specific display is to be projected or rotated.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, 1 is subtracted from the value of the process timer (step S8101), and 1 is subtracted from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a display position fixing flag indicating that the display position of the specific display is fixed is set (step S4700A), and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S4707. . The display position fixing flag is a flag that is set during the execution of the first change effect, that is, during the execution of the first change effect, the process of steps S4701 to S4706 (a process for changing the display position of the specific display). ) Is not executed.

  In this embodiment, while the first change effect is being executed, switching of the display positions of all the specific displays is limited. However, at least the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect. As long as the switching of the display position is limited, the switching of the display position of other specific display may not be limited.

  When the display position fixing flag is not set in step S4700A, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the display position change timing is set in advance (step S4700B). In the present embodiment, the display position change timing is even seconds after the start of fluctuation, that is, the display position can change every 2 seconds. The display position change timing may be determined by lottery, or may be determined for each variation pattern.

  If it is the display position change timing (Y in step S4700B), the specific display specific number R for specifying what number of specific display (if R = 1, the first specific display (that is, active) Display), if R = 2, the second specific display (ie, the first hold display), if R = 3, the third specific display (ie, the second hold display), R If = 4, 1 is set to the fourth specific display (that is, the third hold display)) (step S4701), and the display position of the specific display specified by the specific display specific number R is switched. A display position switching lottery is executed to determine whether or not (step S4702). Specifically, the display position switching lottery is performed using the display position switching lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram of a display position switching lottery table. In the display position switching lottery table shown in FIG. 48, a determination value corresponding to the presence / absence of switching of the display position is assigned according to the operation frequency, but in the example shown in FIG. 48, assignment is made in order to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for display position switching lottery, and determines the decision item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the operation frequency is high, it is determined that the display position is switched at a rate of 70% and the display position is not switched at a rate of 30%. Further, for example, when the operation frequency is low, it is determined that the display position is switched at a rate of 20% and the display position is not switched at a rate of 80%.

  If it is decided to switch the display position (Y in step S4703), if the display position of the R-th specific display is the retracted position, it is switched to the advanced position, and if it is the advanced position, it is switched to the retracted position (step) S4704). Then, the value of the specific display specific number R is the reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number if the variation to be executed is a variation based on the first reserved memory, and the second if the variation to be executed is the variation based on the second reserved memory. It is determined whether or not the value is the same as the value obtained by adding 1 to (the number of stored storage) (step S4705). If it is not the same value, 1 is added to the specific display specific number R and the process proceeds to step S4702. In this way, whether or not to switch the display positions of all the specific displays is determined one by one. If the values are the same, the process proceeds to step S4707.

  In step S4707, the CPU 101 for effect control sets the display position fixing flag (step S4707A) if the execution timing of the first change effect is reached (Y in step S4707), and the display mode of the specific display of the change effect execution target. Is determined to be changed (step S4708). If the change is scheduled, the display position of the specific display to be executed is switched to the advance position (step S4709). If the change is not scheduled, the display position of the specific display to be executed is switched to the retreat position (step S4710). Thereby, when the first change effect is executed, the display mode changes if the display position of the specific display to be executed of the first change effect is the advance position, and the display mode does not change if the display position is the retreat position. It has become.

  In step S4711, the effect control CPU 101 resets the display position fixing flag if it is the end timing of the change effect (Y in step S4711) (step S4711A), and specifies the execution target of the change effect. It is determined whether or not the display mode is scheduled to change (step S4712), and if it is scheduled to change, the display mode of the specific display to be executed is changed (step S4713). In step S4713, the specific display is displayed according to the type of the change effect (for example, when the first change effect is executed, the display is switched from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which eyes are opened and sweat is displayed. On the other hand, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode is switched from the expressionless display mode to the tearing display mode), and then changes to blue or red. It should be noted that when the color is changed to blue or red, the display mode is switched to the expressionless display mode again.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8112).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (offset symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 clears the operation frequency storage area in the start winning command storage area and the active display storage area (step S5301). Thus, in this embodiment, the operation frequency is updated for each change.

  In addition, when neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect controlling CPU 101 performs the effect controlling CPU 101. Proceeds to step S8311.

  When the big win symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and according to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1, the movable member control data 1), the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, the speaker 27 as the production component, and the movable member 78 as the production component and production. The blades 79a and 79b) are controlled (step S8309).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 41, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, because the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  50 and 51 are explanatory diagrams illustrating display examples of the effect display device 9 when the change effect is executed. For example, FIGS. 50 (A1) to (A3) show display examples when the first change effect is executed for the hold display whose display position is the advance position. For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (A1), an active display 51 and three hold displays 52 to 54 are displayed as specific displays, and the display form of any specific display is white. Moreover, as for the display position of each specific display, only the first hold display 52 is the advance position, and the other specific displays (active display 51, hold displays 53, 54) are retreat positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (A2), the first change effect is executed for the first hold display 52 whose display position is the advance position. At this time, the first hold display 52 struck by the hammer X is switched to a display mode in which the eyes are opened and sweat is carried out. Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (A3), the display mode of the first hold display 52 in which the first change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

  Further, for example, FIGS. 50B1 to 50B3 show display examples when the first change effect for the hold display whose display position is the retracted position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (B1), an active display 51 and three hold displays 52 to 54 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. Further, the display positions of the specific displays are all retreat positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (B2), the first change effect for the first hold display 52 whose display position is the retracted position is executed. At this time, the hammer X in the first change effect does not hit the first hold display 52. Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (B3), the display mode of the first hold display 52 on which the first change effect is executed does not change.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the rate of change of the display mode of the specific display varies depending on the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect (the advance position changes 100%, and the retraction position If it is, it does not change 100%).

  Further, for example, FIGS. 51A1 to 51A3 show display examples when the second change effect for the hold display whose display position is the advance position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (A1), an active display 51 and three hold displays 52 to 54 are displayed as specific displays, and the display form of any specific display is white. Moreover, as for the display position of each specific display, only the first hold display 52 is the advance position, and the other specific displays (active display 51, hold displays 53, 54) are retreat positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (A2), the second change effect is executed for the first hold display 52 whose display position is the advance position. At this time, the first hold display 52 that the arrow Y has hit switches to a display mode that sheds tears (a display mode that is different from when the hammer is hit with the hammer X in the first change effect). And as shown to FIG. 51 (A3), the display mode of the 1st holding | maintenance display 52 in which the 2nd change effect was performed changes from white to blue.

  Further, for example, FIGS. 51B1 to 51B3 show display examples when the second change effect for the hold display whose display position is the retracted position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (B1), an active display and three hold displays 52 to 54 are displayed as the specific display 51, and the display mode of any specific display is white. Further, the display positions of the specific displays are all retreat positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (B2), the second change effect for the first hold display 52 whose display position is the retracted position is executed. At this time, the first hold display 52 that the arrow Y has hit switches to a display mode that sheds tears (a display mode that is different from when the hammer is hit with the hammer X in the first change effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (B3), the display mode of the first hold display 52 on which the second change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode can be changed regardless of whether the display position of the specific display is the advanced position or the retracted position. It has become. Note that even when the second change effect is executed, a pattern in which the released arrow Y does not hit the specific display is provided as a pattern in which the display mode of the specific display to be executed does not change.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of performing variable display, and is a mode with an operation (in this example, a mode in which the display position is switched to the advance position or the retreat position, A specific display corresponding to variable display in an expressionless display mode by switching to a display mode in which eyes are opened and sweat is displayed or a display mode in which tears are shed (in this example, an active display corresponding to a change during execution, still Display of the specific display (in this example, display color (white, blue, red), display shape, pattern, position, range, etc.) In this example, the active display is displayed by performing steps S663B and S667B in the production control microcomputer 100, and step S3911 is possible. By performing S3929, the hold display is displayed, and by performing step S4713, the display mode of the specific display is changed and the suggestion effect (in this example, the change effect (first (1 change effect, 2nd change effect)) (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the change effect in step S4506 and the process table corresponding to the change effect in step S8004). And performing steps S8006 and S8105 to execute a change effect).

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the specific display means is the operation mode of the specific display when the suggestion effect is executed (in this example, the display position (advance position, retreat position), operation frequency. (It may be other operation modes such as (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward, rightward)). The effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4707 to S4709, so that when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position, the display mode of the specific display at a rate of 100% On the other hand, when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the retreat position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display at a rate of 0%) Changing)) it was decided. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of specific display.

  Note that in this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of displaying both active display and on-hold display, and both of them can be displayed in a mode involving operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the active display and the hold display may be displayed in a mode involving an operation. Further, for example, only one of active display and hold display may be displayed.

  In addition, although the operation mode and display mode of the active display and the hold display are common, the present invention is not limited to this, and the active display and the hold display can be displayed in different operation modes and display modes. It is good.

  In this embodiment, the display mode pattern and the change timing are determined at the time of starting winning, and the presence / absence of the change effect and the operation frequency are determined at the start of the change. However, the determination timing is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the display mode pattern may not be determined at the time of start winning, but may be determined for each change start (that is, the change timing is also determined at the start of change) whether to change the display mode during the change. Alternatively, the presence / absence of the change effect and the operation frequency may be determined at the time of starting winning.

  In the present embodiment, a maximum of four hold displays can be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if it is possible to display both the first hold display and the second hold display, a maximum of eight hold displays may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, a change effect that suggests a change in the display mode of a single specific display is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as being able to perform the change production which suggests. For example, it is good also as performing the change production which suggests that the display mode of the specific display which two arrows were released toward each different specific display and the arrow hit is changed.

  In the present embodiment, only when some suggestive effects (first change effects) among a plurality of types of suggestion effects are executed, it depends on whether the display position of the specific display is the advanced position or the retracted position. Although the display mode of the specific display changes with the ratio, when executing all types of suggestion effects, the specific display of the specific display is different at different ratios depending on whether the display position of the specific display is the advanced position or the retracted position. The display mode may be changed.

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means includes the first suggestion effect (first change effect in this example) and the second suggestion effect (second change effect in this example). (In this example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes one of the change productions by performing steps S8004, S8006, and S8105. The specific display means can display the specific display according to different operation modes when the suggestion effect to be executed is the first suggestion effect and when it is the second suggestion effect (in this example, the effect control) The microcomputer 100 performs step S4713 to switch from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which eyes are opened and sweated when the first change effect is executed. On the other hand, when the second change effect is executed, the specific display is displayed by switching from the expressionless display mode to the tearing display mode, and the operation frequency changes depending on which suggestion effect is executed. It may be.) Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of specific display.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific display after the change effect is executed is different depending on the executed change effect, but before or during the change effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display may be different depending on the change effect to be executed. For example, when a change effect in which an apple falls from the sky is executed, the display mode of the specific display may be switched to a mode in which the mouth is opened before the apple is displayed, or after the apple is displayed. The display mode of the specific display may be switched in such a mode that the mouth is opened before the apple reaches the specific display.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the specific display means is the operation mode of the specific display before the suggestion effect is executed (in this example, the operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) display position. The display mode of the specific display can be changed at different ratios depending on (an advancement position, a retreat position) or a display direction (for example, downward, rightward). The control microcomputer 100 executes step S4508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 46C, so that the operation frequency of the specific display that is the execution target of the change effect is high and low. The change rate of the display mode differs depending on the frequency.) Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of specific display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means displays the specific display in a mode with an operation regardless of whether or not the display mode is changed (in this example, the display position (advanced for any specific display). (The position and the retreat position) are displayed in a switching manner), and the suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is a diagram) By executing step S4508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in 46 (C), when the operation frequency is high, the change effect (the first change effect, the first change effect is compared with the low frequency). 2 change effect) is easy to execute. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of specific display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means can display the specific display by switching between the specific operation mode (in this example, the advance position) and the non-specific operation mode (in this example, the retracted position) (this book In the example, the production control microcomputer 100 can execute steps S4704, S4709, and S4710), and the display of the specific display when the operation mode of the specific display when the suggestion effect is executed is the specific operation mode. (In this example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4707 to S4713 so that the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change production is the advance position. The display mode of the specific display can be changed). Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of specific display.

  In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means includes a plurality of types of suggestions including a first suggestion effect (in this example, a first change effect) and a second suggestion effect (in this example, a second change effect). Any suggestive effect can be executed among the effects (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes any change effect by performing steps S8004, S8006, and S8105), and the specific display means is The specific display can be displayed by switching between the specific operation mode (in this example, the advance position) and the non-specific operation mode (in this example, the retracted position) (in this example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the steps S4704, S4709, and S4710 can be executed), and when the first suggestion effect is executed, when the operation mode of the specific display is the specific operation mode, the display mode of the specific display (In this example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4707 to S4713, thereby specifying the specific display when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change production is the advance position. On the other hand, when the second suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of the operation mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer). 100 can change the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the second change effect is the advanced position or the retracted position by executing steps S4711 to S4713. It was decided that. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it can be suggested that the display state of the specific display controls the advantageous state (in this example, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the display shown in FIG. 39 in steps S3906 and S3924. By determining the display mode pattern using the mode pattern determination lottery table, the display mode changes the display mode of the specific display depending on the reliability of the jackpot (white <blue <red) is suggested by the display mode, and the operation mode of the specific display (In this example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the operation frequency by using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 46C in step S4508, thereby determining the operation frequency. (Suggests the degree of confidence that the display mode of the specific display changes due to the low frequency <high frequency)) It was. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a specific display (specific indication on the suggesting side) that suggests whether or not the display mode changes by an operation mode, and a specific display (indication that suggests whether or not the display mode changes) Is not limited to this, and the specific display on the suggesting side and the specific display on the suggested side may be different from each other. Good. For example, it may be suggested that the display mode of the specific display B displayed adjacent to the specific display A changes depending on whether the operation frequency of the specific display A is high.

  In this embodiment, two types of suggestion effects are provided, but only one type of suggestion effect may be provided, or three or more types of suggestion effects are provided. It is good to be.

  In the present embodiment, the change display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display may be executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. .

  In this embodiment, the pending change pattern and the change timing are determined by different lotteries. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of pieces of data including information on a hold change pattern and change timing (that is, data in which a display mode is changed at which timing in advance) are provided, and a hold change corresponding to any data is performed. It is good also as deciding whether to perform by lottery.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the hold display is performed at the timing before the next change after the hold display is started (for example, during the change executed when the hold display is started). Although the aspect cannot be changed, the present invention is not limited to this. It is assumed that the display form of the hold display can be changed at a timing before the next change after the hold display is started. Also good. For example, the display mode of the hold display may be changed during the change being performed when the hold display is started.

  In the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the hold display is always low after the display of the hold display is started until the next change is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the frequency may always be high, or one of high frequency and low frequency may be selected by lottery at the time of starting winning. In that case, it is desirable that the display mode of the hold display can be changed at a timing before the next change after the hold display is started.

  In the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the specific display displayed at the start of the change is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation frequency of all the specific displays (one active display and four hold displays) that can be displayed may be always determined regardless of the number of hold memories actually stored. For example, in consideration of a case where a start winning is generated during a change in which two hold memories are stored and a third or fourth hold display is displayed, the third or fourth is displayed in advance at the start of the change. It is also possible to determine the operation frequency of all the specific displays that can be displayed including the first hold display (determine all the operation frequencies of one active display and four hold displays at the start of every change) Good.

  In this embodiment, the start winning command storage area in which information related to the hold display is stored and the active display storage area in which information related to the active display is stored are provided. The information regarding the hold display and the information regarding the active display may be stored in a common storage area. In that case, in steps S4501, S4503B, S4508, and S4702, processing is performed with reference to the common storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the presence / absence of display position switching is determined by lottery based on the operation frequency. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a fixed operation pattern (a pattern indicating which display position is switched at which timing) is provided for each operation frequency, and the display position may be switched based on the operation pattern. . For example, as an operation pattern for high frequency, an operation pattern that repeats displaying for 2 seconds at the retracted position and then displaying for 3 seconds at the advanced position is provided, and as an operation pattern for low frequency, 5 seconds at the retracted position is provided. It is good also as an operation pattern which repeats displaying for 8 seconds in an advance position after displaying.

  In addition, when the presence or absence of execution of a change effect is determined, when the specific display whose display mode has already changed is displayed, the execution ratio of the change effect may be increased. For example, when the blue specific display is already displayed, the execution ratio of the change effect may be increased. Thereby, the player can be expected to further change the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has already changed. In addition, in a gaming machine in which the display mode can be changed in a plurality of stages, if there is a specific display that has already changed to the display mode in the final stage, even if a change effect is executed with the specific display as an execution target, Since the player cannot be given a sense of expectation, the execution of the change effect with the specific display as an execution target may be restricted.

  In this embodiment, the operation frequency of specific display is determined one by one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation frequency of a plurality of specific displays may be determined collectively. For example, it is good also as selecting the combination of the operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) in each specific hold.

  In the present embodiment, the display position of the specific display is forcibly switched according to the presence or absence of the change of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect. (If not, switch to the retreat position. Refer to steps S4707 to S4710.) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position of the specific display to be executed is the accidental advance position when the first change effect is executed. (For example, when the display position is switched to the advance position in step S4704), the display mode of the specific display may be changed. Specifically, the final display mode (which display mode will be changed) is determined at the time of winning the start (the change timing is not determined at that time), and the specific display that has not yet changed to the final display mode is displayed. On the other hand, when the first change effect can be executed and the timing at which the first change effect is executed coincides with the timing at which the display mode of the specific display is controlled to the advance position, the display mode of the specific display It is good also as changing.

  In this case, even if the variation corresponding to the specific display is started (that is, when the active display is displayed as the specific display), the display mode of the active display is not changed to the final display mode. May be forcibly changed to the final display mode. Specifically, while executing the first change effect, the display position of the active display may be forcibly switched to the advanced position to change to the final display mode, or forcibly regardless of the display position. Alternatively, the final display mode may be changed by executing a change effect (which may be a second change effect or another change effect) that changes the display mode.

  Moreover, it is good also as displaying a specific display so that how to move changes with display modes. For example, when the specific display is white, it is displayed by rotating, when it is blue, it is displayed to jump, and when it is red, it is displayed to run around.

  In the present embodiment, by determining the display mode pattern at the selection ratio shown in FIG. 39, the reliability for changing to red is white <blue. For example, since the ratio of winning big hits or small winnings is extremely lower than the ratio of losing, and generally the number of reserved memories at the time of winning is more than two, there are more cases in FIG. Focusing on the case where the determination result at the time of winning in the second display mode pattern determination lottery table of B) is out of SP reach or others, Pt4 (white color) for the case where Pt1 to Pt4 (display mode pattern including white color) is selected The display mode pattern that changes from red to red is selected, and Pt3 (the display mode pattern that changes from blue to red) is selected when Pt2 and Pt3 (display mode patterns including blue) are selected. The percentage is higher. As a result, blue is more likely to change to red than white.

  In addition, a suggestion effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed, and a display mode of another specific display different from the changed specific display in a state where the changed specific display is displayed It is good also as being able to perform the suggestion production which suggests this change in the mode which at least one part is common. Specifically, a description will be given using Modification 1 below. Note that description of the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment is omitted.

  In the first modification, the production control microcomputer 100 can change the display modes of a plurality of specific displays. Specifically, the process of steps S3904, S3905, S3922, and S3923 in FIG. 38 in the above-described embodiment (that is, the specific display of the display mode pattern in which the display mode changes has already been displayed, and a new hold storage is performed. When it occurs, the display mode of a plurality of specific displays can be changed by not executing the process of setting a new display mode pattern of the hold display as Pt1).

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example of the effect display device 9 when executing the second change effect in the first modification. For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (1), an active display 51 and three hold displays 52 to 54 are displayed as specific displays, and the display form of the first hold display 52 is blue, The display form of the specific display (active display 51, hold display 53, 54) is white. Further, the display positions of the specific displays are all retreat positions. At this time, as shown in FIG. 52 (1), the common second change effect (effect in which the arrow Y is released) is executed regardless of which specific display is to be executed.

  When the first hold display 52 whose display mode has already changed to blue is to be executed, an arrow Y hits the first hold display 52 as shown in FIGS. 52 (2) and 52 (3). The display mode changes from blue to red.

  When a specific display (specifically, the second hold display 53) different from the first hold display 52 whose display mode has already changed to blue is set as an execution target, FIG. As shown in 5), the arrow Y hits the second hold display 53, and the display mode changes from white to blue.

  As described above, in the first modification, the suggestion effect execution means is the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed (for example, the first hold display shown in FIGS. 52 (1) to (2)). 52) suggestion effect (for example, the second change effect shown in FIGS. 52 (1) and 52 (2)) and the changed specific display in a state where the changed specific display is displayed. Suggestive effects (for example, FIGS. 52 (1), (4), 52) that suggest a change in the display mode of another different specific display (for example, the second hold display 53 shown in FIGS. 52 (1), 52). The second change effect shown in (5) can be executed in a mode at least partially in common (for example, a mode in which the arrow Y flies as shown in FIG. 52 (1)). Thereby, unexpectedness can be given to the production content and the production effect can be improved.

  In addition, in this modification 1, the specific display which suggests a change in the suggestion effect performed in the aspect which is at least partially in common with the suggestion effect which suggests the change of the display mode of the changed specific display is the changed specific display. However, the display is not limited to this. For example, a hold display or an active display that are not adjacent to each other may be used.

  Moreover, although this modification 1 demonstrated the case where the single changed specific display was displayed, even if it is a case where several changed specific displays are displayed, it is assumed that the same process is performed. Also good.

  Moreover, although this modification 1 demonstrated using the example of the 2nd change production, it is not restricted to this, For example, the 1st which suggests the change of the display mode of the changed specific display in which the display mode was already changed. In a mode in which at least a part of the change effect and the first change effect suggesting a change in the display mode of another specific display different from the changed specific display in a state where the changed specific display is displayed It is good also as performing (for example, stopping in the upper part of the specific display of an execution object after displaying in a common mode which moves a hammer to right and left).

  Further, the specific display means includes any one of the specific display corresponding to the variable display including at least a normal mode, a first specific mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode that suggests the content of the production. Can be displayed in the display mode, and can be performed with the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode. After the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the specific display of the second specific mode It is good also as changing the display mode of this specific display from the 2nd specific mode to the 1st specific mode when the production of the contents suggested by the above is executed. Specifically, a description will be given using Modification 2 below. Note that description of the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment is omitted.

  In the modified example 2, as a display mode of the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 18c, a normal display mode indicating reliability for a big hit (probability / normal / sudden probability change big hit) or a small hit, and a predetermined effect There is provided an effect suggestion display mode that suggests execution.

  The normal display mode includes “white” displayed in white, “red” displayed in red, and “gold” displayed in gold, and a big hit (probability / normal / sudden probability change big hit) and The confidence level for the small hits is gold> red> white.

  In the effect suggestion display mode, a special zone effect is displayed by displaying the first special suggestion mode indicating that the special zone effect is to be notified by displaying the character “special” and the character “special?”. A second special suggestion mode that suggests that it is a subject of notice, a pseudo-link suggestion mode that suggests executing a pseudo-ream by displaying the characters “NEXT”, and displaying the characters “SP” SP suggestion mode that suggests the development of super reach. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the special zone effect is to be notified, while the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether the special zone effect is to be notified. It is a display mode to obtain. Further, the pseudo-suggestion suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the pseudo-sequential execution is executed, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the super-reach is developed.

  The special zone effect is an effect that displays a special background that is different from a normal background by one change or a plurality of continuous changes. In addition, the special zone effect is configured such that the greater the number of executions, the higher the reliability for big hits (probability / normal / sudden probability change big hits) and small hits. Hereinafter, starting execution of a special zone effect may be referred to as “entering a special zone”.

  Immediately before entering the special zone, a successful entry effect is executed. The successful entry effect is an effect that indicates that it has been decided to enter the special zone after suggesting the entry into the special zone (for example, an effect that displays “success!” After displaying “special zone chance!”) ). Also, when the player does not enter the special zone, a rush failure effect that gives the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the player has entered the special zone may be executed. For example, after suggesting entering the special zone in the same manner as the successful entry effect, an effect indicating that the special zone is not entered (for example, “special zone chance!” Is displayed and “failure ...” is displayed. Production) can be executed as an entry failure production. Hereinafter, the rush success effect and the rush failure effect may be collectively referred to as “rush notice effect”.

  The rush advance notice effect is an effect performed over 3 seconds from the start of the change. When entering the special zone, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the start of the change (at the end of the successful entry effect). In addition, when the fluctuation time of the change for executing the rush notice effect is shorter than 3 seconds, the rush notice effect is forcibly terminated one second before the change stop. At this time, when entering the special zone, the successful entry effect is forcibly terminated and the special zone effect is started.

  In the second modification, the display mode of displaying the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold storage occurs (at the time of starting winning a prize). Specifically, when a start winning is generated, first, the change mode (holding change pattern and change timing) of the normal display mode is determined, and then it is determined whether or not to display in the effect suggestion display mode. When it is determined not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing of the start winning prize. In addition, when it is determined to display in the effect suggestion display mode, when the display of the hold display is started in the effect suggestion display mode from the timing of the start winning prize, and the effect of the suggestion content is executed (for example, 5 seconds after starting the special zone production, 5 seconds after re-variation in the pseudo-ream, 5 seconds after starting the super reach), or when it is decided not to execute (for example, entry failure) When an effect is executed, the display mode changes to a normal suggestion display mode.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in the case where the hold display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode in the second modification. First, (1) while the active display 51 and the two hold displays 52 and 53 are displayed, (2) a new hold memory is generated and the hold display 54 corresponding to the hold memory is the second. It is displayed in a special suggestion mode (“special?”). At this time, it is determined to execute a special zone effect that uses the reserved memory as a notice target. At this time, it is assumed that the pending change pattern that changes from “white” to “red” and further changes to “gold” is determined, and the first and second change timings are determined.

  Then, (3) the change ends at the gap, and (4) the next change is started. At this time, the active display 51 corresponding to the new variation is displayed and the hold display is shifted. Then, a rush notice effect is executed (image P is displayed). Then, when 3 seconds have passed, (5) it is notified that the entry has been successful (image P is switched and displayed) and the special zone is entered (image Q is displayed). Then, at the timing 5 seconds later, the display mode of the hold display 53 displayed in (6) the second special suggestion mode changes to “red”.

  Thereafter, although illustration is omitted, the variation ends at the gap and the next variation is started. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new variation is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, the display mode of the hold display displayed in “red” changes to “gold”.

  As described above, in the second modification, the specific display means displays at least a normal display (in this example, “white”) with a specific display corresponding to variable display (in this example, hold display, active display). ), A first specific mode (in this example, “red”) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (in this example, a production suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode) that suggests the production content , The second special suggestion mode, the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, and the SP suggestion mode)) (in this example, as shown in FIG. 53, “white” or “red” Or the second special suggestion mode can be displayed on hold), and an effect execution means (in this example, FIG. 53 (5), ( As shown in 6), the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode And the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode and then displays the specific display when an effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed. The display mode can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 53, the second special suggestion mode is displayed 5 seconds after the special zone effect is started. The hold display 53 can be changed to “red”. Thereby, the expectation with respect to a specific aspect can be raised.

  In the second modification, a single display mode (“white”, “red”) is provided as the “normal mode” and the “first specific mode”, respectively. A plurality of display modes may be provided as at least one of the “first specific modes”. In addition, a plurality of display modes (a first special suggestion mode, a second special suggestion mode, a pseudo-link suggestion mode, and an SP suggestion mode) are provided as the “second specific mode”. ”May be provided with a single display mode.

  Further, the effect suggested by the “specific display of the second specific mode” is not limited to the above-described effect, but a step-up notice effect that develops in stages, a character notice effect that a character appears, and a speech effect that displays a speech Any effect such as a button effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 and an effect effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or active display may be used.

  Further, in the second modification, the display mode that suggests the production using characters (“special”, “special?”, “NEXT”, “SP”) is the “second specific mode”, but the character, button, or pattern The content of the production may be suggested.

  Further, in the second modification, after the special zone effect, the pseudo-ream effect, or the super reach effect is started, after 5 seconds “the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the specific display of the second specific mode is displayed. It is said that “the production of the content suggested by“ is performed ”, but this is not restrictive. For example, it may be at the time when the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed, or the timing before and after the time.

  Moreover, in this modified example 2, each production was started when “the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode was executed after the specific display was displayed in the second specific mode”. Although it decided to unify after 5 seconds, it is not restricted to this. For example, a different timing is set in advance for each presentation of the suggestion content (for example, if the presentation of the suggestion content is a pseudo-continuous, 3 seconds after the start of the pseudo-continuation, if the suggestion content is a super-reach start, a super reach starts. 4 seconds later), or one of a plurality of timings may be determined by lottery. When determining by lottery, it may be different depending on whether or not the lottery ratio is a big hit. Thereby, a sense of expectation can be given by the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes from the second specific mode to the first specific mode.

  In the second modification, the pending change pattern and the change timing are determined by different lotteries, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of pieces of data including information on a hold change pattern and change timing (that is, data in which a display mode is changed at which timing in advance) are provided, and a hold change corresponding to any data is performed. It is good also as deciding whether to perform by lottery.

  Further, the change timing of the display mode of the hold display or the active display may not be determined in advance. For example, whether or not the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed every time the change starts. May be determined by lottery. Further, the display mode after the change may not be determined in advance. For example, it may be determined by lottery which display mode is changed at the change timing.

  In the second modification, the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode are determined by different lotteries as the display mode of the hold display or the active display, but the display mode is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of display mode change patterns including a normal display mode and an effect suggestion display mode may be provided, and it may be determined in which change pattern the display mode is changed.

  In the second modification, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the effect suggestion display mode, the normal display mode is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the normal display mode hold display or active display is displayed as an image with a lower display priority than the display suggestion display mode hold display or active display, Even during active display, it is possible to perform display similar to the second modification without interrupting display control of the normal display mode (change control of the display mode at the change timing).

  In the second modification, the effect execution means may not execute the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode even if the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode (for example, Even when the special zone effect is not executed, the hold display or the active display can be displayed in the second special suggestion mode, that is, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode. The special zone effect that is the suggested content may not be executed.) The specific display means is in the second specific mode even when the content of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is not executed. The display mode of the specific display displayed can be changed to the first specific mode (for example, although the hold display or the active display was displayed in the second special suggestion mode) Koto even when not running zone effect, be changed to "red" is a first particular embodiment is) may be. Thereby, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation when the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is not executed.

  In the second modification, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having a higher degree of expectation than the second specific mode (for example, a big hit or smaller than the second special suggestion mode). The hold display or the active display can be displayed in “red” with high reliability for winning. Thereby, the expectation with respect to a 1st specific aspect can be raised.

  Moreover, in this modification 2, the specific display means can display a specific display in the 1st specific aspect with a high expectation rather than the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the 2nd specific aspect (for example, The hold display or the active display may be displayed in “red”, which is more reliable than the special zone effect. Thereby, the expectation with respect to a 1st specific aspect can be raised.

  Further, in the second modification, the specific display means can further change the display mode of the specific display changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is produced. The suggestion display mode may be changed from “red” to “gold”. Thereby, the expectation with respect to the display mode of the specific display after changing to the 1st specific mode can be raised.

  Moreover, in this modification 2, the specific display means has a plurality of types of second specific modes having different suggested contents (in this example, a first special suggesting mode, a second special suggesting mode, a pseudo-link suggesting mode, an SP suggesting mode). The specific display can be displayed at, and the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode at a different rate based on the type of the second specific mode (for example, “red” is included) The ratio of which effect suggestion display mode is displayed when the hold change pattern (other than P01) is changed is different, so that it is changed to “red” at a different rate depending on the type of the effect suggestion display mode. It may be good.) Thereby, attention can be paid to the display mode of the specific display.

  In the second modification, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode, the pseudo continuous effect is always executed with the corresponding fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the hold display or the active display is displayed in the suggestion mode, a case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed and a case where it is not executed may be provided. Similarly, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode, a case where the super reach effect is executed and a case where the super reach effect is not executed may be provided.

  In the second modification, since the variation can be recognized (prefetched) based on the variation category command received at the time of starting winning, it can be recognized (prefetched) that the variation is accompanied once or twice. Alternatively, the pseudo-link suggesting mode can be executed with a change involving two pseudo-runs as a target of notice, but the pseudo-suggestion suggesting mode may be executed even with a change involving three times of pseudo-runs as a target of notice. .

  Moreover, as a change mode in the pending change pattern, not only a normal display mode but also an effect suggestion display mode is included, and the change mode to the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode can be determined collectively. Good. For example, the hold change pattern that changes from “white” to the first special suggestion display mode, the hold change pattern that changes from the second special suggestion display mode to “red”, or from “white” to the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, In addition, a plurality of hold change patterns such as a hold change pattern that changes to “red” and a hold change pattern that changes from “white” to the SP suggestion display mode are provided, and one of the hold change patterns is selected. It is good as well.

  Moreover, it is good also as determining a holding | maintenance change pattern using a common holding | maintenance change pattern determination table for any winning determination result, or a plurality of holding change pattern determination tables are provided and received. The hold change pattern may be determined using a hold change pattern determination table corresponding to the change category command.

  In addition, although explanation is omitted in the second modification, it is determined at the time of starting winning that the fluctuation is accompanied by a pseudo-relation including a plurality of re-variations, and it is determined to display the hold display in a pseudo-recommendation suggestion mode. In this case, it may be possible to determine at which re-variation timing the change from the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode to the normal display mode (for example, “red” or “gold”). For example, when it is decided to change the display mode at the first re-variation timing, the execution of the pseudo-ream including the first re-variation is suggested by the pseudo-recommendation mode, while the second re-variation is suggested. When it is determined to change the display mode at the change timing, the execution of the pseudo-run including two re-changes is suggested by the pseudo-run suggestion mode. In other words, when it is determined at the time of starting winning that the variation is accompanied by a pseudo-relation including a plurality of re-variations, and it is determined to display the hold display in a pseudo-recommendation suggestion mode, the pseudo-reaction including one re-variation is included. It may be possible to determine whether the execution of a series is to be suggested or whether the execution of a pseudo series including two re-variations is to be suggested.

  Further, a plurality of display modes are provided as the pseudo continuous suggestion mode, and the number of re-variations may be suggested depending on which type of pseudo continuous suggestion mode is displayed. For example, in the case where pseudo-continuous suggestion modes A to C are provided and the pseudo-reams that perform the re-variation once, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-recommendation suggestion mode A, and the re-variation is performed twice It is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-link suggesting mode B if it is a pseudo-run, and it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-link suggesting mode C if it is a pseudo-run that performs three re-variations. Also good.

  In the second modification, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the change is started. However, the start timing (inrush timing) of the special zone effect is not limited to this. For example, the special zone effect may be started at a timing when the change starts or at a predetermined timing during execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a super reach effect). Further, if the fluctuation is accompanied by pseudo-continuations, the special zone effect may be started at the first re-variation timing or the second re-variation timing. In addition, it may be determined by lottery at which timing of the plurality of timings to start the special zone effect.

  Moreover, it is good also as a game machine which can be performed combining combining arbitrary control among the control in the game machine shown to said embodiment, the modification 1, and the modification 2.

  In addition, the specific display of the second specific mode is accompanied by an action, and the content indicated by the specific display of the second specific mode at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode when the suggestion effect is executed. An effect is executed (for example, the execution ratio of the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode varies depending on the display position of the specific display of the second special suggestion mode when the change effect is executed). Also good. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display of the 2nd specific mode.

  In addition, the specific display of the second specific mode is accompanied by an operation, and the content indicated by the specific display of the second specific mode is different in proportion to the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode before the suggestion effect is executed. An effect is executed (for example, the execution ratio of the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode varies depending on the operation frequency of the specific display of the second special suggestion mode before the change effect is executed). Also good. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display of the 2nd specific mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., 1 is used when the change is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, This is a concept including a ratio that is different in a relationship of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and production symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In addition, about embodiment mentioned above, although the game machine (what is called a 1st type game machine) which transfers to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result of a special symbol and an effect design was demonstrated, the variable provided in the game area | region was demonstrated. A gaming machine (so-called second type gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit gaming state based on the winning of a gaming ball (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in a winning ball apparatus (so-called role) It is good also as applying to the game machine which combined 1st type and 2nd type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the probability change state based on the type of jackpot that has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, the game moves to a probable change state, while the specific area is played during the big hit. It is also possible to shift to the normal state when does not pass. In that case, substantial probability variation big hit and non-probability big hit may be realized by changing the ease of passing of the game ball to the specific area according to the big hit type. For example, the easiness of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening according to the big hit type. Specifically, a big hit type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is set as a big hit (substantial probable big hit) that allows a game ball to easily pass to a specific area, and a big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening is set to a specific area. It is good also as a big hit (substantial non-probable big hit) that a sphere does not easily pass.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 side determines whether or not the game is a big hit and determines whether or not the variation pattern type is winning (pre-reading determination), and shows a command (symbol designation command) indicating the winning determination result. , A variation category command) is transmitted, and the pre-run announcement effect is executed on the effect control microcomputer 100 side based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. Further, it may be configured such that determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) is performed on the production control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command for designating only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the time of starting winning. In addition, the presentation control microcomputer 100 side may be configured to make a winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on random number values specified by these commands.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible.

  In the above embodiment, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses game media such as the above and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine controlled to the probable change state after the big hit game is shown based on the fact that the big hit type is a probable big hit or a normal big hit and the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. It is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a probable state after completion.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown in embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned embodiment and modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probable variation state, a short-time state, etc.) Identification corresponding to variable display in accompanying modes (for example, a mode in which the display position is switched to the advance position or the retracted position, a mode in which the eyes are opened from the expressionless display mode, and a mode in which sweat is displayed or a mode in which tears are displayed) It is possible to display a display (for example, an active display corresponding to a variation being executed, a pending display corresponding to a variation that has not yet been started), and a display mode (for example, display colors (white, blue, red) of specific display). Specific display means that can change the shape, pattern, position, range, etc. to be displayed (for example, steps S663B and S667B in the production control microcomputer 100). The active display is displayed, the hold display is displayed by performing steps S3911, S3929, and the display mode of the specific display is changed by performing step S4713), and the change of the display mode of the specific display is suggested Suggestive effect execution means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the change effect is set in step S4506, and the change effect (first change effect, second change effect)) can be executed, and step S8004 The process table corresponding to the change effect is selected and the change effect is executed by performing steps S8006 and S8105), and the detection means (for example, the game area 9010) used for the game can be detected. For example, the out sphere detector 907 shown in FIGS. 0), a signal line (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 156) to which a detection signal from the detection unit is transmitted, and a reception unit for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board 9011 and the main board 9011 side) And a predetermined connection section provided in the error detection means, an abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, the CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 157), and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, Normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first starting winning port, ordinary variable winning ball device 906B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 9050A to 9050D serving as general winning regions, and special variable winning ball device 907 serving as a big winning port A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, or the like) for paying out game media based on winning a prize, etc., and a predetermined state (for example, a normal state or the like) different from the advantageous state. Specifically, the number of game media (for example, the number of shot balls) detected by the detection means in the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are all off) and the payout means in the predetermined state Predetermined information (for example, performance information in FIG. 136, etc.) calculated based on the number of game media paid out (for example, the number of winning balls by winning at each winning opening) can be displayed (for example, performance display Information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 160), and when the abnormality detection means detects an abnormality in the reception state, the display by the information display means is limited (for example, FIG. 158). As shown in FIG. 159, an error is notified and the performance display is limited, etc., and the specific display means is a specific display operation mode (for example, a display position (advance position, Avoid position). Other operation modes such as operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward or rightward) may be used. ) Can change the display mode of the specific display at different ratios (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the steps S4707 to S4709 to display the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect. When the position is the advance position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the retreat position, the specific display A gaming machine characterized in that the display mode is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%).

  According to the gaming machine, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display. Further, it is possible to prevent the information display means from performing inaccurate display.

  In the above gaming machine, when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the change of the specific display or the execution of the suggestion effect may be restricted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent giving incorrect information to the player by performing an effect in an abnormal state. In addition, as a restriction | limiting, it is not limited to not performing an effect, It may be reducing the execution rate of an effect, performing an effect in the aspect which can specify that abnormality was detected.

  In the gaming machine, the suggestion effect mode, the specific effect operation mode, and the display mode may be varied according to the calculated predetermined information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the calculated predetermined information, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can prevent the display of inaccurate information, it is possible to execute a game, and an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short time state, etc. ) That can be controlled (for example, pachinko machines, slot machines, etc.) and that can detect a game medium (for example, a game area 9010) used in the game (for example, FIG. 156, FIG. 160). ), A signal line for transmitting a detection signal from the detection means (for example, signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 156), and reception means for receiving the detection signal ( For example, the main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, and the like, and an abnormality detection unit (for example, an error detection unit shown in FIG. 157) that can detect an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal. -CPU 90103 that executes the notification process) and predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 906B serving as a second starting winning port, and a general winning area). A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media based on the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D, winning to a special variable winning ball device 907 which becomes a big winning port, and the like The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state (for example, a normal state, etc., specifically, a state in which all of a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag are off, etc.) And the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning opening). Information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 160) capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, performance information in FIG. 136) that is displayed (for example, performance display is possible), and the like by the abnormality detection means There is a gaming machine that restricts display by the information display means when an abnormality in the reception state is detected (for example, as shown in FIGS. 158 and 159, an error is notified and performance display is restricted). Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
As described above, the entry of the game media into the general winning area has an effect on the game as compared to the entry of the game medium into the start winning area where a special symbol variable display is executed when the game medium enters. Is low. Further, when the display result of the special symbol variable display becomes the specific display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Compared with the approach, the player's interest is low and it is difficult to enhance the interest. Under such circumstances, game nails may be maintained on the game hall side so that entry of the game media into the general winning area is substantially difficult.

  However, on the gaming machine manufacturer side, it is usual to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Therefore, it is desirable that the game nail is in a maintenance state where the game medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency on the game site side. In this case, it is necessary to raise the player's interest in the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and to make the player aware of the frequency of the game medium entering the general winning area.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. In a gaming machine according to an embodiment to be described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of gaming in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

  Hereinafter, other exemplary embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 54 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 903a formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming machine frame 903 so as to be openable and closable. The gaming machine frame 903 is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism. This outer frame is fixed to a so-called game island in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are arranged in parallel. By opening the gaming machine frame 903 with respect to the outer frame, a store clerk or the like can visually recognize the back side of the gaming machine frame 903 or the inside of the gaming island.

  The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area 9010 surrounded by guide rails. In this game area 9010, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven. The game area 9010 includes a left game area 9010A and a right game area 9010B. The game area 9010 is an area through which a game ball can pass on the game board 902. The left game area 9010A on the left side and the right game area 9010B on the right side with respect to the center of the game area 9010.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 54, on the right side of the game area 9010). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and each is identified in a special graphic game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. It is not limited. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as "second special symbol". . There may be one special symbol display device.

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 905, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R start changing the decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In this way, in the display area of the image display device 905, the special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A or the special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended.

  In the image display device 905, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, three areas may be provided to be bonded or separated, or to be able to be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 905 is controlled by an effect control CPU 90120 mounted on an effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 904A is executing variable display of the first special figure, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the image display device 905 to execute the effect display and perform the second special symbol display. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 904B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 905 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  For example, eight kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols 905L, 905C, and 905R. There are numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. Can be, for example, a decoration image showing a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, decorative symbols (designs that consist of the characters “Accuracy”) and blank symbols (which are also known as “2R probable big hits”) and blank symbols ( A symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  While the decorative symbols are changing, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, for example, from the smallest symbol number to the largest symbol number, from top to bottom sequentially. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the lower right part of the display screen of the image display device 905, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B for displaying a fourth symbol after a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and a normal symbol which will be described later. In this embodiment, the 4th symbol variable display for the first special figure is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived. The 4th symbol display area 905A and the 4th symbol variable display for the 2nd special symbol are displayed in synchronization with the 2nd special symbol variable display, and the display result of the variable display is derived. A fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special figure is provided.

  In this embodiment, the decorative symbol variable display is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variable display. (However, to be precise, the decorative symbol variable display is performed on the effect control CPU 90120 side by specifying the variation pattern. This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the command.) When performing an effect using the image display device 905, for example, an effect in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects, for example, and effects such that the moving object shields all or part of the screen are performed. For this reason, even when viewing the display screen on the image display device 905, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether the current state of variable display is being performed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 905. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  Note that the 4th symbol for the first special figure and the 4th symbol for the second special figure are sometimes collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 905A for the first special figure and the second special figure. The 4th symbol display area 905B for illustration may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  In the variable display (variable display) of the 4th symbol, the 4th symbol display areas 905A and 905B are displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, the 4th symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is white, the second symbol for the second special symbol is displayed). 4 symbol display area 905 </ b> B is black), and is realized by continuing the blinking state of repeatedly turning on (displaying) and turning off (not displaying) at predetermined time intervals. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 904A is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 904B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth special symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. Will remain. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Further, when the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of off. Will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 905A.

  When the big special symbol display device 904B stops and displays the big hit symbol, the fourth special symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. Will remain. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Further, when the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of off. Will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 905B.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display occurs when the game ball enters (starts winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. To do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning memory display area 905H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. Then, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is established based on the game ball having entered the first start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts in the mode (transmission color) (for example, the leftmost display part in the display part in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. Further, when a game ball enters the second start winning opening, the special symbol game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is established. One of the display parts which are the modes is changed to red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

  That is, when a start winning is generated, in the start winning storage display area 905H, hold information (an object indicated by a round shape in FIGS. 54, 84, etc.) corresponding to a special game executed based on the start winning is displayed. Display control to be newly displayed is performed. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left according to the order in which the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the hold information is satisfied (in the above example, the start condition is also satisfied). When a new start prize is generated when n pieces of hold information are displayed (when n special figure games are put on hold), the (n + 1) th hold information from the left corresponding to the new start prize Will be newly displayed. When the start condition for the special figure game being held is satisfied, the leftmost holding information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the nth (n ≧ 2) holding information from the left is left one by one. Shifted to the (n-1) th display.

  The order in which the start conditions for the special figure game are satisfied is not limited to the order in which the start conditions are generated, but the start condition for the special figure game for the second special figure is greater than the start condition for the special figure game for the first special figure. It may be established with priority (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). On the other hand, the start condition of the special figure game relating to the first special figure is established in preference to the start condition of the special figure game relating to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation). Anyway.

  In the start winning memory display area 905H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 905H or instead of the start winning memory display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 54, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memory in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the start winning memory display area 905H. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first hold stored number as the number of effective start winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second hold stored number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning ball formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including. A movable accessory 901000 is provided on the right side of the image display device 905.

  The movable accessory 901000 includes a motor and a lamp for operating a star-shaped member. The movable accessory 901000 operates (rotation operation and lighting) when an effect of notifying a big hit, for example, a later-described change result notification effect or a pre-reading notification effect is executed.

  Below the image display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 9027 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter or enters the second start winning port. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the game ball enters the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state. Easy to open and open.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first starter switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If so, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening shown in FIG. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the big prize opening door is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door closes the big prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the great prize opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  In this way, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit game state. When the start condition for starting the figure game is not satisfied, variable display is suspended. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). The added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be the total reserved memory number or the special figure reserved memory number.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 54, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 9020 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. Note that the normal symbol display 9020 is not limited to a variable display of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, etc. as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display device 9020, a general symbol hold display device 9025C is provided. The general figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gates 9041A and 9041B.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A winning area is provided.

  The general winning ports 9050A to 9050D are configured by ball receiving members that project forward (player side) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above from the opening, and the horizontal length (horizontal width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, but the game ball 2 It is smaller than the diameter of the piece. Therefore, two or more game balls are arranged in the horizontal direction so as not to pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. Further, the interval between the ball receiving members provided with the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D is an interval through which at least one game ball can pass. In addition, a winning ball device for switching the opening / closing of the openings of the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D (for example, an accessory corresponding to the normal variable winning ball device 906B for switching the opening / closing of the second start winning port) is not provided. It is always open. In addition, even if a game ball wins the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, neither the special-game variable display start condition nor the normal-game variable display start condition is established based on the winning.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the fact that the game balls have won the general prize opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Along with the winning of a game ball in the winning opening, a variable winning ball apparatus, for example, a normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B for performing opening / closing control of the second start winning opening, or a special variable for performing opening / closing control of the large winning opening. It is good also as the specific value provided by having won the game ball to a general winning opening to make it easy to win a game ball to a 2nd start winning opening and a big winning opening by operating the winning ball apparatus 907.

  Further, the specific value given to the player may be made different depending on the general winning opening, for example, 5 when the game ball wins the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C. 10 prize balls are awarded when a game ball is awarded to the first general prize opening 9050A or the fourth general prize opening 9050D (that is, a specific value having a different size is given). May be given). The specific value given when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is a predetermined number of winning balls, but the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening When a game ball wins in 9050D, the normal variable winning ball device 906B or the special variable winning ball device 907 may be operated (that is, a different type of specific value is given).

  In addition, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, for example, according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening And a case where the variable winning ball apparatus operates according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (that is, when the specific value type is different), so that different effects are executed. Also good. In addition, when 10 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls to the general prize opening, and when 5 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls to the general prize opening. Different effects may be executed (that is, when specific values have different magnitudes).

  As shown in FIG. 55, the first general prize corresponding to each of the first general prize opening 9050A, the second general prize opening 9050B, the third general prize opening 9050C, and the fourth general prize opening 9050D is shown in FIG. It is detected by the mouth switch 9024A, the second general winning port switch 9024B, the third general winning port switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning port switch 9024D. When a game ball is detected by the first general prize port switch 9024A, the second general prize port switch 9024B, the third general prize port switch 9024C, and the fourth general prize port switch 9024D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected. Will be paid out as a prize ball.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the winning opening switches corresponding to the four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D are provided, the game control microcomputer 90100 receives a game ball at the general winning opening. In addition to the above, it is also possible to detect which general winning award the game ball has won.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the structure in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for every general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that a general winning opening provided in the left game area 9010A has been won) is provided for the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. A common prize port switch (a switch for detecting that a prize has been won in the general prize opening provided in the right game area 9010B) is provided for the third general prize opening 9050C and the fourth general prize opening 9050D. Anyway. In addition, a common general prize opening switch (a switch for detecting that a prize has been won in any of the general prize winning openings) is provided for all the general prize winning openings of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. You may be allowed to.

  In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. The game balls taken into the out mouth are collected on the game island via a ball collection passage (not shown) communicating with the out mouth. The game balls won in each winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first to fourth general winning openings) are collected through a winning ball collecting box (not shown) It is to be collected on the amusement island via the collection passage. An out ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball collection passage. As a result, in the out-ball detector, game balls 9010 (game balls led to the out-ports without winning any of the winning ports, and winning balls set in any of the winning ports) Game balls collected in a cage) All game balls are detected. Each time a game ball is detected by the out-ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 9012, so that the effect control CPU 90120 counts the number of game balls that have been driven into the game area 9010, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. When the out-ball detector is configured to include a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, the effect control is performed every time the counter value increases by a certain number (for example, 10). The out number increase signal may be output to the substrate 9012 so that the number of outs can be tabulated in a certain number unit (for example, 10 units) on the effect control CPU 90120 side.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 903a, there is an upper plate 9060 that holds (stores) a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. Is provided. For example, an operation button 9030 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate 9060.

  A key hole 9061 for a locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the upper plate 9060. By inserting a key corresponding to the key hole 9061 into the key hole 9061 and rotating the key in one direction, for example, counterclockwise, it is possible to open the front of the glass door frame 903a with respect to the gaming machine frame 903. Further, by inserting the key into the key hole 9061 and rotating the key in the other direction, for example, clockwise, the gaming machine frame 903 can be opened forward with respect to the outer frame. In the locking device, a spring is built in the key hole 9061. When the key is inserted into the key hole 9061 and rotated counterclockwise or clockwise and then the key is released or pulled out, the direction opposite to the direction in which the key hole 9061 is rotated is obtained. Turn around to return to the neutral position. When the key hole 9061 is in the neutral position, the glass door frame 903a can be closed and locked with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, and the gaming machine frame 903 can be closed and locked with respect to the outer frame. Is possible. Also, maintenance of the game board (gauge board including game nails and winning holes) 902 (for example, measures to eliminate clogging) by opening the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903. Alternatively, a mode changeover switch 9031 and a display changeover switch 9032 described later can be operated.

  A lower plate 9062 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 9060 is provided immediately below the upper plate 9060, and a game ball as a game medium is directed to the game area on the lower right side of the upper plate 9060. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) 9063 operated by a player or the like for launching is provided. For example, the hitting operation handle 9063 adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  The operation button 9030 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. Note that the operation button 9030 is not limited to a button that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a button that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. It may be operable, or may be capable of being pressed and tilted like a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 9030, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 9030 only needs to be configured to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A player's operation action performed on the operation button 9030 includes a press detection switch (not shown) that detects pressing of the operation button 9030 and a rotary encoder that detects the rotation direction and the rotation amount of the operation button (jog dial) 9030. (Not shown).

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the game balls that have passed through the first passing gate 9041A provided in the left gaming area 9010A and the second passing gate 9041B provided in the right gaming area 9010B are transferred to the first passing gate 9041A shown in FIG. The normal symbol start condition for executing variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9020, such as detection by the second gate switch 9021B corresponding to the corresponding first gate switch 9021A and second pass gate 9041B, After being established, the normal symbol game 9090 is started by the normal symbol display device 9020 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable symbol normal display is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. The

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is "per normal figure", the expansion and release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The special game by the first special symbol display device 904A is caused by the fact that a game ball that has entered the first start winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first start port switch 9022A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the process is started on the basis that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 904B, the game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second start port switch 9022B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied by the above, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the last special figure game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result after a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time has elapsed. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” as a specific display result. " The specific special symbol (big jackpot symbol) as the confirmed special symbol is different depending on the type of jackpot, for example, the confirmed special symbol is different between the probability variation big hit and the non-probable variation big hit. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the big hit game state controlled after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball device 907 has a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number of times. A round game is executed to change the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 to the first state advantageous to the player by opening the large winning opening in a period until (for example, nine) winning balls are generated. The In this way, the open / close plate that opens the grand prize opening during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 902, and then closes the special prize opening, thereby providing a special variable winning ball apparatus. 907 is changed to the second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is ended. In the big hit state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, is, for example, 15 times. Note that a plurality of types of jackpot types with different numbers of round games may be provided.

  After the big hit state is over, as one of the advantageous states advantageous to the player, time shortening control is executed in which the variable symbol variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state The time-short state is controlled, and the probability variation state in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with the time reduction control is controlled.

  Here, the normal state is a normal state as a gaming state different from a specific state such as a big hit gaming state, a short time state, or a probability variation state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. On the other hand, the time-saving state is when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) a special-figure game is executed and the variable display result is “big hit” is met first. You just have to finish. Also, in the probability variation state, the variable display result in each special figure game and decorative symbol variable display will be “big hit”, and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. improves. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or until a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) a special game is executed.

  The jackpot (type) that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is ended is also referred to as a probability variation jackpot. The big hit (type) that is controlled to the short-time state without being controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state is ended is also referred to as a non-probability variation big hit.

  In the probabilistic state and the short time state, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game to have a shorter variation time (ordinary symbol variation time) than in the normal state, and the normal symbol is variable in each normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the certain change state or the short time state. A state in which the high opening control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the high opening control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and In response to the start of one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B, variable display of the decorative symbols is started. A period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variation symbol”). Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R, etc.) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 905C, etc.), the decorative symbols are changing, or the decorative symbols are a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  In response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 905 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 909, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. When the super reach reach mode appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (big hit reliability) is higher than when the normal reach reach mode appears.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 9011 side. Or not is determined.

  Unlike variable reach effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-ream” or “slip” during decorative display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying effect images such as predetermined character images and message images. Notifying the player that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect may be executed.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach-losing combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “lost”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative symbol of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When a special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state. At a later time, for example, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol pattern that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905 is “1”. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the“ left ”,“ middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Anything is acceptable.

  In addition, after a decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, a pre-read that notifies and notifies that pending data with a special figure display result of “hit” is stored during the round in the jackpot game state. A notice effect may be executed.

  As described above, the game area 9010 includes the left game area 9010A and the right game area 9010B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the hitting operation handle (operation knob) to adjust the left game area 9010A. It is possible to switch between left-handed shots for launching game balls toward the right and right-hand hits for launching game balls toward the right game region 9010B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 9010A (when a game ball enters the left game area 9010A), the right game area is arranged by arranging a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). The game balls win the first start winning opening at a higher rate than when the game balls are fired at 9010B. Also, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal symbol has a longer variation time (ordinary diagram variation time) than when the gaming state is the probability variation state and the short-time state, and the normal symbol variable display result is “per regular diagram”. Therefore, the rate at which game balls launched into the left game area 9010A in the normal state win the second start winning opening is extremely low compared to the rate at which the first starting winning opening is won. Yes.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, when a game ball is fired into the right game area 9010B (when a game ball enters the right game area 9010B), the left side of the pachinko game machine 901 is arranged by an unillustrated game nail or game ball guiding member. Compared to the case where a game ball is fired in the game area 9010A, the percentage of game balls winning at the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game ball does not win at the first starting winning opening. Yes. Therefore, even if the player hits the right hand in the normal state, the percentage that the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) left-handed in the normal state. It is extremely low compared to the percentage at which game balls sometimes win the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player will make a left strike in the normal state.

  In addition, the proportion of the game balls launched into the right game area 9010B passing through the second passage gate 9041B is the same as that of the game balls launched into the left game area 9010A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-pass gate 9041A. The rate at which the game ball launched into the right game area 9010B wins the open second start winning opening is determined by the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), and the game launched into the left game area 9010A. It is higher than the rate at which the ball wins the second start winning opening in the open state.

  In the probability variation state and the short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per regular diagram” is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the rate at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when the player makes a right turn in the probability changing state and the short time state is left in the probability changing state and the short time state. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball wins at the start winning opening (either the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) when hitting. Therefore, the player makes a right turn in the probability variation state and the short time state.

  In addition, the ratio of the game balls launched into the right game area 9010B to the open big winning opening is determined by the arrangement of game nails or game ball guiding members (not shown), and the game balls launched into the left game area 9010A. It is higher than the percentage of winning in the open big opening. Therefore, the player makes a right strike in the big hit gaming state. In this way, the player makes a left strike in the normal state, switches to the right strike with the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, continues the right turn in the probability change state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state ends, and enters the normal state. With the transition (for example, the probability change state without the big hit gaming state or the end of the short-time state), it will return to the left-handed.

  In addition, the proportion of the game balls launched in the left game area 9010A winning in the first general prize opening 9050A or the second general prize opening 9050B provided in the left game area 9010A is the first general prize opening 9050A and the second general prize opening 9050A. Depending on the position where the general winning opening 9050B is provided and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the right game area 9010B is the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening. It is higher than the percentage to win 9050B. On the other hand, the ratio of the game balls launched in the right game area 9010B to the third general prize opening 9050C or the fourth general prize opening 9050D provided in the right game area 9010B is the third general prize opening 9050C and the fourth Depending on the position where the general winning opening 9050D is provided and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the left game area 9010A is the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening. It is higher than the percentage to win 9050D.

  It should be noted that, for some or all of the plurality of general winning holes provided in the left gaming area 9010A (the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B), only the game balls launched into the left gaming area 9010A are included. The game balls that can be won and are launched into the right game area 9010B may not be awarded, and a plurality of general prize holes provided in the right game area 9010B (the third general prize opening 9050C and the fourth general prize opening). For some or all of 9050D), only the game balls launched into the right game area 9010B can win, and the game balls launched into the left game area 9010A may not win.

  Thus, since the left-handed is performed in the normal state, the probability that a game ball will win the first general winning port 9050A and the second general winning port 9050B among the four general winning ports is high, and the jackpot gaming state, In the probability variation state and the short-time state, right-handed is performed, and therefore, there is a high probability that the game ball will win the third general winning port 9050C and the fourth general winning port 9050D among the four general winning ports. In accordance with the game state and the like, as the game area where the game ball is launched changes, the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win also changes. In the left game area 9010A where the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball is easy to win, and the right game in which the game ball enters in the big hit game state, the probability variation state and the short time state. In the area 9010B, a general winning opening may be provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball to win (or vice versa), so that the winning frequency at the general winning opening may be changed according to the gaming state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a power supply board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The power supply board is a board that supplies power to each board such as the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. The power supply board is connected to other boards such as the audio control board 9013, the lamp control board 9014, and the relay board 9015 in addition to the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 to supply power. The power supply board is provided with a power switch. When the power switch is turned on, power is turned on, and power supply from the power supply board to each board is started. Further, the power supply to each board is stopped by turning off the power switch. The main board 9011 includes a payout control board. The payout control board may be provided separately from the main board 9011. The payout control board is a board that controls the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board includes a ball payout device (not shown) in response to receiving a prize ball number command in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 9011). The payout mechanism (mechanism for paying out prize balls) is driven to pay out the prize balls.

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020, or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a function to control. The main board 9011 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9027 and 9028 is mounted.

  Further, the switch circuit 90110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 (details will be described later) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 90100. Although described in detail later, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is for detecting an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 909 and the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 909 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the main board 9011 includes a first gate switch 9021A, a second gate switch 9021B, a first start port switch 9022A, a second start port switch 9022B, a count switch 9023, and a first general prize port switch 9024A. , Wirings for transmitting detection signals from the second general prize port switch 9024B, the third general prize port switch 9024C, and the fourth general prize port switch 9024D are connected.

  The first gate switch 9021A, the second gate switch 9021B, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D are, for example, What has an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor, may be used. Further, on the main board 9011, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display device 9020, a first hold display device 9025A, a second hold display device 9025B, and a general drawing hold display device 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected. In addition, a wiring for transmitting a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is connected to the main board 9011.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The main board 9011 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 9015, for example, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 90100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 9015 to the main board 9011. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 9012 or the relay board 9015 side to the main board 9011 side.

  The relay board 9015 may be provided with a transmission direction regulating circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example. Each transmission direction regulating circuit has a diode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 9011 and a cathode connected to the effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 9012 and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can block the input of a signal from the effect control board 9012 to the relay board 9015 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the production control board 9012 side to the main board 9011 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 9015, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 90100 and the main board side connector on the main board 9011. By providing, illegal signal input from the outside to the main board 9011 can be prevented.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 905, a sound control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  Such effect control commands include, for example, a gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state (normal state, probability variation state, or short-time state), a variation start command for designating a variation start in a special game, and a special game in a special game. A variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a design variation time or a design pattern on the image display device 905, a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a design design, and a design design for the image display device 905 A decorative ball stop command for specifying variable display stop, a jackpot start specifying command for specifying the start or end of a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot end specifying command, or a game ball has won a first start winning port or a second starting winning port Start winning command that is sometimes output, one that is output when a game ball wins a general winning opening Winning opening designation command, the game ball into the special winning opening includes special winning opening winning command or the like which is output when the prize.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 for performing the operation and an input / output port (I / O) 90105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 90101. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the CPU 90103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and the CPU 90103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 90101 to perform the game control. Specifically, the term “perform processing” means that the CPU 90103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 9011.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 90120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the RAM 90122, the display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and the CPU 90120 for effect control A circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component. At this time, the production control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121, the production control CPU 90120 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90122, and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the production control CPU 90120 enters the RAM 90122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and the presentation control CPU 90120 is an I / O. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 through O90125 is also performed.

  On the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013, Wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 9014, wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 901000, and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 9012, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation button 9030 has been detected is sent from a press detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit in the mode changeover switch 9031 described later, and operation in the display changeover switch 9032 described later. Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the part (first position or second position) is also connected.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 has a light emitting body such as an image display device 905, speakers 908L and 908R, a game effect lamp 909 and a decoration LED, operation buttons 9030, a movable accessory 901000, and an effect accessory. A plurality of types of pattern data constituting the effect control pattern are stored in advance in order to control the effect operation using the effect device (effect electric component) including the movable member included in the.

  A display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. For example, the display control unit 90123 executes various kinds of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. Control. The display control unit 90123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 confirms, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode switch 9031. Including an input port for capturing various signals such as a signal to be enabled and a signal for enabling the state of the display changeover switch 9032 to be confirmed, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. Composed. For example, from the output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, a command transmitted to the audio control board 9013 (sound effect signal), or a command transmitted to the lamp control board 9014 A command (driving signal) or the like transmitted to the movable accessory 901000 is output.

  On the voice control board 9013, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 9013, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs to the speakers 908L and 908R an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 9014. As an example, in the lamp control board 9014, the electric decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electrical decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 909 and the like.

  In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the abnormality that has occurred is reported by voice by controlling the speakers 908L and 908R via the voice control board 9013, or the lamp control board 9014 is displayed. Via the display control unit 90123, an abnormality notification image (error message) is displayed on the display area of the image display device 905 via the display control unit 90123. It is displayed and notified. Abnormalities include magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, radio wave abnormalities, and the like, which are detected using an abnormality detection sensor group 9026 and the like.

  The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 includes one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is not limited to a sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches that do not correspond to the sensor, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 only needs to be configured to detect an abnormality. One or more sensors or the like included in each of the abnormality detection sensor groups 9026 are prepared according to the type of abnormality. What is specifically included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 may be determined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like. An abnormality occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a phenomenon that does not occur or is extremely unlikely to occur in a normal game performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, And a phenomenon that may hinder the progress of the game, and particularly a phenomenon that requires notification to the player or the employee of the game hall (pachinko store, etc.).

  The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 includes, for example, a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band). For example, these sensors may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. In addition, the detection of abnormality can utilize a well-known method suitably. When the game control microcomputer 90100 detects a magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality or the like based on an output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that an abnormality has occurred is the main board. 9011 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 and an error has occurred due to the display of an error message on the image display device 905, the output of a warning sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, the light emission mode when an abnormality occurs in the game effect lamp 909, etc. Notification is performed. For example, when an abnormality has occurred, an image of the characters “An error has occurred” is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905, as shown in FIG.

  Here, not only the abnormality has occurred by the notification means such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909, but any type of magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, and front door opening. You may make it alert | report so that it is identifiable whether the abnormality of this was detected.

  The notification of magnetic abnormality is notification of abnormality performed when a magnetic abnormality (abnormality that the magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko gaming machine 901, in which case there is a possibility of fraud) is detected. There are fraudulent acts in which a game medium is moved by a magnet to win a prize opening, or a predetermined area is clogged with a game medium to guide the game medium to the prize opening. By notifying the magnetic abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is a magnetic abnormality by determining whether the signal from the magnetic sensor indicates a magnetic force equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (indicating magnetic force → there is a magnetic abnormality). When a magnetic abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the magnetic display is notified on the image display device 905 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of the characters “Magnetic error has occurred” is displayed.

  The vibration abnormality notification is, for example, an abnormality notification that can be executed in a pachinko gaming machine or the like provided with the special variable winning ball apparatus 907. There is a fraudulent act that intentionally shakes the pachinko machine to change the flow direction of the game medium closer to a winning opening such as a big winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is an abnormality due to vibration (vibration abnormality) by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration having a strength greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold (stronger than the predetermined threshold). Shows vibration of vibration → vibration is abnormal). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of the vibration abnormality is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the vibration abnormality is notified in the image display device 905 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of the characters “Vibration error has occurred” is displayed.

  The radio wave abnormality notification is an abnormality notification performed when a radio wave abnormality (abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko gaming machine 901, in which case there is a possibility of fraud) is detected. By applying radio waves to the start port switches (first start port switch 9022A and second start port switch 9022B), count switch 9023, etc., these switches are turned on / off, etc. There is a cheating to get. By notifying the radio wave abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band) is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is a radio wave abnormality by determining whether a signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicating reception of a predetermined radio wave → presence of radio wave abnormality). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the image display apparatus 905 and the like are notified of the radio wave abnormality. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of the characters “A radio wave error has occurred” is displayed.

  Each of the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 is configured by a DIP switch (Dual In-line Package switch), and is provided outside the game area of the game board 902. The mode change switch 9031 and the display change switch 9032 configured by DIP switches are configured by switching the operation unit between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of a slide type, the position of the knob is set to one end side and the other end). The processing (control program) executed by the effect control CPU 90120 can be switched. When the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, the glass door frame 903a covers the front surface of the game board 902, so that the player cannot operate the mode switch 9031 and the display switch 9032. It has become. It should be noted that the mode change switch 9031 and the display change switch 9032 are provided by the player via the glass door frame 903a when the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 903 (the state shown in FIG. 54). Since it is installed at a position where it cannot be visually recognized, it is not shown in FIG.

  As described above, the store clerk of the game hall inserts the key into the key hole 9061 to open the locking device (not shown) and opens the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, The operation of the mode switch 9031 and the display switch 9032 provided on the game board 902 (switching of the DIP switch) becomes possible. When the operation of the mode switch 9031 and the display switch 9032 is completed, the glass door frame 903a is returned to the closed state with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, and a key is inserted into the key hole 9061 to lock the locking device (not shown). )) Is closed.

  When the operation portion of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the first position, the voltage at the mode changeover terminal of the CPU 90120 for effect control is in the low state, and when the operation portion of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 90120 is in a high state. When the voltage at the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the first position, that is, information for the player (for example, a demonstration) The game mode for displaying a screen or the like is specified, and information of a winning number management table described later is not displayed on the image display device 905. On the other hand, when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 905 has information for the store clerk (for example, It is specified that the maintenance mode is to display the number of winning a prizes, etc., and the information of the winning number management table described later is displayed on the image display device 905.

  When the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the CPU 90120 for effect control is in the low state, and when the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 90120 is in a high state. When the voltage at the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 905 indicates the number of winnings to the general winning award. By specifying that display is not permitted, it is prohibited to display information based on the display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) on the image display device 905. On the other hand, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 905 receives a prize for the general prize opening. Permission to display the number is specified, and information based on the display control table to be described later (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) is allowed to be displayed on the image display device 905. To do.

  In this embodiment, the mode selector switch 9031 and the display selector switch 9032 are provided on the front side of the game board 902 (the surface facing the player), but the mode selector switch 9031 and / or the display selector switch 9032 are provided. The game board 902 may be provided on the back side (game island side). In the case of such a configuration, the mode change switch 9031 and / or the display change switch 9032 provided on the back side of the game board 902 by rotating the gaming machine frame 903 forward with respect to the outer frame. Can be operated.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 includes the start winning command as described above. The start prize command includes a start prize designation command indicating whether a start prize has occurred with respect to either the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, or a first start prize opening or a second start prize opening. There are a start winning determination result designation command and the like indicating a jackpot determination result and a jackpot type determination result at the time of winning a game ball.

  The CPU 90103 has an effective start winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When winning is detected, the big hit determining random number and the big hit type determining random number are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted big hit determining random number and the big hit type determining random number are stored in the first random number storage area for the first special figure. A command for designating the “first start prize opening” is set as a start prize opening designation command while being stored in a storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number after addition including the valid start prize). Further, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, short-time state, or probability variation state). Whether or not the start winning prize is determined is determined.

  In this starting prize determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value of the big hit determination table, a start winning determination result designation command for designating “out” is set. When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number is further stored in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure for each jackpot type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in the table matches. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command for designating “non-probable variation big hit” or a command for designating “probability big hit” is set as the determination result designation command at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“first start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 9012.

  Note that the CPU 90103 starts the game ball at the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening reaches the upper limit (that is, according to the first start winning opening). When an invalid start prize that is not eligible for the special game is detected, the command specifying the “first start prize opening” is set as the start prize designation command, and the determination result at the start prize is designated As a command, blank data is set to specify that it is not a valid starting prize. Then, the set start prize opening designation command ("first start prize opening" designation) and the start prize determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012.

  The CPU 90103 has an effective start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When the winning is detected, the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are stored in the second random number storage area for the second special figure. A command for designating “second start prize opening” is set as a start prize opening designation command while being stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories (the second reserved memory number after addition including the valid start prize). Further, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, short-time state, or probability variation state). Whether or not the start winning prize is determined is determined.

  In this starting prize determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value of the big hit determination table, a start winning determination result designation command for designating “out” is set. When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number is further stored in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure for each jackpot type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in the table matches. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command for designating “non-probable variation big hit” or a command for designating “probability big hit” is set as the determination result designation command at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“second start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 9012.

  It should be noted that the CPU 90103 has a start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening reaches the upper limit (that is, according to the second starting winning opening) When an invalid start prize that is paid out, but is not subject to a special game, is detected, a command for designating a “second start prize opening” is set as a start prize designation command, and a determination result at start prize is designated As a command, blank data is set to specify that it is not a valid starting prize. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“second start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012.

  In this embodiment, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the starting winning is determined, and based on the determination result Although the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and based on the variation pattern determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the variable pattern changing pattern corresponding to the starting winning is determined, A pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, when the determination result at the start winning is a super reach variation pattern, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the determination result at the start winning is a non-reach variation pattern. Good.

  Specifically, when the CPU 90103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, the CPU 90103 extracts the random number for determining the variation pattern from the random number circuit 90104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the variation pattern for the big hit determination Along with the random number and the jackpot type determination random number, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number after addition including the valid start winning) in the random number storage area for the first special figure. In addition, when the CPU 90103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening, the CPU 90103 extracts the random number for determining the variation pattern from the random number circuit 90104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the variation pattern as the big hit determining random number and the big hit. Along with the type determination random number, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number (the second reserved memory number after addition including the valid start winning) in the second special figure random number storage area.

  Here, the ROM 90101 corresponds to the deviation variation pattern determination table in which random number ranges corresponding to each of the deviation variation patterns shown in FIG. 61A are set, and to the big hit variation patterns shown in FIG. 61B. And a big hit variation pattern determination table in which the random number range is set.

  When the determination result of the start winning determination (the display result specified by the start winning determination result specifying command) is “out of”, the CPU 90103 extracts (stores) by referring to the deviation variation pattern determination table. The variation pattern determination random number is included in the random number range of the variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is identified, and the identified variation pattern is “non-reach” , A start winning variation pattern determination result designation command for designating which variation pattern is “normal reach deviation” or “super reach deviation” is set.

  On the other hand, if the determination result of the start winning determination (the display result specified by the start winning determination result specifying command) is one of “non-probable big hit” or “probable big hit”, Refer to the pattern determination table to determine which variation pattern random number for the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination is included in the random number range, and identify the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number Then, a start winning variation pattern determination result designation command for designating whether the identified variation pattern is a variation pattern of “normal reach big hit” or “super reach big hit” is set.

  When the CPU 90103 detects an invalid start winning, the CPU 90103 sets blank data that specifies that the start winning change pattern determination result designation command is not a valid start winning.

  Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set start winning variation pattern determination result designation command to the effect control board 9012 as a start winning command together with the aforementioned start winning opening designation command and start winning determination result designation command.

  The effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening designation command designated as “first starting prize opening” and a start winning determination result designation command including valid data that is not blank data (and a start including valid data that is not blank data). When receiving the winning variation pattern determination result designation command), the start winning determination result designation command (and the starting winning variation pattern determination result designation command) is held in the first winning command storage area for the first special figure. Stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of memories (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start prize), the start prize opening designation command designated as “second start prize opening” and valid data that is not blank data Start prize determination result specification command (and start prize variation variable including valid data that is not blank data) The start winning time determination result specifying command (and the start winning time variation pattern determination result specifying command) is received by the second reserved memory number (in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure ( It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number after addition including the effective start winning. The effect control CPU 90120 confirms the start prize determination result designation command (and the start prize variation pattern judgment result designation command) stored in the start prize command storage area, so that the first special characteristic is established before the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to estimate the display result (and fluctuation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure and execute the prefetch notice effect.

  On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening designation command designated as “first starting prize opening” and a start winning determination result designation command including blank data (and a start winning variation pattern determination result designation command including blank data). Is received, the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) is specified for the first special figure. It is not stored in the start winning command storage area (excluded from the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect), and the winning history storage area to be described later can store the winning history for the first start winning opening. Start winning port designation command specified with “Start winning prize opening” and start winning judgment result specifying command including blank data (and starting input including blank data) When the time variation pattern determination result designation command) is received, it is determined that an invalid start prize has occurred in the second start prize opening, and the start prize determination result designation command (and the start prize variation pattern judgment result designation command) ) Is not stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure (excluded from execution of the pre-reading notice effect), and the winning history storage area described later stores the winning history for the second starting winning opening. Is possible.

  As described above, as a control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, there is a variation pattern designation command. As shown below, when the main board 9011 starts variable display of the special symbol, the main board 9011 determines a fluctuation pattern according to the special figure display result that is derived and displayed, and notifies the effect control board 9012 of the fluctuation pattern. Output a change pattern specification command for The ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012 stores effect control data corresponding to each variation pattern in advance, and the effect control CPU 90120 is for effect control corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern designation command. Data is selected and effect control is executed according to the selected effect control data.

  The CPU 90103, when the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special figure is executed, the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure, In addition, among the random numbers for variation pattern determination, the big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of stored storages = 1) and the variation pattern determination random number are read out and thereafter The big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, short-time state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

  When the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table in this determination at the start, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command for designating “out” and together with the big hit determination random number The variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area is determined to be included in the random number range of the variation pattern set in the deviation variation pattern determination table, and corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the “outlier fluctuation pattern” is determined.

  When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure. It is determined which of the existing determination values matches. Then, a variable display result notification command for designating the “big hit” of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for variation pattern judgment read from the top storage area together with the big hit judgment random number is changed for the big hit By determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and identifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number, the “big hit variation pattern” is determined.

  Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the first special figure.

  The CPU 90103, when the second start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure, In addition, among the random numbers for variation pattern determination, the big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of stored storages = 1) and the variation pattern determination random number are read out and thereafter The big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, short-time state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

  When the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table in this determination at the start, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command for designating “out” and together with the big hit determination random number The variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area is determined to be included in the random number range of the variation pattern set in the deviation variation pattern determination table, and corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the “outlier fluctuation pattern” is determined.

  When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure. It is determined which of the determination values matches. Then, a variable display result notification command for designating the “big hit” of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for variation pattern judgment read from the top storage area together with the big hit judgment random number is changed for the big hit By determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and identifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number, the “big hit variation pattern” is determined.

  Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the second special figure.

  When the CPU 90120 for effect control receives the change start command, the variable display result notification command, and the change pattern specification command for specifying the change start of the first special figure, the effect control data corresponding to the change pattern specification command is selected. At the same time, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, the variable display of the decorative design is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Accordingly, of the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determining result specifying command) stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area, the leading storage area (the number of stored memories) = 1 in the storage area corresponding to = 1) (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) and the subsequent storage area start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning prize) The time variation pattern determination result designation command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the reach state establishment timing corresponding to the variation pattern in the ROM 90121, so that the reach state is established at the reach state establishment timing corresponding to the received variation pattern designation command. Controls variable display of symbols. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the variation pattern.

  The effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern designation command when receiving the variation start command designating the variation start of the second special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, the variable display of the decorative design is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Accordingly, of the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) stored in the start winning command storing area for the second special figure, the leading storage area (the number of stored memories) = 1 in the storage area corresponding to = 1) (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) and the subsequent storage area start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning prize) The time variation pattern determination result designation command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

  In addition, when the first general prize opening switch 9024A to the fourth general prize opening switch 9024D detect that the game balls have won the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, the game balls are placed in any of the general prize openings. A general winning opening designation command for designating whether or not has been won is output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012. That is, when a game ball is detected by the first general prize opening switch 9024A, a general prize opening designation command for designating a winning to the first general prize opening 9050A is output, and a game ball is outputted by the second general prize opening switch 9024B. When detected, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the second general prize opening 9050B is output, and when a game ball is detected by the third general prize opening switch 9024C, a command to the third general prize opening 9050C is output. A general prize opening designation command for designating a prize is output, and when a game ball is detected by the fourth general prize opening switch 9024D, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the fourth general prize opening 9050D is output. .

  Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and which general winning opening the game ball has won based on the received general winning opening designation command. . Further, as described above, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 designates which start winning opening the game ball has won. A mouth designation command is received. Thereby, the CPU 90120 for effect control stores the information that can identify the general winning opening where the winning has occurred and the information that can identify the starting winning opening where the winning has occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122 according to the order of winning. It is possible.

  The effect control CPU 90120 determines which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the general winning opening designated by the received general winning opening specifying command (the general winning opening where the game ball has won). Confirming whether the start winning port designated by the received start winning port designation command (the starting winning port where the game ball has won) is the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. The RAM 90122 stores the winning history of each general winning opening and each starting winning opening. For example, when the game balls win in the order of the second general winning opening 9050B, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second starting winning opening, and the third general winning opening 9050C, The history of “winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, first general winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, third general winning mouth”] is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122.

  In addition, when the winning at the start winning opening and the winning at the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 receives a start winning opening specifying command and a start winning determination result specifying command. , It may be transmitted prior to the general prize opening designation command. For example, detection by a start port switch of any of the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, and any of the general winning port switches of the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D. When the detection is confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, in the same interrupt process), the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the start winning port designation command and the start winning time determination result designation command as the general winning port designation command. It is better to send it ahead of the other. By using such a transmission order, the effect control CPU 90120 grasps that it has already received the start prize opening designation command and the start prize determination result designation command when the general prize opening designation command is received. It is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning time determination result designation command received in advance as the specific effect executed based on the winning in the general winning opening.

  Note that, when a winning at the general winning award occurs a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits a plurality of general winning award specifying commands in accordance with a predetermined priority order. To do. For example, if the detection by the first general prize port switch 9024A and the detection by the second general prize port switch 9024B are confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, in the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 90100 The general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to a general prize opening that is more difficult to win may be transmitted first with priority. In addition, when the number of prize balls given according to the general prize opening is different, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to a general prize opening with a larger number of prize balls may be preferentially transmitted first. good.

  When the count switch 9023 detects that a game ball has been won at the big prize opening, a big prize opening prize command for designating that a game ball has won at the big prize opening is sent from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012. Is output. Accordingly, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening based on the received big winning opening winning command, and the winning history to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening described above. Similarly to the history, it is possible to store the winning history for the big winning opening in the winning history storage area.

  The effect control CPU 90120 receives a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state until receiving a jackpot end designation command for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to separately count the number of times received and the number of times received for the general winning opening designation command. Thereby, it is possible to discriminate and count the number of times of winning in the big prize opening and the number of times of winning in the general winning mouth during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the result of counting is shown in FIG. It is also possible to display in 905.

  In addition, when a game ball is being fired in the game area 9010, the game ball usually wins at any of the start winning port, the general winning port, and the big winning port with a certain frequency. If the decorative symbols are not variably displayed and a game ball has not been won in any of the predetermined winning period (for example, 1 minute), the start winning opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening, There is a high possibility that the player is in a non-game state in which no game is played. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and receives the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening designation command for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If not, it is possible to make a game end determination that determines that the game has ended.

  FIG. 56A is a diagram showing an example of winning number information managed by the winning number management table stored in the RAM 90122. FIG. In this winning number management table, the number of winnings to each of the first general winning ports 9050A to 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of wins for each general winning slot for each gaming state based on the jackpot start designation command, jackpot end designation command, gaming state designation command, and general prize opening designation command. . The gaming state designation command is a timing at which the gaming state changes (in this case, the gaming state designation command designates the gaming state to be controlled, and is transmitted, for example, at the end of the big hit gaming state or at the end of the short time state. Or a timing at which the special symbol variable display is started (the game state designation command in this case designates the game state when the special figure game is executed).

  In this example, the number of winnings in the second general winning opening 9050B is 50 (total for all periods), of which 46 are in the normal state, 2 are in the big hit gaming state, and the number of winnings in the probable state. Is 1, and the number of winnings in the short-time state is 1. That is, the number of winnings in the left-handed period is 46, and the number of winnings in the right-handed period is 4. Further, the total number of winnings in the general winning opening is 108, of which 81 are winning in the left-handed period and 27 are winning in the right-handed period.

  In this way, the number of winnings in the left-handed period and the number of winnings in the right-handed period are individually stored together with the number of winnings in each general winning opening and displayed on the image display device 905 (or corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901). Sent to a gaming device such as a card unit or a call lamp device provided and displayed on a display device included in the gaming device, or transmitted to an information management device and displayed on a display device included in the information management device. Thus, at the game hall, it is possible to grasp the ease of winning a game ball at each general winning opening and to use it for maintenance of game nails. For example, if the number of game balls received in a general prize opening is excessively large or small, it is estimated that the game nail near the general prize opening is bent or damaged, and maintenance of the game nail is performed. It can be performed.

  Information on the number of winnings in the winning number management table (the number of winnings in each general winning opening, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in each gaming state, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the left-handed period and the right-handed period, and the general winning opening) Is displayed on the image display device 905 when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position (in the maintenance mode) and in the case of the first position (in the game mode). Do not show. The game shop clerk switches the mode changeover switch 9031 from the first position to the second position, displays the winning number information in the winning number management table, performs game nail maintenance with reference to this, and enters the general winning opening. Appropriate frequency of winning game balls. Then, after the maintenance is completed, the mode switch 9031 is returned from the second position to the first position.

  In this embodiment, the number-of-wins information in the number-of-wins management table does not depend on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot game state), Whether or not variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memory for special-purpose games), and the execution status of ordinary games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed, and the number of reserved memories for ordinary game) Regardless, the image display device 905 is continuously displayed while the operation unit of the mode switch 9031 is in the second position. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the gaming state. The operation unit is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state. Even if the operation unit of the mode change switch 9031 is in the second position, it is not displayed in the probability change state, the short time state, or the big hit game state. Anyway.

  Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the execution state of the special figure game. For example, the operation unit of the mode switch 9031 is set to the second position. Even if the special symbol variable display is not executed and the number of reserved memory of the special figure game is 0, the display can be performed only, and the operation portion of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. The period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, or the period during which the number of special figure games held is not 0 may not be displayed. The winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the execution state of the usual game. For example, the operation unit of the mode switch 9031 is set to the second position. Even if the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed, the display can be performed only during the period in which the number of reserved games of the normal game is 0, and the operation part of the mode switch 9031 is in the second position. The period during which the normal symbol variable display is being executed or the period during which the number of reserved games stored in the normal game is not 0 may not be displayed.

  The number-of-wins information stored in the number-of-wins management table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 (settings in FIGS. 58 (1) to (3)). Regardless of the setting on the screen, it is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command. Also, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to a game information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) provided in the game hall) after the game hall is closed. The winning information for each gaming machine is stored every business day in the gaming information management device. The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is obtained when the winning history in the winning history storage area described above is deleted (reset) based on execution of a specific effect corresponding to the winning history storage area. Even after the transmission to the game information management device is completed, the operation button in the state where the store clerk reset operation (for example, the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905) 9030).

  For example, the store clerk of the game hall presses the operation button 9030 in a state where the winning number information in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 (the mode change switch 9031 is in the second position (display setting)). By pressing the time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items (the number of winnings of each general winning mouth and the total number of winnings of general winning mouths) stored in the winning number management table may be reset to zero. Is possible.

  FIG. 56B is a diagram showing an example of winning number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 90122. In this display control table, the number of wins to each of the general winning awards of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of wins to each general winning opening based on the general winning opening designation command. In this example, the total number of winnings in the general winning award is 11, among which, the number of winnings in the first general winning opening 9050A is 3, the number of winnings in the second general winning opening 9050B is 5, and the third general winning opening. The number of winnings in 9050C is 2, and the number of winnings in the fourth general winning opening 9050D is 1.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the information on the number of winnings in the display control table (specifically, the number of objects displayed in accordance with the total number of winnings) is displayed when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (display setting). ) And the display of the general winning number is set by the operation button 9030, it is displayed on the image display device 905. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (in the case of non-display setting), regardless of whether or not the display setting of the general winning number is set by the operation button 9030, the winning in the display control table is performed. Number information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of display setting), when the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of non-display setting). Does not display the winning information in the display control table.

  That is, when the store clerk of the game hall performs the display prohibition information display prohibition setting with the display changeover switch 9032, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. Yes. Only when the store clerk of the game hall performs the display permission setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 9032, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed according to the player's display setting operation.

  In this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening is executed. As for the production, as shown in FIG. 57, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting) and the operation button 9030 is used, the general winning display display setting (execution of specific production) is performed. It can be executed when (setting) is performed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (in the case of execution non-permission setting), whether or not the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of the specific effect) is performed by the operation button 9030 is determined. The specific effect is not executed (execution is prohibited). Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting), the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of non-execution setting). In this case, the specific performance is not executed.

  That is, when the store clerk of the game hall performs the setting for disapproving the execution of the specific effect using the display changeover switch 9032, the execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the player's execution setting operation. Only when the store clerk of the game hall performs execution permission setting of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 9032, the specific effect can be executed according to the player's execution setting operation.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the setting as to whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting as to whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the operation means for setting is also common. (Game hall side: display changeover switch 9032, player side: operation button 9030). Not only in such a form, it may be possible to individually set whether or not to notify the number of winnings in the general winning opening and whether or not to enable the specific effect, and may be set by different operating means. May be.

  The number-of-wins information stored in the display control table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 (settings in FIGS. 58 (1) to (3)). Regardless of the setting on the screen, it is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command. In addition, the number-of-wins information stored in the display control table (the number of winnings and the total number of winnings for each general winning slot) is the identification of the winning history in the winning history storage area described above corresponding to the winning history storage area. Even if it is erased (reset) based on the performance (A or B), etc., it is not erased, and when the game end determination is made by the performance control CPU 90120, for example, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. If the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the big prize opening designation command have not been received for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), they are erased (reset to 0).

  When the number of winnings and the total number of winnings in each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 is displayed. The number of winnings is also reset to zero. For example, the coin-type object (winning display) displayed on the right side of the character “General Winning” on the screen of FIG. 59 to be described later is not displayed, and the number of display objects becomes zero. It should be noted that when the number of winnings in the general winning award is not displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings in each general winning opening stored in the display control table are determined as the game end Next, when the number of winnings to the general winning award is displayed on the image display device 905, the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at that time ( For example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings) is displayed.

  In addition, the store clerk or player of the game hall presses the operation button 9030 in a state where the number-of-wins information of the display control table is displayed on the image display device 905 (an object corresponding to the total number of winnings is displayed). By pressing for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more), regardless of the above game end determination, the number of winnings of all items stored in the display control table (the number of winnings of each general winning mouth and the total winnings of general winning mouths) (Number) can be reset to 0, and accordingly, the winning number information displayed on the image display device 905 is also reset to 0 (all displayed objects are erased).

  As shown in FIG. 58, the player's display setting operation is accepted by operating the operation button 9030 during the display of the demonstration screen not related to the progress of the special game and the progress of the normal game. A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and the start prize opening designation command, the general prize opening designation command, and the big prize opening prize command are set for a predetermined period (for example, 1 58 minutes), the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 905, and the screen shown in FIG. 58 (1) is displayed at predetermined intervals while the demo screen is displayed.

  In the screen of FIG. 58 (1), a message “Please press the OK button to set the general winnings display setting” message is displayed, and an image simulating the operation button 9030 is displayed below the operation button 9030. An arrow prompting you to press is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 9030 in accordance with the instruction, the selection screen shown in FIG. 58 (2) is displayed. On the selection screen, an icon including the characters “display” and an icon including the characters “do not display” are displayed, and a message “decision button after selecting with the jog dial” is displayed, and an operation button 9030 ( An arrow that prompts the user to press the jog dial after being rotated is displayed.

  In order to display the number of winnings in the general winning a prize, the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is turned to the left to select an icon including the characters “display”, and to enter the general winning award. In order not to display the number of winnings, the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is rotated to the right to select an icon including the characters “not displayed”. In this example, an icon including the characters “display” is selected.

  Then, when the operation button 9030 is pressed in the state where the icon including the characters “display” is selected in FIG. 58 (2), as shown in FIG. 58 (3), “the number of general winnings is displayed”. A message is displayed, and the display returns to the normal demonstration screen of FIG. By this setting operation, as shown in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905, and the player can grasp this. Here, it is assumed that the total number of winnings stored in the display control table when the setting operation is completed (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings in FIG. 59) is displayed immediately. The total number of winnings is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 905 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is no longer performed). You may make it.

  On the other hand, when the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “do not display” is selected in FIG. 58 (2), a message “The number of general winnings is not displayed” is displayed, and FIG. 58 (4). Return to the normal demo screen. As a result of this setting operation, the number of winning prizes for the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 905.

  Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, on the game hall side, the winning information stored in the display control table is stored in the image display device 905. Only when the display is permitted, a screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning a prize is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIGS. It shall be displayed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, when the game hall side does not permit the image display device 905 to display the winning number information stored in the display control table, As shown in FIGS. 58 (1) to 58 (3), the screen itself for selecting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 described above, it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed only by the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 9032 regardless of the display setting / non-display setting of the player. Is done.

  In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to display the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening. In this embodiment, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening only when the operation section of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position) on the game hall side. It is possible. That is, in this embodiment, the intention of the game hall is prioritized over the intention of the player. For this reason, on the game hall side, when the player does not want to know the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 may be set to the first position (non-display position).

  In addition, in the case where the intention of the game hall has priority over the intention of the player, even though the operation section of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side ( 58 (1) to (3) as shown in FIGS. 58 (1) to (3), even though it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening regardless of the setting on the player side. When the setting screen is displayed, it is misunderstood that the player can display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by his / her setting operation.

  In order to prevent such misidentification, in this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (regardless of the setting on the player side) When it is already determined not to display the number of winnings in the winning opening), the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 58 (1) to 58 (3) is not displayed. That is, the notification itself that “the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed according to the setting operation on the player side” is not performed.

  Display setting on the game hall side (the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position) and display setting on the player side (the icon including the characters “display” on the selection screen of FIG. 58 (2)) When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 9030 in the selected state), as shown in FIG. 59 (1), the screen is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 905. “General winning” is displayed. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D), as shown in FIG. (Winning display) is displayed.

  The number of coin-type objects displayed on the image display device 905 corresponds to the total number of winnings in the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 59 (3), every time a game ball wins a general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D), the total winning number in the display control table is incremented by one. As a result, the number of coin-type objects also increases. In addition, the coin-type object includes a number “10”, which indicates the number of prize balls given when a game ball wins a general prize opening. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general winning opening. Note that the number of prize balls that are awarded when a game ball wins each winning mouth (first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, general winning mouth, and big winning mouth) is stored in the ROM 90121 in advance. And

  In this way, by displaying the object corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and increasing the number of objects to be displayed in accordance with the increase in the winning number, the player can It is possible to easily grasp that the game ball has won and the number of game balls won to the general winning opening.

  When the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 90120, as described above, the number of game balls won and the total number of wins in each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to zero. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59 (4), all coin-type objects displayed on the right side of the character “general winning” are erased. That is, it is notified that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is zero.

  As described above, when the game end determination is made, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in a non-game state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been notified is reset to 0 (general It is possible to prevent a player who plays a game on the gaming machine from grasping the number of winnings in the general winning opening after that. .

  In this embodiment, by setting the game end determination condition and the above-described condition for shifting to the demo screen as a common condition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been informed at the time of shifting to the demo screen is 0. Will be reset. In this way, when displaying the demo screen, the number of winning prizes received in the general winning award may be reset to zero.

  As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 58), the display control for increasing the number of objects to be displayed for each winning in the general winning opening shown in FIG. 59 is not executed. . In these cases, the character “General Winning Number” shown in FIG. 59 is not displayed, and the coin-type object itself is also displayed regardless of the number of winning in the general winning opening (total winning number in the display control table). Do not show.

  If the number of objects (normal objects) to be displayed for each winning prize in the general winning opening is increased, the screen becomes difficult to see as the number of winnings increases, so the number of normal objects reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, it is preferable to display one special object (for example, an object having a different aspect from the normal object including the number “100”) instead of the predetermined number of normal objects. Accordingly, a predetermined number of winning times and the number of winning balls corresponding thereto can be notified in one special object display area without requiring a predetermined number of normal object display areas.

  Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of displayed objects increases by one for each winning of a general winning opening. Objects may be displayed according to the number of winnings. For example, the number of displayed objects may be increased by one for every five winnings in the general winning opening.

  Also, the display setting on the game hall side (the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position) and the display setting on the player side (including the characters “display” on the selection screen of FIG. 58 (2)). When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 9030 with the icon selected), the period of time controlled in the big hit gaming state as shown in FIG. , The number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed together with the number of winnings in the large winning opening.

  FIG. 60 (1) shows a screen displayed on the image display device 905 when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the first round game is started, the characters “general winnings” are displayed, and the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed on the right side thereof, and “large winnings” Is displayed, and on the right side, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed. In this example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the jackpot gaming state is still 0, and the number of winning balls awarded when a game ball is won in the general winning opening is 10 [0 × 10]. Is displayed. In addition, [0 × 15] is displayed because the number of winning balls in the big winning game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls awarded when a game ball is won in the big winning gate is 15. Has been. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of winning balls [0 × 10] awarded in response to winning in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls [0 × 15] awarded in response to winning in the big winning mouth Since the total number of and is 0, [0 balls in total] is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (2), as a result of performing the first round game, the game ball has won seven times in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 907), and the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A). Since the game ball has won once in the fourth general winning opening 9050D), the general winning number is 1, and the large winning number is updated to 7. In addition, the total number of prize balls [1 × 10] awarded according to the prize winning to the general prize opening and the number of prize balls [7 × 15] awarded according to the prize winning to the big prize mouth is 115. Therefore, [total 115 balls] is displayed. It should be noted that the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning the general winning opening [1 × 10 = 10 balls] and the number of winning balls awarded in accordance with winning in the big winning opening [7 × 15 = 105] May be displayed individually.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 60 (3), as a result of performing the second to fifteenth (final) round games, the game balls are counted in the big winning mouth (special variable winning ball device 907) in the big hit gaming state. The game is won three times and the game balls are won three times in the general prize opening (the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D), so the number of general prizes is 3, and the number of big prizes is updated to 105. ing. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning a general winning opening [3 × 10] and the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning a winning prize [105 × 15] Since the total number of and 1605 is 1605, a total of 1605 balls is displayed.

  In this way, by displaying the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the period controlled to the big winning gaming state separately from the number of winning in the large winning opening, the player can only receive the number of winning in the big winning opening. In addition, we will be interested in the number of prizes received in the general prize opening. In addition, by distinguishing and displaying the number of winning balls according to the number of winning prizes and the number of winning balls according to the number of winning winnings in the general winning slot, the player can win the winning prize. In addition to the number of prize balls given in response to this, there is an interest in the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general prize opening.

  It should be noted that the number of winnings in the general winning award in the probability variation state or the short time state may be displayed on the image display device 905, not limited to the number of winning in the general winning opening in the period controlled to the big hit gaming state, You may make it display on the image display apparatus 905 the number of winning in a general winning opening in a normal state. In addition, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the right-handed period (big hit gaming state, probability change state or short-time state) may be displayed on the image display device 905, and the general winning in the left-handed period (normal state). The number of winning prizes for the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 905. In addition, the number of wins to the general winning opening during a period in which the special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number corresponding to the number of stored special figure games) may be displayed on the image display device 905.

  As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 58), the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 60 is displayed. Display control to be performed is not executed. In these cases, the number of “general winnings” shown in FIG. 60 is not displayed, but the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the winnings in the period controlled to the big hit gaming state. In addition, the total number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening are not displayed. Only the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes are displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 59, the example in which the number of winning balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening is displayed on the object has been described. However, the image display device 905 has the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening. It may not be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 60, the example in which the number of winning balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls given in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening is described. These may not be displayed on the device 905.

  In this way, only the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening may be displayed, and the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening or the number of winning balls given in accordance with the winning to the general winning opening may not be displayed. . With such a configuration, when the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening is changed in the design process of the gaming machine, the display information of the image display device 905 must be changed according to the change. The situation of disappearing can be prevented. In contrast to this, only the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general winning opening may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side, the player setting shown in FIGS. The example in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not notified that the winning number display / non-display switching is possible) has been described. Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen shown in FIGS. 58 (1) to 58 (3) is displayed (the number of winnings can be displayed / hidden switched). May be notified to the player).

  In the case of such a configuration, even if the player has set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the player setting screen of FIGS. 58 (1) to (3), The effect control CPU 90120 displays the number of winnings to the general winning award on the image display device 905, based on the fact that the operation section of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side. (Do not give priority to the game hall setting). At this time, it may be displayed on the image display device 905 that the number of winnings cannot be displayed due to the priority of the game hall setting.

  When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen shown in FIG. 58 (1) is displayed (the winning number can be displayed / hidden switched). That the player is informed), but the player's setting operation may be invalidated. For example, even when the operation button 9030 is pressed on the player setting screen of FIG. 58 (1), the selection screen of FIG. 58 (2) is not displayed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed. It may be impossible to select whether or not.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the game hall setting has priority over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may have priority over the game hall setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is at the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. When the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. When the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “not displayed” is selected on the selection screen in FIG. 58 (2), the general winning award is displayed. The number of winning prizes for the mouth may not be displayed on the image display device 905 (the display control in FIGS. 59 and 60 is not executed).

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening in accordance with the order of the accepted setting operation, with the game hall setting and the player setting having the same priority. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize with priority given to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player enters the general winning opening on the player setting screens shown in FIGS. 58 (1) to (3). When the number is set to be displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 59 and 60 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screen of FIGS. 58 (1) to 58 (3) is set so that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently moved to the second position. In the case of (display position), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 59 and 60 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is subsequently displayed on the player setting screen of FIGS. 58 (1) to (3). Is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 59 and 60 is not executed). Further, even when the player setting screen shown in FIGS. 58 (1) to 58 (3) is set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is thereafter moved to the first position. In the case of (non-display position), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 59 and 60 is not executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings to the general winning a prize by operating the display changeover switch 9032 by the store clerk of the game hall, and the player By operating the operation button 9030, it is possible to set whether or not the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening. By operating the switch 9032, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905. On the player side, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905. Whether or not to display can not be set (for example, a setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 58 (1) to (3) is not provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening only at the game hall side.

  Contrary to this, it is possible to set whether or not the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings to the general winning a prize by operating the operation button 9030 by the player (and the store clerk of the game hall). On the other hand, there may be no means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided) that allows only the game hall side to set whether or not to display the number of prizes received in the general prize opening on the image display device 905. In the case of such a configuration, whether or not the player and the store clerk at the game hall display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). It can be set. In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings for the general winning a prize by a common setting operation for the player and the game hall.

  In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905. However, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is the pachinko. An information display device provided corresponding to the gaming machine 901, for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, or a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901, and displayed as an information display. It may be displayed on the device. Also, the winning information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to an information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages game information of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the information management device receives a general winning opening for each gaming machine. The number of winnings may be stored and displayed on the display device. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is not provided with the mode changeover switch 9031. The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the gaming machine (image display device 905), and the information display device or It may be displayed only on the information management apparatus.

  In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 according to the setting of the mode switch 9031, and is stored in the display control table according to the setting of the display switching switch 9032. The example in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 905 has been described. Thus, the winning prize management table and the display control table can be displayed without providing individual switches for controlling the display of each of the winning number management table and the display control table. A common switch for performing display control of both the number management table and the display control table may be provided. For example, by setting the common switch to display, both the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are displayed on the image display device 905. The non-display setting may be configured so that neither the winning number information stored in the winning number management table nor the winning number information stored in the display control table is displayed on the image display device 905.

  In FIG. 61 (A), when a special symbol (outlier symbol) other than a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is determined by the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100). An outlier variation pattern is illustrated. Further, FIG. 61B illustrates a big hit variation pattern determined by the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) when a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. Has been. Since the special figure fluctuation time is determined for each fluctuation pattern, the presentation control CPU 90120 that has received the fluctuation pattern designation command can execute the presentation according to the special figure fluctuation time.

  Among the deviation variation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are variation patterns that are non-reach out of effect, PX003 is a variation pattern that is out of normal reach and PX004 is a non-reach effect. It is a fluctuation pattern. Among the big hit fluctuation patterns, PY003 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of normal reach big hit, and PY004 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of super reach big hit. Here, the super reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is executed after the reach state is established. The normal reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is not executed after the reach state is established.

  The battle effect is an effect that suggests whether or not a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other and win or lose. In PX004, which is a variation pattern of superreach, a defeat effect is performed in which a teammate character loses to an enemy character, while in PY004, which is a variation pattern of a super reach jackpot, the teammate character wins against the enemy character. Production is performed.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the special figure is executed in the game control microcomputer 90100. As a result, when the special symbol variable display is being executed (before the fixed special symbol is stopped), the specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol of the variable display (that is, the big bonus symbol) It is possible to execute a fluctuating result notice effect for notifying that the game state is controlled).

  In the change result notice effect shown in FIG. 62 (a), together with the change notice effect and the sound effect of the first mode in which only the sound effect in which the sound “Now is a chance!” Is output from the speakers 908L and 908R, It is possible to execute the change notice effect of the second mode in which the accessory effect in which the movable accessory 901000 operates (rotating operation and lighting) is executed. Due to such a difference in the production mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is established).

  The effect control CPU 90120 is based on the notice effect determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect) based on the winning in the general winning opening is satisfied. The mode of the change result notice effect is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning at the general winning opening is established), the mode of the change result notice effect is determined, and the determined mode The change result notice effect is executed. As will be described later, if the special symbol variable display (the decorative symbol variable display associated therewith) is not executed, the execution of the fluctuation result notice effect is suspended or the change result notice effect is displayed. Do not execute.

  For example, if the variable display result (variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specified by the last received variable display result notification command specifies “out of”, the audio effect is 80%. The change notice effect of the 1st mode with only is performed, and the change notice effect of the 2nd mode with a sound effect and an accessory effect is performed in the ratio of 20%. On the other hand, when the variable display result specified by the last received variable display result notification command (the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed) specifies “big hit”, the voice effect is 25%. The change notice effect of the 1st mode with only is performed, and the change notice effect of the 2nd mode with a voice effect and an accessory effect is performed in the ratio of 75%.

  Further, as described above, when the effective start winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs in the game control microcomputer 90100, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the start winning opening designation command and the start winning prize. Receives the hour determination result specification command. As a result, before the special chart start condition is established, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol for variable display that has not yet been executed (that is, controlled to the big hit gaming state) ) Can be executed in advance.

  In the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 62 (b), the first-order pre-reading notice effect in which only the sound effect in which the sound of “coming soon!” Is output from the speakers 908L and 908R is executed, and the voice effect, The pre-reading notice effect in the second mode in which the accessory effect in which the object 901000 operates (rotation operation and lighting) is executed can be executed. Due to the difference in the production mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Yes.

  The effect control CPU 90120 pre-reads based on the notice effect determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) based on the winning in the general prize opening is satisfied. The mode of the notice effect is determined. Specifically, the aspect of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning at the general winning opening is established), and the determined aspect is A pre-reading notice effect is executed. Note that, as will be described later, if the number of reserved memories is 0, execution of the prefetching notice effect is suspended or the prefetching notice effect is not executed.

  For example, if the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area does not include the start prize judgment result designation command for designating “big hit” (all start prizes for designating “out”) In the case of the time determination result designation command), the prefetching notice effect in the first mode with only the audio effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the second mode with the sound effect and the effect effect at a rate of 15% is executed. A pre-reading notice effect is executed. On the other hand, if the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area includes a start prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit”, the voice effect is 10%. The prefetching notice effect of the 1st mode accompanied only by is performed, and the prefetching notice effect of the 2nd mode accompanied by an audio effect and an effect effect is performed in the ratio of 90%.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 is capable of executing a specific effect that is executed based on the winning of a game ball in a general winning opening. The variation result notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a big hit symbol is executed as the specific effect A in this embodiment. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied becomes a jackpot symbol, that is, whether or not the reserved memory includes the one determined to be a jackpot is included in this implementation. It is executed as a specific effect B in the form.

  In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not the specific effect can be executed, and notifies the number of winnings to the general winning opening. When the setting has been made (when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting) and the operation button 9030 is used, the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of specific effect) is performed. Only when it is performed) the effect control CPU 90120 can execute the specific effect.

  As described above, every time the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command and the start winning opening designation command, the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122. However, this winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are provided separately. For example, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second When winning occurs in the order of the general winning opening 9050B, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 9050C, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and Each of the winning history storage areas corresponding to the specific effect B has a winning history of [first general winning opening, second general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, third general winning opening, fourth]. Will be memorized.

  In an effect mode in which only the specific effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (the timing at which a winning in any winning opening occurs). ), Whether or not the winning condition is satisfied is determined, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the winning condition being satisfied. Further, in an effect form in which only the specific effect B can be executed, every time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at the timing when a winning in any winning opening occurs) It is confirmed whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. Further, in an effect form in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed, every time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (any one) At the timing of winning a prize at the winning opening), it is confirmed whether or not a winning condition corresponding to the specific effect A is established in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and corresponding to the specific effect A. The execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the established winning condition, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is satisfied in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B. The execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is established.

  Further, when the execution of the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect A execution flag. When the special symbol variable display (the variable decorative symbol display) is executed at the timing when the winning condition is established, as described above, the specific effect A corresponding to the variable display result is displayed. The mode (only the audio effect or both the audio effect and the effect effect) is determined, the change result notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect A execution flag is deleted. That is, the specific effect A is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without holding the fluctuation result notice effect.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol variable display (variable display of the decorative symbol associated therewith) is not executed at the timing when the winning conditions are satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is executed because there is no target for the change result notice effect. Is put on hold and the specific effect A execution flag remains set. The effect control CPU 90120 can determine that the execution of the specific effect A is determined by setting the specific effect A execution flag, but the specific effect A is not executed and is in a suspended state. It has become. And when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display of the decorative symbol associated therewith) is established, the aspect of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, The specific effect A that has been executed is executed, and the set specific effect A execution flag is deleted.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this form, and if the special symbol variable display (the variable decorative symbol display) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is suspended. Without executing the specific effect A, the specific effect A may not be executed even when the variable display start condition is satisfied.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect B execution flag when execution of the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. When the winning condition is satisfied, when the number of reserved memories (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1 or more, as described above, 1 The aspect of the specific effect B (only the sound effect or both the sound effect and the effect effect) according to the determination result at the time of starting winning is determined, the pre-reading notice effect of the determined aspect is executed, and the specific effect Clear the B execution flag. That is, the specific effect B is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without holding the pre-reading notice effect.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, there is no target of the pre-reading notice effect, so the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag is set. State. The effect control CPU 90120 can determine that the execution of the specific effect B is determined by setting the specific effect B execution flag, but the specific effect B is not executed and is in a suspended state. It has become. Then, when the start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a winning at the start winning opening (when the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more), the mode of the specific effect B is determined based on the start winning determination result, The specific effect B that has been put on hold is executed, and the set specific effect B execution flag is deleted.

  In addition, it is not restricted to such a form, and when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without deferring the execution of the specific effect B, and thereafter Even if the start condition is satisfied and the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more, the specific effect B may not be executed.

  In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped (for example, when power interruption is detected), the effect control CPU 90120 receives a winning history storage area (a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and All winning histories stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B and the specific effect execution flags (specific effect A execution flag and specific effect B execution flag) are deleted. As a result, power is supplied to the pachinko machine 901 while the specific effect (variation result notice effect, pre-read notice effect) is being executed, or after the execution of the specific effect has not been executed yet. However, even if the power supply is restarted after that, the specific effect that was being executed or the specific effect that was decided to be executed is not executed again. That is, for a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the specific effect is not executed because the winning history and the specific effect execution flag are erased. When it is confirmed that the winning conditions are satisfied based on the winning history since the power supply is started, the specific effect is newly executed.

[First production form]
In the first effect form shown in FIG. 63, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a game ball in one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is satisfied every time the player wins. When the first winning condition is satisfied, whether or not the specific effect is executed is determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D, which is the first winning condition). (Including winning history for any of them) is deleted.

  On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short time state, the effect control CPU 90120 each time the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. A winning condition (second winning condition) is established. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 20%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D which is the second winning condition). (Including winning history for any of them) is deleted.

  In the first effect form, and in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, (1) the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the normal state is (2 ) It is higher than the rate at which the specific performance is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the probability changing state or the short time state. In the promiscuous state and the short-time state, the player is usually more interested in the winning situation of the game ball in the second starting prize opening and the variable display of the decorative pattern than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Even if the specific performance is executed, it is difficult to produce the same interest as in the normal state. For this reason, in the probability variation state or the short time state, the execution rate of the specific effect is reduced compared with the normal state, and the interest reduction of the specific effect is suppressed.

  In the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, unlike the first effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution. In any of the second to fourth effect forms described later, the specific effect can be executed when the winning condition is satisfied. However, the winning condition in the (2) probability change state or the short-time state is (1) normal. More winnings are required than the winning conditions in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution rate of the specific effect in the normal state is higher than (2) the execution rate of the specific effect in the probability variation state or the short-time state.

  Thus, by making the execution ratio of the specific effects different according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening. Contrary to the examples of the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (2) the ratio of the specific effect being executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the probability variation state or the short time state, ( 1) You may make it become higher than the ratio in which a specific production | presentation is performed based on a game ball having won a general winning opening in the normal state.

  In the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, as in the first effect form, whether or not the specific effect is executed is determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect when the winning condition is satisfied. You may do it. For example, in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the first winning condition required in the normal state and the second winning condition required in the probability changing state or the short time state are the same winning condition. As in the production mode, by making the lottery probability when the winning condition is established in the normal state different from the lottery probability when the winning condition is established in the probability variation state or the short-time state, the ratio that the specific effect is normally executed and the probability variation You may make it differ from the ratio in which a specific effect is performed in a state or a time-short state.

  Further, the specific effects may be executed at different rates depending on not only the gaming state but also the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot symbol, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate compared to the case where the display result of the variable display is a loss symbol. When there is a hold memory determined to be a big win, compared to a case where there is no hold memory determined to be a big win at the time of start winning (when there is only a hold memory determined to be a deviation at the start winning), The specific effect may be executed at a high rate. In addition, the number of times that the specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, the specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type, or for different types of specific effects It may be possible to execute only once every time).

[Second production form]
In the second effect form shown in FIG. 63, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has two or more general ones out of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. A winning condition (the first winning condition) is established when a game ball wins at least once each at the winning opening. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 has two or more general winning ports out of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D, respectively. A winning condition (second winning condition) is established by winning the game ball two or more times. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  As described above, in the second effect form, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the number of winnings to the general winning opening necessary for executing the specific effect in the normal state, Because the number of winnings in the general winning opening required to execute the specific performance in the short-time state is different, it is possible to make interest in the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening depending on the gaming state. .

  Further, in the second effect form, in order to execute a specific effect, a game is performed at least once for each of two or more general winning ports of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D. Ball winning is a condition. In this way, by setting the winning for each of the plurality of general winning awards as the execution condition of the specific effect, not only the presence or absence of the winning in the general winning award, but the game ball wins in any general award You can be interested in what you did.

  In the second effect form, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the start of the big hit game state is designated based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the big hit game state. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the jackpot start designation command, both the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. It is supposed to be.

  Also, in the second effect form, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on the change in the gaming state. . Therefore, the fact that the first winning condition is satisfied means that the first winning condition is satisfied as a result of confirming the winning history in the winning history storage area in the normal state. Based on this, the first winning condition is not necessarily established. Similarly, the fact that the second winning condition is satisfied means that the second winning condition is satisfied as a result of confirming the winning history in the winning history storage area in the probability changing state or the short time state. The second winning condition is not always established based on the winning history only in the short-time state. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the time-saving state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time-shortening state to the normal state. Also good. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the first winning condition is established based on the winning history only in the normal state, and whether or not the second winning condition is established based on the winning history only in the probability variation state or the short-time state. You may make it confirm.

[Third production form]
In the third effect form shown in FIG. 63, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general within 120 seconds). The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established when the game ball has won a total of three or more times at the winning opening 9050D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 can enter the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game ball has won five or more times in total. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds). Set). If the winning condition is not satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the specific effect A timer times out), the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without executing the specific effect A. . On the other hand, when the winning condition is satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the winning condition is satisfied before the time-out of the timer for the specific effect A), the specific effect A is executed and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A Is erased.

  As described above, the winning frequency (the number of winnings within a predetermined period) required for executing the specific effect in the normal state and the winning frequency (predetermined period) required for executing the specific effect in the probability variation state or the short time state. (The number of winning prizes) can be made interested in the winning frequency of the general winning opening according to the gaming state.

  Further, in the third effect form, when the specific effect A targeted for the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning award in a predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only for one variable display period) If there is a winning condition according to the winning history), a specific effect A is executed for a variable display different from the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning opening in a predetermined period (120 seconds). In some cases, the winning conditions may be satisfied by winning histories in a plurality of variable display periods.

  It should be noted that, as in the third production mode, a special design is variably displayed a predetermined number of times as a mode in which the specific production is executed when the number of prizes received in the general prize opening in a predetermined period reaches a predetermined number. The specific effect may be executed when the number of prizes received in the general prize opening during the period reaches a predetermined number. For example, it is specified when the number of winnings in the general winning award reaches a predetermined number until all the reserved memory of the special figure game is exhausted, that is, within the period when the variable display of special symbols corresponding to the number of reserved memories is executed. An effect may be executed.

[Fourth production form]
In the fourth effect form shown in FIG. 63, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the winning prize opening (either the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening). , The winning prize opening (one of the first starting prize opening and the second starting prize opening), the general winning opening (any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) in the order The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established by winning the mouth. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port), start winning port (first start) Any one of the winning a prize opening and the second start winning a prize opening), the general winning a prize opening (any of the first general award winning opening 9050A to the fourth general award opening 9050D), and the general winning a prize opening (the first general award winning opening 9050A to the fourth award). The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game balls win the winning opening in the order of the general winning opening 9050D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  In this way, the specific effect is executed on condition that the winning order to the other winning ports (the first starting winning port, the second starting winning port) different from the general winning port and the general winning port is a specific order. This makes it possible to give interest not only to the status of winning the general winning award but also to the winning order for the general winning award and other winning awards.

  It should be noted that a range may be provided for the number of times that a game ball wins continuously to the general winning opening and the number of times that a game ball wins continuously to another winning port. For example, the winning condition may be satisfied by winning the general winning opening twice or more after winning the starting winning opening three or more times continuously. In addition, the winning condition may be determined regarding which of the plurality of general winning awards or which of the plurality of other winning awards has been won. For example, a winning condition is established when a game ball wins a winning opening in the order of a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first general winning opening 9050A, and a second general winning opening 9050B. Also good. The winning conditions are not limited to the order in which the winning in the general winning opening occurs after the winning in the starting winning opening occurs, but the winning condition is determined by the winning in the starting winning opening after the winning in the general winning opening occurs. May hold.

  Further, the winning conditions may be established based on the fact that the order of winning the game balls to the plurality of general winning holes becomes a specific order. For example, if the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition (( When the first winning condition is established) and the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short-time state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, and the third general winning The winning conditions (referred to as the second winning condition) may be satisfied when the game balls have won a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the mouth 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D.

  Further, the winning conditions may be established based on the winning order of the game balls in the plurality of general winning holes and the winning order of the game balls in the one or more starting winning holes being in a specific order. . For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition ((1) the game ball is won in the order of the first general winning opening 9050A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050B) When the first winning condition is established) and the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short-time state, the first general winning port 9050A, the first starting winning port, the second general winning port 9050B, Further, the winning condition (second winning condition) may be established by winning the game balls in the order of the third general winning opening 9050C, the second starting winning opening, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. good.

  In addition, the order of entry to the general prize opening and entry to the start prize opening is not limited to the order of entry to the general prize opening and entry to the grand prize opening. The condition may be satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied based on the fact that the order of entering the general winning opening and entering the first passing gate 9041A or the second passing gate 9041B is a specific order. You may do it. In addition, when there is a specific area in which a big hit type (for example, a probable big hit) is determined based on the entry of a game ball, the order of entry into the general winning opening and the entry into the specific area is specific. The winning conditions may be satisfied based on the order.

  In the first effect form to the fourth effect form, the example in which the variation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect has been described. However, the prefetch notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. May be.

[Fifth effect form to eighth effect form]
In the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 64, unlike the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state. The winning conditions are not different and are common winning conditions. In the examples of the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, the first winning conditions in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, that is, the winning conditions employed in the normal state are provided as common winning conditions, respectively. ing. Then, (1) if the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, the change result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the game when the winning condition is satisfied. When the state is a certain change state or a short time state, a pre-reading notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. Thereby, according to the gaming state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, the type of the specific effect can be made different, and the specific effect executed based on the game ball winning the general winning opening Interest can be improved.

  In the fifth effect form shown in FIG. 64, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution of the specific effect at a rate of 50% when the winning condition is satisfied. When the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and All winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a certain change state or a short-time state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A , And the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 64, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the specific effect A when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the normal state, Each time the specific effect A is executed, both the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, if the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (2) a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, it corresponds to the specific effect A. Both the winning history in the winning history storage area and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased.

  In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, a big hit start specifying command for specifying the start of the big hit game state is sent based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the big hit game state. Is received, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased. Further, in the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased when the gaming state is changed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the time-saving state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time-shortening state to the normal state. Also good.

  In the seventh effect form, the specific effect timer is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general prize opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the specific effect B. . Then, when the specific effect timer times out, the specific effect A and the specific effect B are not executed, and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B are displayed. Both are erased. On the other hand, if the winning conditions are satisfied before the time-out of the specific effect timer, (1) in the normal state, the specific effect A is executed and the winning history and the specific effect B in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. All the winning histories in the winning history storage area are deleted. (2) In the case of the probability change state or the short time state, the specific effect B is executed and the winning history and the specific effect in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. All winning histories in the B winning history storage area are erased.

[9th effect form-12th effect form]
In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 65, unlike the first effect form to the eighth effect form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state. The winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) when the first winning condition is established in the normal state, the variation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the second winning condition in the probability variation state or the short time state. When is established, a prefetch notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. Thereby, according to the gaming state when the game ball has won the general winning opening, the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect can be made different, and the game ball has won the general winning opening. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance executed based on the above.

  In the ninth effect form shown in FIG. 65, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a game ball in either the first general winning port 9050A or the second general winning port 9050B. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established each time the player wins, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short time state, the effect control CPU 90120 each time the game ball wins one of the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined at a rate of 20%. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the tenth effect form shown in FIG. 65, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has 1 for each of the first general winning port 9050A and the second general winning port 9050B. When the game ball wins at least once, a winning condition (first winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 has two or more game balls at both the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Wins the winning condition (the second winning condition), and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 is controlled to the big hit game state, a big hit start specifying command for specifying the start of the big hit game state is sent to the effect control CPU 90120. Is received, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased. Also, in the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased when the gaming state is changed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the time-saving state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time-shortening state to the normal state. Also good.

  In the eleventh effect form shown in FIG. 65, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B within 120 seconds. When a game ball wins a total of three or more times, a winning condition (first winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 wins a total of five or more game balls in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. As a result, a winning condition (second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the eleventh effect form, the timer for specific effect A is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general prize opening is stored in the prize history storage area of specific effect A. When the timer for the specific effect A times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without executing the specific effect A. On the other hand, if the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state before the time-out of the timer for the specific effect A, the specific effect A is executed and only the winning history in the prize history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted. Further, based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B, the timer for the specific effect B is set to 120 seconds. When the timer for the specific effect B times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is erased without executing the specific effect B. On the other hand, if the second winning condition is established in the probability variation state or the short-time state before the timeout of the timer for the specific effect B, the specific effect B is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted. Is done.

  In the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 65, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a first start prize port, a first start prize port, a second general prize port 9050B, The winning conditions (the first winning condition) are established when the game balls win the winning opening in this order. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability variation state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 has the second start winning port, the second starting winning port, the third general winning port 9050C, and the fourth general winning port. The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game balls win the winning opening in the order of 9050D. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  As in the ninth to twelfth effect forms, a general winning opening (a general winning opening and a start winning opening in the twelfth effect form) that is a target for winning a game ball for executing a specific effect is selected according to the gaming state. Thus, the specific effect is appropriately executed according to the gaming state. In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, in order to establish the second winning condition in the probability variation state or the short time state, the target winning opening to be awarded in order to establish the first winning condition in the normal state Although the example where all the target winning mouths to be awarded are different is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the target winning mouth in the normal state and the target winning mouth in the certain change state or the short time state are partially It may be common. For example, the first prize condition and the second prize condition may include a prize for the second general prize opening 9050B.

[13th effect form-16th effect form]
In the thirteenth effect mode to the sixteenth effect mode shown in FIG. 66, the ratio of executing the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation. However, the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A when (2) the reach variation is outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation.

  Here, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, specifically, the confirmed decorative pattern (final stop) after the reach state is established in the variable display of the variation pattern with the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) This is the period until the symbol is stopped. In addition, (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is, specifically, a period during which variable display of a fluctuation pattern with reach production (normal reach, super reach) is being executed. It is the period from the start of variable display of the fluctuation pattern with reach production (normal reach, super reach) to before the reach state is established.

  The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the thirteenth effect form to the sixteenth effect form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, respectively. It has become. In any production form, when the timing when the first winning condition is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is determined by the second winning condition. When the established timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A. In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[17th effect form to 20th effect form]
In the seventeenth effect form to the twentieth effect form shown in FIG. 67, when the timing when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning condition is determined. When the timing at which is established is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

  The winning conditions in the seventeenth effect form to the twentieth effect form are the same as the winning conditions (common winning conditions) in the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, respectively. In any production mode, when the timing when the winning condition (common winning condition) is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the winning condition is established. When the performed timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific effects according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[21st effect form to 24th effect form]
The 21st effect form to the 24th effect form shown in FIG. 68 execute the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation. When the timing at which the second winning condition is established is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

  The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the twenty-first effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, respectively. It has become. In any production mode, when the timing when the first winning condition is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the second winning condition is established. When the completed timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, depending on the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, the execution ratio of the specific effects is made different, and by executing different types of specific effects according to the gaming periods when the winning conditions are satisfied, It is possible to improve interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening.

[25th effect form and 26th effect form]
In the 25th effect form shown in FIG. 69, unlike the 1st effect form to the 24th effect form, regardless of the gaming state or the game period, the general winning award (first general winning award 9050A to 4th general winning award 9050D). The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won three or more times in total. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. Further, regardless of the game state and the game period, the second winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won a total of five or more times in the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the 26th effect form shown in FIG. 69, unlike the first effect form to the 24th effect form, the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general) within 120 seconds irrespective of the gaming state and the game period. The first winning condition is established when the game ball has won a total of three or more times at the winning opening 9050D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. In addition, regardless of the game state and the game period, the second prize is awarded because the game ball has won a total of five times or more in the general prize opening (the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D) within 120 seconds. The condition is met. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In this way, regardless of the game state and the game period, the number of winnings to the general winning a prize mouth is executed by performing different effects according to the number of winnings to the general winning award and the winning frequency (the number of winnings within a predetermined period). And interest in winning prizes. In this example, the production mode (output audio) differs according to the number of winnings to the general prize opening and the winning frequency, and the variable display to be notified differs (specific production A: variable display being executed, Specific presentation B: variable display that has not been executed), but is not limited to this, depending on the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency, whether or not to suggest the display result of the variable display is different ( For example, it may be possible to execute an effect of notifying the display result of the variable display and an effect not related to the display result of the variable display, and an effect (for example, high probability) indicating whether or not the game state is suggested. It is also possible to execute an effect that informs that the state is in effect and an effect that is not related to the gaming state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a general prize opening designation command and receives a general prize opening, and the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D. It is possible to specify which of the game balls has been won, and upon receipt of the start winning port designation command, a winning to the starting winning port has occurred, and either the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port has a game It is possible to specify whether or not the ball has won, and it is possible to specify that a winning to the big winning opening has occurred by receiving the winning prize winning command. Therefore, the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 70 can be stored as the winning number management table and can be updated.

  The second start winning opening is formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B, and the normally variable winning ball device 906B is controlled to be opened (the game ball can be won or can be easily won from a closed state where the game ball is not won or difficult to win). The game ball can be won by switching to the state. Further, the special winning opening is formed by the special variable winning ball device 907, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is controlled to be opened (the game ball can be won or won easily from a closed state where the game ball is not won or difficult to win). The game ball can be won by switching to the open state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70, the second start winning opening and the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 are classified into the prize winning holes through which the game balls can be won by the operation of the winning combinations. On the other hand, the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D and the first starting winning opening are always open, and a non-community winning prize opening through which a game ball can be won regardless of the operation of an accessory. It is divided into.

  In the winning number management table of FIG. 70, a game ball has won a prize in each of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening. The number of prize balls given at times (the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening, which is 10, 10, 10, 10, 2, 2, 15 in this example) is stored. Then, for each winning opening, the number of winnings (in this example, 11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420), which is the number of times that a game ball has won the winning opening, is multiplied by the number of winning balls. The number of payouts (the total number of balls paid out by winning the game ball in the winning opening, 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300 in this example) is stored.

  The winning ratios are as follows: (1) The number of winning prizes in each winning mouth (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420), respectively, with respect to the total number of winning prizes in each winning mouth (1572 in this example). And (2) the non-commodity prize opening (the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D and the first start prize) with respect to the total number of prizes of each prize opening (in this example, 1572) The number of winning prizes (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754), the percentage of winning prizes (315 + 420) for the winning prize winning opening (the second starting winning prize opening and the big winning prize opening), and (3) the total number of winning prizes for each winning prize ( In this example, the ratio of the number of winnings other than the big winning opening (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754 + 315) and the ratio of the winning number of the big winning opening (420) with respect to 1572) are stored.

  Also, as the payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts for each winning mouth (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300, respectively) with respect to the total number of payouts for each winning mouth (9268 in this example) And (2) non-commodity prize opening (first general prize opening 9050A to fourth general prize opening 9050D and first start prize) with respect to the total number of payouts of each prize opening (9268 in this example) The number of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 1140 + 1508), the ratio of the number of payouts (630 + 6300) for the prize winning award (630), and (3) the total number of payouts for each winning mouth ( In this example, the ratio of the number of payouts other than the big winning mouth (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508 + 630) and the percentage of the payout number of the big winning mouth (6300) with respect to 9268) are stored.

  Here, as described above, during the period when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is at the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 90120 displays each information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Display on the device 905. Accordingly, the store clerk at the game hall is paid out when the game ball is won at the prize winning port with respect to the total number of balls (9268) paid out when the game ball is won at each winning port. The ratio of the number of balls (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) (hereinafter referred to as “first payout ratio”, which is 74.77% in this example) can be grasped. In addition, the number of balls (6300) paid out by winning the game ball at the big prize opening with respect to the total number of balls (9268) paid out by winning the game ball at each prize opening. The ratio (hereinafter referred to as “second payout ratio”, which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

  Here, when the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the fact in an identifiable manner. . In the example of FIG. 70, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first reference ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame. In addition, when the second payout ratio is higher than a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60%), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the fact in an identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 70, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second reference ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 905, and displays the comparison result between the predetermined first reference ratio and the second reference ratio. It can be displayed in a graspable manner. For example, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed on the image display device 905 by the setting of the display changeover switch 9032 and the setting operation by the operation button 9030, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031. For example, when the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 905, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of the settings on the game hall side or the player side. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the gaming state, for example, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to a game device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for game use. In the apparatus, the received first payout ratio and second payout ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to an information management device such as a hall computer, and the information management device uses the first payout ratio and the second payout of each gaming machine. The ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device.

  Further, when the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs a general prize opening designation command, a start prize opening designation command, and a big prize opening prize command to the effect control CPU 90120, external output information corresponding to these commands is output. As an information, it is possible to specify that a winning at the general winning opening has occurred and which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D has been won, and a winning at the start winning opening has occurred. And information that can specify whether the game ball has won in the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, and information that can specify that the winning to the big winning opening has occurred The data is output to an external device such as a card unit or a call lamp device or an information management device (hall computer).

  This makes it possible to specify information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, information corresponding to the big winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio. In the external device that has received this information, it is possible to store and update the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 70 for each gaming machine. This makes it possible to grasp the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each gaming machine. In addition, for each gaming machine, it can be determined whether the first payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio.

  In addition, regarding the total period of the winning number information (value of each item in FIG. 56 or FIG. 70) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901, if no setting is made for the total period, pachinko It is a period from when the power supply of the gaming machine 901 is started until the power supply is stopped. As the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is reset (the number of winnings at each winning opening becomes 0), and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed. In some cases, the number of winnings for each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is zero. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is erased without being backed up.

  The aggregating period of the winning amount information (value of each item in FIG. 56 or FIG. 70) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be set on the game hall side. It is possible to set a total period (for example, 10 hours, 3 hours, etc.) regarding the gaming machine using the button 9030. In addition, in a gaming device (card unit or calling lamp device), a shop clerk inputs a desired counting period with an input device or the like, and the input counting period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 901, and the counting period May be set (stored in the RAM 90122). Also, in the information management device (hall computer), the game hall manager inputs a desired total period using an input device or the like, and the input total period is the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, the pachinko machine selected as the setting target). It may be transmitted to the gaming machine 901) and set as a totaling period (stored in the RAM 90122). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a winning number management table is created for each set counting period (for example, 10 hours), and these are displayed on the image display device 905, or a corresponding gaming device (card) Unit, call lamp device) and displayed on the display device of the gaming device, or output to the information management device (hall computer) and displayed on the display device of the information management device. .

  In addition, the number of winnings in the winning number management table is output from the pachinko gaming machine 901 based on information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, and information corresponding to the large winning opening winning command. By storing and updating information (value of each item in FIG. 56 or FIG. 70), by setting an aggregation period using an input device included in the external apparatus, an external apparatus that updates and stores information (for example, 10 hours). A winning number management table can be created and displayed on a display device provided in an external device. For example, when the external device is a gaming device (card unit or calling lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning number management table for the corresponding gaming machine for each predetermined period is displayed on the display device. If the external device is an information management device that manages gaming information for each gaming machine, the winning number management table for each predetermined period can be displayed on the display device for each gaming machine. It becomes.

[27th effect form]
The specific effects A and B described above both give notice of variable display results in the special game according to the effect mode, and are executed in connection with winning of game balls to the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D. As the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game. FIG. 71 illustrates a specific effect C (point giving effect) as an effect not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game.

  In the 27th effect form shown in FIG. 72 and the 29th effect form to be described later, the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124 every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The presence / absence of execution of the specific effect C is determined based on the execution determination random number, and the specific effect C is executed if it is determined to be executed. When the specific effect C is executed, 1 is added to the total points of the point storage areas formed in the RAM 90122, and as shown in FIG. 71, the image display device 905 includes an image including the characters “1point”. 902000 is displayed.

  That is, every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed as to whether or not 1 point is given, and the lottery is won. In this case, a point form effect in which 1 point is given is performed. A privilege is given to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

  For example, when the total number of points reaches 5 (when 5 points are won), a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server is displayed on the image display device 905. The player can access the image providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal that he owns, and download the desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. . When the total point reaches 10 (when 10 points are won), the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server. The player can access the music providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired music to the information terminal.

  In the twenty-seventh effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the rate is 80%. The specific effect C is executed. The effect control CPU 90120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in a special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of a special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed.

  As with the specific effects A and B, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effects C is provided. Each time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D which is the winning condition) History is included).

  Here, the total points in the point storage area formed in the RAM 90122 are set to 10 regardless of the winning history in the winning history storage area (even if the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted). After reaching (in this example, a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), it is reset to 0, and 1 is added again each time the specific effect C is executed.

  In the 27th effect form and the 29th effect form, which will be described later, (1) the specific effect is based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol change period). The rate of execution is lower than (2) the rate of execution of a specific effect based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period when the special symbol variable display is not being executed (outside the symbol change period). Is set. During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed in the period (1), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period (2), the player can execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special game that is the object of interest is not executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the period of (1).

  Further, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to a variable display result in a special game or a variable display result in a normal game as a specific effect, depending on the execution status of the special game and the number of reserved memories. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when an effect related to a variable display result in a special game such as a specific effect A is adopted as a specific effect, the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is (2) variable symbol variable display is executed When the period is not set (outside the symbol change period), there is no change result notice target at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning in the general prize opening is stopped) or the execution is suspended until the start condition of the variable display related to the special game is established (the general prize) The specific effect is not executed at the timing of winning the mouth, and the specific effect is subsequently executed at the timing when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the interest may decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. By adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game as the specific effect, such a problem can be avoided.

  In the twenty-seventh effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is executed (symbol fluctuation) If it is within the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C can be executed only when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). Also good. Also, contrary to the example shown in the 27th effect form, (1) specified based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period) The rate at which the effect is executed is (2) the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during a period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). May be set to be higher.

[28th effect form]
In the twenty-eighth effect form, unlike the twenty-seventh effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the twenty-eighth effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) The specific effect A is not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, the specific effect A is either the first aspect in which only the sound effect is executed or the second aspect in which the accessory effect is executed together with the sound effect. Thus, the variation result notice effect suggests that the possibility that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied is suggested before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62B, the specific effect B is one of the first aspect in which only the sound effect is executed and the second aspect in which the accessory effect is executed together with the sound effect. Thus, the pre-reading notice effect suggests that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the specific effect C is a variable display display result (whether it becomes a big win symbol) related to the special game, and a variable display display result (whether it becomes a win symbol) related to the normal game. It is an effect not related to any of the above, and points are awarded to the player in accordance with winning in the general winning opening.

  As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the specific effect A is not executed (described above “ The execution of the specific effect A is deferred, and the process of “execute when the variable display start condition for the special game is satisfied” is not performed), and is specified only in the period (1). Production A is to be executed. Every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least one of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D, which is the winning condition) History is included).

  In the 28th effect form, by executing the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening as the specific effect, I am trying to improve my interest in specific productions. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is a period (2) during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a subject of the change result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general prize opening), and then specified when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied. When the production A is executed, there is a possibility that the interest will be lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific production. Therefore, in the twenty-eighth effect form, the specific effect A is not executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period).

  In the 28th effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20% in the case of the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). In the case of such a form, when a winning in a general winning opening occurs during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (in the general winning opening) The specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning a prize), and then the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied. As described above, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is either the period (1) (within the symbol variation period) or the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). Alternatively, the specific effect A may be executed, and the specific effect A may be executed at a different rate.

  In addition, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), a special feature being executed is further displayed. The execution ratio of the specific effect A may be varied depending on the variable display result of the figure game and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed. For example, if the CPU 90120 for effect control determines that the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot symbol, the specific effect A is executed at a rate of 80%, and the confirmed decorative symbol is assumed to be the off symbol. If it is determined, the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[29th effect form]
In the 29th effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). Is within the period of 1 or more, (2) In the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period) In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) a period in which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the special symbol variable display is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

  That is, when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is executed or at least the special symbol variable display is determined to be executed ((1) or (2) above) ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and the special symbol variable display is not executed and the special symbol variable display is performed at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. If it is not determined to execute (in the period (3) above), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

  Each time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D which is the winning condition) History is included).

  In the 29th effect form, when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is executed, or at least the special symbol variable display is determined to be executed ((1) above) (If it is during the period of (2)), the specific effect is executed at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is not executed, and the special symbol variable display is performed. It is set lower than the rate at which the specific effect is executed when the execution is not determined (in the case of the period (3)). In the period (1) and (2), an effect corresponding to a special game (for example, a change result notice effect or a prefetch notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 or the speakers 908L and 908R. The player is usually more interested in these effects including variable display of decorative symbols rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the specific effect is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period (3), the player can execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game that is the target of interest is not executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the periods (1) and (2).

  Further, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to a variable display result in a special game or a variable display result in a normal game as a specific effect, depending on the execution status of the special game and the number of reserved memories. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect that can be executed only when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more as in the specific effect B is adopted as the specific effect, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the number of reserved memories In the period in which is 0, there is no target of prefetching notice at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the prize winning in the general prize opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the reserved memory count becomes 1 or more (the general prize winning is won). The specific effect is not executed at the timing, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the variable display start condition for the special game is established). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the interest may decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. By adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game as the specific effect, such a problem can be avoided.

  In the 29th stage, the special symbol is variably displayed or at least the special symbol is variably displayed at the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. If it is decided to execute (in the period (1) or (2) above), the specific effect C is not executed, the special symbol variable display is not executed, and the special symbol is not executed. The specific effect C may be executable only when it is not determined to execute the variable display (in the case of the period (3)). Contrary to the example shown in the 29th effect form, is the variable symbol display being executed at the timing when the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D? Or, when it is decided to execute variable display of special symbols at least (in the case of the period (1) or (2) above), the variable symbol special display is executed at a rate that the specific effect is executed. If it is not determined to execute variable symbol special display (in the period (3) above), it may be set to be higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed.

  In addition, the timing at which variable display related to the special figure game is started (the timing when the start condition is satisfied) and the timing at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and including the same time). In this case, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the variable display is started, without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the specific effect B or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the game is related to the special figure game. In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (the timing when the start condition is established) and the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds, including the same time). In some cases, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the reserved memory number increases without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the start condition is established (for example, in the case of the specific effect A or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the game is related to the special figure game.

[30th effect form]
In the 30th effect form, unlike the 29th effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the 30th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). ) Is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the reserved memory number is 0. Is the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period), (3) the period in which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the special symbol variable display is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period) If it is, the specific effect B is not executed.

  As described above, the specific effect B is not executed when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2) or (3). (The above-described process of “suspending execution of the specific effect B and executing it when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more” is not performed) and only in the period of (1), The specific effect B is executed. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at least one of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D which is the winning condition) History is included).

  In the 30th effect form, the specific effect B is specified by executing the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) related to the variable display result of the special figure game held at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. I try to improve my interest in production. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period (2) or (3) in which the number of reserved memories is 0, there is no pre-reading notice target at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing of winning the general prize opening), and then the specific effect B is displayed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. When it is executed, there is a risk that the interest will be lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific performance. Therefore, in the 30th effect form, the specific effect B is not executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (the period in which the stored storage number is 0). .

  In the 30th production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory). The specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and if it is the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding storage), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 20%. You may do it. In the case of such a form, when a winning to the general winning opening occurs during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding storage), the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended. Every time (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning opening), and then the specific effect B is executed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. As described above, the timing at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory) and the period (2) or (3) (within the period without reserved memory). ), The specific effect B can be executed, and the specific effect B can be executed at a different rate.

  Further, when the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved storage), the holding is further held. The execution ratio of the specific effect B varies depending on the variable display result of the special game related to memory and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbols accompanying the execution of the special game related to the reserved memory. You may do it. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a start winning prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit” in the start winning command storage area (that is, the reserved memory in which the variable display result of the special game is a big hit symbol). In the case where there is a special winning effect B at a rate of 80%, the start winning time determination result designation command for designating “big hit” is not stored in the start winning command storage area (ie, In the case where there is no reserved memory in which the variable display result of the special figure game becomes a big hit symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[31st effect form]
In the 31st effect form shown in FIG. 73, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable symbol variable display is executed ( If it is within the symbol change period), the specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) In some cases, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) and the period (2). Different types of specific effects are executed. Thereby, it can be interested in the effect performed when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and it can improve interest. In addition, every time a specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth winning condition 904A, which is a winning condition) corresponding to the specific effect. The winning history for any of the general winning ports 9050D is included).

  In the 31st effect form, by executing the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game being executed at the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening, I am trying to improve my interests. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is a period (2) during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a subject of the change result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, if no specific effects are executed, the execution frequency of the specific effects decreases. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning opening), and then the special game is related. When the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition is satisfied, there is a possibility that the interest is lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect.

  In the 31st effect form, when a game ball wins a general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), instead of the specific effect A, the variable display result in the special game or the variable in the normal game By executing the specific effect C that is not related to the display result, such a problem can be avoided. It should be noted that any type of specific production is always executed (percentage is executed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening, and any type of specific presentation is given every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening. The specific performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

[32nd form]
In the thirty-second effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). ) Is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the reserved memory number is 0. Is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period), the specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of reserved memories is 0 When the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1), the period (2), In the case of the period 3), different types of specific effects are executed. Thereby, it can be interested in the effect performed when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and it can improve interest. Each time a specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning that is the winning condition) The winning history is included in any of the mouth 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D).

  In the thirty-second effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within the period of (1), that is, when the target of the prefetch notice exists, the specific effect B (prefetch notice) When the period is within the period of (2), that is, when there is no target of the prefetching notice but there is a target of the fluctuation result notice, the specific effect A (fluctuation result notice effect) When the period is (3), that is, when neither the target of the pre-reading notice nor the subject of the change result notice exists, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed.

  In this way, by selecting a specific effect that can be executed immediately at the timing when a game ball is won in the general prize opening, and executing this, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest when the game ball wins the general prize opening. I try to let them. It should be noted that any type of specific production is always executed (percentage is executed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening, and any type of specific presentation is given every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening. The specific performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

  In the thirty-second effect form, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. Regardless, that is, the pre-reading notice effect is executed regardless of whether or not there is a subject of the change result notice. That is, in the case where “the subject of the change result notice and the object of the prefetch notice exist both”, the prefetch notice effect is preferentially executed. Not only in such a form, but when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when a game ball wins a general winning opening, when variable display of special symbols is executed at that timing, the change result notice When the effect is executed, and the variable symbol special display is not executed at that timing, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed. That is, in the case where “the target of the change result notice and the target of the prefetch notice exist both”, the change result notice effect may be preferentially executed.

[Modified example of the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form]
In the twenty-seventh effect form to the thirty-second effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect may be varied according to the state when the game ball is won at the general winning opening. The “state” here is a state that is generated as a result of a game in the gaming machine and is based on a game in the gaming machine. The execution ratio of the specific effect is varied according to the state category. For example, in the 27th effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within (1) the symbol variation period, if the game state at that time is a normal state, the specific effect is 30%. C is executed, and if the gaming state at that time is a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the symbol variation period (2), if the gaming state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 100%. If the game state at that time is a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, the interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening can be further enhanced.

  Moreover, in the 27th effect form-the 32nd effect form, you may make it vary the kind of specific effect performed according to the state when a game ball wins a general winning opening. For example, in the 31st effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within (1) the symbol change period, if the reserved memory number at that time is 0, the specific effect A (change result notice) If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside (2) the symbol variation period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed, If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed. According to this, the interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening can be further enhanced.

  As described above, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the state classification for changing the type of the specific effect is either (1) the game state is the normal state or (2) the game state is the probability change state or the short-time state. Or (1) whether the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. For example, it may be classified as (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change or (2) a period before the reach state is established in the reach change. Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, it may be classified as (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good. Furthermore, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may be different according to the difference between these categories.

  Whether or not the specific effect C (point granting effect) is executed is switched according to the display setting table of FIG. 57, similarly to the other specific effects A and B executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is like that. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to display setting (second position), and display setting is performed by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 in the setting screen of FIG. 58). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect C can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

  In addition, the specific effect C (point granting effect) is not limited to one point that is awarded for one prize to the general prize opening, but 2 points or 3 points are given for one prize to the general prize opening. It may be. The number of points awarded may be different depending on, for example, which general winning opening the game ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the game ball has won the general winning opening, for example, The game state may be different depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state.

  In addition, in the specific effect C (point giving effect), points may be awarded according to factors other than the prize winning to the general prize opening. For example, points are awarded according to the winning to the starting prize opening. Alternatively, points may be awarded according to the establishment of the reach state.

[33rd effect form]
In FIG. 74, a specific effect D (gauge update effect) is illustrated as an effect in which the effect mode changes step by step in accordance with the winning of a game ball to the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 74, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) is a filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 displayed on the image display device 905 in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. This effect can be changed step by step from a minimum of 0 to a maximum of 10.

  In the example of FIG. 74 (a), the filling area 902100a (black portion in the gauge image) in the gauge image 902100 corresponds to the 0 stage in response to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning ports 9050A to 9050D. It increases from 1 (the state where the white part occupies 10/10) to 1 level (the state where the black part occupies 1/10 and the white part occupies 9/10) (gauge + 1). In the example of FIG. 74 (b), the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is changed from the 0th stage to the 3rd stage (black part) in response to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning ports 9050A to 9050D. Occupies 3/10 and the white part occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

  As described above, the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 increases in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and reaches 10 levels (the black portion in the gauge image occupies 10/10). In the case where the player is in a state of being), a privilege is given to the player. For example, similarly to the specific effect C described above, a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 905, and the player can select a desired image or music for the image providing server or the music. It can be downloaded from the providing server to the information terminal.

  Not limited to this, when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 905, and a special music is output as BGM during the game. It may be made possible. Alternatively, a variable result notice effect may be executed in which the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game being executed at the timing when the filling area 902100a reaches 10 stages may be a big hit symbol. A pre-reading notice effect may be executed for notifying the possibility that the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game that is held at the timing when the area 902100a reaches 10 stages will be a big hit symbol.

  That is, the privilege provided when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages may be an effect not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game. It may be an effect related to a variable display result in a game or a variable display result in a usual game. In addition, it may be an effect related to the gaming state or an effect not related to the gaming state. Further, every time the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels, different effects may be executed. Further, different effects may be executed according to the gaming state when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels.

  When the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels, a message to the image display device 905, voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R, etc. are notified, and then the gauge image 902100 is displayed. The filling region 902100a at is reset to the zero level. After the reset, the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 increases again in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

  In the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form shown in FIGS. 75 to 76, each time the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the identification extracted from the random number circuit 90124 It is determined whether or not the stage of the filling area 902100a (hereinafter referred to as a gauge level) in the gauge image 902100 is to be increased by one stage on the basis of the random number for effect execution determination. Is increased by one step. That is, every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to increase the gauge level by one step. If you win, your gauge level will increase by one level.

  In the 33rd effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is being executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) when it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), a rate of 80%. Increases the gauge level by one step. The effect control CPU 90120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in a special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of a special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed.

  As with the specific effects A to C, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effects D is provided. When the gauge level reaches 10 stages, along with a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the 33rd effect form, and in the 34th effect form, the 36th effect form, and the 37th effect form, which will be described later, (1) a general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period) The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in (2) is that the game ball won in the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) The gauge level is set lower than the rate of increase. During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period of (2), the player can increase the gauge level because the production corresponding to the special game of interest is not preferentially executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (1), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 33rd effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which variable display of special symbols is being executed (symbol fluctuation) (Within the period), the gauge level is not increased. (2) The gauge level can be increased when the special symbol variable display is not performed (outside the symbol variation period). Also good. Contrary to the example shown in the 33rd effect form, (1) a gauge based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period). The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that (2) the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) You may set so that it becomes.

[34th form]
In the 34th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) and is special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol changing period) and When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

  The effect control CPU 90120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in a special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of a special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, and until the special symbol variable display ends (the confirmed special symbol is It is possible to specify the remaining time (until the stop is displayed). For example, when the variation start command and the variation pattern designation command are received, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the variation time of the special symbol designated by the variation pattern designation command as the value of the variation time timer. The remaining time until the timer value times out can be specified as the remaining time until the special symbol variable display ends (until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed). In addition, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the 34th production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is 10 seconds or longer until the symbol stops is (3) when the symbol level is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops In addition, the gauge level is set to be higher than the rate at which the game level is won based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state will be, rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (3), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level, the player is easily interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (3), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 34th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased. In the case of the period (3), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 34th effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3 ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops.

  Moreover, in the 34th production form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the decorative symbol being executed when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). When the display result of variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%. When the display result is out of symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, while the first general prize is awarded. When the timing at which a game ball wins any of the mouth 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is a jackpot symbol May increase the gauge level at a rate of 30%, and increase the gauge level at a rate of 10% if the display result is out of pattern.

[35th form]
As described above, the specific effect B is exemplified as the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the variable display result in the reserved special game. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 62 (b), does the start prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit” be included in the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area? Based on whether or not, it is determined whether the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is the first mode (sound effect only) or the second mode (sound effect and accessory effect). That is, in the pre-reading notice effect such as the specific effect B, the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target fluctuation) that is the target of the pre-fetching notice is not notified to the player, and the player grasps the target fluctuation. It has become difficult.

  As the pre-reading notice effect, it is also possible to adopt an effect that notifies the target fluctuation. For example, as described above, the start winning memory display area 905H includes a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Is provided. When the start control winning determination result designation command is received, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the display region corresponding to the command corresponding to the command designating the “outage” if the command designates “big hit”. It is possible to execute a hold change effect displayed in a special mode (for example, gold) different from the part. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to the display portion displayed in a special manner, and the player can grasp the remaining variable display count executed until the target variation.

  For example, if a command for designating “big hit” is received when a start winning determination result designation command is received, a display portion corresponding to the command is displayed in a special manner at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 30%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. On the other hand, if a command specifying “out of” is received when the start winning determination result specifying command is received, the display portion corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 95%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. As described above, when the display part corresponding to the reserved memory generated by the start winning is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, the display part in the special mode is displayed every time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is satisfied). Each time), and when the start condition of the variable display game (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is satisfied, The display part disappears from the start winning storage display area 905H. In such an aspect, the hold change effect is executed during the period from the start winning to the start of the variable display game corresponding to the start winning.

  That is, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied according to the order in which the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the hold change effect is executed, so that the display portion (the target of the hold change effect is displayed) in a special mode. Depending on the number of display parts in the normal mode (display information corresponding to variable display hold storage that is not the target of hold change effect) to the left of the display information corresponding to variable display hold storage) It becomes possible to grasp the number of remaining variable display games until the variable display that is the target of the hold change effect is executed.

  In addition, the timing which displays a display site | part in a special aspect is not restricted at the time of a start winning prize. For example, the display part may be displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and after changing the predetermined effect, the normal mode may be changed to the special mode. The timing at which the start condition is satisfied (display mode of each display part) May be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing of shifting to the left). In these aspects, from the timing at which the display portion corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice changes from the normal state to the special form, the start condition of the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is satisfied. During the period, the pending change effect is being executed.

  In the thirty-fifth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is as follows: If it is a non-period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the pending change effect and it is not a target variation execution period), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more. If there is a special game in which the start condition is established before the special game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the ratio is 40%. Increases the gauge level by one step.

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 1. If there is one special figure game in which the start condition is established before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge is measured at a rate of 20%. Level increases by one level.

  In addition, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the pre-reading notice effect (in the hold change effect) The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10% when the variable display based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is established.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the 35th production mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) until the target change The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball is won at the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count of 1 is 1, (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 (execution of target change) During the period), the gauge level is set higher than the rate at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening. In the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target variation that is currently being executed than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 35th production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased. In the case of (3) and (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 35th effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until target change is 2 or more is (3) remaining variable until target change. The ratio may be set so that the gauge level increases when the number of display times is 1, and (4) the gauge level increases when the target variation is executed.

  Moreover, in the 35th production form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is in any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4) In this case, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation or not. For example, the CPU 90120 for effect control displays the variable display result in the target variation when the timing when the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). In the case of a big win symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and when the variable display result is out of the design, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, and the first general winning opening 9050A to 4th general When the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (3), if the variable display result in the target variation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%, When the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 20%, and the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth one When the timing at which a game ball wins one of the winning openings 9050D is in the period (4), if the variable display result in the target variation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 15%, When the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10%.

[36th effect form]
In the thirty-sixth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a period in which (2) variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without a reach effect is being executed. In some cases, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%.

  In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a period during which (3) variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is being executed, and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) a variable display (reach fluctuation) with a reach effect is being executed and the reach state In the period after establishment, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the thirty-sixth production mode, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening before the reach state in reach change is established is (4) after the reach state is established in reach change The gauge level is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the winning opening. During the period of (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that are not stopped after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, since the reach state is not established in the period (3), the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the thirty-sixth production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3), the gauge level is increased. In the case of the period (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the thirty-sixth effect form, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the reach fluctuation period and before the reach state is established is (4 ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the reach variation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[37th effect form]
In the 37th effect form shown in FIG. 76, the ratio of increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won. When the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%.

  In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the 37th effect form, the rate of increase of the gauge level is different between (1) the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period, and further, the second general prize opening 9050B or the third general prize opening The rate at which the gauge level increases differs between when the game ball wins 9050C and when the game ball wins the first general winning port 9050A or the fourth general winning port 9050D. The rate at which the gauge level increases depending on the general winning opening where the game ball has won, so that the player will be interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won and improve the interest. be able to.

  For example, the first general prize provided closer to the edge of the game area 9010 than the winning of the game ball to the second general prize opening 9050B and the third general prize opening 9050C provided near the center of the game area 9010. When it is difficult to win game balls in the mouth 9050A and the fourth general prize opening 9050D, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game balls win in the first general prize opening 9050A and the fourth general prize opening 9050D Is made higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, thereby providing an interest in winning a general winning opening that is more difficult to win. It is good to raise it.

  In the 37th production mode, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, it is possible to increase the gauge level, and in the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening. When a game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 37th effect form, the rate of increase in the gauge level when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening 9050B. Or you may set so that it may become lower than the rate which a gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the 3rd general winning opening 9050C.

[38th production form]
In the thirty-eighth effect form to the forty-second effect form shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, whether or not the specific effect is executed is not determined based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124. Moreover, in the 38th production form-the 42nd production form, the gauge level which increases according to one prize-winning to a general winning opening is not restricted to one step. For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the gauge level may be increased by three stages in response to a single winning at the general winning opening.

  In the thirty-eighth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1), and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the gauge level is three steps. Increase (gauge + 3).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history (including at least four winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is deleted.

  In the 38th effect form, and the 39th effect form, the 41st effect form, and the 42nd effect form, which will be described later, (1) a general winning opening during a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol change period) The number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in (2) is that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) Is set to be less than the number of gauge level steps that increase based on During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased in the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player corresponding to the special game that is the subject of interest is not executed in the original period, so that the player is increased by increasing the gauge level. Are in a situation where they are interested in this. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than the period (1).

  In the thirty-eighth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (design variation) (Within a period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate at which only one step is changed is 80%), and (2) a period during which variable symbol special display is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol variation period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels may be, for example, 80% (the rate at which only one level is changed is 20%). Contrary to the example shown in the 38th effect form, (1) a gauge based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a general winning opening during a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period). The number of stages in which the level increases is (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) May be set to be larger.

  In addition, as a privilege granted when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a privilege with a different value may be given. For example, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a two-dimensional code capable of downloading only an image may be displayed, and a two-dimensional code capable of downloading an image and music may be displayed. At this time, the privilege value given to the latter is greater than the former. Depending on the number of stages at which the gauge level increases, the value of the privilege value given when the gauge level reaches 10 stages may be suggested. For example, when the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period). In addition, when the privilege value is small, the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is set to, for example, 20% (the rate at which only one level is changed is 80%). When the rate of increase is, for example, 40% (the rate of changing only one step is 60%), and (2) when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the privilege value is small For example, if the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is 50% (the rate of changing only one step is 50%) and the privilege value is large, the gauge level is increased to two steps. The ratio to above increases for example, 80% (ratio for one step changes of 20%) may be.

[39th form]
In the thirty-ninth presentation mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by three levels (gauge + 3). The timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) and is special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by two levels (gauge + 2). The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol changing period) and When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history (including at least four winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is deleted.

  In the 39th production form, (2) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the fact that a game ball has won the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3) less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops It is set to be higher than the number of gauge levels that increase based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening. During the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state will be, rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (3), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than the period (3).

  In the 39th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more stages. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the period (3), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step) May be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 39th production mode, (2) the number of stages at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops ( 3) It may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops.

  In the 39th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the decorative symbol being executed when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). When the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by three levels, and when the display result is out of the pattern, the gauge level is increased by two levels, while the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general When the timing at which a game ball is won in any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (3), if the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is set in two levels. The gauge level may be increased by one step when the display result is a deviated symbol.

[40th effect form]
In the 40th effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the pre-reading notice effect is not executed and the target change is also executed. If it is a non-period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the on-hold change effect and it is not an execution period of target variation), the gauge level is increased by four stages (gauge + 4).

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more. If there are two or more special-figure games in which the start condition is established before the special-figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge level is 3 Increase in steps (gauge + 3).

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 1. If there is one special figure game where the start condition is established before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge level is increased by two stages. (Gauge +2).

  In addition, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the pre-reading notice effect (in the hold change effect) The gauge level is increased by one level (gauge + 1) when the variable display based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is established).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the 40th production mode, (2) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when the number of remaining variable display until target change is 2 or more is (3) target change When the remaining variable display count up to 1 is 1, the number of gauge levels increases based on the winning of a game ball in the general prize opening, (4) When the remaining variable display count until target change is 0 (target change The number of gauge levels is set to be increased based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize at a general winning opening during the execution period of (1). In the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target variation that is currently being executed than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased in the period of (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 40th production mode, the gauge level is increased by two or more stages when the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). For example, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more stages is set to 20% (only one stage) in the period of (3) and (4). The rate of change may be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 40th effect form, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the remaining until the target change. It may be set so that the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the number of times of variable display is 1, and (4) less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases during the target variation execution period.

  Moreover, in the 40th production form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is in any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4) In this case, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation or not. For example, the CPU 90120 for effect control displays the variable display result in the target variation when the timing when the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). In the case of a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by four steps, and when the variable display result is out of the symbol, the gauge level is increased by three steps, and any one of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D When the timing when the game ball is won is in the period of (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by three stages, and the variable display result becomes a symbol out of place The gauge level is increased by two stages, and the game is played in one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When the timing when the ball is won is in the period of (4), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by two steps, and if the variable display result becomes a dissimilar symbol The gauge level may be increased by one step.

[41st effect form]
In the 41st effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period) ), The gauge level is increased by 4 levels (gauge + 4). In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a period in which (2) variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without a reach effect is being executed. In this case, the gauge level is increased by three levels (gauge + 3).

  In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a period during which (3) variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is being executed, and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by two steps (gauge +3), and (4) a variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is being executed and the reach state is established. In the subsequent period, the gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the forty-first production mode, (3) the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening before the reach state in reach change is established (4) after the reach state in reach change is established. The number is set more than the number of stages of gauge levels that increase based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening. During the period of (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that are not stopped after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, since the reach state is not established in the period (3), the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than in the period (4).

  In the 41st production mode, the gauge level is increased by two or more stages when the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3). For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the period (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step) May be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 41st effect form, (3) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is being executed and before the reach state is established, 4) It may be set to be smaller than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[42nd effect form]
In the forty-second effect form shown in FIG. 78, the number of steps for increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning awards is won. When the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) The gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1). On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period). The gauge level is increased by two levels (gauge +2).

  In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). , The gauge level increases by 3 levels (gauge + 3). On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level is increased by 4 levels (gauge + 4).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the 42nd effect form, the number of steps of increasing gauge level is different between (1) the symbol change period and (2) outside the symbol change period, and further, the second general prize opening 9050B or the third general prize is given. The number of steps of increasing gauge level is different between the case where a game ball wins the mouth 9050C and the case where a game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Since the number of gauge levels to be increased according to the number of general winning holes for which the game balls have been won, the player will be interested in which general winning holes the game balls have been won, and the interest will be improved. Can be made.

  For example, the first general prize provided closer to the edge of the game area 9010 than the winning of the game ball to the second general prize opening 9050B and the third general prize opening 9050C provided near the center of the game area 9010. When it is difficult to win a game ball in the mouth 9050A and the fourth general prize opening 9050D, the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general prize opening 9050A and the fourth general prize opening 9050D By increasing the number more than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when a game ball is won in the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, it is possible to win for a general winning opening that is more difficult to win. It is good to raise interest.

  In the forty-second production mode, when a game ball is won at the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more stages is, for example, 80% (the ratio of changing only one stage is 20). %), And when a game ball wins the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%), for example. Also good. Contrary to the example shown in the 42nd production mode, the number of stages at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening. You may set so that it may become less than the number of steps which a gauge level increases when a game ball wins 9050B or the 3rd general winning opening 9050C.

[Modification of the 33rd effect form to the 42nd effect form]
In the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form, the division serving as a reference for determining whether to increase the gauge level, and the number of gauge levels to be increased in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form are determined. The classification used as a reference for this is not limited to the above example. For example, the category for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level, and the category for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased include (1) whether the gaming state is a normal state or (2) the gaming state is It may be a category of whether the state is a certain change state or a short time state. Further, it may be classified as (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, even if the classification is (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good.

  Note that the gauge image 902100 is displayed even when the filling area 902100a is at least at the zero level, but a condition for displaying the gauge image 902100 may be provided. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when the gaming state is the normal state, and an effect of increasing the gauge level can be executed, but the gauge image 902100 is not displayed when the gaming state is the probability change state or the short time state (gauge An effect of increasing the level may not be executed).

  The effect of increasing the display of the gauge image 902100 and the gauge level is executed in a period in which the predetermined effect is being executed, and may not be executed in a period in which the predetermined effect is not being executed. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when a game ball is won in the general winning opening only during a period (predetermined stage stage) in which the background image of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 905 is a predetermined background image. Or the gauge level may be increased. In addition, a game ball is won in the general winning opening only during a period in which the display portion in the start winning memory display area 905H is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, white indicating that there is a possibility of changing to a special mode). The gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 is simultaneously executed when an unillustrated RTC (real time clock) provided on the effect control board 9012 reaches a predetermined time (simultaneously when a predetermined time is reached in a game machine of the same model). In the case of performing (drafting), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during the execution period of the simultaneous rendering, the gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

  Further, when the gauge level is increased, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. At this time, different production sounds may be output depending on the number of steps of the gauge level to be increased. For example, when the gauge level is increased by three steps, the gauge level is increased by one step. The volume of the production sound may be increased.

  In addition, it is preferable to output an effect sound that increases the gauge level at a volume different from the effect sound related to the special game or the effect sound related to the ordinary game. For example, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the usual game, but lower than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game. Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level is larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game, but may be smaller than the volume of the error sound that notifies the gaming machine error.

  Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be different depending on the state. For example, the sound volume in the normal state may be larger than the sound volume in the probability change state or the short time state.

  In addition, the specific effect in which the effect mode changes step by step in accordance with the winning of the general prize opening is not limited to the specific effect D that changes the gauge level, and the displayed character mode is step by step. It may be one that changes (for example, the size of the displayed character increases or the item that the character owns changes), and the number of characters that the player can select increases step by step. Also good. Further, the mode and position of the movable accessory may be changed step by step, and the emission color of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed stepwise. Further, the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R may change stepwise.

  Whether or not execution of the specific effect D (gauge update effect) is switched according to the display setting table of FIG. 57 is performed in the same manner as the other specific effects A to C executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. It is like that. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to display setting (second position), and display setting is performed by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 in the setting screen of FIG. 58). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect D can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

[43rd effect form]
The specific effects A to D described above are effects that are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, but the specific effect is executed when the game ball does not win the general winning opening. Anyway. For example, if the game ball is not won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D in the game period of 10 minutes, as shown in FIG. A specific effect E for displaying on the image display device 905 an image imitating the form of a general winning opening and a notification image 902200 including the characters “no general winnings” can be executed.

  As described above, the specific effect is not limited to an effect that is executed based on a game ball having won a general winning opening, but an effect that is executed based on a game ball that has not won a general winning opening (general winning game) It may be a presentation that suggests difficulty in winning a prize in the mouth. That is, the specific effect may be an effect related to a game event such as a game ball winning in a general winning opening (an effect executed when a game event occurs or no game event occurs).

  In the 43rd effect form shown in FIG. 80, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a non-winning determination timer for determining a period in which a game ball has not won the general winning opening. When the value of the non-winning determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning port designation command and a general winning port from the game control microcomputer 90100. When any of the designated command and the big prize winning command is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer and the timer is started. If the general prize opening designation command is received before the non-winning determination timer times out (before 10 minutes have elapsed from the timer set), 10 minutes is again set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and again Start the timer.

  On the other hand, when the non-winning determination timer times out due to not receiving the general winning opening designation command before the non-winning determination timer times out, a notification image 902200 is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. The specific effect E to be displayed is executed. When the specific effect E is executed, 10 minutes is again set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of the notification image 902200) is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the non-winning determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and performs the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening designation command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it is not received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped, processing (specifically, execution of the specific effect E) due to the non-winning determination timer timing out is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed in a period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the processing due to the non-winning determination timer timing out (specifically, the detection of the time-out when the timer value becomes 0). (Execution of the specific effect E) becomes possible. In the state where the update of the non-winning determination timer is paused, when the production control CPU 90120 receives any of the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the big prize winning prize command The renewal of the non-winning determination timer is resumed.

  In other words, the non-winning determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (the game is not determined to be finished). A time-out occurs when the number of winnings at the winning opening becomes 0 (the effect control CPU 90120 detects the time-out). As a result, when the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed if no winning in the general winning opening occurs for 10 minutes.

  In the above-described production form, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being launched toward the game area 9010. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the game ball entrance in the game area 9010, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects a game ball. Anyway. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game, depending on whether or not the hitting operation handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the launching motor included in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

  In this way, when the player is playing a game and no winning in the general winning opening occurs in a predetermined period (10-minute gaming period), the specific effect E is executed, Informs that no winning in the general winning opening has occurred. By this notification, the player can grasp that the winning to the general winning opening has not occurred, and can use it as a reference (for example, judgment material for selecting a base) when playing the game. In the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific effect E is high), the game nails are made so that the winning frequency at the general winning opening becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance.

  In addition, when a game is being played by the player and no winning in the general winning opening has occurred, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is not being played by the player. When no winning is made to the general winning opening, the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the processing based on the timeout of the non-winning determination timer). Execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

  It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that no prize has occurred in the general prize opening due to the fact that no game is being played by the player. The specific effect E may be executed at a lower rate than the case where it is determined that a winning in the general winning opening has not occurred despite the game being played by the player.

[44th form]
The specific effect E is not limited to notifying that a general winning opening has not been won within a predetermined period (the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than 1), You may make it alert | report that it can specify that the number of winnings to a winning opening is less than predetermined number. In the 44th effect form, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening in a predetermined period. The effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning port designation command and a general winning port from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0). When either the designated command or the big prize winning command is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started. At this time, the value of the winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122 is set to zero. Then, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area every time a general winning opening designation command is received during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes from the timer set).

  Then, if the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect control CPU 90120 is within the predetermined period in the specific effect E. That the number of winnings is less than a predetermined number and / or the number of winnings within a predetermined period is notified. For example, a message “30 minutes of general winnings is less than 3” and / or “30 minutes of general winnings is only 1” is displayed on the image display device 905.

  When the specific effect E is executed, 30 minutes is again set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the winning number determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time after the specific effect E is started. On the other hand, if the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the specified number E of the winning number determination timer is not executed without executing the specific effect E. Set the value again to 30 minutes and start the timer again.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and performs the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening designation command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it is not received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped, processing (specifically, execution of the specific effect E) due to timeout of the winning number determination timer is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed in a period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the winning number determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to detection of a time-out when the winning number determination timer times out (specifically, the timer value becomes zero). (Execution of the specific effect E) becomes possible. When the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped, the production control CPU 90120 receives any of the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the big winning mouth prize command. Then, the update of the winning number determination timer is restarted.

  In other words, the winning number determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (no game end determination is made), and 30 minutes have elapsed within the period in which the player is playing a game. The time-out occurs (the time-out control CPU 90120 detects the time-out). At the time of the time-out, the specific effect E is executed only when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the game period of 30 minutes is less than the predetermined number.

  In the above-described production form, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being launched toward the game area 9010. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the game ball entrance in the game area 9010, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects a game ball. Anyway. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game, depending on whether or not the hitting operation handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the launching motor included in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

  Thus, even if the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period (30 minute game period) is less than the predetermined number. Then, it is notified that the number of winnings in the general winning opening during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. By this notification, the player can grasp that the frequency of winning in the general winning opening is low, and can use it as a reference (for example, judgment material for selecting a base) when playing the game. In the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific effect E is high), the game nails are made so that the winning frequency at the general winning opening becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance.

  In addition, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is being played by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is performed by the player. If the number of prizes received in the general prize opening during a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 90120 executes processing based on the timeout of the winning number determination timer) By doing so, the execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

  It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number because the player is not playing a game. In this case, the specific effect is produced at a lower rate than the case where it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is being performed by the player. E may be executed.

[45th effect form]
In the 43rd effect form and the 44th effect form, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Regardless, the specific effect E is executed. However, the execution ratio of the specific effect E may be varied according to the state when this determination is made. In the forty-fifth production mode, the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) determined that the number of wins to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number However, (1) the specific effect E is executed in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is not executed in the probability variation state or the short time state.

  Note that the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer has timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer has timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number is ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and (2) In the case of the probability changing state or the short-time state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. May be. As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effects E at different ratios according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[46th effect form]
In the 43rd effect form and the 44th effect form, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Regardless, the specific effect E is executed in the common mode. However, the specific effect E may be varied depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 46th performance mode, the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number However, (1) When it is in the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output). The program is executed in two modes (image display only).

  Specifically, the first aspect of the specific effect E is informed to the image display device 905 along with an image display notification indicating that the number of winnings in the general winning award in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. This is a mode in which notification is performed by sound output for outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the second mode of the specific effect E is a mode in which only notification by image display is performed and notification by sound output is not performed.

  Note that the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer has timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer has timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number is (1 ) In the normal state, for example, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode at a rate of 80% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 20%). The specific effect E may be executed in the first mode at a rate of 20%, for example (executed in the second mode at a rate of 80%). As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E in a different mode according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winning in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[Modification of the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form]
The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is similar to the other specific effects A to D executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, and the display setting table of FIG. The execution can be switched according to the above. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to display setting (second position), and display setting is performed by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 in the setting screen of FIG. 58). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not the specific effect E is executed can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

  For example, when it is not desired to execute the specific effect E on the game hall side, the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player setting by switching the display changeover switch 9032 to the non-display setting (first position). . By having such a configuration, whether or not to execute the specific performance E, that is, whether or not to notify the difficulty of winning a prize in the general winning opening is reflected with priority given to the intention of the game hall side. Can be made.

  The value of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect form, the value of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect form, and the value of the winning number counter area, which are stored in the RAM 90122, are both If it is not backed up at the time of disconnection and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, it is erased accordingly. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect form and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect form are both invalid. The timer value is not referred to until the predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 90120. Further, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the 44th effect form becomes 0 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed.

  In this way, with the stop of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is erased without being backed up, and when power supply is resumed, addition starts from 0 again. become. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a control burden that requires providing backup means at the time of power interruption.

  As in the 45th effect form and the 46th effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the category for differentiating the effect mode of the specific effect E is either (1) whether the gaming state is a normal state or (2 ) It is not limited to whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short-time state. For example, it may be classified as (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change or (2) a period before the reach state is established in the reach change. Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, it may be classified as (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good. Furthermore, according to the difference of these divisions, both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the aspect of the specific effect E may be different.

  It should be noted that the specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is executed when the number of wins to the general winning opening in the predetermined game period is less than the predetermined number. Not only in such a form, among the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, only a specific general winning opening is targeted, and the predetermined number of winnings to the specific general winning opening in a predetermined period is a predetermined number. The specific effect E may be executed when the number is smaller. For example, only the second general winning port 9050B and the third general winning port 9050C, which have higher game ball winning frequencies than the first general winning port 9050A and the fourth general winning port 9050D, are targeted for the general winning port during a predetermined game period. The specific effect E may be executed when the number of winnings is counted and the counted number of winnings is smaller than a predetermined number.

  Further, in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form, the specific effect E is executed when the number of wins to the general winning opening within a certain time (10 minutes or 30 minutes) is less than the predetermined number. However, the period for determining the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not limited to this. The period may be defined by the number of executions of the special figure game. For example, the variable display related to the special figure game may be executed 100 times. Further, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the present time, or may be a period defined by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). In addition, the period may be a period controlled to a predetermined gaming state, for example, a period controlled to a normal state (a period in which a game is performed by left-handed), a probability change state or a time reduction It may be a period controlled by the state (a period in which a game is played with a right hand).

  Furthermore, the following method may be used as a method for determining whether or not the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening during a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

(A) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening with respect to a predetermined number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is smaller than the predetermined number. During driving of the launch motor provided in the hitting ball launching device, approximately 100 game balls are launched into the game area 9010 in one minute. Therefore, for example, the specific effect E may be executed when the number of winnings in the general winning opening with respect to 1000 shot balls (corresponding to a game period of 10 minutes) is less than a predetermined number. . In addition, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is calculated, and the specific effect E is executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. May be.

  Also, the ratio of the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot into the game area 9010 is different depending on whether the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio or not less than a predetermined ratio. A specific effect may be executed. For example, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is low, the character A appears and the winning frequency to the general winning opening is low. When the level is informed and the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot in the game area 9010 is a medium ratio higher than the low ratio, the character B appears. Then, it is notified that the winning frequency at the general winning opening is at a medium level, and the ratio of the winning number to the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot in the game area 9010 is higher than the medium ratio. In the case of the ratio, it may be notified that the character C appears and the winning frequency to the general winning opening is high.

(B) You may make it determine whether the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to a general winning opening in a predetermined period is smaller than a predetermined number. For example, when 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball is won at the general prize opening, the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning at the general prize opening in the game period of 30 minutes The specific effect E may be executed when the number is less than 30 (3 wins). In addition, whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening for a predetermined number of balls (for example, 1000 shots) shot in the game area 9010 is less than the predetermined number. The ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot in the game area 9010 is calculated, and the ratio is predetermined. The specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning to the general prize opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is lower than a predetermined ratio, or more than a predetermined ratio It may be made to perform the specific effect of a different aspect with the case where it is.

  As described above, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number. It should be noted that such a form can be applied even in a case where a different number of prize balls are paid out depending on a general winning opening where game balls have been won.

(C) It may be determined whether or not the number of winning in the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number (for example, 5) with respect to a predetermined number of winning (for example, 100) in the starting winning opening. It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the number of winnings in the general winning opening with respect to the number of winnings in the starting winning opening, and to execute the specific effect E when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general prize opening with respect to a predetermined number of winning balls (eg, 10,000) paid out in accordance with the winning in the start winning opening is more than the predetermined number. It is also possible to determine whether or not the number is less, and the number of prize balls that are paid out in response to the winning prize in the starting prize opening is the prize ball that is paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general prize opening. The ratio of numbers may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general prize opening to the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the starting prize slot is lower than a predetermined percentage. And the specific effect of a different aspect may be performed when it is more than a predetermined ratio.

  In addition, for example, the total number of winning balls for a predetermined period when the gaming state is in the normal state (in accordance with the number of winning balls paid out in accordance with the winning at the starting winning opening and the winning at the general winning opening) The total number of award balls paid out) is calculated as a percentage of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general winning opening, and the percentage is lower than the predetermined percentage. The specific effect E may be executed. Moreover, you may make it perform the specific production of a different aspect according to the ratio.

(D) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening for a predetermined consumption amount (for example, 1000 yen) in the gaming machine is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 times). The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the amount of money consumed in the gaming machine may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In such a form, a different predetermined number (for example, twice for 4 yen, 8 for 1 yen, etc.) depending on the rental unit price (for example, 4 yen, 1 yen, etc.) of the game media used in the gaming machine. Etc.) or different predetermined ratios (for example, 2 times / 1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times / 1000 yen for 1 yen, etc.) are applied. In addition, specific effects in different modes are executed depending on whether the percentage of the number of winnings in the general prize opening with respect to the amount of money consumed in the gaming machine is lower than a predetermined ratio or more than a predetermined ratio You may make it do.

[47th effect form]
In the 47th effect mode shown in FIG. 83, a character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening, and the first start winning opening is displayed within the period during which the character is displayed. Effective start winning of the game ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the first start winning port when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first start winning port is less than the upper limit value) and the game to the second start winning port Based on the occurrence of one of the effective start winnings of the ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning port is less than the upper limit value) In the start winning storage display area 905H, a hold change effect is executed in which the display portion corresponding to the variable display game held including the variable display game based on the generated effective start win is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. .

  It is to be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 holds the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning in a special manner from the beginning without going through the normal manner based on the occurrence of the effective starting winning. You may make it perform change production. For example, when a new effective start winning occurs, the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the new effective start winning in accordance with the action that the displayed character swings up the wand etc. May be displayed not in the normal mode but in a special mode (from the beginning of the display of the hold information, a state in which the hold information in the special mode corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is finally established exists).

  Here, in the 47th effect form, and in the 48th effect form and the 49th effect form, which will be described later, each time the game ball wins any one of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port, the random number circuit 90124. The random number for character determination is extracted from. Then, based on the extracted character determination random number, the character determination table in FIG. 81 indicates whether or not to make the character appear and which of the characters A to C when the character appears. Determine at the indicated rate.

  The random number for character determination by the effect control CPU 90120 may be extracted only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting a random number for character determination on the condition that it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state, it is possible to limit the character from appearing during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state. . In addition, it is possible to prevent characters from appearing after the reach state is established by not extracting the random numbers for character determination after the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is being executed.

  In the example of FIG. 81, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 10% when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the first general prize opening 9050A. It is determined that the character B appears at a rate of 30%, and the character C is determined to appear at a rate of 60%. Also, when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the second general prize opening 9050B, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 50%, and character A appears at a rate of 35%. It is determined that the character B appears at a rate of 10%, and the character C is determined to appear at a rate of 5%.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 decides that no character appears at a rate of 90% when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the third general prize opening 9050C, and 10% The character C is determined to appear at a ratio. Also, when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 75%, and a character C appears at a rate of 25%. Decide to let

  That is, in this example, when a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left gaming area 9010A, the third gaming area 9010B provided in the right gaming area 9010B. Characters appear at a higher rate than when the game ball wins at either the general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Since the player launches a game ball in the left game area 9010A when the game state is in the normal state, and in the normal state, the player releases a game ball in the right game area 9010B in the normal state. Characters appear at a higher rate than the state or the short time state.

  Then, in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, the specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect)) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (effective start winning, reach state) during the period in which the character is displayed. , The specific effect G (the change result notice effect by dialogue) is executed, and in these effect forms, when the game state is the normal state, the game state is higher than when the game state is the probability change state or the short time state. Specific effects can be executed at a rate.

  In this way, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous compared to the probability variation state and the short time state, and the player's game, for example, the state of low interest in variable display of the special figure game is low. By making the execution frequency high, the interest is improved. On the other hand, the probability variation state and the short time state are advantageous compared to the normal state, and the player's game, for example, the state of high interest in variable display of special figure games is high. However, if it remains high, it may be detrimental. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set low.

  In addition to the example shown in FIG. 81, even when a game ball wins the same general winning opening, the proportion of characters appearing in accordance with the game state may be different. For example, the normal state When a game ball is won at the second general prize opening 9050B, a character appears at a rate of 50%. However, when a game ball is won at the second general prize opening 9050B in the probability variation state and the short-time state, 10%. Characters may appear at a rate of.

  Further, the character can appear only in the normal state, and the character may not appear in the probability variation state and the short time state. Thus, in order to “make the execution rate of the effect in one state different from the execution rate of the effect in the other state”, the effect can be executed only in one state and the effect is not executed in the other state. Is included. In contrast to the example shown in FIG. 81, the appearance ratio of characters in the probability variation state and the normal state may be higher than the appearance ratio of characters in the normal state.

  In the example of FIG. 81, when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A, characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 9050B. Yes. Further, when a game ball wins in the fourth general winning opening 9050D, characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C. In this embodiment, when a game ball is fired in the left game area 9010A, the game ball is more frequently won in the second general prize opening 9050B than in the first general prize opening 9050A, and the right game area 9010B is entered. When a game ball is fired, the frequency at which the game ball wins in the third general winning port 9050C is higher than that in the fourth general winning port 9050D. That is, when a game ball wins a general winning opening where it is difficult for a game ball to win, a character appears at a higher rate than when a game ball wins a general winning slot where a game ball easily wins. On the other hand, when a game ball is won in a general winning opening where a game ball is easy to win, a higher percentage of characters are played than when a game ball is won in a general winning port where a game ball is difficult to win. You may make it appear.

  Also, in the example of FIG. 81, characters that may be displayed when a game ball wins in the first general winning port 9050A and the second general winning port 9050B that are frequently played in the normal state are as follows. Although it is the characters A to C, there is a possibility that the game ball is displayed when the game ball wins in the third general winning port 9050C and the fourth general winning port 9050D that are frequently played in the probability changing state and the short time state. The character with is only the character C. In the probability variation state and the short time state, which are gaming states that have a higher gaming interest compared to the normal state, the occurrence of a situation in which the character display period elapses without the predetermined condition being met, although the character has appeared, Since it is possible to cause a decrease, only the character C having the longest display period can be displayed.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 81, and even when a game ball has won a prize in the same general winning opening, characters appearing according to the game state may be different. 2 When a game ball is won at the general winning opening 9050B, the characters A to C may be displayed. However, when a game ball wins at the second general winning opening 9050B in the probability variation state and the short time state, the character is displayed. Only C may be displayed. Also, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 81, the number of characters that may be displayed in the probability variation state and the normal state is set to be larger than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. May be.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a display period of each character displayed on the image display device 905. It is assumed that the characters A to C are immediately displayed on the image display device 905 at the timing when the character to be displayed is determined based on the winning in the general winning opening. That is, the character is displayed immediately after the winning in the general winning opening, so that the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred.

  When the character A is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within 1 minute from the start of display (effective start winning, reach state is established), from the start of display of the character A Character A is erased from the screen at the timing when one minute has elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within one minute from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character A is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

  The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to a game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (including a condition related to an effect executed as the game progresses). Even when an effective start prize is generated, if the number of variable display games held including the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize is 1, the start condition for the variable display game is satisfied. Since the start condition is satisfied immediately after the hold (hold information is deleted), it is difficult to secure a period for executing the hold change effect by the displayed character. Therefore, when the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start winning is equal to or less than the predetermined number (1 in this example), the hold change effect is not executed, and the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start winning is the predetermined number. If the number is greater than (1 in this example), the hold change effect may be executed.

  Further, the character may be deleted when the game state is changed to the big hit game state or when the above-described effect control CPU 90120 determines the game end. Also, the character displayed on the image display device 905 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped is not displayed again after the power supply is resumed. That is, it is assumed that the backup process for displaying the character displayed before the power interruption on the image display device 905 after the power supply is resumed is not performed.

  Note that the execution of the specific effect F (holding change effect) causes the reserved character to be stored in the holding memory as the appearing character performs a predetermined action (that is, according to a change in the mode of the displayed object). Both the case where the aspect of the corresponding display part changes and the case where it does not change shall be included. Moreover, the timing at which the specific effect F (holding change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action. Specifically, as shown in FIG. In the example, the character A is used. However, in the specific effect F (holding change effect), the character B may appear or the character C may appear). This is the timing at which the action effect for covering the corresponding display part is performed for a certain period of time (a predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

  Also, the execution of the specific effect G (change result notice effect) means that as shown in FIGS. 85 (f) and 85 (g), the character 903100 that appears (the character B in this example is the specific effect G). In (variation result notice effect), when character A appears or character C may appear), it means that a predetermined dialogue is issued, and the timing at which specific effect G (variation result notice effect) ends is This is the timing when the dialogue of the character is displayed for a certain period of time (a predetermined dialogue display period has elapsed).

  When the character B is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within 2 minutes from the start of display (effective start winning, reach state is established), from the start of the display of the character B Character B is erased from the screen at the timing when two minutes have elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within two minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character B is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

  When the character C is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) when the predetermined condition (effective start winning, establishment of reach state) is not established within 3 minutes from the start of display, the display of the character C is started. Character C is erased from the screen at the timing when 3 minutes have elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character C is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

  As described above, based on the fact that the game ball is won in the general winning opening, the character is immediately displayed on the image display device 905, so that the player is in a state after the game ball has won the general winning opening. Can be recognized. In addition, the period during which the character is displayed is a specific period in which the specific effect can be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the period when the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the specific effect based on the character is not executed, the player recognizes that the specific effect is executed if the predetermined condition is satisfied while the character is displayed, and plays the game to satisfy the predetermined condition. As a result, the interest of the game is enhanced until a specific performance is executed.

  Further, since the display period differs depending on the character to be displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is being displayed. The player who has confirmed the character type can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period during which the predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute the specific effect. Thereby, the interest until a specific effect is performed can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, the appearance ratio of each character, that is, the set ratio for a specific period in which a predetermined condition must be established differs depending on the general winning opening, so that the player can play a game ball in any general winning opening. You will be interested in winning.

(Specific example of specific effect F (holding change effect))
In the 47th effect form shown in FIG. 83, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905 and an effective start winning is generated, the character displayed as the specific effect F is displayed. The hold change effect with the action is executed. As described above, the occurrence of the effective start winning is the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit, and the second That is, winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening occurs when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value.

  The effect control CPU 90120 has received a start winning port designation command for specifying “first start winning port” or “second start winning port” and a start winning determination result specifying command including valid data that is not blank data. Based on this, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of the effective start winning. FIG. 84 shows a specific example of the hold change effect in the 47th effect form.

  In FIG. 84 (a), decoration symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 2. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, among the variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first. Is displayed in the normal mode, and the display part (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game that satisfies the start condition second is displayed in the normal mode.

  At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 determines to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the game ball has won the second general winning opening 9050B (see FIG. 81). In FIG. 84 (b), based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a character 903000 (character A) having a wand 903001 on the image display device 905. It is assumed that the character A appears on the screen immediately after the general winning.

  Then, it is assumed that an effective start winning is made to the first start winning opening within one minute from the appearance of the character A, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In FIG. 84 (c), accordingly, the number of reserved memories becomes 3, and the display part (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game that satisfies the start condition third is displayed in the normal mode. The production control CPU 90120 that has detected the occurrence of the effective start winning, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, determines whether or not to change the display portion corresponding to each of the three reserved storages from the normal mode to the special mode. Each is determined.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 has each start prize determination result designation command (not blank data) stored in the start prize command storage area for the first special figure and the start prize command storage area for the second special figure. (Contains valid data). Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (d), regarding the start winning determination result designation command for designating “big hit”, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. It is determined that the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, regarding the start winning determination result designation command for designating “out of”, it is decided to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and the rate of 90% Thus, it is determined that the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode.

  In this example, regarding the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game in which the first and second start conditions are satisfied, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode. Only with respect to the start prize determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied for the third time, the display part mode corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. Suppose that it is decided to make it happen (with pending change).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (e), the effect control CPU 90120 has the character 903000 (character A) point the tip of the cane 903001 to the start winning memory display area 905H and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the cane 903001. As a result, an action effect in such a manner that a display part corresponding to each reserved storage is surrounded is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 84 (f), the effect control CPU 90120 changes the display mode to the normal mode based on the determination described above for the second display part from the left end and the left with the execution of the action effect. For the third display portion from the left without changing, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the determination described above. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period, the character 903000 (character A) having the cane 903001 and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the cane 903001 are erased from the screen.

  As a result of the change in the display portion mode accompanying the action effect, the player will see the third display portion from the left as a result of the action of the character 903000 (character A) that has appeared based on the winning in the general winning opening. Recognizes that the game has changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and expects a variable display game executed three times after the currently executed variable display game.

  On the other hand, in FIGS. 84 (c) and 84 (d), regarding the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the three variable display games for which the start condition is not satisfied, all of the display part modes corresponding to the command are normally set. When it is decided not to change the mode (no change in hold), after the action effect shown in FIG. 84 (e) is performed, three hold memories are stored as shown in FIG. 84 (g). None of the three corresponding reserved sites remain in the normal mode.

  Thus, the effective start winning is generated during the character display period by executing the specific effect F (holding change effect) triggered by the fact that “the effective start winning has occurred within the period during which the character is displayed”. Whether or not the game ball is won at the general winning opening until the specific effect is executed can be enhanced. In addition, a game ball is placed at the general prize opening by an effect configuration in which a display result of the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been established is triggered by an event of winning a prize at the general prize opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game. It is possible to further enhance the interest from winning a prize until a specific performance is executed.

  Also, with the action of the character 903000 (character A), of the display parts corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been established, the display form of any display part changes from the normal form to the special form. If not, and if it changes, it can be noted which display mode of the display part changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, it is possible to improve interest by suggesting a variable display game that a player can expect.

  In addition, an effect that suggests winning in the general prize opening (appearance of character A) and an effect that suggests a display result of a variable display game in which the start condition is not satisfied (action of character A) are common objects ( By being constituted by the character A), it is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific effect is executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening. The common object suggests the winning to the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied, thereby relating to the appearance and action of the character. It can increase the player's interest.

  The specific effect F (holding change effect) is a variable display game corresponding to an effective start prize (an effective start prize that has been determined to satisfy a predetermined condition) as an opportunity to execute the hold change effect. Lastly, the display results are announced for each variable display game that is held, including the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the hold change effect is executed. Targeting only the variable display game (variable display game where the start condition was finally satisfied) corresponding to the effective start prize (the effective start prize determined that the predetermined condition was established) The display result may be notified in advance. On the other hand, the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize that triggered the execution of the on-hold change effect (the effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was met) (the last start condition) The display result may be notified in advance by targeting a variable display game (except for the variable display game in which is established).

(Character deletion process)
Similarly to the specific effects A to D, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (holding change effect) is provided. When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the displayed character from the screen, and at the same time, wins history (at least the first general prize opening 9050A to the first general winning opening 9050A to the first) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F. (1) One or more winning histories to the general winning opening 9050D and one or more winning histories to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are included (the winning history of FIG. 83). Reset condition).

  In addition, when the displayed character is erased by the elapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect F, the winning history (at least in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F is associated with this). (Including a winning history at least once for the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 83).

  FIG. 86 (A) is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that a decorative display variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. When the variable display 1 is being executed, one of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won one of the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D at the timing (1). The

  When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (2) after one minute has passed since the appearance without generating an effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 is ended and the variable display 2 is started. However, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed but is continuously displayed. Yes. If an effective start prize is generated within one minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is not displayed after the action effect ends.

  When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (3) after 2 minutes from the appearance without generating an effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 is ended and the variable display 2 is started. Further, the variable display 2 is ended and the variable display 3 is started. However, the variable display 1 is ended, the variable display 2 is started, and the variable display 2 starts. With the end of the display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not displayed but is continuously displayed. If an effective start winning is generated within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the action effect ends.

  When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when 5 minutes have passed since the appearance without generating an effective start winning. In this example, the action effect is executed without the character being hidden because the effective start winning is generated at the timing of (4) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C. At the timing (5) when the production ends, the display portion corresponding to one or more reserved memories changes from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, the variable display 1 is finished and the variable display 2 is started, the variable display 2 is finished and the variable display 3 is started, and the variable display 3 is finished and the variable display 4 is started. With the end of display 1 and the start of variable display 2, the end of variable display 2 and the start of variable display 3, and the end of variable display 3 and the start of variable display 4, character C is not hidden. It is displayed continuously.

  As described above, once the character is displayed, it is continuously displayed until “a predetermined condition is satisfied” or “a predetermined period of time elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”. ing. Then, the character is not displayed at the earlier timing of “the predetermined condition is satisfied” and “the predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”.

[48th effect form]
In the forty-eighth effect form shown in FIG. 83, the character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, and the reach state is established within the period during which the character is displayed. Based on the display result of the variable display game being executed (variable display game with a variation pattern with a reach state) is displayed. That is, the display control of the character is the same as in the 47th effect form, but the predetermined condition to be established within the character display period and the type of the specific effect executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied are different.

(Specific example of specific effect G (change result notice effect))
In the forty-eighth effect form shown in FIG. 83, when the reach state is established in a state where any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905, the character displayed as the specific effect G is displayed. The change result notice effect accompanied by the dialogue display is executed. As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the variation pattern. Therefore, when the variable display game with the reach state is being executed, and the remaining time of the variable display game with the reach state has reached a predetermined reach state establishment timing, the fact that the reach state has been established The specific effect G can be executed if the character is displayed at this time. FIG. 85 shows a specific example of the change result notice effect in the 48th effect form.

  In FIG. 85 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 determines to cause the character B to appear at a rate of 30% based on the fact that the game ball has won the first general winning opening 9050A (see FIG. 81). In FIG. 85 (b), based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the character 903100 (character B) having the wand 903101 on the image display device 905. Character B shall appear on the screen immediately after the general winning.

  In FIG. 85 (c), it is assumed that after the appearance of the character B, the variable display of decorative symbols that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a finalized decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses with “2” on the left, “1” on the right, and “3” on the middle is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the leftmost display region is not displayed.

  It is assumed that the reach state is established and the predetermined condition is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B. In FIG. 85 (e), with the establishment of the reach state, a character 903050 is displayed at the top of the screen. The production control CPU 90120 that detects the establishment of the reach state, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, determines the line of the character B.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 checks whether the display result of the decorative display variable display game being executed is determined to be the big hit combination or the lost combination. It should be noted that it may be confirmed whether the last variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is a big hit variation pattern designation command or a deviation variation pattern designation command. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (f), when the display result of the variable display game is determined to be a jackpot combination, the character of the character displaying the “chance!” Line at a rate of 25%. It is determined to be displayed horizontally, and it is determined to display the line “Intense heat !!” next to the character being displayed at a rate of 75%. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is a combination of lost, it is determined to display the line “chance!” Next to the displayed character at a rate of 90%. % Will be displayed next to the character being displayed at the rate of%.

  In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to display the line “Intense heat !!” next to the character being displayed. Based on this determination, the production control CPU 90120 produces an aspect in which the character 903100 (Character B) swings up the cane 903101 and emits the dialogue 903102 “hot!” As shown in FIG. 85 (g). Is executed. When the dialogue 903102 is displayed for a predetermined period, the character 903100 (character B) having the wand 903101 and the dialogue 903102 emitted from the character 903100 are erased from the screen.

  As a result, for the player, there is a possibility that the decorative symbol that will be the jackpot combination will be finally stopped and displayed as a result of the reach effect due to the dialogue of the character 903100 (character B) that has appeared based on the winning in the general winning opening. You can grasp that it is expensive.

  In this way, whether or not the reach state is established in the character display period by executing the specific effect G (change result notice effect) triggered by “the reach state is established within the period during which the character is displayed”. It is possible to make it interested in whether or not, and it is possible to enhance the interest until a specific effect is executed after a game ball is won in the general winning opening. In addition, in the event of a prize-winning event at a general prize opening not related to the progress of the variable display game, a play structure for notifying the display result of a variable display game for which a display result has not been derived and displayed has been announced. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the winning of the ball until the specific performance is executed. In addition, attention can be paid to the dialogue of the character 903000 (character A), and the interest of the character display effect can be improved.

  In addition, an effect that suggests winning in the general prize opening (appearance of character B) and an effect that suggests the display result of the variable display game whose display result is not derived and displayed (the line of character B) are common objects. By being constituted by (Character B), it is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific effect is executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening. Then, a common object suggests a winning to a general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game and a display result of the variable display game that is not fixed, so that the player's appearance and dialogue regarding the appearance of the character and dialogue Increase interest.

  In the forty-eighth effect form, the specific effect G in which the character emits a predetermined dialogue is executed when the reach state is established, that is, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is in a predetermined mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the specific effect G may be executed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, for example, when a predetermined notice effect different from the specific effect G (for example, a step-up notice effect executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed when variable display of decorative symbols is executed. The specific effect G may be executed as follows.

  Moreover, in the 48th effect form, the example in which the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening regardless of the decorative display variable display mode has been described. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern executed when the game ball is won at the general winning opening becomes a predetermined mode. For example, the game ball is won at the general winning opening. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed at the time of reaching the reach state (the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is being executed).

(Character deletion process)
As with the specific effects A to D and the specific effects F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the displayed character from the screen, and at the same time, wins history (at least the first general prize opening 9050A to the first general winning opening 9050A to the first game) corresponding to the specific effect G. 4 is included (including a history of one or more winnings to the general winning opening 9050D) (winning history reset condition in FIG. 83).

  In addition, when the displayed character is erased with the elapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect G, the winning history (at least in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G is associated with this). (Including a winning history at least once for the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 83).

  FIG. 86 (B) is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the decorative display variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. Of these, the reach effect is executed only on the variable display 4 and the reach state is reached. Is assumed to hold. When the variable display 1 is being executed, one of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won one of the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D at the timing of (11). The

  When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (12) when one minute has elapsed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed but is continuously displayed. When the reach state is established within one minute from the appearance of character A, character A is not displayed after the end of the line display effect.

  When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (13) when two minutes have passed since the appearance without establishment of the reach state. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, and the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is continuously displayed instead of being hidden. If the reach state is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the end of the dialogue display effect.

  When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when 5 minutes have passed since the appearance without the reach state being established. In this example, the dialogue display effect is executed without the character being hidden because the reach state is established at the timing of (14) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C. During this time, the character C is not displayed as the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts. It is displayed continuously.

[49th effect form]
In the 47th effect form and the 48th effect form described above, an example is shown in which a specific effect is executed as long as a predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of which type of character A to C is displayed. However, only when a specific type of character is displayed, a specific type of specific effect may be executed.

  For example, in the 49th effect form shown in FIG. 83, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed based on the fact that an effective start winning is generated during the period in which either the character A or B is displayed. Thus, even if an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is not executed. In addition, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed based on the fact that the reach state is established within the period during which the character C is displayed, and the character A or B is temporarily displayed. Even if the reach state is established within a certain period, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is not executed.

  As described above, according to the type of character to be displayed, that is, the notification mode for notifying that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the predetermined condition for enabling execution of the specific effect, and the predetermined condition The types of specific effects executed based on the establishment may be different.

  In addition, although the predetermined condition for enabling execution of the specific effect is common regardless of the type of the displayed character, the specific that is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the type of the displayed character The type of production may be different. For example, when an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed (the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is not executed). However, when an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed (the specific effect F (holding change effect) is not executed). May be.

  Moreover, although the predetermined conditions for enabling execution of a specific effect differ depending on the type of character displayed, it is executed when a predetermined condition corresponding to each is established regardless of the type of character displayed. The types of specific effects may be common. For example, when an effective start prize is generated during the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed (even if the reach state is established within that period, the specific effect F is specified) However, when the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed (assuming that an effective start prize is generated within that period). However, the specific effect F may not be executed).

  In addition, if an effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action is displayed. After the execution, the character is deleted. (2) When the reach state is established prior to the effective start winning, the character is displayed after executing the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) in which the displayed character emits speech. It may be deleted. As described above, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) may be satisfied within the display period of one character, and the predetermined condition previously satisfied among the plurality of predetermined conditions is set. A corresponding type of specific effect may be executed.

  In addition, if an effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action is displayed. The character is deleted after being executed, and (2) the character is deleted after executing the specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action even when the reach state is established prior to the effective start winning. You may make it do. In this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) may be satisfied within the display period of one character, and a specific effect is produced when any of the predetermined conditions is satisfied. You may make it perform.

[Modification of 47th Production Mode to 49th Production Mode]
In the example of FIG. 82, when a predetermined condition is established and a specific effect is executed within a predetermined period after the character is displayed, the character is erased before the end of the specific period. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may be continuously displayed until the specific period ends even after the specific effect is executed. good.

  In the case of such a form, a specific effect may be executed every time a predetermined condition is satisfied within a period during which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on a winning in the general winning opening, the character C continues without disappearing from the screen for 5 minutes when the character C is displayed even if an effective start winning occurs. The specific effect F (holding change effect) may be executed every time an effective start prize is generated for 5 minutes.

  In the example of FIG. 82, the example in which the character display period is a predetermined period (1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes) has been described. However, the display period of the character is not limited to such a form. The period until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times or the period until the variable display game being executed when the character is displayed may be completed, and the character is displayed. It is good also as a period until the game state (for example, a normal state, a probability change state or a time-short state, a big hit game state) is complete | finished.

  Further, there may be a character that is continuously displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of the display period. That is, once such a character is displayed, it is assumed that the character is not erased until a predetermined condition is established and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

  In addition, the character display period may be determined before the character type to be displayed is determined, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball wins a general winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the character display period is one minute, two minutes, or three minutes, and is determined. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected at a rate of 70%, character B is selected at a rate of 20%, character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is 2 minutes. If the character B is selected at a rate of 70%, the character A is selected at a rate of 15%, the character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, C may be selected at a rate of 70%, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, different display periods may be determined depending on which general winning opening the game ball has won or depending on the game state.

  In addition, the predetermined condition to be satisfied in order to enable execution of the specific performance is not limited to the above-mentioned effective start winning or reach state, but the occurrence of a big hit gaming state, a predetermined type of big hit gaming state (for example, probability variation big hit, or The number of rounds with the greatest number of rounds, the number of prize balls awarded in the big hit gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive big hit gaming states (the number of consecutive = the winning state after the end of the big hit gaming state) The number of consecutive big hit gaming states controlled by the state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, the end of the big hit gaming state, the predetermined gaming state (for example, the probability variation state) has been controlled, and the display result is a lost combination A variable display game has been repeated a predetermined number of times, a variable display game having a variation pattern of “non-reach” (“losing without reach”) has been continued a predetermined number of times, and a pending storage There may be a satisfied conditions with such that you have reached the predetermined number, the other conditions, i.e., in the game. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period in which the special symbol variable display is being executed, but the special symbol variable display (the effect corresponding to the special symbol variable display) such as the period controlled in the big hit gaming state is executed. It may be performed during a period that is not performed.

  In the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form, an example is shown in which the notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is the hold change effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b) described above, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot hold, an effect of only sound is executed or an effect by the sound and the movable accessory 901000 is executed. It may be a pre-reading notice effect with a different ratio of whether or not, or it may be a chance eye notice effect as shown in a 50th effect form or a 51st effect form to be described later. Further, it may be a countdown notice effect in which the player is notified of the remaining variable display count until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice.

  In the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form, after the character is displayed based on the fact that the game ball has been won in the general winning opening, the displayed character is the mode of the hold information by the occurrence of the effective start winning. Although the example of executing the hold change effect for changing the game is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a game ball wins a game in a general winning opening, determination at the start winning prize corresponding to each variable display game held Check the result specification command and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command, and if there is a variable display game with a big hit display result or a variable display game with a reach state, it will be at a higher rate than when it does not exist A character may appear. In addition, when there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the rate at which a specific character appears may be higher than when there is no such game. Further, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, and a case in which there is no reach. Then, when an effective start winning occurs after the appearance of the character (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is preferable that the displayed character performs a hold change effect that changes the mode of the hold information.

  In the 47th to 49th effect forms, when the big hit game state is controlled, the displayed character is erased, and during the period in which the big hit game state is controlled, a game ball is placed in the general winning opening. Even if a prize is won, a specific effect may not be executed by preventing a new character from appearing. As a result, the player's consciousness is concentrated on various effects (for example, fanfare effect, in-round effect, ending effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the control to the big hit gaming state so as not to disturb these various effects. be able to.

  In the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, the example in which the specific effect is always executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period has been described. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character A, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 25%, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character B, the specific effect is performed at the rate of 50%. When the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character C, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 100%, for example, the specific effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the displayed character. The execution ratio may be varied.

  Here, in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening when the character is displayed, the display of a new character based on winning in the general winning opening is as follows. It is assumed that the already displayed character is continuously displayed without performing the above. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the presence / absence of the character display and the character to be displayed at the ratio shown in FIG. 81 on the condition that no character is displayed when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. The character is displayed based on the determination.

  In addition, not only in such a form, when a character is displayed when a game ball wins in a general winning opening, instead of the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (already displayed The character may be deleted) and the character based on the subsequent general winning may be displayed.

  In addition, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is compared with the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize, and the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is If the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize is longer, it is displayed instead of the character based on the previous general prize (already The displayed character may be deleted), and the character based on the subsequent general winning may be displayed.

  In such a form, when displaying a character based on the subsequent general winning instead of the character based on the previous general winning (deleting the already displayed character), the character display period based on the subsequent general winning In addition, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed may be added (the period during which both are added is taken as the display period of the newly displayed character).

  In addition, in the 47th to 49th presentation forms, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening during the character display period, no new character is displayed based on the winning in the general winning opening. The remaining display period of characters that have already been displayed may be extended. Here, the period to be extended (the time to be added to the remaining display period) may be a display period (for example, 1 minute if character A is displayed) defined for the already displayed character. Also, even when a winning in the general winning opening occurs during the character display period, one of the characters is determined at the rate shown in FIG. 81, and the determined character (however, newly displayed) A display period (for example, 2 minutes for character B) corresponding to the character that is not displayed may be added to the remaining display period of the already displayed character.

(Display of multiple characters)
In addition, when a character is displayed when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, the character is displayed along with the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (without deleting the already displayed character). The character based on the general prize may also be displayed. For example, when it is determined that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when the character A is displayed and the character B is newly displayed, a new character is added in addition to the already displayed character A. B may also be displayed on the image display device 905.

  In such a form, a period obtained by adding the character display period based on the subsequent general prize to the remaining character display period based on the previous general prize is set as a common display period for both characters. May be. In this case, when the predetermined condition is satisfied before the common display period elapses, the specific effect is executed, and either one character or both characters are erased. Further, when a common display period elapses without satisfying the predetermined condition, both characters are erased.

  In addition, in a state where both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 905, first, a first predetermined condition (for example, effective When the start prize is established and the first specific effect (for example, the specific effect F (holding change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed, the first character is deleted and only the second character is present. Next, the second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is established, and the second specific effect (for example, the specific effect G (variation result) based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition is established. When the notice effect) is executed, the second character may be deleted. Here, the first character and the second character may be the same type of character.

  In such a form, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be set as a common condition (for example, occurrence of an effective start prize). In this case, both the first character and the second character The first specific effect by the first character and the second specification by the second character based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, the occurrence of a one-time effective start prize) in the state displayed on the image display device 905. Both the effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are deleted.

  Further, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effect (for example, the specific effect F (holding change effect)), and in this case, both the first character and the second character are image display devices. When the first predetermined condition (for example, effective start winning) corresponding to the first character is established in the state displayed in 905, a certain type of specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect)) is executed, and the first When one character is erased and only the second character is displayed, and then a second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, a specific effect (specific effect F ( The second character may be deleted by executing the hold change effect)).

  In addition, as in the 49th effect form, if the first character (character A or B) is being displayed, the first specific effect (specific effect) according to the establishment of the first condition (occurrence of an effective start prize). F) can be executed, and the second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed in accordance with the establishment of the second condition (establishment of the reach state) during the period in which the second character (character C) is displayed. In this case, it is assumed that only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed simultaneously). Here, when the second specific effect is executed, if the ratio of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) is higher than when the first specific effect is executed, the second character is the first character. It is assumed that it is displayed with priority over the character. For example, when it is determined to display the second character based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when the first character is displayed, the first character is deleted and the second character is deleted. Is newly displayed. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, the control for displaying the first character is not performed instead.

  On the other hand, when the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 at the same time, the first specific effect is executed according to the establishment of the first condition, and the second condition It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of. However, when both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are effects for the same variable display game and the execution periods overlap (for example, both are the change result notice effect of the same variable display game and reach) In the case where it is executed immediately after the state is established), the second specific effect is executed with priority over the first specific effect, and at this time, the first specific effect is not executed.

[50th effect form]
In the 50th effect form shown in FIG. 87, each time a game ball wins a general winning opening, a button icon 904000 is newly displayed on the image display device 905 (see FIG. 88 and the like), and the displayed button icon 904000 is displayed. Depending on the number, the types of specific effects that can be executed are different. Here, each of the specific effects in the effect form is an effect that prompts the player to perform some operation, and is an effect that can notify the display result of the variable display game based on the detection of the player's action. As specific effects, three types of cut-in notice effects (specific effects H), pseudo-continuous notice effects (specific effects I), and chance eye notice effects (specific effects J) are provided.

  The display information condition in FIG. 87 is the display number of button icons 904000 necessary for executing each specific effect. If at least the number of button icons 904000 shown in the display information condition is not displayed, each specific information is displayed. Production is not executed. Specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed unless two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. If three or more button icons 904000 are not displayed, the button icon 904000 is not executed.

  The button icon 904000 displayed on the image display device 905 is incremented by 1 every time a game ball is won in the general winning opening, and a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) can be displayed on the image display device 905. It shall be. When the specific effect is executed, the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the display number of the button icon 904000 required for the execution of the specific effect from the display number of the button icon 904000 before the specific effect execution, It will be displayed on the image display device 905 after execution of the specific effect. For example, when (1) a cut-in notice effect (the number of required button icons to be displayed = 1) is executed in a state where five button icons 904000 are displayed, the button icon after the cut-in notice effect is executed. The number of displays of 904000 is 4, and (2) When the pseudo-continuous notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 2) is executed, the display number of 904000 of the button icons after the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is three. (3) When the chance eye notice effect (required number of button icon displays = 3) is executed, the number of button icons 904000 displayed after the chance eye notice effect is executed becomes two.

(Cut-in notice effect)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is an effect in which after the reach state is established, the display result of the variable display pattern of the variable display pattern is notified based on the content of the characters displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 87, the cut-in notice effect is (1) when one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) when a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern with a reach state. A notification is given to perform a predetermined continuous hitting operation, and (3) the player can execute it by performing the predetermined continuous hitting operation.

  When the variable display game is executed with a variation pattern with a reach state in a state where no button icon 904000 is displayed, notification of the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not given, and the cut-in notice is given. Production is not executed. Further, in a variable display game with a variable pattern that does not involve a reach state, notification of a continuous hit operation related to a cut-in notice effect is not performed, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed.

  Further, in the cut-in notice effect, the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is executed, and then the player operates the operation button 9030 a plurality of times, so the reach effect is executed. The condition is that the variable display game is executed with the variation pattern to be executed. A specific aspect of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 88 (a), decoration pattern variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  The effect control CPU 90120 displays the first button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 88 (b), the screen is updated from a state where the button icon 904000 is not displayed to a state where one button icon 904000 is displayed. In addition, when one or more button icons 904000 are displayed on the screen, a “cut-in” character 904000a indicating that “a cut-in notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition here is that (1) one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) a variable pattern variable display game with a reach state is executed.

  In FIG. 88 (c), it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative pattern that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a definite decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses, “4” on the left, “2” on the right, and “8” in the middle, is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display game is a reach variation pattern with a reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Confirmation is performed based on the variation pattern designation command received from 90100. When the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggesting condition for the cut-in notice effect is satisfied.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the leftmost display region is not displayed.

  In the reach change pattern variable display game, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of displaying the characters 904080 of “reach!” When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. Based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, as shown in FIG. 88 (f), the characters “continuous hit!”, A plurality of downward arrows, and the operation button 9030 are imitated in the center of the screen from the top. The continuous hit suggestion information 904100 composed of an image and a time bar suggesting the remaining period during which the operation is valid is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 9030 should be continuously performed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 erases one button icon 904000 required for executing the cut-in notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 in accordance with the display of the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. As a result, the number of button icons 904000 displayed becomes 0, and the “cut-in” character 904000a is erased from the screen when there is no specific effect that can be executed.

  It is assumed that the player who has recognized the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 continuously performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030 a predetermined number of times or more. The effect control CPU 90120 updates the display of the time bar according to the elapsed time after displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. When the time bar is displayed, it is in a state of 5 stages out of 5 stages, and it is assumed that the time bar is decreased by 1 stage every 1 second from the display. As shown in FIG. 88 (g), the effect control CPU 90120 operates the operation button 9030 a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar reaches 0 level out of 5 levels (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operation is performed, the cut-in mode is determined, and a cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 905.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120, when the continuous hit suggestion condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 88 (h), when the display result of the variable display game to be executed becomes the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination Decides to display the characters “chance!” At a rate of 20% and “burnt!” At a rate of 80%, and the display result of the variable display game to be executed is a losing combination. In the case of the final stop symbol, it is determined that the characters “chance!” Are displayed at a rate of 80% and the characters “burning!” Are displayed at a rate of 20%.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a cut-in notice effect for causing the image display device 905 to display a screen including the determined character. In the example of FIG. 88 (i), the characters 904200 of “Burning !!” are displayed large on the entire screen.

  It should be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 “chance!” If the operation button 9030 has not been operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the start of displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. In addition, it is assumed that neither of the characters “Furious heat !!” is displayed on the screen.

(Pseudo-continuous notice effect)
The pseudo-continuous notice effect provided as the specific effect I is as if multiple times in a variable display game, by performing re-variation that scrolls and temporarily displays the temporarily stopped decorative symbols again and again. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display of decorative symbols is continuously executed. When re-variation is performed, in accordance with the player's each symbol stop operation, the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C has a pseudo-continuous symbol as a decorative symbol (in this example, composed of characters “NEXT”). Shall be temporarily suspended.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is (1) a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or more in a state where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. In such a case, a notification is given to perform each predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can execute it by performing each predetermined symbol stop operation.

  Further, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the player operates the operation button 9030 three times (performs each symbol stop operation three times) within a period in which one variable display game is executed. It is required to execute a variable display game with a variation pattern that requires a certain operation time and has a variation time of a certain time (8 seconds in this example) or more. A specific aspect of the pseudo-continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90.

  In FIG. 89 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and is stored in the reserved memory. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  In addition, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, one button icon 904000 is displayed at the left end of the screen. A “cut-in” character 904000a indicating that the in-notification effect can be executed is displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the second button icon 904000 on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 89B, the screen is updated from the state in which one button icon 904000 is displayed to the state in which two button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, when two or more button icons 904000 are displayed on the screen in total, a “pseudo-ream” character 904000b indicating that “pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion conditions here are (1) a state in which two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or more. is there.

  In FIG. 89 (c), it is assumed that after the second button icon 904000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a fixed decorative pattern, a combination of non-reach loses in which “5” on the left, “1” on the right, and “7” on the middle is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 receives from the game control microcomputer 90100 whether or not the change time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Check based on the change pattern specification command. And when the variation time of the variable display game to be started is 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is established.

  When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), when the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state. Decides to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform re-variation) with a probability of 15%, and not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform no re-variation) at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern with a reach state, it is determined to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (execute revariation) with a probability of 100%.

  When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 90120 temporarily stops the decorative symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L in accordance with each symbol stop operation of the player, and Then, the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R is determined, and the pseudo continuous symbol is determined to be temporarily stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C.

  As described above, when receiving the change start command, the variable display result notification command, and the change pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the change pattern designation command and also displays the variable display result. A confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the notification command is determined. When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R in accordance with the player's respective symbol stopping operations are determined It may be different from the “left” and “right” decorative symbols constituting the decorative symbol (final stop symbol), or may be the same.

  When it is determined not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the “left” decorative symbol display area 905 </ b> L and the “right” decorative symbol display in accordance with each symbol stop operation of the player. In the area 905R and the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C, the “left”, “right”, and “middle” decorative symbols that constitute the determined confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) are respectively oscillated and stopped. Decide on. That is, when the re-variation is not performed, it is determined to stop the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to each symbol stop operation of the player.

  Thus, when the presence / absence of re-variation and the temporary stop symbol for re-variation are determined, as shown in FIG. 89 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, Accordingly, there is no variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the display portion at the left end is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 89 (f), the characters “Press!”, A downward arrow, and an operation button 9030 are displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L in order from the top. Operation suggestion information 904050 composed of a simulated image is displayed. Accordingly, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L.

  Also, the effect control CPU 90120 erases two button icons 904000 necessary for executing the pseudo-announcement effect among the displayed button icons 904000 in accordance with the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. As a result, the number of button icons 904000 displayed becomes zero, and the “cut-in” character 904000a and the “pseudo-continuous” character 904000b are erased from the screen in accordance with the fact that there is no specific effect that can be executed.

  When the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the “left” decorative design display area 905L performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030, as shown in FIG. 89 (g), the “left” decorative design is displayed. The decorative symbol (“1” in this example) is stopped from swinging in the symbol display area 905L. The swing stop is a state in which the decorative symbols are not scrolled in the vertical direction but are not completely stopped and are shaking (the state where the final stop is not displayed). Here, the decorative symbol to be rocked and stopped is the “left” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the temporary stop symbol that has been determined in advance if the pseudo continuous symbol has been determined to be stopped. When it is determined not to stop the continuous symbols, it is a “left” decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of finalized decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

  When the “left” decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 90120 then displays operation suggestion information 904050 in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R, as shown in FIG. 89 (g). . Accordingly, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R.

  When the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030, as shown in FIG. 89 (h), the “right” decorative display The decorative symbol (“2” in this example) is stopped from swinging in the symbol display area 905R. Here, the decorative symbol to be stopped is the “right” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the temporary stop symbols determined in advance when the pseudo continuous symbol is determined to be stopped. When it is determined not to stop the continuous symbols, it is a “right” decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of finalized decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

  When the “right” decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 90120 then displays the operation suggestion information 904050 in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C as shown in FIG. 89 (h). . Accordingly, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C.

  It is assumed that the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030.

  At this time, if the CPU 90120 for effect control has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols based on the table of FIG. 89 (d), as shown in FIG. 90 (i), “medium” In the decorative symbol display area 905C, the pseudo-continuous symbol composed of the characters “NEXT” is stopped. As a result, the combination of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” temporary stop symbols determined in advance is temporarily stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (j), after a temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the decorative symbols change (for example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R) Re-variation is resumed to resume the vertical scroll display. After the re-variation, the combination of the finalized symbols (final stop symbols) is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The display result of the game will be confirmed.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 90120 for effect control has decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols based on the table of FIG. 89 (d), as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display area 905C, the “medium” decorative symbol constituting the combination of the predetermined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) determined in advance is stopped. As a result, the predetermined combination of “left”, “right”, and “medium” determined decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is rocked and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (l), after a predetermined period of swinging stoppage, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined.

  It should be noted that the CPU 90120 for effect control has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo continuous symbols even when the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. In this case, it is assumed that the combination of the temporary stop symbols determined in advance is temporarily stopped and re-variation is executed. That is, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, even if no operation is performed, the temporary stop symbol combination is automatically displayed as temporary stop and re-variation is executed. And

  In this example, when the operation suggestion condition that two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or more is satisfied, The operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by a reach state (that is, regardless of the effect form of the designated fluctuation pattern). The operation suggesting condition may be that two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed in a variation pattern with a reach state. In the case of such an operation suggestion condition, when the display result of the variable display game with the reach state is a big hit, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is lost. It is good to make it.

  In addition, when the presence / absence of execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is preset for each variation pattern determined on the game control microcomputer 90100 side, that is, by a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100. In a case where the pseudo continuous symbol is designated to be temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 90120 displays two or more button icons 904000 and is designated to temporarily stop the pseudo continuous symbol. The operation suggestion condition may be that the received change pattern designation command is received (the variable display game is executed with the change pattern accompanied by the pseudo-announcement effect), as in the above-described example, regardless of the specified change pattern. , Two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and a predetermined time or longer. The variable display game is executed by the change time, it may be used as the operation suggested condition.

(Chance eye notice effect)
The chance eye notice effect provided as the specific effect J is different from the display result of the decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination as the display result of the variable display game executed before the variable display game that is the target of the prefetch notice. By displaying the chance that is the display result as a final stop display, the player is notified of the display result of the variable display game that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

  In this example, the same odd number of decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed in the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C, and “left” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R. In addition, the “left”, “middle”, and “intermediate” symbols, which are the chances, are displayed in the final stop display of even-numbered decorative symbols that are one larger than the odd-numbered decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C. The “right” decorative symbol combination shall be completed.

  That is, the combination of the decorative symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right” that are chances in this example is any one of “112”, “334”, “556”, and “778”. In accordance with the player's all symbol stop operation, it is possible to display the final stop combination of decorative symbol combinations that will become opportunities.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the chance eye notice effect is (1) a state in which three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game with a reach state is put on hold, and its variable When none of the variable display games executed before the display game is in a reach state, a notification is given to perform a predetermined all symbol stop operation, and (3) the player performs a predetermined all symbol stop operation. It becomes possible to execute by doing.

  In the chance eye notice effect, the combination of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols swings when the player operates the operation button 9030 only once in one variable display game. Stopped. That is, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation three times to stop swinging each of the “left”, “right”, and “middle” decorative symbols in one variable display game, The operation (all symbols stop operation) required in one variable display game is only once. A specific aspect of the chance eye notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92.

  In FIG. 91 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and is stored in the reserved memory. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 3. At this time, in the start winning storage display area 905H, each display part (left end, second from the left, and 3 from the left) corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. )) Are displayed in the normal mode.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the start winning change pattern determination result designation command stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area and the second special drawing start winning command storage area. The change pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the display part at the left end) that first satisfies the start condition among the three variable display games that are put on hold is confirmed after confirming the start winning change pattern determination result designation command. Is the non-reach variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) that satisfies the second start condition is the non-reach variation pattern, and the third start condition is satisfied It is assumed that the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (third display portion from the left) is the reach variation pattern.

  Two button icons 904000 are displayed on the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a plurality of times (at least twice or more) in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. "Cut-in" character 904000a indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the operation suggestion condition is satisfied" and "the pseudo continuous notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is established" A “pseudo-ream” character 904000b is displayed.

  The effect control CPU 90120 displays the third button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 91B, the screen is updated from the state in which the two button icons 904000 are displayed to the state in which the three button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, as a total of three or more button icons 904000 are displayed on the screen, a “chance eye” character 904000c indicating that “the chance eye notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion conditions here are (1) a state in which three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is put on hold, and the variable display game None of the variable display games executed before the time is accompanied by the reach state.

  In FIG. 91 (c), it is assumed that after the third button icon 904000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a confirmed decorative pattern, a combination of non-reach loses with “5” on the left, “9” on the middle, and “6” on the middle is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is a non-reach variation pattern in which the variation pattern of the variable display game in which the start condition is established is not accompanied by the reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Among the two variable display games that are put on hold, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the display portion at the left end) that first satisfies the start condition is a non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied second. Based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggesting condition of the chance eye notice effect is established.

  When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the variable display game executed before the variable display game of the reach reach variation pattern (two times including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied). Each variable display game) is requested to request the player to stop all symbols after the variable display is started. In addition, whether or not the display result of the variable display game of the pending reach variation pattern is a big hit combination or a loss combination, a start winning determination result designation command or a start winning variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game Check based on the judgment result specification command.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (d), when the display result of the variable display game with the reach reach variation pattern held is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied are displayed. According to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 75% and stop the non-chance eye (miss combination other than the chance eye) at a rate of 25%. If the display result of the display game is a lost combination, in the variable display game where the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% in accordance with the player's all symbols stop operation, Decide to stop non-chance eyes at a rate of 75%.

  When it is decided to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 90120 constitutes the chance symbol according to the player's all symbol stop operation, and the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display area 905L. And the odd number of decorative symbols to be stopped at 905C and the even number of decorative symbols to be stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R.

  When it is determined not to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the player's all symbol stop operation by displaying the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L and the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C. In addition, the decorative symbols constituting the determined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become the chance according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command are swung in the decorative symbol display area 905R of “right”. Decide to stop. That is, in accordance with the player's all symbol stop operation, it is decided to stop the swinging of the confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that will be a non-chance.

  Thus, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for performing the chance eye stop are determined, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display portion from the left is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" Are displayed large in the center of the screen, and the characters "Press!" The operation suggestion information 904050 composed of an arrow and an image simulating the operation button 9030 is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. To do. In the chance eye notice effect, unlike the above-described pseudo-announce notice effect, all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, The decorative symbols are stopped at 905C and 905R.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 displays three buttons necessary for executing the chance eye notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 in accordance with the display of the characters 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” of “Stop all symbols!”. The icon 904000 is deleted. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and there is no specific effect that can be executed. Accordingly, “cut-in” character 904000a, “pseudo-continuous” character 904000b, and “chance” The character 904000c is deleted from the screen.

  Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the characters 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” of “Stop all symbols!” Performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030.

  At this time, if the CPU 90120 for effect control has decided to stop the non-chance eyes based on the table of FIG. 91 (d), as shown in FIG. 91 (g), “left”, In the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, a combination of a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is shaken. Stop moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (h), after a predetermined period of swaying stop, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. In this case, as a non-chance eye definitive decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses, “4” on the left, “9” on the middle, and “7” on the right, is derived and displayed.

  If the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 904050, the effect control CPU 90120 is the player. When it is decided to stop the non-chance eye according to all the symbol stop operations, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop symbol) that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command This combination shall be rocked and stopped.

  Next, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the next variable display game start condition for the next variable display game is based on the fact that it is determined that the player is requested to stop all symbols. Even if established, whether or not to stop the chance eye is determined as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (i), when the display result of the variable display game with the reach reach variation pattern held is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied are displayed. According to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 75%, and stop the non-chance eye at a rate of 25%. In the variable display game where the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 25% according to the player's all symbol stop operation, and the non-chance rate at a rate of 75%. Decide to stop.

  Further, similar to the previous variable display game, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the player's all symbol stop operation when it is determined to stop the chance eye or when it is determined to stop the non-chance eye. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped is determined according to the above.

  Thus, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for performing the chance eye stop are determined, as shown in FIG. 92 (j), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there is one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the second display portion from the left is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 92 (k), characters 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And operation suggestion information 904050 are displayed at the center of the screen. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. To do.

  Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the characters 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” of “Stop all symbols!” Performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030.

  At this time, if the CPU 90120 for effect control has decided to stop the chance eye based on the table of FIG. 92 (i), as shown in FIG. 92 (l), “left”, “ The combination of the decorative symbols constituting the determined chance eye is stopped in the middle and right decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (m), after the rocking is stopped for a predetermined period, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. Here, as a determined decorative pattern of a chance, a combination of non-reach loses, “1” on the left, “1” in the middle, and “2” on the right, is derived and displayed.

  If the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 904050, the effect control CPU 90120 is the player. Even if it is decided to stop the chance eye according to all the symbols stop operation of, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop) that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command The combination of symbols) shall be stopped.

  Next, it is determined that the effect control CPU 90120 requests the player to stop all symbols for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern that is the target of the chance eye notice effect. Therefore, when the next variable display game start condition is satisfied, whether or not to stop the chance eye is not determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (n), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the leftmost display region is not displayed.

  In the reach change pattern variable display game, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect of displaying the characters 904080 of “reach!” When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG.

  In the 50th effect form described above, the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect are all the states after the game ball has won the general winning opening, that is, the button icon 904000 is displayed. In the displayed state, it can be executed with the player's operation corresponding to each notice effect. In this way, by providing a specific effect that is executed on the condition of the player's operation after winning the game ball to the general winning opening, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

  In addition, each time a game ball wins a general winning opening, the button icon 904000 displayed on the screen increases, so that the player can play a game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening. It is possible to recognize that has won.

  Further, when the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in notice effect is established in a state where one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, a notification for prompting a continuous hit operation is given as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. If the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous announcement effect is established in the state of being displayed, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation as an operation corresponding to the pseudo-continuous announcement effect is given, and three or more button icons 904000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition for the notice effect is established, a notification that prompts all symbol stop operations as an operation corresponding to the chance eye notice effect is given, and the player can execute the specific effect by performing any operation. I can understand.

  Further, according to the display number of the button icon 904000, when the display number is 1 or more, a “cut-in” character 904000a is displayed, and when the display number is 2 or more, a “pseudo-continuous” character 904000b is displayed. When the number is 3 or more, the character 904000c of “chance” is displayed, so that the player can grasp the type of specific effect that can be executed according to the number of button icons 904000 displayed. Thereby, interest can be given to the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening.

  In addition, you may make it alert | report the operation required in order to perform the specific effect with the kind of specific effect which can be performed. For example, according to the display number of the button icon 904000, when the display number is 1 or more, a “continuous hit” character is displayed next to the “cut-in” character 904000a, and when the display number is 2 or more, a “pseudo continuous” character is displayed. A character “stop each symbol” is displayed next to the character 904000b, and when the number of displays is three or more, a character “stop all symbols” is displayed next to the character 904000c of “chance eye”. It is possible to grasp an operation required according to the type of specific effect that can be executed.

  Here, in this embodiment, there are cases where the operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of the plurality of types of specific effects are simultaneously satisfied. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the variable display game start condition is satisfied, the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a reach state, and the variation time of the variation pattern is 8 In this case, there is a notification (display of continuous hitting suggestion information 904100) for prompting a continuous hitting operation for executing the cut-in notice effect, and a prompting operation for stopping each symbol for the pseudo consecutive notice effect execution. Which of notifications (display of operation suggestion information 904050 in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R) should be a problem. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the button icon 904000 having the larger number required for execution of the specific effect is executed with priority. Accordingly, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (two or more button icons 904000 are required) is a notification that prompts a continuous operation for execution of the cut-in notice effect (one or more button icons 904000 is required). Shall be given priority over.

  In the state where three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is 8 seconds or more, and In some cases, the variable display game on hold has a reach variation pattern. In this case, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R) Either display of operation suggestion information 904050) or notification prompting all symbols stop operation for execution of the chance eye notice effect (characters 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And display of operation suggestion information 904050 in each variable display game) The question is whether to do this. In this case, a notification that prompts all symbol stop operations for the chance eye notice effect execution (three or more button icons 904000 are required) is a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for the pseudo continuous notice effect execution (button icon 904000). Is given priority over 2).

  In this embodiment, the number of displayed button icons 904000 is the number of button icons 904000 required for execution of the specific effect (1 for a cut-in notice effect, 2 for a pseudo-continuous notice effect) If the number is more than 3), the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the number of button icons 904000 required for execution of the specific effect from the number of button icons 904000 initially displayed is the specific notice effect. It will continue to be displayed after the performance.

  For example, when the chance eye notice effect is executed in a state where four or more button icons 904000 are displayed, one button icon 904000 that is continuously displayed remains after the chance eye notice effect is executed. The “cut-in” character 904000a remains displayed on the screen. After that, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started, the operation suggesting condition of the cut-in notice effect is established, and the notification for prompting the continuous hitting operation is performed.

  In this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not an operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is established (the number of button icons 904000 is confirmed). In addition, this is not limited to such a form, but when the variable display game is being executed, is the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect established? It may be determined whether or not. For example, the production control CPU 90120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and if it is displayed, the repetitive hit suggestion information 904100 for causing repeated hits is displayed. It may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether two or more button icons 904000 are displayed at a timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (display result derivation display) reaches a predetermined time (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). If it is determined and displayed, operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. Further, the production control CPU 90120 holds a variable display game (including a variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) with a reach state at the timing when the effective start winning occurs, and the variable display game If none of the variable display games executed before the reach state is associated with the reach state, it is determined whether or not three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and if they are displayed, all symbols are stopped. For example, the characters 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” may be displayed. That is, within the variable display game that is being executed when the number of display of the button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number (without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed) A notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed is a reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the case of the reach variation pattern, the repeated hitting suggestion information 904100 for making repeated hits may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 remains until the end of the variable display game being executed (display result display) at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. It is determined whether or not the time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). If the time is longer than the predetermined time, the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (display result display) is the predetermined time (for example, You may make it display the operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation at the timing which became 10 seconds of remaining. In addition, the CPU 90120 for effect control controls the variable display game with the reach state (the variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 3 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. Variable display game with a reach state by determining whether or not any of the variable display games executed before the variable display game is accompanied by a reach state. Is held, and all the variable display games executed before the variable display game are not accompanied by the reach state, the entire symbol stop operation is performed in the variable display game being executed. For example, the characters 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” may be displayed. That is, within the variable display game that is being executed when the number of display of the button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number (without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed) A notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

  Also, in the 50th effect form, the operation suggestion conditions for informing to perform a predetermined operation (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stopping operation, all symbol stopping operation) are all conditions relating to the variable display game (display mode and The example in which the specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable display game because the predetermined operation is performed has been described. However, the operation suggesting condition is not limited to such a form, for example, the jackpot It may be a condition relating to a gaming state (for example, whether or not the game is controlled to a big hit gaming state, whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit, and whether or not the number of rounds is greater than a predetermined number). A specific effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in the gaming state. For example, when the number of display of the button icon 904000 reaches a predetermined number within the period controlled to the big hit gaming state, the player is notified to perform a predetermined operation, and the predetermined operation is performed. In some cases, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the big hit gaming state is a probabilistic big hit or whether or not the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is greater than a predetermined number. In addition, when the number of display of the button icon 904000 reaches a predetermined number within a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state (however, it is set as the production mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the probability changing state) A notification that prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation may be performed, and when the predetermined operation is performed, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state.

  Further, in the 50th effect form, even when the number of display of the button icon 904000 is 1, a notification for prompting a continuous hitting operation is performed based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous hitting operation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. If the number of displayed button icons 904000 is not less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 or more, or 3 or more), notification for prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example, There is no notification prompting any one of the repeated operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operations), and the specific effect is not executed (for example, any of the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect) May not be executed).

(Example of single announcement)
In the 50th effect form, in order to stop the temporary stop symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, three operations are performed for each area, but the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) ) May be stopped three times in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R. That is, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines a confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L, and the operation button 9030 is displayed. The left symbol constituting the final stop symbol is rocked and stopped in response to the operation of, and then the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R, and the final stop in accordance with the operation of the operation button 9030 The right symbol constituting the symbol is stopped from swinging, and finally, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C, and the middle symbol constituting the final stop symbol according to the operation of the operation button 9030 May be rocked and stopped. In such a configuration, when the combination of jackpot symbols is the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 905L, 905R, “left”, “right”, and “middle” are displayed according to the player's three operations. By sequentially stopping the same decorative design at 905C, the player's expectation for the operation can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the “left”, “right”, and “middle” symbol display areas, a combination of special ornament symbols different from a combination of normal ornament symbols (for example, images of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”) is used. By stopping, the player is informed of a predetermined operation, and whether or not the display result of the variable display game is a big hit or off (or a probable change big hit) according to the player's predetermined operation. Or a specific effect that informs whether or not it is a non-probable big hit or the like. For example, the special decorative symbols, which are images simulating the operation buttons 9030, are stopped in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas (or the normal ornaments are displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas, respectively. The symbol is stopped), and the image of the characters “continuous hit!” Is stopped in the “medium” symbol display area. Then, when the player who has recognized the image of the characters “continuous hit!” Performs the hit operation, the display result of the variable display game (for example, the image of the characters “big hit!” Or “lost” May be displayed.

  Further, in such a form, according to the character image stopped in the “medium” symbol display area (according to the notification mode that suggests performing a predetermined operation), the variable display game The rate at which the display result is a big hit (or the rate at which the probability variation big hit) may be different. For example, in the “middle” symbol display area, the operation button 9030 is made longer than when the image of the character “continuous hit!” Indicating that the operation button 9030 should be repeatedly pressed many times is stopped as a special symbol. When the image of the character “Long press!” Suggesting that the user presses once is stopped as a special symbol, the ratio of the display result that is a big hit may be increased. In this way, an effect in which the display result of the variable display game is notified in accordance with the player's operation without passing through the reach state may be executed as the specific effect. During the period in which one variable display game is being executed, the special decorative design is stopped by causing the combination of the special decorative symbols to be stopped a plurality of times in the “left”, “right”, and “middle” symbol display areas. Each time the combination is stopped, the player may perform a predetermined operation. In this case, a notice effect that suggests a display result is executed for each predetermined operation (excluding the last predetermined operation), and the display result may be notified according to the last predetermined operation. .

  In the 50th effect form, each symbol stop operation is valid on condition that two or more winnings are made to the general winning opening, and further, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stopping operation, An example is shown in which all symbol stop operations are valid on condition that three or more winnings are made, and a chance eye notice effect is executed in response to all symbol stop operations, but a notification that a predetermined operation should be performed (predetermined The condition that the operation is valid) may be based on four or more winnings to the general winning opening.

[51st effect form]
In the 51st effect form shown in FIG. 87, the specific effect that can be executed according to the gaming state is different from the 50th effect form. In the 51st effect form, the cut-in notice effect requiring continuous hitting operation can be executed when the game state is the normal state, the probability change state, and the time-short state. On the other hand, the quasi-continuous notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation can be executed only when the gaming state is in the normal state, and the chance eye notice effect that requires all symbol stop operations is in the probable state or in the short time state. It can be executed only when

  In the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect, an operation suggestion condition may be satisfied at the same time in the normal state. In this case, a pseudo-continuous notice effect that requires a larger number of button icons 904000 is executed. Therefore, each symbol stop operation is preferentially prompted. On the other hand, since the executable game state is different between the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the chance eye notice effect, the operation suggesting condition is not satisfied at the same time.

  Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the normal state is 3 or more, the chance eye notice effect is not executed in the normal state, so that “cut-in” characters 904000a and “pseudo-continuous” are displayed. The character 904000b is displayed, but the “chance” character 904000c is not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the probability change state or the time reduction state is 3 or more, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed in the probability change state or the time reduction state, so that “cut-in” characters are displayed. The characters 904000a and 904000c “chance” are displayed, but the characters “pseudo-continuous” 904000b are not displayed.

  Thus, according to the gaming state when the game ball is won in the general winning opening, the type of the specific effect to be notified, that is, the type of the specific effect that can be executed, is appropriately changed according to the gaming state. It becomes possible to make interest different.

  In this production form, a notice production that requires a larger number of button icons 904000 is preferentially executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Priority may be given to execution. For example, when an operation suggestion condition for a cut-in notice effect and an operation suggestion condition for a pseudo-continuous notice effect are established for the same variable display game, a notice effect with a higher percentage of big hits (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) ) Should be prioritized.

[52nd production form]
In the 52nd effect form shown in FIG. 93, unlike the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 904000 is not displayed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and the game ball to the general winning opening is displayed. Whether or not to display any one of the characters 904000a to 904000c for each winning prize, and in the case of displaying, the “cut-in” character 904000a, the “pseudo-ream” character 904000b, and the “chance eye” character 904000c. Which of these is to be displayed is determined. In FIG. 94 (A), whether or not to display any of characters 904000a to 904000c in accordance with winning in each general winning opening, and if to display, which of characters 904000a to 904000c is to be displayed. The display information determination table for determining is shown.

  When the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A, the performance control CPU 90120 determines to display the characters “cut-in” 904000a on the screen at a rate of 25%, and at a rate of 75%, It is decided to display the character 904000b of "pseudo ream" on the screen. In addition, when a game ball is won in the second general winning opening 9050B, it is decided not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c at a rate of 50%, and the “cut-in” character 904000a at a rate of 25%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and it is determined to display “pseudo-continuous” characters 904000b at a rate of 25%.

  In addition, when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C, it is determined that none of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 80%, and the “cut-in” character 904000a is set at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and it is determined to display “90% of chance” characters 904000c on the screen at a rate of 10%. In addition, when a game ball is won in the fourth general winning opening 9050D, it is determined that none of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 70%, and the character 904000a of “cut-in” is set at a rate of 10%. It is decided to be displayed on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 904000c of “chance eyes” on the screen at a rate of 20%.

  Similarly to the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form described above, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started in a state where the character “cut-in” 904000a is displayed, the repeated hitting operation is performed. A cut-in notice effect is executed in response to a continuous hitting operation, and a variable display game with a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is started in a state where the characters “pseudo-continuous” 904000b are displayed. In such a case, it is notified that each symbol stop operation is performed, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in accordance with each symbol stop operation, and the reach fluctuation pattern is changed in a state where the character 904000c of “chance eyes” is displayed. If the display game is on hold and all variable display games executed before that are non-reach fluctuation patterns, all symbols will be stopped. Notification to, to run the chance eyes announcement attraction in response to all the symbol stop operation.

  In the example of FIG. 94 (A), when a game ball is won in the first general winning opening 9050A, any one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and the gaming ball is displayed in the second general winning opening 9050B. When winning, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and when a game ball wins the third general winning port 9050C, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 20%. When a game ball wins in the fourth general winning opening 50C, any of characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 30%.

  In this way, depending on the general winning award that the game ball has won, the ratio of the notification of the type of the specific effect that can be executed and the ratio that the specific effect can be executed differ, so that It is possible to improve interest by focusing on whether a game ball enters.

  Also, the game ball launched into the left game area 9010A is easier to win the second general prize opening 9050B than the first general prize opening 9050A, and the game ball launched into the right game area 9010B is the fourth general prize opening. If it is configured so that it is easier to win the third general winning opening 9050C than 9050D, it is more difficult to win a general winning opening (if the normal state is the first general winning opening 9050A, if it is in the probability change state or the short time state) When a game ball wins the fourth general winning opening 9050D), the ratio of executing a specific effect is high.

  In addition, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, there is a possibility that either “cut-in” character 904000a or “pseudo-ream” character 904000b is displayed. However, the “90th chance” character 904000c is not displayed. On the other hand, when a game ball has won a prize in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, there is a possibility that either a “cut-in” character 904000a or a “chance eye” character 904000c is displayed. However, the “pseudo-ream” character 904000b is not displayed.

  In this way, depending on the general winning opening where the game ball has won, the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed are different, so that the game ball enters any general winning port. You can pay attention to what you do and improve your interest.

  In addition, when the game state is the normal state, a game ball is fired in the left game area 9010A, and when the game state is the probability change state or the short-time state, a game ball is fired in the right game area 9010B. In a normal state in which a game ball wins in 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, characters 904000a to 904000c are more likely than a certain change state or a short time state in which a gaming ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Is displayed at a high rate, and the execution rate of the specific effect is high.

  Since the interest is likely to decrease when the gaming state is the normal state, the interest reduction is prevented by increasing the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the rate at which the specific performance is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is in the probabilistic state or in the short-time state, the player's interest is directed to the special game or the ordinary game. Therefore, the execution of the specific effect based on the display of the characters 904000a to 904000c and the establishment of the operation suggestion condition is rather a game. Therefore, the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are set lower than in the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately change the interest of a game ball to win a general winning opening according to the game state.

  Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 94 (A), when the gaming state is in the probable change state or in the short-time state, the ratio or specific effect in which characters 904000a to 904000c appear than in the normal state. The ratio may be increased. Contrary to the example shown in FIG. 94 (A), when a game ball is won in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first general winning is achieved. The characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate than when the game ball is won in the mouth 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B. In FIG. 94 (A), the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed only at the time of winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, but similarly, the third general winning opening 9050C. Or you may make it provide the specific effect which can be performed only at the time of winning to 4th general winning opening 9050D.

  In addition to the example shown in FIG. 94 (A), as shown in FIG. 94 (B), a game ball won at each of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When the game state at the time is the normal state, the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear or the rate at which the specific performance is executed is greater than when the game state when the game ball is won is the probability variation state or the short time state. You may make it raise. In contrast to the example shown in FIG. 94 (B), when a game ball is won at each general winning opening in the normal state, when a game ball is won at each general winning opening in the probability changing state or the short time state. The characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate. In FIG. 94B, a specific effect that can be executed only when the gaming state is the normal state may be provided. May be provided.

  In addition, according to whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state or the time-short state, not only an example in which the ratio of displaying characters 904000a to 904000c or the ratio of executing the specific effect is different, For example, whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, whether or not the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive jackpot gaming states (the number of consecutive = the end of the jackpot gaming state) Whether or not the number of consecutive big hit gaming states that are controlled to a probabilistic state or a short time state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, whether or not a variable display game whose display result is a lost combination has continued a predetermined number of times, Depending on other conditions such as whether or not the variable display game of the variation pattern of “reach” (“losing without reach”) has continued for a predetermined number of times, whether the number of reserved memories has reached a predetermined number, the character 9 Ratio and the specific effect that 4000a~904000c is displayed may be made different proportions to be executed.

[Display area of each image on the screen of the image display device 905]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 may be set as follows. Hereinafter, the maximum width of an image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 is (X + 1) pixels, and the maximum height is (Y + 1) pixels. The coordinates of the pixel at the upper left corner of the display screen are (0, 0), and the coordinates of the pixel at the lower right corner of the display screen are (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1, 0) And a rectangular area defined with coordinates (X, Y) as vertices is defined as a second area β. There is no overlapping area between the first area α and the second area β. In this example, the second area β is a larger area than the first area α.

  In the first area α, prizes related to the number of prizes received at each prize opening, such as the number of prizes received at the general prize opening, the number of prizes received at the first start prize opening, and the number of prizes received at the second start prize opening, etc. Number information can be displayed. In the second area β, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), an error message display area 5E, fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B, decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, and a start winning memory display area 905H. Is provided. 95 and 96, the background image can be visually recognized in the second area β, but the background image cannot be visually recognized in the first area α.

  In this example, the entire background image stored in the ROM 90121 as effect data has an overall width of (X + 1) pixels, as shown in FIGS. In this image, the height is (Y + 1) pixels, the character D is climbing near the top of the mountain, and the character E is climbing near the foot of the mountain. 95 (b) (c) and 96 (e) (f), the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) Of these, only the area corresponding to the second area β [rectangular area defined with coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) is visible to the player. Of the entire background image area, the area corresponding to the first area α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices) is invisible to the player.

  Accordingly, in the examples of FIGS. 95 (b) (c) and 96 (e) (f), the player is defined with the coordinates (a + 1,0) and coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area can be visually recognized, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is not visible.

  In the example of FIGS. 95 (b) (c) and 96 (e) (f), in the first area α, (1) “the number of general winnings of today” that is the total number of winnings to the general winning opening on that day. (2) “Today's navel winning number” which is the total number of winnings at the first starting prize opening on that day, and (3) “Today's total number of winnings at the second starting winning prize opening” Three items of “Den-chu winning number” are displayed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 wins a game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D when a winning in the general winning opening occurs. When a general prize opening designation command is received to specify whether the game ball is won at the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening when a winning at the starting prize opening occurs, the starting prize is designated. A mouth designation command is received. Accordingly, the effect control CPU 90120 can individually count the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening. In this example, (1) “Today's general prize number” is 70, (2) “Today's navel prize number” is 521, and (3) “Today's electronic Chu prize number” is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of prizes received at the general prize opening and the number of prizes received at the start prize opening in a comparable manner, it is possible to relatively grasp the winning situation at each prize opening.

  In the example of FIGS. 95 (b) and 96 (e), in the second area β, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 905A. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a round object is displayed at the left end as one hold information corresponding to one special figure game hold. The image of the fourth symbol during variable display, the image of the decorative symbol during variable display, and the image of the hold information are all displayed only in the second area β.

  The fourth symbol display layer, the decorative symbol display layer, and the hold information display layer are all higher than the background image display layer. Here, when the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image, when a certain image and another image are displayed in a superimposed manner, the visibility of a certain image is reduced. This means that display control is given priority over the performance. Specifically, in the examples of FIGS. 95 (b), (c) and FIGS. 96 (e), (f), a region where each image of the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information is displayed and one of the background images In this case, with respect to the overlapping area, the 4th pattern, the decorative pattern, and the hold information whose display layer is higher than the background image are easily visible (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information appear to be displayed in front of the background image (player side).

  In this embodiment, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative symbol display layer. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 95 (a) and 96 (f), the area where the decorative symbol is displayed and the area where the error message is displayed overlap, but in this case, the overlapping area is displayed. With regard to, the display control is performed so that an error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative symbol is easily visible (including visible), and the decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize (including invisible). Accordingly, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front of the decorative design (player side).

  As a display control for enabling the player to visually recognize only the area corresponding to the second area β among the entire area of the background image, only the area corresponding to the second area β of the entire background image is displayed in the background. An area corresponding to the first area α is set as the display layer of the image, and an area corresponding to the first area α is not set as the display layer of the background image (that is, [coordinate (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, (Rectangular area defined with Y) as the apex] may be used).

  In addition, as another display control for allowing only the area corresponding to the second area β to be visible to the player among the entire area of the background image, the entire area of the background image is set as the display layer of the background image (that is, In the display layer higher than the display layer of the background image, the entire background image [using the image data of the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) is used. By setting another background image (for example, a white, plain image) for winning number information in the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer cannot be visually recognized. Anyway. In such a configuration, it is easy to see a predetermined transmittance (an image of a display layer below the display layer) on another background image (for example, a white and plain image) for winning number information. , The image of the lower display layer may be visible, and the background image of the lower display layer can be set by setting a predetermined transmittance. An area corresponding to the first area α can be visually recognized, and the character E can be visually recognized.

  In addition, the display layer of the winning information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layer of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the visibility of the winning information is not reduced by displaying other information in the first area α. In addition, the display layer of the winning information may be the same display layer as the error message in which the display area does not exist in the first area α, or may be a higher display layer than the error message. May be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer for the number-of-wins information is the highest among all the display layers, and is displayed in a display area for other information (displayed in the first area α or the second area β). Regardless, the visibility may not be lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are all performed in the second area β. Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings to the general winning opening (“the number of general winnings of the day”) as the winning number information displayed in the first area α, the first start winnings. The visibility of the number of winnings to the mouth ("Today's navel winning number") and the number of winnings to the second start winning opening ("Today's electric Chu winnings") are not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information.

  When the image display device 905 performs variable display of the 4th symbol, variable display of the decorative symbol, and display of the hold information, when a winning to the general winning a prize occurs, FIG. As shown in d), based on the fact that the effect control CPU 90120 has received the general winning award designation command, the number of winnings in the general winning award displayed in the first area α (“the number of general winnings today”). Is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are performed, the general winning displayed in the first area α is displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth is updated without impeding visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning information is updated is not hindered by the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result, the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

  When the special symbol variable display ends and the display result is stopped, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is ended and the display result is stopped, as shown in FIG. 95 (c). At the same time, the variable display of decorative symbols is also terminated and the display result is stopped. In this example, it is assumed that the 4th symbol display area 905A remains lit (displayed) in a display color that reminds of dislocation (the display result is stopped and displayed). In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the off symbol that is “5, 3, 1” is stopped and displayed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the fourth symbol is displayed in a stopped state (in a state where the display result is derived and displayed) and is stopped and displayed (the display result is derived and displayed). Since all the decorative symbols (in the state) are displayed in the second area β, the number of winnings displayed in the first area α depending on the display of these images on the image display device 905. Information on the number of prizes received at the general prize opening ("Today's number of general prizes"), the number of prizes at the first start prize opening ("Number of navel prizes of today"), and the prize at the second start prize opening The visibility of the number ("Dai Chu Chu winnings today") is not hindered. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the number-of-wins information appropriately irrespective of the stop display of a 4th symbol, and the stop display of a decoration symbol.

  Then, in the image display device 905, when the 4th symbol stop display and the decorative symbol stop display are performed, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, as shown in FIG. 95 (d). Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 90120 has received the general prize opening designation command, the number of winning prizes to the general prize opening displayed in the first area α (“the number of general prizes for today”) is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the stop display of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped, the number of winning in the general winning slot displayed in the first area α is calculated. , Updated without disturbing visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning information is updated is not hindered by the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result, the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

  In the example of FIGS. 95 (b), (c), and (d), an example is shown in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, but to the first starting winning opening. In the same way as in the case of the general winning opening, the winning in the first starting winning opening is performed regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol. The number is updated without impeding visibility. In addition, even when a winning to the second start winning a prize occurs, as in the case of the general winning a prize, regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol, and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, The number of winnings in the second start winning opening is updated without impeding visibility.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 (e) and 96 (f), when the effect control CPU 90120 receives an abnormality detection designation command for designating that an abnormality has occurred, an error message (in this example, “an error has occurred” is displayed on the image display device 905. Is displayed). As described above, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative symbol display layer. Therefore, when the decoration control CPU 90120 receives an abnormality detection designation command when the decorative design is variably displayed or when the decorative design is stopped, an area for displaying the decorative design and an error are displayed. With respect to the overlapping range with the area where the message is displayed, display control is performed to make the error message easy to see (including visible) and make the decorative symbol difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 96 (b), when viewed from the player, the error message is closer to the player (side of the player) than the decorative symbol that is variably displayed (or the decorative symbol that is stopped). Looks like it is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (f), since the error message is displayed in the second area β, the error message displayed in the image display device 905 indicates that the error message is displayed in the first area α. As the number-of-wins information displayed on the screen, the number of winnings in the general winning opening ("Today's general winning number"), the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening ("Today's navel winning number"), The visibility of the number of winnings at the 2 start winning award (“Today's electric Chu winnings”) is not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the display of the error message.

  When the image display device 905 displays an error message and a winning is made to the general winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the general winning as shown in FIG. 96 (g). Based on the receipt of the mouth designation command, the number of wins to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“the number of general winnings of the day”) is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the error message is displayed, the visibility of the number of winning in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is not hindered. Updated. That is, depending on the display of the error message, the visibility when winning information is updated is not hindered. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result, the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

  In the example of FIGS. 96 (f) and 96 (g), an example is shown in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, but the winning in the first starting winning opening is shown. Even when it occurs, the number of winnings to the first start winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. In addition, even when a prize is awarded to the second starting prize opening, the visibility of the number of winnings to the second starting prize opening is hindered regardless of the display of an error message, as in the case of the general winning prize opening. Updated without any changes.

  In the example of FIG. 96 (f), the characters “An error has occurred” for notifying that an abnormality has occurred are displayed based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. Not limited to this, different error messages may be displayed depending on the type of abnormality designated by the abnormality detection designation command. For example, when an abnormality detection designation command is received that specifies that a magnetic abnormality has occurred, the message “Magnetic error has occurred” is displayed, and an abnormality detection designation command that specifies that a vibration abnormality has occurred is received. Sometimes the message “Vibration error has occurred” may be displayed, and when an error detection designation command is received that specifies that a radio wave error has occurred, the message “A radio wave error has occurred” may be displayed. .

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1) are defined. , 0) and a rectangular area defined with coordinates (X, Y) as vertices are defined as the second area β, but the first area in which the winning information can be displayed, the decorative design, the fourth design, and the hold The second area where information and error messages can be displayed is not limited to a rectangular area, but may be any area that does not overlap each other on the screen.

(Display / Hide setting for winning information)
As described with reference to FIG. 57, the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 operated by opening the glass door frame 903a forward (operating by the game hall clerk but not by the player) is at the display position (second Position), and on the player setting screen (see FIG. 58), when the setting for displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening is performed by the player's operation, The number-of-wins information related to the number of winnings is to be displayed.

  The example shown in FIG. 95 and FIG. 96 is a display mode of the screen in a state where the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed in this way, and when the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed. In the first area α, not only the number of winning in the general winning opening, but also the number of winning in the first starting winning opening (so-called “Hesso”) and winning in the second starting winning opening (so-called “Den Chu”). The number is also displayed. That is, according to the operation of the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the first start winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 57, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to non-display (first position), the number-of-winning information (the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed by the operation button 9030. In addition, the number-of-wins information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 regardless of whether or not the setting for displaying the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is performed. Do not show. Even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to display setting (second position), the setting for displaying the winning information is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of non-display setting). ) Is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 905.

  The example shown in FIGS. 97B and 97C is a display mode of the screen in a state where the setting for not displaying the winning number information is performed in this way, and the setting for not displaying the winning number information is performed. In this case, in the first area α, the number of winnings for the general winning opening is not displayed, the number of winnings for the first starting winning opening (so-called “heso”) and the second starting winning opening (so-called “Den Chu”). The number of winnings is not displayed.

  In this way, it is possible to set whether or not to display winning information according to the setting operation on the game hall side and according to the setting operation on the player side. In addition, the number-of-wins information can be displayed according to the judgment of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 97A, 97B, 97C, when the setting for not displaying the winning number information is made, the error message display area 5E, compared with the setting for displaying the winning number information, The fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, and the start winning memory display area 905H are common. That is, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information displayed in the second area β are set to display the winning information and the number of winnings. It does not change with the setting that does not display information. This simplifies the display control associated with the setting change for setting whether or not to display the winning information.

  On the other hand, when the setting is made not to display the winning number information, the setting is made to display the winning number information as shown in FIGS. 97A, 97B, and 97C (display examples in FIGS. 95 and 96). In contrast, the background image is visible in the first area α and the second area β. In the example of FIGS. 97A, 97B, and 97C, the first area of the entire background image [rectangular region defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) is used. An area corresponding to α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices) and an area corresponding to the second area β [coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates ( Both of the rectangular areas defined with X, Y) as vertices, that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

  Accordingly, in the examples of FIGS. 97A, 97B, and 97C, the player can use the character included in the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. In addition to being able to visually recognize D, the character E included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices can also be visually recognized.

  Thus, regarding the display position and display range (size of the image) of a specific image (error message, 4th symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number information are displayed. The control load is reduced by not changing (common) with the setting that does not, while the other images (background images) can be viewed with the setting that displays the winning information and the setting that does not display the winning information By making different ranges different, the interest in the case where winning information is not displayed is improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the image display device 905, when the 4th symbol variable display, the decorative symbol variable display, and the hold information display are performed, the prize winning to the general winning a prize opening is performed. In the case where the occurrence of a win occurs, as shown in FIG. 97 (d), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed because the winning number information is not displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the fourth symbol stop display and the decorative symbol stop display are performed on the image display device 905, a winning in the general winning opening occurs. As shown in FIG. 97 (d), since the number-of-winning information is not displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed.

  In the example of FIGS. 97B, 97C, and 97D, an example in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed even when a winning in the general winning opening occurs is shown. In the case where the setting is not displayed, the number of winnings at the first starting winning opening is not displayed even when winning at the first starting winning opening occurs, and the winning at the second starting winning opening occurs. However, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is not displayed. In this manner, whether or not to display the number of winnings at each winning opening can be set according to the player's operation.

(Each item in the winning information)
FIG. 98 shows an example of items of winning number information that can be displayed in the first area α. FIG. 98 shows items related to the number of wins in the general winning opening, but in the same way, items related to the number of wins in the first starting winning opening and to the second starting winning opening. Items related to the number of winnings can be displayed in the first area α.

  It is possible to display “today's number of general winnings (A1)”, which is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening since the power-on of the gaming machine. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and increments the value of the general winning number counter by 1 every time a general winning opening designation command is received. By doing so, A1 can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display “today's general winning ratio (A2)”, which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs since the power-on of the gaming machine. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the value of the out number counter every time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. By adding one by one, the total number of outs can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs, A2 can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display “today's general award ball number (referred to as A3)”, which is the total number of award balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening since the power-on of the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to display “today's general prize ball ratio (referred to as A4)”, which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  The ROM 90121 stores the number of winning balls determined for each of the first start winning port, the second starting winning port, the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D, and the big winning port. . The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and each time the general winning entry specifying command is received, the general winning entry specifying command is designated. By adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening to the value of the general winning ball number counter, A3 can be tabulated. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the winning ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening. The total number of winning balls can be totaled by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port specified by each command to the value of the winning ball counter every time a command is received for a large winning port that specifies winning. Thus, A4 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of winning balls.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies whether the current gaming state is the low base state or the high base state by designating the gaming state by the gaming state designation command, and wins in the low base state The number information (B1 to B4) and the winning number information (C1 to C4) in the high base state can be divided and tabulated.

  Specifically, it is possible to display “the number of general winnings in the low base state (referred to as B1)” that is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening in the low base state, and each general winning opening in the high base state It is possible to display “the number of general winnings in the high base state (assumed to be C1)”, which is the total value of the winning numbers.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium general winning number counter and the value of the high base medium general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. . Then, during the period when the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is the normal state, B1 is added by incrementing the value of the low base medium general winning number counter by 1 every time the general winning opening designation command is received. During the period when the gaming state specified by the received gaming state designation command is either the probability change state or the short time state, the value of the high base medium general winning number counter is received every time a general winning mouth designation command is received. By adding one by one, C1 can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display the “low base state general winning ratio (referred to as B2)” that is the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, and the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state It is possible to display “a general winning ratio in a high base state (C2)”.

  It is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium-out number counter and the value of the high base medium-out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. And, in the normal state, the low base medium out number can be counted by adding the value of the low base medium out number counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received, B2 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of low base medium outs. On the other hand, in the probability variation state or the short time state, the high base medium out number can be counted by adding one value to the high base medium out number counter every time a detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received. It is possible to count C2 by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of high base medium outs.

  In addition, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls in the low base state (referred to as B3)”, which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening in the low base state. It is possible to display “the number of general winning balls in the high base state (referred to as C3)”, which is the total value of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening in the state.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium general prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. And Then, during the period in which the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is the normal state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning mouth designated by the received general winning mouth designation command is displayed as a low base medium general winning ball number counter. B3 (“the number of general prize balls in the low base state”) can be counted by adding to the value of the game state, and the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is either the probability variation state or the short-time state. The period is determined by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening specified by the received general prize designation command to the value of the high base medium general prize ball counter, so that C3 ("the number of general prize balls in the high base state" ") Can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display “a ratio of the general prize ball in the low base state (referred to as B4)” that is a ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state. It is possible to display the “high base state general prize ball ratio (referred to as C4)” which is the ratio of C3.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. . In the normal state, each time the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the large winning mouth prize command are received, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning mouth designated by each command is reduced to the low base middle prize. By adding to the value of the ball counter, the number of low base medium award balls can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of low base medium award balls, B4 (“low base state General prize ball ratio ") can be tabulated. On the other hand, in the probability change state or the short-time state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning mouth designated by each command is increased every time the start winning mouth designation command, the general winning mouth designation command, and the large winning prize designation command are received. By adding to the value of the base middle prize ball number counter, the number of high base middle prize balls can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of C3 to the number of high base middle prize balls, C4 (“high It is possible to tabulate the general award ball ratio in the base state.

  As described above, information related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be tabulated for each gaming state, so that the player can grasp information according to the current gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is the low base state (normal state), focus on the items B1 to B4, and when the gaming state is the high base state (probability change state or short time state), focus on the items C1 to C4. Become.

  The effect control CPU 90120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α when the gaming state is in the low base state, while not displaying the items C1 to C4, and when the gaming state is in the high base state. The items C1 to C4 may be displayed in the first area α, while the items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. Although the items B1 to B4 and the items C1 to C4 are displayed in the first area α regardless of the gaming state, the items B1 to B4 are more visible than the items C1 to C4 in the low base state. In a high base state, the items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a manner that is easier to visually recognize (for example, larger) than the items B1 to B4.

(Aggregation of winning information during the set period)
Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can count the number-of-wins information in the period set by the player, and is the “total number of winnings in the set period ( D1) ”can be displayed in the first area α.

  When the total period corresponding to the player's operation shown in FIG. 99, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 and totals. The timer value is set to a set period (total period according to the player's operation), and the total timer is started. Each time a general prize opening designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is incremented by 1 during the set period, and the general prize is received during the set period when the total timer times out (when the set total period has elapsed). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

  In addition, while the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period since the detection signal was last received from the out-sphere detector), the counting timer is updated while the number of outs is not increasing (for example, After a predetermined period has elapsed since the detection signal was last received from the out-ball detector, the counting timer may be stopped without updating. In this way, a period during which the game ball is not being launched into the game area 9010 may be excluded from the counting period.

  When the counting timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is again set to the setting period (player's The counting timer is set again at the counting period according to the operation). The value of the general winning number counter during the set period is added every time a general winning opening designation command is received, and the general winning number counter during the set period when the counting timer times out again (when the set counting period has elapsed again). Is displayed in the first area α as D1. Thus, D1 corresponding to the counting period is displayed for each counting period set by the player.

  Further, it is possible to display a “general winning ratio (set as D2) for the set period” that is a ratio of D1 to the number of outs of gaming machines in the set period. When the CPU 90120 for effect control sets the value of the general winning number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, the value of the out number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122 is also set to 0. The number of outs in the set period can be totaled by adding the value of the out number counter during the set period every time a detection signal output from the out-sphere detector is received. D2 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of D1 to the number of outs in the period.

  Further, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls in the set period (denoted as D3)”, which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general prize opening in the set period. Further, it is possible to display “general prize ball ratio (D4) in the set period” which is a ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period.

  When the total period according to the player's operation shown in FIG. 99 described later is set, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, and The value of the total timer is set to a set period (total period according to the player's operation), and the total timer is started. Each time a general winning award designation command is received, the total number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning prize designated by the general winning award designation command is added to the value of the general prize winning number counter during the set period, and the counting timer The value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period when time-out occurs (when the set counting period elapses) is displayed in the first area α as D3.

  When the counting timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize ball number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is again set to the setting period (player). The counting timer is restarted, and the counting timer starts again. Then, every time a general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general prize ball counter during the set period is added, and the general prize ball during the set period when the total timer times out again (when the set total period elapses again). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3. Thus, D3 corresponding to the total period is displayed for each total period set by the player.

  In addition, when the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, the prize ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122 is combined with this. Is set to 0, and each time a winning prize designation command is specified, each time a start prize designation command, a general prize designation command, or a big prize entry command specifying a prize to the big prize opening is received. Is added to the value of the prize ball number counter during the set period, so that the number of prize balls in the set period can be tabulated, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period D4 can be tabulated by calculating.

  It should be noted that since the general winning opening designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120 designates which general winning opening the game ball has won, the effect controlling CPU 90120 has the first general winning opening 9050A to the No. 4 Total number of winnings to the general winning opening 9050D is individually counted, and the items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, and D1 to D4 are counted for each general winning opening, and the total value is calculated. It is possible to display in the first area α.

  Each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the items is displayed in the first area α may be automatically determined according to the gaming state or the like. For example, the items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the related items is displayed in the first area α may be selectable by an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030). (For example, an operation using the operation button 9030) may be selectable.

  In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening For each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the ROM 90121 stores the reference value in association with each item. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 checks whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the total value does not reach the reference value, As shown in FIG. 99 (4), which will be described later, it is possible to display a message notifying that the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has not reached the reference value of the item. . Thereby, the player grasps whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value as compared with the reference value of the item, and selects the gaming machine. It can be used as a judgment material (whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine).

  Next, a method for setting the total period will be described with reference to FIG. For example, the aggregation period setting screen in FIG. 99 further sets the aggregation period when selection is made to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the selection screen in FIG. 58 (2) described above. This is a screen that is displayed when the selection screen for selecting whether or not is selected and the selection to set the aggregation period is made on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed) And

  In the setting screen of FIG. 99 (1), a message “Please set the total period” is displayed, and an image simulating the operation button 9030 is displayed below the message. On the setting screen, an icon including the characters “10 minutes”, an icon including the characters “30 minutes”, and an icon including the characters “60 minutes” are displayed, and the button is “determine button after selecting with the jog dial”. A message is displayed, and an arrow that prompts the user to press the operation button 9030 (jog dial) after rotating is displayed.

  In the case where the total period is set to 10 minutes, the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is rotated to the left to depress the operation button 9030 while the icon including the characters “10 minutes” is selected. The message “The period is 10 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 10 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. When the total period is set to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 99 (1), when the operation button 9030 is pressed while an icon including the characters “30 minutes” is selected, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, a message “Setting period is 30 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 30 minutes. Further, when setting the aggregation period to 60 minutes, when the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is rotated to the right and the operation button 9030 is pressed while an icon including the characters “60 minutes” is selected, The message “Setting period is 60 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

  Thus, it is possible to set a desired total period according to the player's operation. In the example of FIG. 99, 30 minutes is set as the total period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99 (3), in the first area α, the number of winnings in the general winning opening per 30 minutes is displayed as “the number of winnings in the set period (D1)”. In the example of FIG. 99 (3), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the total value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is Since it is 37, the total value exceeds the reference value. Accordingly, there is no notification that the total value has not reached the reference value.

  On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 99 (4), while 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is counted. Since the value is 29, the total value does not reach the reference value. Therefore, a notification that the total value has not reached the reference value (display of a message “below the reference value (30 times / 30 minutes)”) is made.

(Items related to the number of prizes received at the start prize opening)
The effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning port designation command for designating which one of the first start winning port and the second starting winning port is won when a winning to the start winning port occurs. By the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general winning opening designation command for designating which of the first to fourth general winning openings, the “number of wins to the first starting winning opening of today (in A1 “Equivalent)”, “award ratio to today's first start winning opening (corresponding to A2)”, “the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning to the first start winning opening today (corresponding to A3)”, And “the ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning of today's first starting winning opening to the total number of winning balls of today (corresponding to A4)” and “the second starting winning opening of today Winning number (equivalent to A1) ”,“ Today ’s second starting prize opening "Rate (equivalent to A2)", "the number of winning balls awarded based on today's second starting winning opening (equivalent to A3)", and "today's total number of winning balls against today's total number of winning balls The ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning at the 2 start winning opening (corresponding to A4) "can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

  Also, “the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B2)”, “the number of winning in the low base state” The number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the 1st prize opening (corresponding to B3) "and" the number of prize balls given in the low base condition to the first starting prize opening in the low base state "Percentage of winning balls awarded based on winning (corresponding to B4)", "Number of winnings in second starting winning opening in low base state (corresponding to B1)", "Second starting in low base state" Winning ratio to the winning opening (equivalent to B2) "," Number of winning balls awarded based on winning at the second starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B3) ", and" Low base state " In the low base state for the number of winning balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to B4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  Also, “the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C2)”, “the number of winning in the high base state” The number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the 1st start prize opening (corresponding to C3) "and" the number of prize balls given in the high base state to the first start prize opening in the high base state “Percentage of winning balls awarded based on winning (corresponding to C4)”, “Number of winnings in second starting winning opening in high base state (corresponding to C1)”, “Second starting in high base state “Award ratio to the winning opening (corresponding to C2)”, “Number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C3)”, and “Awarding in the high base state” In a high base state for the number of winning balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to C4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  In addition, “the number of winnings in the first start winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D2)”, “the first starting winning in the setting period” Awarded based on the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the mouth (corresponding to D3), and “based on winning in the first start winning mouth in the setting period with respect to the number of winning balls given in the setting period” "Percentage of winning balls (corresponding to D4)", "Number of winnings in the second start winning opening during the setting period (corresponding to D1)", "Winning ratio for the second starting winning opening during the setting period ( D2) ”,“ the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the second start winning opening during the setting period (corresponding to D3) ”, and“ setting for the number of prize balls given during the setting period ” Awarded based on winning the 2nd starting prize opening during the period Percentage of winning balls number (corresponding to D4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

(Role (running ratio), ratio display)
Further, in the gaming machine 901, each of the winning ports (large winning port, second starting winning port, first starting winning port, first to fourth general winning ports, etc.) is also included in the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011. , Also called “entry area”). Further, in the gaming machine 901, predetermined information such as a combination (community ratio) and a combination ratio can be displayed on the display monitor 9029 shown in FIGS. 102 and 103 provided on the main board 9011.

  As described above, on the gaming machine manufacturer side, it is normal to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Further, when the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is performed and, as a result of the adjustment, whether the game medium has entered the general winning area as frequently as designed. Therefore, in a gaming machine according to an embodiment described later, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made in a gaming machine having a general winning area. In the following, display of an accessory ratio and the like will be described. In the following, display of game balls on the main board 9011 and the display of the ratio of bonuses will be described.

  A main board 9011 shown in FIG. 102 is a board that performs control related to a game. As shown in FIG. 104A, the main substrate 9011 is sealed in a substrate case 90201, and a display monitor 9029 is arranged at the center of the back side of the main substrate 9011. The display monitor 9029 is arranged in front of the main board 9011 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 9011 is not visible when the glass door frame 903a is not opened, the front when the main board 9011 is viewed is the back side of the game board 902 when the glass door frame 903a is opened. This is the front of the game machine and is different from the front of the gaming machine 901. However, the front when viewing the main board 9011 and the front of the gaming machine 901 may be common.

  On the main board 9011, information related to game winning, for example, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (electrical chew), the big winning opening ( The number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls are entered and aggregated, and the display monitor 9029 is a ratio of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls to win the large winning opening (attacker). This is the percentage of the total number of consecutive balls (%) and the total number of prize balls that are won by winning the 2nd starting prize opening (Den Chu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big prize opening (Attacker) The role ratio (%) is displayed. A combination (ream ratio) is a ratio of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls (the number of consecutive winning characters below) by winning a winning prize (attacker). The ratio is the number of winning balls in the 2nd starting winning entrance (Den Chu) out of the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the big winning entrance (attacker) (the number of winning balls below) Is the proportion occupied. The total number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls below) is the number of winning balls for winning the winning prize winner (attacker), the number of winning balls for winning the second starting winning prize opening (Den Chu), and the winning prize opening (Attacker) and the total number of winning balls by winning in winning ports (first starting winning port, general winning port) other than the second starting winning port (Den Chu). In addition, the big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electrical chew) are variable roles, and the winning percentage of the game ball is changed due to the change of the passable width of the game ball. is there. In addition, the winning ports (first starting winning port, general winning port) other than the big winning port (attacker) and the second starting winning port (Den Chu) are fixed roles, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected percentage of winning game balls is a fixed character.

  As a method of counting and calculating information related to game winnings, the number of winning balls (the number of general winning balls), the number of winning balls in the first starting opening (heso) and the general winning opening (sode) with 6000 winning balls, 2 Special Dengaku Award, which is the number of balls in the regular electric role (number of electric chew awards), which is the number of balls won by winning in the starting winning opening (Denchu), Count the number of balls (the number of attackers). The total is set as one set, and 10 sets, that is, 60,000 roles (%) and roles (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of award balls (general award ball number), the number of ordinary electric award balls (the number of electric chew award balls), and the special electric roles The number of winning balls (attacker winning ball number) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. Furthermore, the memory of 11 sets of 66,000 pieces is stored in a corresponding quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative combination (connection ratio) (%) and combination ratio (%) within the range of those numerical values are stored. Can be calculated.

  The display monitor 9029 displays 60,000 combinations (link ratio) (%), a combination ratio (%), and a cumulative combination (link ratio) (%) and a combination ratio (%) for a predetermined time (for example, 30). Can be switched every second). That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display all, but the number of award balls won by winning at the first starting hole (hews) counted by the progress of the game, winning at the second starting winning hole (electric chew) The number of award balls due to, and the number of award balls due to winning a prize winner (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of winning balls won after displaying 60,000 consecutive games (run ratio) (%) is reflected in the 60000 hand roles (%) displayed thereafter, There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the 60,000 servings (running ratio) (%) and the 60000 servings (%). Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting gate (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning port (Den Chu), the number of winning balls by winning at the big winning port (attacker), the total number of winning balls If the numbers are input and aggregated at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, display timing of 60,000 combinations (run ratio) (%), etc.), such a discrepancy can be prevented. .

As an example of the calculation method, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning mouth (Den Chu) and the number of winning balls by winning in the big winning mouth (attacker) A method for calculating the ratio of the winning combinations (ratio (%)) in the case where the total number of acquired winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. In addition, the number of winning balls acquired means the total number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutively-acquired balls acquired is the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins an attacker. For this reason, the combination (running ratio) can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the role ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).
Association (ream ratio) = [Number of consecutive feature acquisition balls / total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)
Ratio = [(number of consecutive feature winning balls + number of winning balls) / total winning number] × 100 (2)

When the total number of winning balls is 60000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the bonus rate is obtained by dividing 42000 by 60000 and rounding down to 3 decimal places after 0.70.
However, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine cannot perform the arithmetic operation after the decimal point, the operation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning characters is multiplied by 100 to 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain a calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be divided by 1000.

  In this example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate a long-term bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning balls acquired.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down to 00EAh, which is a decimal number, with respect to 00EA60h, which is the total number of prize balls, in order to facilitate calculation on a microcomputer used in a gaming machine. Calculate 234 by notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00A410h of the winning character acquisition ball number, and the winning character acquisition ball number is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, calculation with a microcomputer used in a gaming machine is facilitated, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls is 10 times is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and approximates the original value.

  The substrate case 90201 is made of a light-transmitting material so that the main substrate 9011 and the display monitor 9029 can be visually recognized. The board case 90201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 9011 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 9011. The display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 9011 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 9011 and an employee who wants to visually recognize the main board 9011.

  The substrate case 90201 is provided with a seal for displaying the type, model, specifications, and the like of the main substrate 9011. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to obstruct display on the display monitor 9029. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103, when the display monitor 9029 is arranged on the first part of the main board 9011 (for example, the central part of the main board 9011), the second different from the first part on the main board 9011. Other electrical components and the like are disposed on the portion (for example, the peripheral portion of the main substrate 9011), and a hole, a heat radiating hole, and a seal are disposed on the portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 9011. Good. In particular, the heat radiation hole is preferably provided in the vicinity of the display monitor 9029 in order to release heat generated by the display monitor 9029. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat radiating hole is disposed at a position not directly in front of the display monitor 9029. According to this, since the display monitor 9029 does not hinder the visibility, it is easy to confirm information related to winning.

  In addition, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap a portion of the substrate case 90201 corresponding to the second part of the main substrate 9011. Specifically, the portion of the board case 90201 corresponding to the second part of the main board 9011 does not overlap the hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. To. According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being hindered by the wiring.

  The main board 9011 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine. In order to avoid misidentification with the 7-segment display monitor 9029, the main board 9011 is separated by a predetermined distance or other electronic components. It is preferable to arrange them with a gap therebetween. The other electronic components here are preferably large control components such as a CPU.

  Storage area for storing information related to game winning (ring buffer, 10 set total buffer (total of information related to game winning stored in ring buffer having 10 counters of 2 bytes at maximum), prize ball The total number buffer) may be stored continuously without being initialized when the reset button is operated. The ring buffer will be further described later. Note that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, initialization is performed, the value of the number of winning balls is greater than the value of the total number of winning balls stored, Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to game winnings when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the number of consecutive feature-acquired balls is greater than the number of acquired balls Processing may be performed. Further, the abnormality count error display or warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the abnormality count error display or warning display may be performed or may be performed after the initialization process. Abnormal count error display and warning display will be further described later.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 are divided as a divisor for 19876 and the ratio is calculated. 1987/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When calculation is performed in the game control microcomputer 90100, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point. In the division of 19876/34321, 34321 of the denominator is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the ratio is 57% (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 9029. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799 respectively. If this is calculated by the above method, it will be 32799/32799 = 100%, and if replaced by the calculation by the game control microcomputer 90100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69% → 70% on the display. % Error may be displayed, but even in the display of 1% error, it is possible to display the role (%) (or the combination (connection ratio) (%)) with a very small error.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100. Therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Further, the error gradually increases even when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, until the total number of acquired balls of a specific number or more (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display monitor 9029 displays the ratio (%) and the combination (linkage ratio) (%). Notifying or notifying that the error may be large even if it is displayed, by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, flashing the displayed value, etc. Good.

  Further, the display monitor 9029 displays the duty ratio (%) and the consecutiveness (running ratio) (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). indicate. In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins an electric chew or attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to If it is displayed as a value of (combined ratio) (%), there is a possibility that the value of the combined ratio (%) and the combined function (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable to sequentially display the values calculated and calculated in the same interrupt for the role ratio (%) and the role combination (ream ratio) (%).

  In addition, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when two 7 segments are provided), it becomes impossible to display 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 9029 shown in FIGS. 103 and 104A, numerical values can be displayed in the lower two digits. However, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, numerical values may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under specific conditions.

  In addition, in the above calculation method, an example is shown in which the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls, and the number of consecutive winning balls are counted in a counter. It is detected that a game medium has been won by a sensor provided, and the number of winning balls is counted separately based on the detection result. You may calculate the value to total. Further, based on the detection result, a sensor provided individually for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passage through which the game media won by the attacker and the game media won by the electric chew merge are combined. Thus, a value to be added to the counter for the number of winning balls for the winning combination and the counter for the number of winning balls for the consecutive winning points may be calculated. Hereinafter, the display of the combination (ream) ratio will be described in detail. In the following specific example, an example will be described in which it is detected that a game medium has been won by a sensor provided in each of an attacker and an electric chew, and the number of each winning ball is individually counted based on the detection result.

  A display monitor 9029 is connected to the main board 9011 in the gaming machine 901 as shown in FIG. In the gaming machine 901, the main board 9011 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 902 (see FIG. 54) provided in the gaming machine frame 903 as shown in FIG. In addition to the main board 9011, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are also provided on the back side of the game board 902. Yes. The main substrate 9011 is disposed at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral substrate other than the main substrate 9011. Note that the main substrate 9011 may overlap these peripheral substrates. In particular, the main substrate 9011 may overlap so as to be on the upper side of each peripheral substrate.

  The RAM 90102 on the main board 9011 includes a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, A third general winning number counter, a fourth general winning number counter, and a large winning number counter are provided.

  The first gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of times that the first gate switch 9021A has detected a game ball. The second gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 9021B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 9022A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 9022B.

  The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning port switch 9024A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning port switch 9024B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. The big prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

  In addition, a clear switch is connected to the main board 9011. The clear switch is disposed on the back side surface of the game board 902 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate. By operating the clear switch, the combination used in the RAM 90102 described later and the data used for the combination are cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when it is necessary to redo the calculation of the association (relation ratio) or ratio, such as when there is a failure in the calculation of the association (relation ratio) or ratio. It is. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal combination (run ratio) or a combination ratio. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 9011 in addition to clearing data.

  The main substrate 9011 is provided with an RTC 90106. The main board 9011 can detect the current time by the RTC 90106. The RTC 90106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing an initial setting, but in this embodiment, the RTC 90106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 9011 is housed in a board case 90201 as shown in FIG. Caulking pins 9011B are attached to the substrate case 90201. By providing the caulking pins 9011B, the main substrate 9011 is completely enclosed in the substrate case 90201, and illegal acts on the main substrate 9011 are prevented. The substrate case 90201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as “crimped substrate case”).

  The display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011. In addition, a seal seal 9011S is attached to the substrate case 90201 to prove that the main substrate 9011 has been enclosed. The seal seal 9011S is pasted, for example, across the part to be removed from the substrate case 90201. The seal seal 9011S is disposed at a position away from the main substrate 9011, and is disposed at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is blocked, such as in front of the display monitor 9029. In this way, the display monitor 9029 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the seal sticker 9011S.

  The display monitor 9029 includes a four-digit display unit including a first display unit 9029A, a second display unit 9029B, a third display unit 9029C, and a fourth display unit 9029D. Each of the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D is composed of seven segments configured by seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots disposed on the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display portion 9029A to fourth display portion 9029D can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing in an extremely short period.

  Each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 illustrated in FIG. 104B is displayed on the display monitor 9029. The total period is displayed on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B of the upper two digits, and the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D of the lower two digits. In display No1, a short-term role combination (run ratio) is displayed, and in display No2, a short-term role ratio is displayed. In display No3, the total cumulative combination (running ratio) is displayed, and in display No2, the total cumulative combination is displayed.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) was 60000. The period for which the total is calculated means the total period after starting the calculation of the consecutive (relation ratio) and ratio, or the total period after temporarily resetting the calculation of the consecutive (link ratio) and ratio. To do.

  In the above example, the combination (run ratio) and the combination ratio are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the combination of consecutive balls (ream ratio) may be the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state in the total number of prize balls. Also, the winning ratio is the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening in the high base state of the total winning balls and the winning winning opening in the big hit gaming state. It is good also as a ratio which the number of prize balls by winning a prize occupies.

  In the case where the short-term combination (run ratio) of display No1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and the short-term combination of display No2 is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B. In addition, when the short-term combination (linkage ratio) of the display No1 is displayed, the short-term combination (linkage ratio) is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B. When the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed, the short-term role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B.

  When the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 (running ratio) is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, “A7.” Is displayed on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B. In addition, when the total cumulative combination (run ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative combination (run ratio) is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. When the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the main board 9011 calculates the combination (ream ratio) and the combination ratio, the game ball that has entered the fourth general winning opening from the attacker, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening The number of intrusions is counted. In the main process, the CPU 90103 performs the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general. A state confirmation process for confirming the state (presence / absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning prize switch 9024D is performed.

  In the state confirmation process of each switch, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When detection signals are output from the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, and the first start port switch 9022A, When the detection signal is output from the second start port switch 9022B, the values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 9023, When the value of the big prize counter is added and a detection signal is output from the first general prize opening switch 9024A, the second general prize opening switch 9024B, the third general prize opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general prize opening switch 9024D Are the first general prize counter, the second general prize counter, the third general prize counter, and the fourth general prize counter. By adding the value, it counts the entry number of game balls (winning number of game balls to each winning hole) to each entry area. Note that the value of each counter is stored in the RAM 90102.

  In this way, the step for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together in a series of processes for checking the switch status corresponding to each entry area (included in the switch status check process). Thus, the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without causing a separate counting program to be executed, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. .

  The CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning mouth based on the total number of winning game balls to each winning mouth, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 90102 for each winning mouth. Let The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls to be paid out by one winning with respect to the winning opening and the number of winning for the winning opening. The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth divided here is a general winning mouth winning ball (a winning ball by winning from the first general winning mouth to the fourth general winning mouth (sode)), 1st starting prize mouth ball (award ball by winning the 1st starting prize port (heso)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball by winning an electric Chu), special electric role award ball (winning an attacker) Is the number of prize balls. The RAM 90102 also stores the total number of winning balls. Note that the CPU 90103 individually counts the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting opening, but the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the first starting opening are counted. The number of winning game balls to may be summed up. In addition, although the number of prize balls for the general prize opening prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first start mouth prize ball are calculated separately, the number of prize balls for the general prize opening prize ball and the number of the first start mouth prize ball are calculated. May be calculated together.

  The RAM 90102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls. The ring buffer includes 10 first storage areas to 10th storage areas, each of which has a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). The active buffer also includes a 0th storage area composed of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth that increases as the game progresses is added. Eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  In addition, the RAM 90102 is provided with a storage area for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total total for each winning opening. The storage area of the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be spared. I can remember.

  In addition, the RAM 90102 is provided with a role combination (relation ratio) role ratio storage area for storing role ratios and role combinations (relation ratios) of 10 sets and totals. The CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 calculates the ratio and the combination of the ten sets and the total total based on the number of winning balls based on the number of game balls won in each of the ten sets and the total total of the winning ports. 10 sets and total accumulated role ratios and role combinations (ream ratios) are stored in a role combination (ream ratio) role storage area. Each of the 10 sets and the total accumulated role ratios and role combinations (ream ratios) are stored in counters of up to 1 byte. For example, in the case of storing the set ratio and the combined run (run ratio) of 10 sets and the total cumulative number as an integer, the counter can be stored with a margin with a maximum of 1 byte.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 will be described. FIG. 106 shows a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 90103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described built-in register, ROM 90101, RAM 90102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 106, the address / data signal line of the ROM 90101 is a built-in ROM area of a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH (H is a hexadecimal number; the same applies hereinafter) in the memory space. Assigned to. The CPU 90103 performs various control processes in the built-in ROM area.

  The address / data signal lines of the built-in registers are assigned to the built-in register areas FE00H to FEBHFH in the memory space. The CPU 90103 reads data from the built-in register and writes data to the register via the built-in register area.

  The address / data signal line of the RAM 90102 is assigned to the RWM area (built-in RAM area) of F000H to F3FFH in the memory space. The CPU 90103 designates the RWM area and reads data from the RAM 90102 or writes data to the RAM 90102. Note that other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, a use area program area, a use area data area, a non-use area program area, and a non-use area data area are allocated to the built-in ROM area. A free area is allocated between the use area program area and the use area data area. Similarly, free areas are also allocated between the use area data area and the non-use area program area, and between the non-use area program area and the non-use area data area. The CPU 90103 reads out data from the ROM 90101 by designating this built-in ROM area.

  Among these, the use area program area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 90103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction. The game-related program data relating to the progress of is stored. The game-related programs stored in the use area program area include a game control program that is a program for controlling a game, and a special symbol display output program that is a program for displaying a special figure, a general figure, etc. Yes. These game control programs and special symbol display output programs are stored in the use area program area. The game control program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program that performs control related to the progress of the game, such as a jackpot lottery program for lottery with respect to the transition to the big hit gaming state.

  The non-use area program area is composed of the CPU 90103 for the combination (operation ratio) and the instruction data (opcode) for calculating the ratio and the supplementary data (operand) necessary for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction. The data of the association (relation ratio) and the program for calculating and displaying the association ratio (hereinafter also referred to as the association (interaction ratio) association ratio related program) are stored. The role-related (relationship) ratio-related programs include a role-relationship (relationship) ratio calculation program for calculating the role-relationship (relationship ratio) and ratio, and a monitor that displays the role-relationship (relation ratio) and ratio. A role combination (relation ratio) role ratio display output program for display in 9029 is included. In the non-use area program area, a role combination (relation ratio) role ratio calculation program and a role combination (relation ratio) role ratio display output program are stored. The combination (relation ratio) combination calculation program is a program different from the progress of the game.

  Here, the use area program area and the non-use area program area will be further described. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a configuration of a use area program area and a non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area. As shown in FIG. 108, in the use area program area, as a game-related program, “switch input process” “digit output process 1” “jump process to non-use area (digit output process 2)” “error detection process” "Random number update process" "Special figure process" "Common figure process" "Information output process" "Prize ball process" "Test terminal process" "Solenoid process" "Memory display process" "Error notification process" Each program of “jump processing to ratio calculation processing” is stored. Also, in the non-use program area, programs such as a combination (link ratio) “digit output process 2”, “jump process to use area (error detection process)”, and “ratio calculation process” are stored. In the CPU 90103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are made common and executed in one interrupt process. Also, in the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2, the LEDs on the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display device 9020, and the display monitor 9029 are displayed by dynamic lighting. However, static lighting may be used instead of dynamic lighting.

  Among these processes, the program that performs “digit output process 1” corresponds to a special symbol display output program, and the program that performs “digit output process 2” corresponds to a combination (ratio) ratio display output program. . Further, a program that performs “error detection processing” to “error notification processing” (hereinafter also referred to as “game progress control processing”) corresponds to a game control program, and a program that performs “role calculation processing” Corresponds to a ratio calculation program. In the program (run ratio) role ratio calculation program, the role pattern (run ratio) and the role ratio are calculated, and the display pattern when displaying the calculated role (run ratio) and role ratio on the display monitor 9029, in other words, And the light emission pattern of several LED (1st segment SG1-7th segment SG7 and dot SG8 shown in FIG. 120) in the display monitor 9029 is determined.

  In the use area data area, reference data (for example, the above-described various lottery data) referred to by the control program stored in the use program area is stored. In addition, in the non-use area data area, data used for displaying a combination (connection ratio) and a combination ratio is temporarily stored. For example, the non-use area data area is provided with a storage area for storing the total cumulative number of winning balls for each winning opening and a total cumulative combination (relation ratio) ratio storage area. The non-use area data area includes an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning mouth, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a tenth storage area, and the number of winning balls for each winning mouth (for 10 sets). A total storage area and 10 sets of consecutive (running ratio) combination ratio storage areas are provided.

  In this embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-described data (command data, supplemental data, reference data) , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

  In addition, there are a use area program area in which a special symbol display output program and a game control program are stored in the built-in ROM area of the CPU 90103, a combination (relation) ratio display output program, and a combination (relation) ratio calculation program. Different upper addresses (head addresses) are set in the stored unused area program areas.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109, the upper address of the subroutine in the use area program area in which the special symbol display output program and the game control program are stored is “00”. The upper address of the subroutine in the non-use area program area in which the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program and the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program are stored is “01”. Thus, the upper address of the program stored in the non-use area program area is different from the upper address of the program stored in the use area program area.

  “CALLF” and “CALLmn” are used for the programs stored in the use area program area as calling instructions for these programs. For the program stored in the non-use area program area, only “CALLmn” is used, and “CALLF” is not used. The special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area program area are called by “CALLF” or “CALLmn”, but are called by “CALLF” here. Also, the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program stored in the non-use area program area and the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program are called by “CALLmn” and called by “CALLF”. Absent. Comparing these call instructions, “CALLF” is a call instruction having a shorter tone and lighter capacity than “CALLmn”.

  The CPU 90103 includes a Q register. The Q register is a dedicated register for storing the upper address in the built-in ROM area as a fixed value. By providing the Q register, it is possible to call a program without the upper address. A fixed value corresponding to the upper address is set in the Q register. For example, when calling a program stored in the use area program area, a fixed value “00” is set, and when calling a program stored in the non-use area program area, a fixed value “01” is set. The As described above, the Q register may set a fixed value at the upper address of the non-use area program area after executing a program in the non-use area program area after setting a fixed value at the upper address of the use area program area. Is possible.

  Next, the program execution order in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 90103 will be described. In principle, the CPU 90103 executes the programs in the order of addresses. Therefore, referring to FIG. 108, when executing the program, the CPU 90103 first executes “switch input processing” in the use area program area, and then performs “digit output processing 1” corresponding to the special symbol display output program. Run. When interrupt processing is started, a fixed value “00” is set in the Q register. In the “digit output process 1”, the CPU 90103 transmits the digit signal for the special figure or ordinary figure obtained in the previous routine to the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display device 9020. Execute the process to output to.

  After executing “digit output process 1”, the CPU 90103 jumps from the use area program area to the non-use area program area, and executes “digit output process 2” corresponding to the combination (relationship) combination ratio display output program. . When jumping from the use area program area to the non-use area program area, a fixed value “01” is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 executes a process of outputting a digit signal regarding the combination (continuity ratio) and the combination ratio obtained in the previous routine to the display monitor 9029. Therefore, “digit output process 1” and “digit output process 2” are executed in succession.

  After performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 jumps from the non-use area program area to the use area program area and performs a process according to the game control program. When jumping from the non-use area program area to the use area program area, a fixed value “00” is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. In the process according to the game control program, the CPU 90103 performs “error detection process”, “random number update process”, “special figure process”, “common figure process”, “information output process”, “prize ball process”, “test terminal process”, “solenoid process”. The “memory display process” and the “error notification process” are sequentially executed. The CPU 90103 generates a digit signal for a special drawing, a general drawing, or the like by processing according to these game control programs.

  The CPU 90103 executes the “error notification process”, and when the process according to the third program is completed, the CPU 90103 jumps from the use area program to the non-use area program, The ratio calculation process ”is executed. The CPU 90103 calculates a combination (relation ratio) and a combination ratio by “computation ratio calculation processing”, and generates a digit signal regarding the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, and the like. Thus, the interrupt process in the CPU 90103 is completed.

  As described above, the CPU 90103 executes “digit output process 1” and “digit output process 2” in one interrupt process, and the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display. The special figure and the common figure are displayed on the container 9020, and the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio are displayed on the display monitor 9029.

  Next, the configuration of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area will be described. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing another configuration of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area. In this example, as shown in FIG. 110, the use area program area includes “switch input process”, “error detection process”, “random number update process”, “special drawing process”, “general map process”, “information output process”, “award”. Each program of sphere processing, “test terminal processing”, “solenoid processing”, “memory display processing”, “error notification processing”, and “digit output processing 1” is stored. In the unused program area, “digit output process 2” and “ratio calculation process” programs are stored.

  Next, the program execution order in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 90103 in this example will be described. Referring to FIG. 110, in executing the program, the CPU 90103 first executes “switch input processing” in the use area program area, and then performs processing according to the third program. In the process according to the game control program, the CPU 90103 performs “error detection process”, “random number update process”, “special figure process”, “common figure process”, “information output process”, “prize ball process”, “test terminal process”, “solenoid process”. The “memory display process” and the “error notification process” are sequentially executed. The CPU 90103 generates a digit signal for a special drawing, a general drawing, or the like by processing according to these game control programs.

  CPU 130 then executes “digit output process 1” according to the special symbol display output program. In the “digit output process 1”, the CPU 90103 transmits the digit signal for the special figure or ordinary figure obtained in the previous routine to the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display device 9020. Execute the process to output to. However, the digit signal for the special figure or ordinary figure obtained in this routine may be output.

  Then, the CPU 90103 shifts to the non-use area program area as it is, and executes “digit output processing 2” according to the combination (continuation ratio) combination ratio display output program. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 executes a process of outputting a digit signal regarding the combination (continuity ratio) and the combination ratio obtained in the previous routine to the display monitor 9029. Therefore, “digit output process 1” and “digit output process 2” are executed in succession.

  Thereafter, after performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 executes a “role ratio calculation process” corresponding to the role (ratio) role ratio calculation program. The CPU 90103 calculates a combination (relation ratio) and a combination ratio by “computation ratio calculation processing”, and generates a digit signal regarding the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, and the like. Thus, the interrupt process in the CPU 90103 is completed.

  As described above, the CPU 90103 executes “digit output process 1” and “digit output process 2” in one interrupt process, and the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display. The special figure and the common figure are displayed on the container 9020, and the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio are displayed on the display monitor 9029.

  For example, regarding the configurations of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area, the configuration shown in FIG. 108 is an area configuration pattern A, and the configuration shown in FIG. The configuration of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 108 except for the jump processing between the use area program area and the non-use area program area. C.

  In this case, in the area configuration pattern A, as shown in FIG. 111 (A), in one cycle of interrupt processing in the CPU 90103, a special symbol display output program → combined (combined) role display display program → game control program → The process is executed in the order of the combination (ream) combination ratio calculation program. In addition, in the area configuration pattern B, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), in the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103, the game control program → special symbol display output program → association (association) ratio display output program → association ( The processing is executed in the order of the connection ratio calculation program. In the area configuration pattern C, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), a special symbol display output program → game control program → community (combined ratio) ratio display output program → communal (combined ratio) ratio calculation program Processing is executed in the order of. In the following, the interrupt process shown in FIG. 111 (A) is referred to as a first interrupt process, the interrupt process shown in FIG. 111 (B) is referred to as a second interrupt process, and the interrupt process shown in FIG. 111 (C) is shown. The process is referred to as a third interrupt process.

  Next, a description will be given of the control (display ratio) and the control for displaying the role ratio for the display monitor 9029 by the main board 9011. Here, the main board 9011 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items related to the combination (relation ratio) and the combination. FIG. 112A is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the display monitor. As shown in FIG. 112 (A), when the display on the display monitor 9029 is started, first, the short-term combination (connection ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term combination (run ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term combination (run ratio) of the display No1, as shown in FIG. 112 (B-1), the letter “y” is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and “6. "Is displayed. The third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D display a short-term combination (continuity ratio). For example, when the short-term combination (running ratio) is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display of display No1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed. The display of the short-term combination (run ratio) of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of the display No2, as shown in FIG. 112 (B-2), the letter “y” is displayed on the first display part 9029A, and the letter “7.” is displayed on the second display part 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the characters “3.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination (connection ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total accumulated combination series (run ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination (running ratio) of display No3, as shown in FIG. 112 (B-3), the letter “A” is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and “6” is displayed on the second display portion 9029B. . "Is displayed. In addition, the total display combination (running ratio) is displayed on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative combination (running ratio) is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative role ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 112 (B-4), the character “A” is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and the character “7.” is displayed on the second display portion 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display of display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, as shown in FIG. 112 (B-5), the short-term combination (connection ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the short-term combination (connection ratio) of display No1 to the total cumulative combination of display No4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. In addition, as for the display color, only the short-term combination of the display No1 (run ratio) is green, and the short-term combination of the display No2 to the total cumulative combination of the display No4 is red. In this way, the display monitor 9029 switches the short-term combination (ream ratio), short-term combination, total accumulated combination (ream), and total accumulated combination every 30 seconds.

  Further, the content displayed on the display monitor 9029 is not limited to the above content and can be determined as appropriate. For example, in the above example, characters such as “y” and “A” are displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and numerical values are displayed on the second display portion 9029B to the fourth display portion 9029D. Characters may be displayed on the display portion 9029B, and numerical values may be displayed on the first display portion 9029A, the third display portion 9029C, and the fourth display portion 9029D.

  In addition, numerical values may be displayed on all of the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D, and a predetermined ratio, division, and the like may be indicated only by the numerical values. Or a character may be displayed on two places of the 1st display part 9029A-the 4th display part 9029D, and a numerical value may be displayed on two other places. In addition, a numerical range of characters may be set so that only the characters are displayed on the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D. For example, “0” to “30” may be displayed as “P”, “31” to “60” as “Q”, and “61” to “100” as “R”. The characters to be displayed are not limited to English characters, but may be hiragana, katakana, kanji, or the like. Further, not a character but a symbol having no meaning may be displayed.

  Further, when displaying a numerical value or the like on the display monitor 9029, it may be displayed by changing the color or display mode depending on the displayed numerical value. For example, when displaying the role ratio, it may be displayed in “blue” if the displayed role ratio is less than or equal to a predetermined value, and may be displayed in “red” if it exceeds the predetermined value. Further, when the displayed role ratio is less than or equal to a predetermined value, it may be lit and displayed when it exceeds the predetermined value. In the blinking display, any display among the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D may be blinked. For example, the entirety of the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D may be blinked, two of the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B, or the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. These two may be blinked. About the display part which is not blinking, it may be made to light and may be made to light-extinguish.

  Further, in the main board 9011, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the sum and total of 10 sets is updated, and the storage of the combination (relation ratio) role ratio storage area for storing the ratio of 10 sets and the total of the total accumulation and the combination (relation ratio) is updated respectively. .

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 113, the number of winning balls of the general winning opening in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is “27” “81” “120” “36” “225” “87” “66”, respectively. “117” “45” “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area is “27”, “81”, “ 120 ”,“ 36 ”,“ 225 ”,“ 87 ”,“ 66 ”,“ 117 ”,“ 45 ”, and“ 21 ”. Also, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the number of prize balls stored may be temporarily deleted and a new number of prize balls may be stored. Or you may memorize | store a new number of prize balls in the form overwritten on the number of prize balls stored.

  Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 shown in FIG. 102 includes a door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 903a. Opening the glass door frame 903a does not correspond to an abnormality when performed by an employee, but often corresponds to an abnormality when performed by a person other than the employee. For this reason, in this embodiment, a door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 903a is included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. The door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main board 9011 when detecting the opening of the glass door frame 903a.

  The opening of the door includes a normal opening of the glass door frame 903a by an employee and an abnormal opening of the glass door frame 903a by a person other than the employee. Here, detection of door opening is performed assuming abnormal opening of the glass door frame 903a. Further, even if the employee opens the glass door frame 903a and the glass door frame 903a is opened normally, the door opening is detected, but the employee or the like recognizes the opening of the glass door frame 903a. Because there are many, special problems can be avoided.

  Next, the control relating to the display of the combination (relation ratio) and the combination performed on the main board 9011 will be described. In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 90102 are cleared. For this reason, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used for displaying the combination (continuity ratio) and the combination ratio stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 90102 is maintained without being cleared. The The data used for displaying the combination (continuity ratio) and the combination stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 90102 is cleared by operating the clear switch. Also, register setting of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. After the initial setting, the CPU 90103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process. The role association (ream ratio) and role ratio related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing. In addition, among the association (association) / association-related processing, the association (association) association ratio display output program is executed in the display switching control process (step S90209 in FIG. 117), and the association ( The ratio ratio calculation program is executed. The role ratio calculation processing in the role association (ream ratio) role ratio calculation program includes other processes for calculating the role association (ream ratio) and the role ratio. However, in the ratio calculation process, the calculation of the combination (link ratio) and ratio is performed, and a program corresponding to the other processes in the combination (link ratio) ratio calculation program may be prepared separately. Good.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a combination (relation ratio) / ratio-related process. In the main board 9011, as shown in FIG. 114, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation has been detected in the combination (relation ratio) / ratio related processing (step S90101). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

  As a result, when a clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S90101; YES), warning display preparation is performed (step S90102), and the process proceeds to step S90103. If no clear switch operation signal is transmitted and no abnormal operation is detected (step S90101; NO), winning information is acquired (step S90103). As for the winning information, a game ball is detected by any of the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D. Obtained by.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within business hours (step S90104). Whether or not the current time is within business hours is measured by the RTC 90106 and determined. As a result, when the current time is within business hours (step S90104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105). Whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed is determined by whether or not an opening signal is transmitted from the door opening sensor.

  As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor and the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105; YES), the game ball wins a predetermined number of balls or more per unit time. It is determined whether or not (step S90106). Here, the unit time and the predetermined number of balls are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a normal game cannot be won. Specifically, since the maximum number of game balls that can be fired is 100 per minute, for example, 100 balls can be appropriately determined as an upper limit per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is 5 when the unit time is 1 second, or the predetermined number is 30 when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by the RTC 90106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

  As a result, when the game ball has not won more than the predetermined number of balls per unit time (step S90106; NO), the number of prize balls is added to add the number of prize balls according to the winning information acquired in step S90103. Processing is performed (step S90107). The award ball number adding process is performed when warning display preparation is not performed. Here, when warning display preparation is performed, the combination (relation ratio) / ratio related processing is ended as it is. In the winning ball number addition process, the general winning opening (sode), general winning opening (heso), ordinary electric winning ball (electric chew), special electric winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area shown in FIG. Add the number of each prize ball.

  In addition, in the prize ball number addition process, the general winning opening (sode), the general winning opening (heso), the ordinary electric winning ball (electric chew), and the special electric winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. The total number of prize balls for each of the prize balls is calculated. Here, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the first storage area of the ring buffer. Move. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. Further, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is deleted.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has expired (calculation timer = 0) (step S90108). As a result, if the calculation timer has not expired (step S90108; NO), the combination (continuity ratio) / ratio related processing is terminated as it is. If the calculation timer is up (step S90108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S90109).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (total prize balls) obtained by addition in step S90107 is the number of executions for calculation (step S90110). The calculation execution number can be an appropriate number, for example, a reference for moving numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the first storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The number may be slightly less than the total number of prize balls of 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the calculation execution number is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum payout ball number from 6000.

  As a result, if the number of winning balls (the winning ball total) is not the calculated execution number (step S90110; NO), the combination (continuity ratio) / ratio related processing is ended as it is. Further, when the number of winning balls is the number of executions for calculation (step S90110; YES), a combination of consecutive (continuous ratio) and a combined ratio is calculated (step S90111). Here, the short-term roles (running ratio), the short-term roles ratio, the cumulative roles (running ratio) (total cumulative roles (running ratio)), and the cumulative roles ratio (total cumulative roles ratio) are calculated. For this reason, the short-term service group (run ratio), the short-term role ratio, the cumulative service group (run ratio), and the cumulative role ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. After that, preparations for displaying a combination (relation) / ratio are performed (step S90112), and the processing related to a combination (relation) / ratio ends.

  If it is determined in step S90104 that it is not within business hours (step S90104; NO), or if it is determined in step S90105 that the door frame is not closed (step S90105; NO), in step S90106, an attacker per unit time. If it is determined that more than a predetermined number of game balls have been won (step S90106; YES), preparation for abnormal count error display is performed (step S90113).

  Next, a role combination (ream ratio) / ratio display control process will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the combination (relation ratio) / ratio display control process. As shown in FIG. 115, in the combination (relation ratio) / ratio display control process, it is determined whether preparation for the combination (rear ratio) / ratio display has been completed (step S90201). When it is determined that the combination (continuation ratio) / ratio display preparation process has not been completed (step S90201; NO), it is determined whether or not preparation for display of an abnormal count error has been completed (step S90202).

  As a result, when it is determined that preparation for displaying an abnormal count error has been completed (step S90202; YES), an abnormal count error is displayed (step S90203). Abnormal count error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and “0” and “1” can be displayed in the lower two digits. In addition, when performing an abnormal count error display, a predetermined abnormal count error display may be performed on another display device, for example, the image display device 905, the first special symbol display device 904A, or the second special symbol display device 904B. Then, the game effect lamp 909 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of a gaming machine provided on the main board 9011. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  When the abnormal count error display is performed, the role combination (ream ratio) / ratio display control processing is terminated. If it is determined in step S90202 that it is not determined whether or not the abnormal count error display preparation is completed (step S90202; NO), it is determined whether or not warning display preparation is completed (step S90204).

  As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204; YES), a warning display is performed (step S90205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029 and “0” and “6” can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 9029 may be blinked or displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 9029 in order to indicate that a warning is being given. Alternatively, display may be performed by increasing the display brightness of the display monitor 9029. In this way, it is preferable that the warning display is made more conspicuous than other displays. It should be noted that after displaying the abnormal count error display, the process may proceed to determination of whether or not warning preparation is completed (step S90204). If it is determined that warning preparation is complete (step S90204; YES), an abnormal count error display and a warning display are performed. In order to perform the abnormal count error display and the warning display on the display monitor 9029, for example, the abnormal count error display and the warning display may be repeatedly performed at intervals of several seconds, for example, 5 seconds. Moreover, you may display by another display method.

  In addition, when a warning is displayed, a predetermined warning may be displayed on another display device such as the image display device 905, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, etc. The effect lamp 909 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of a gaming machine provided on the main board 9011. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  When the warning is displayed, the combination (relation ratio) / ratio control process is terminated. Also, when it is determined in step S90204 that the warning display preparation has not been completed (step S90204; NO), the combination (continuity ratio) / ratio control processing is also terminated.

  If it is determined that preparations for role combinations (ream ratio) and role ratio display have been completed (step S90201; YES), display restriction confirmation processing is performed (step S90206). In the display restriction confirmation process, a process of determining whether or not to limit the display of the combination (relation ratio) / combination ratio is executed. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the display restriction confirmation process.

  As shown in FIG. 116, in the display restriction confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not a door opening error is detected (step S90301). The door opening required error is an error that requires opening the gaming machine frame 903 forward from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. Except for the abnormal count error, examples of errors occurring in the gaming machine 901 include various errors shown in FIG. Each of these errors will be briefly described.

Error 1: Magnet error A magnet error (magnetic error) is an error caused by detecting a magnetic abnormality. When a magnet error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 9011 to the hall computer. The magnet error is canceled by turning off the power switch. The security information is output until the power switch is turned off.
Error 2: Prize ball abnormality error The prize ball abnormality error is an error due to detection of a predetermined number, for example, 2000 or more abnormal prize balls. An abnormal prize ball is, for example, a prize ball that is paid out when a game ball is won beyond the number of counts of the big prize opening. The prize ball abnormality error is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 3: Prize ball error The prize ball error is an error that occurs when a prize ball is not paid out while detecting the winning of a game ball to the prize opening. The prize ball error is an error that occurs when a payout switch abnormality is detected or when a payout case abnormality is detected. The prize ball error is canceled by eliminating the generated error, such as by canceling the error.
Error 4: Out-of-ball error The out-of-ball error is an error that occurs when the out-of-ball is detected and the game ball to be paid out is not behind the game board 902 when the winning of the game ball into the winning opening is detected. The ball-out error is an error that is canceled when the supply of the game ball is started.
Error 5: Radio wave error error The radio wave error is an error due to detection of a radio wave error. The radio wave error is an error that is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 6: Main board communication failure error The main board communication failure error is an error caused by a communication failure between the main board 9011 and the payout control board. The main board communication failure error is an error that is canceled when communication between the main board 9011 and the payout control board is restored.
Error 7: Card unit error The card unit error is an error caused by a communication failure between the main board 9011 and the card unit. The card unit error is an error that is canceled when communication between the main board 9011 and the card unit is recovered.
Error 8: Full tank error The full tank error is an error that occurs when the tray (upper or lower tray) from which the game balls are paid out becomes full and the game balls cannot be paid out. The full tank error is canceled when the game ball is removed from the tray from which the game ball is paid out and is not in a full state.
Error 9: first-time-start-of-function error The first-time-start-up error of an accessory is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected when the accessory is activated for the first time. The first-time startup error of the accessory is canceled by pressing the operation button 9030.
Error 10: Unauthorized Winning Error Unauthorized winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball enters a large winning opening other than in operation. In the gaming machine 901, since the only prize winning device is the special variable winning ball device 907, an illegal winning error is not detected, and is an error that occurs in a gaming machine having two or more winning games. When an illegal winning error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 9011 to the hall computer. The illegal winning error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 3 minutes has elapsed since the output of the security information.
Error 11: RTC-SRAM error An RTC-SRAM error is an error that occurs when an RTC error is detected when a power switch is turned on, or when a backup failure is detected. The RTC-SRAM abnormality error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds elapses from the occurrence.
Error 12: RAM clear error The RAM clear error is an error that results in a cold start when the power is turned on. When a RAM clear error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 9011 to the hall computer. The time for which the security information is output is, for example, 30 seconds. The RAM clear error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 31 seconds has elapsed since the occurrence.
Error 13: Vibration detection device abnormality error The vibration detection device abnormality error is an error that is detected when vibration occurs in the gaming machine. The vibration detection device abnormality error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds has elapsed since the occurrence.
Error 14: Door opening error The door opening error is an error that occurs when the glass door frame 903a is opened from the gaming machine frame 903 or when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame. The door opening error is canceled when the opened glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is closed.

  Among these errors, error 1 to error 7 are door opening required errors that require opening of the gaming machine frame 903 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. On the other hand, error 8 to error 13 are errors that do not require opening of the gaming machine frame 903 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error, and are not door opening required errors. Since the error 14 is a door opening error, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not the gaming machine frame 903 needs to be opened.

  Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 116, it is determined whether or not a door opening required error has been detected, in other words, whether any one of the errors 1 to 7 has been detected (step S90301). If the door opening required error is detected (step S90301; YES), it is determined whether the door opening required error flag is set (step S90302).

  If the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90302; NO), the door opening required error flag is set (step S90303). If the door open error flag is set (step S90302; YES), the process proceeds directly to step S90304.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a measurement timer is set (step S90304). The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time during which the restriction on the combination (relation ratio) ratio display is continued after the door opening error is canceled. The measurement timer is a timer that measures time in a set state, and is a timer that does not measure time in a reset state.

  The time for which the restriction of the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio display after the door opening required error is released can be, for example, a time required for releasing the door opening required error or a time longer than that time. Specifically, it may be 1 minute or 2 minutes, or 5 minutes or 10 minutes. Moreover, it is good also as long time of 30 minutes or more. Further, the time required for releasing the door opening required error may be uniform or set according to the type of the door opening required error. For example, errors 1, 2, 5, etc. that are cleared by turning off the power switch shorten the time required to clear the door opening error, and error 3 prize ball error that needs to be resolved May increase the time required to cancel the door opening error.

  If it is determined in step S90304 that the measurement timer is set (step S90304; YES), the measurement timer is reset (step S90305). If it is determined that the measurement timer is not set (step S90304; NO), the process directly proceeds to step S90306. The state in which the measurement timer is set when the door opening required error is detected is a state in which the door opening required error occurs again after the door opening required error is once reset. For this reason, by resetting the measurement timer in step S90305, if a door opening required error is detected again during the time measurement by the measurement timer, the door opening required error detected later is released. Time can be measured with a measurement timer.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door opening required error flag is set (step S90306). As a result, when the door opening required error flag is set (step S90306; YES), the combination (continuation ratio) combination ratio display restriction is executed (step S90307), and the display restriction confirmation process is terminated. If the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90306; NO), the display restriction confirmation process is terminated as it is. As the combination (relation ratio) ratio display restriction, for example, the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio is stopped.

  If it is determined in step S90301 that the door opening required error is not detected (step S90301; NO), it is determined whether the door opening required error flag is set (step S90308). As a result, when it is determined that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90308; NO), the process proceeds to step S90306.

  If it is determined in step S90308 that the door opening required error flag is set (step S90308; YES), after the door opening required error is once detected, the door opening required error is released. (Step S90309). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a measurement timer is set (step S90310).

  When the measurement timer is not set (step S90310; NO), it is immediately after the door opening error is canceled. In other words, this flow is in a state that flows only after the door opening error is canceled. At this time, the measurement time t (measurement timer = t) is set in the measurement timer (step S90311). The measurement time t corresponds to the time for which the restriction of the combination (ream) ratio display is continued after the door opening error is canceled.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is up (t = 0) (step S90312). If the measurement timer is set in step S90310 (step S90310; YES), it is determined whether the measurement timer is up (t = 0) as it is (step S90312).

  If the process goes through step S90311, the measurement timer is not 0 (time has not expired) (step S90312; NO), and the process directly proceeds to step S90306. After the measurement timer is set, it is determined in step S90310 that the measurement timer is set (step S90310; YES). In this case, the measurement time decreases with the flow loop, and when the time t elapses after the measurement timer is set, it is determined that the measurement timer is up.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is up (t = 0) (step S90312). If the measurement timer is up (step S90312; YES), the measurement timer and the door opening required error flag are cleared (step S90313). If the measurement timer has not expired (step S90312; NO), the process proceeds to step S90306 without clearing the measurement timer and the door opening required error flag.

  If the process does not go through step S90313, the door opening required error flag is not cleared. Therefore, in step S90306, it is determined that the door opening required error flag is set (step S90306: YES). Therefore, the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio display restriction is executed. In addition, when the process goes through step S90313, the door opening required error flag is cleared. Therefore, in step S90306, it is determined that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90306; NO). Therefore, the combination display (relation ratio) combination display restriction is not executed. In this way, in the display restriction confirmation process, it is determined whether or not to execute the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio display restriction. In summary, in the display restriction confirmation process, the detection time (= time for continuing the restriction of the combination (relation) ratio display) has elapsed since the detection of the door opening required error and the release of the door opening required error. During this time, the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio is limited, and the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio is not limited at other times.

  Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 115, based on the determination made in the display restriction confirmation process shown in step S90206, it is determined whether or not display restriction is to be executed (step S90207). As a result, when the display restriction is executed (step S90207; YES), the display restriction is executed (step S90208), and the display of the combination (continuous ratio) combination ratio is restricted. Then, the role combination (ream ratio) / ratio display control process is terminated.

  If the display restriction is not executed (step S90207; NO), the display switching control process is executed (step S90209), and the combination (continuity ratio) / ratio display control process is terminated. The display switching control process is executed according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the display switching control process. As shown in FIG. 117, in the display switching control process, first, it is determined whether or not a short-term combination (continuous ratio) display is performed on the display monitor 9029 (step S90401). When the short-term combination (relation ratio) display is performed (step S90401; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the short-term combination (relation ratio) display. (Step S90402). Here, the predetermined time can be set to an arbitrary time, for example, 30 seconds (30000 ms). The predetermined time may be a time shorter than 30 seconds such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, or may be a time longer than 30 seconds such as 1 minute (60 seconds) or 10 minutes (600 seconds).

  If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90402; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term combination (continuous ratio) display continues. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90402; YES), short-term role ratio display control is performed (step S90403), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the short-term role ratio display control, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the short-term role ratio display is started is set.

  If it is determined in step S90401 that the short-term combination display is not performed (step S90401; NO), it is determined whether the short-term combination display is performed (step S90404). . If the short-term role ratio display is being performed (step S90404; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the short-term role ratio display (step S90405).

  If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90405; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term role ratio display continues. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90404; YES), cumulative display (continuous ratio) display control is performed (step S90406), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the cumulative combination (relation) display control, the cumulative combination (relation) is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the start of the cumulative combination (relation) display is set. .

  If it is determined in step S90404 that the short-term role ratio display is not performed (step S90404; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative role combination (connection ratio) display is performed (step S90407). . If the cumulative combination display (relation ratio) is being displayed (step S90407; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the cumulative combination display (connection ratio) display. (Step S90408).

  If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90408; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative combination display (continuous ratio) display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90408; YES), the cumulative ratio display control is performed (step S90409), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the cumulative ratio display control, the cumulative ratio is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the cumulative ratio display is started is set.

  If it is determined in step S90407 that the cumulative combination display (connection ratio) is not displayed (step S90407; NO), it is determined whether the cumulative combination display is performed (step S90410). . If the cumulative role display is being performed (step S90410; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the cumulative role display (step S90411).

  If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90411; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative combination display (continuous ratio) display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90411; YES), short-term combination (continuous ratio) display control is performed (step S90412), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the short-term service group (run ratio) display control, the short-term service group (run ratio) is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the start of the short-term service group (run ratio) display is set. . Thus, the display switching control process ends.

  In the short-term role ratio display control in step S90403 described above, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed. Similarly, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed also in the cumulative combination display (link ratio) display control in step S90406, the cumulative combination display control in step S90409, and the short-term combination display (link ratio) display control in step S90412. Is done.

  In the gaming machine 901, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are made common, and the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are executed in one cycle of the interrupt process in the CPU 90103. One cycle of the interrupt process in the CPU 90103 is about 4 ms, and the time required for the game progress control process (game control program) is, for example, about 2 ms.

  FIG. 119A is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt process is executed and the display state of the monitor and the like, and FIG. 119B is the signal flow when the first interrupt process is executed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between display states, such as a monitor. Here, in the first cycle, a symbol (character) corresponding to “0” and “y” is displayed on the display monitor 9029 (SEG2) on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1), and in the second cycle, the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1). Assume an example in which a symbol (character) corresponding to “1” is displayed on the symbol display device 904A and “6.” is displayed on the display monitor 9029.

  In the third interrupt process shown in FIG. 111 (C), a game progress process (a special symbol display output program) and a digit output process 2 (combined (combined) ratio display output program) A game control program is executed. For this reason, a difference of about 2 ms occurs between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (combined (ream) ratio display program), as shown in FIG. 119 (A). Thus, there is a delay in the digit output (DG).

  As a result, in the first cycle, the symbol corresponding to “0” is clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1), but the display monitor 9029 (SEG2) has a display defect. Specifically, the problem regarding the example in which the character corresponding to “y” is displayed on the display monitor 9029 is as follows. As shown in FIG. 120, the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D in the display monitor 9029 include 8 LEDs arranged in 7 segments and in the lower right dot. If these LEDs are the first segment SG1, the second segment SG2, the third segment SG3, the fourth segment SG4, the fifth segment SG5, the sixth segment SG6, the seventh segment SG7, and the dot SG8, the second segment SG2, the second segment SG2, The 3 seg SG3, the 4th seg SG4, the 6th seg SG6, and the 7th seg SG7 are thinly displayed. This defect occurs because, for example, control that does not turn on the display monitor 9029 in the previous cycle has penetrated to the first cycle. For the characters corresponding to “6.” displayed in the second period, the second segment SG2, the fourth segment SG4, the sixth segment SG6, and the seventh segment SG7 are clearly displayed. SG1, the fifth segment SG5, and the dot SG8 are thinly displayed. This defect also occurs, for example, because the control that turned on the LED corresponding to “y” on the display monitor 9029 in the first cycle has penetrated to the second cycle.

  On the other hand, in the first interrupt processing shown in FIG. 119 (B), digit output processing 1 (special symbol display output program) is executed subsequent to digit output processing 1 (special symbol display output program). . For this reason, there is almost no difference between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (combined (ream) ratio display program), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, there is almost no delay in the digit output (DG).

  As a result, in the first period, the symbol corresponding to “0” was clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1). In addition, all characters corresponding to “y” were clearly displayed on the display monitor 9029 (SEG2). Thus, in the first interrupt process, it is possible to prevent display defects on the LEDs of the display monitor 9029.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 901, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 displays the short-term combination (ream), the short-term combination, the accumulated combination (ream), and the accumulated combination. . The display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011 for controlling the game so that visibility is not hindered. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to game nails (fault nails), windmills and the like provided on the game board.

  Further, the display monitor 9029 is disposed on the front surface when the main board 9011 is visually recognized. For this reason, it can prevent that the visibility with respect to the display monitor 9029 is disturbed. Further, the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation holes provided in the board case 90201 are not directly in front. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 can be prevented from being difficult to see due to the heat dissipation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 from being hindered.

  In addition, the main substrate 9011 is disposed at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral substrate other than the main substrate 9011. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 from being obscured by a peripheral board such as the effect control board 9012. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 from being hindered.

  Further, the display monitor 9029 displays a combination (ratio) and a ratio regarding the relationship between a prize ball paid out by passing an electric chew or an attacker and a prize ball paid out by passing a general winning opening. can do. In addition, the display monitor 9029 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term combination (continuous ratio) and a cumulative combination (continuous ratio) every predetermined period. For this reason, there is no need to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

  In addition, the display monitor 9029 displays a combination of consecutive (ream) (short-term service (ream)) and a ratio (short-term service) every time the number of prize balls reaches 6000. It is possible to easily recognize the numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit, for example, the number is 6000. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the number of prize balls of 6000. For example, a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10,000 may be used. Alternatively, time may be used instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

  In addition, the display monitor 9029 includes a combination of consecutive roles (ream ratio) (short-term service group (ream)) and a ratio (short-term service ratio) every time the number of prize balls reaches 6000, and a cumulative service group (rear ratio). And the cumulative role ratio is switched and displayed. For this reason, it is possible to easily compare the short-term combination (ream ratio) or short-term combination for each predetermined unit with the accumulated combination (ream) or the accumulated combination ratio. The display monitor 9029 is provided on the main substrate 9011 accommodated in the caulked substrate case. For this reason, it can contribute to prevention of fraud such as tampering with the display on the display monitor 9029.

  In addition, the gaming machine 901 includes a detecting unit that detects and detects fraud in which appropriate predetermined information cannot be displayed. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside the business hours of the game hall, counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is opened, and winning a game ball exceeding the allowable number of prizes. The gaming machine 901 operates within the business hours of the amusement hall, and the counting of prize balls at times other than business hours is highly likely to be fraudulent. Further, the gaming machine 901 plays a game with the door frame closed, and counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is open is highly likely to be an illegal act.

  Further, during the game of the gaming machine 901, the game ball cannot be fired beyond a certain speed. For example, game balls are fired at a maximum of 100 shots per minute. For this reason, the upper limit of the number of winning game balls per minute is approximately 100. Therefore, for example, when a winning of 100 gaming balls per minute or more than 20 gaming balls per 12 seconds is detected, the probability of fraud is extremely high.

  In the gaming machine 901, in order to detect fraud, when it is not within business hours, when the glass door frame 903a is not closed, a prize ball when a game ball wins more than a predetermined number of balls per unit time Eliminates the addition of numbers. Therefore, it is possible to suppress tampering of the role association (ream ratio), information on the role ratio, and the like due to these frauds. It should be noted that fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time, instead of the number of prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are won by the attacker per unit time.

  In the above gaming machine 901, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 90102 reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is erased. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from becoming insufficient in capacity.

  The ring buffer is provided with the first storage area to the tenth storage area. When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area is Erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased is set for each predetermined unit, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from being insufficient in capacity. Further, it is possible to increase the data that remains without being erased.

  When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the ninth storage area may be overwritten on the data in the tenth storage area. Even in this case, a lack of ring buffer capacity can be prevented.

  When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area, is erased in the ring buffer. For this reason, since the data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from being insufficient in capacity, and it is possible to calculate the combination (connection ratio) and the combination ratio with a large amount of data.

  When erasing the data in the ring buffer, not only a part of the data in the tenth storage area but also all of the data in the first storage area to the tenth storage area may be erased. Good. In this case, insufficient capacity of the ring buffer can be prevented more suitably. Further, some or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the beginning of business hours, all data in the ring buffer may be erased, and thereafter, part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

  In the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer has been described. However, in the storage area for storing data other than the ring buffer, for example, the total accumulation, a part or all of the data is similarly deleted. May be.

  In the above gaming machine 901, the data of the short-term combination (ream ratio), the short-term combination, the cumulative combination (ream), and the accumulated combination are displayed every 30 seconds. For this reason, each data can be compared easily. Note that the period for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate period. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be every hour. The displayed data may be data other than the data of the short-term service group (run ratio), the short-term role ratio, the cumulative service group (run ratio), and the cumulative role ratio, or only a part of these data. Good.

  In addition, when displaying each data of short-term officers (running ratio), short-term officers ratio, cumulative officers (running ratio), and cumulative officers ratio every 30 seconds, The display is different from the data of. Specifically, the short-term service group (run ratio) is displayed in red, and the other data is displayed in green. For this reason, it is possible to recognize that new data is displayed from the short-term service group (run ratio).

  In the gaming machine 901, a warning is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation when the clear switch is operated. The clear switch is an emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the combination (link ratio) or the combination ratio. When this switch is operated, it is possible to tamper with the combination data (relation ratio) and the data of the combination ratio, so that the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. Since the gaming machine 901 can warn of this abnormal operation by a warning display, fraud such as falsification of data can be suppressed.

  In the above gaming machine 901, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A, the second general winning port switch 9024B, and the third general winning port switch 9024C. Based on the number of prize balls obtained based on the detection signal from the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, the combination (community ratio) and the combination ratio are calculated. For example, using a sensor (count switch 9023) provided individually for an attacker and a sensor provided after a discharge passage through which a game medium won by an attacker and a game medium won by an electric chew merge, Based on the result of detection, when calculating the combination (relation ratio) and ratio by counting up the counter for winning the number of winning characters and the counter for acquiring the number of consecutive winning characters, specify which winning opening is to be paid out. It is difficult to calculate the ratio and the combination (link ratio). In this regard, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A, the second general winning port switch 9024B, the third general winning port switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning port. Based on the winning of each winning opening by detecting that the game medium has been won by the switch 9024D, and calculating the winning combination (linking ratio) and the winning ratio based on the number of winning balls obtained from the detection result. The number of winning balls can be judged. Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the combination (continuity ratio) and the combination ratio, and to calculate with high accuracy.

  When a door opening error occurs, it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. When the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the main board 9011 provided on the gaming machine frame 903 becomes visible from the outside of the gaming machine 901. For this reason, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 can be visually recognized by, for example, a player located outside the gaming machine 901.

  Here, in the above gaming machine 901, when a door opening required error occurs, the display of the role combination (relationship) role ratio on the display monitor 9029 is limited. For this reason, even if the door opening required error occurs and the display monitor 9029 can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the display of the combination ratio.

  In addition, the limitation of the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio on the display monitor 9029 is executed when a door opening required error occurs. For this reason, it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903 due to the occurrence of a door opening error, so that when the player can view the display monitor 9029 from the outside of the gaming machine 901, It is possible to prevent the display of the role combination (ream) ratio display.

  In the above-described gaming machine 901, when the door opening required error occurs, the display of the role (relation ratio) role ratio on the display monitor 9029 is executed. However, after the door opening required error occurs, When the machine frame 903 is opened, the display restriction of the combination (relation ratio) ratio on the display monitor 9029 may be executed. Even after the door opening required error has occurred, when the game machine frame 903 is opened, the display of the role (relationship) role ratio on the display monitor 9029 is executed. Ratio) It is possible to prevent the display of the ratio display.

  In addition, the limitation of display of the role (relation ratio) ratio on the display monitor 9029 is measured by a measurement timer for a predetermined time after the door opening required error is released, specifically, after the door opening required error is released. It is executed until the continuation time elapses. For this reason, immediately after the door opening required error is released, the gaming machine frame 903 is in an open state even though the door opening required error is released. At this time, a player or the like can visually recognize the display monitor 9029 from the outside of the gaming machine 901. In this regard, by continuing the restriction of the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio display until the duration time measured by the measurement timer elapses after the door opening error is canceled, the player can be notified from the outside of the gaming machine 901. It is possible to prevent the display of the role combination (ream) ratio display.

  Further, in the gaming machine 901, the duration is measured after the door opening required error is released, but after the door opening required error is released, the gaming machine frame 903 is closed and the duration is increased. You may measure. The continuation time in this case may be uniform regardless of the type of door opening required error, or may be set according to the type of door opening required error. Moreover, it is good also as time shorter than the continuation time measured after a door opening required error is cancelled | released.

  The above door opening required error is an example, and other modes may be adopted. For example, if the error canceling method is different and errors 1 to 7 can be canceled without opening the gaming machine frame 903, these may be errors other than the door opening required error. Conversely, if errors 8 to 13 are errors that cannot be canceled unless the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, these may be door opening required errors. In addition to the errors shown in FIG. 118, for example, an error that prevents the game ball from being launched from the hitting ball launcher, an error that makes it impossible to lend a ball, an error that causes the game board to move, etc. An error may be required. In addition, even if it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903 to cancel the error, an error that is often detected outside the business hours of the amusement hall, for example, an abnormal display on the image display device 905 In the case of an error that normally requires repair outside of business hours, such as an error that becomes a check error, a ROM check screen error, or an electric chew or a big prize opening not opening, it may be treated as an error other than the door opening required error.

  Further, in the above gaming machine 901, the display restriction mode is set to stop display, but the display limit may be set to another mode. For example, the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio may be thinned or reduced, or the display monitor 9029 may display different from the combination (relation ratio) ratio. As the display different from the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio, an error display may be displayed, for example, a display such as lighting all the segments may be used.

  In the above gaming machine 901, the main board 9011 and the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 are provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 903, so that when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened ( Although the display of the connection ratio) role ratio is limited, other modes may be used. For example, the main board 9011 may be provided on the surface of the game board 902 at a position where the glass door frame 903a is not visible from the outside of the gaming machine 901 when the glass door frame 903a is closed. In this case, the display monitor 9029 may also be provided on the surface of the game board 902 at a position where the glass door frame 903a cannot be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 901 when the glass door frame 903a is closed. In the gaming machine of this aspect, instead of the aspect in which the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio is limited when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the combination (when the glass door frame 903a is opened) The ratio display may be limited. In addition, regarding the continuation of the restriction of the display of the role combination (ream) ratio, the opening / closing of the glass door frame 903a may be used as a condition instead of the opening / closing of the gaming machine frame 903 as a condition. .

  In the above gaming machine 901, the CPU 90103 stores the special symbol display output program and the game control program in the use area program area in the built-in ROM area, and the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program in the non-use area program area. In addition, a role combination display program is stored. In this way, by storing the special symbol display output program and the game control program, the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program, and the combination (relation ratio) role display program separately in different areas, This makes it easier to test a program related to a game. In the CPU 90103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are made common and executed in one interrupt process. For this reason, the digit output process can be simplified.

  Further, when the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are made common, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are continuously executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (A), in the first interrupt process, the special symbol display output program → the combination (relationship) ratio display output program → the game control program → the combination (relationship) ratio. The programs are executed in the order of the calculation program. In the second interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 111 (A), a game control program → a special symbol display output program → an association (relation ratio) ratio display output program → an association (relation ratio) ratio calculation program The program is executed in the order. For this reason, in both the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, the special symbol display output program (first interrupt process) and the combination (relationship) ratio display output program (second interrupt process) A game control program (game progress control process) or a combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program (an association (relation ratio) ratio calculation process) is not sandwiched. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent a delay in the digit output processing 2 and the like, there is a problem in LED display in the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display device 9020, and the display monitor 9029. It is possible to prevent the pattern and characters from being displayed clearly.

  When digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are made common, the execution procedure of the first interrupt processing shown in FIG. 111 (A) or the second interrupt processing shown in FIG. 111 (B) is included. Just do it. For example, an arbitrary program may be executed before or after the execution order of the first interrupt process or the second interrupt process.

  Further, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, after executing the game control program, the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program is executed. For this reason, before the calculation of the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio, processing related to the main part of the game such as lottery for the transition to the big hit gaming state is executed. Therefore, game delay can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program is executed after the special symbol display output program is executed. In addition, after the special symbol display output program is executed, a specific program such as a game control program or a combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program is executed until the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program is executed. Does not run. For this reason, it is possible to prevent LED display defects on the display monitor 9029.

  Further, the special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area are called using “CALLF” having a short tone. On the other hand, a call using “CALLmn” is made to the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program and the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program stored in the non-use area, and the tone is changed. Calls using the short “CALLF” are never made. For this reason, progress of a game can be performed smoothly.

  Also, the combination (relation ratio) ratio displayed on the display monitor 9029 is determined by the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation process in the non-use area. The association (relationship) ratio calculation program and the association (relationship) ratio display output program are programs that are not related to the progress of the game. Since “CALLmn” having a relatively long tone is used for a program that is not related to the progress of the game, waste in the processing of the program can be reduced.

  In the non-use area, a call with “CALLmn” having a relatively long tone is performed. Therefore, in the use area, a call with “CALLF” having a short tone can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to use a highly versatile instruction such as “CALLF” with a short tone for a program related to game control executed in the use area.

  Further, since the CPU 90103 includes a Q register and calls a program using the Q register, the program can be called without specifying an upper address. However, since the upper address is set as a fixed value, for example, even if it can be used in the use area program area, it may not be used in the non-use area program area, and the versatility may be lowered.

  In this regard, the upper address of the use area program area in the CPU 90103 is “00”, the upper address of the non-use area program area is “01”, and the upper address of the non-use area program area is the upper address of the use area program area. It is different from the address. Further, when a program stored in the use area program area is called, the Q register is set to a fixed value “00”. For this reason, since the Q register can be used when calling a program stored in the use area program area, the program stored in the use area program area can be called only by specifying a lower address. Further, since the upper address of the non-use area program area is different from the upper address of the use area program area, the program stored in the non-use area program area by the Q register is prevented from being called. When a program stored in the non-use area program area is called, the Q register is set to a fixed value “01”. Therefore, since the Q register can be used also in the non-use area program area, the Q register can be used also in the non-use area program area while ensuring the versatility of the Q register.

  Further, in the above gaming machine 901, the display monitor 9029 is arranged in the center of the back side of the main board 9011 in the front when the main board 9011 is visually recognized. However, the display monitor 9029 is easy to see from an oblique direction. May be arranged. Hereinafter, a plurality of examples will be specifically described with respect to an aspect (hereinafter referred to as “display monitor arrangement aspect”) in which the display monitor is disposed so as to be easily viewed from an oblique direction.

  The first display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a first display monitor arrangement mode, the second display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a second display monitor arrangement mode, and the nth display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as an nth display monitor arrangement mode. A main substrate 9011 similar to the main substrate 9011 shown in FIG. 104A is used in each display monitor arrangement mode, and all the main substrates 9011 have the same structure. Similarly to the example shown in FIG. 104A, the main substrate 9011 is housed in the substrate case 90202. In the description of the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, the left and right are based on the direction when the main board 9011 is viewed from the front. Therefore, the side where the gaming machine frame 903 opens from the outer frame is the left side.

[First display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 121, in the first display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129A is provided on the back side of the main substrate 9011, and a display monitor 90130A is provided on the base member 90129A. The display monitor 90130A is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129A and the main substrate 9011.

  The base member 90129A has a triangular prism shape whose bottom surface is a right triangle, and is arranged so that the height direction thereof is along the vertical direction. The side surface of the triangular prism including one side forming the right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle on the bottom surface of the triangular prism formed by the base member 90129A is superimposed on the back surface of the main substrate 9011. A side surface of the triangular prism including one side extends in a direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main substrate 9011. A side surface (hereinafter referred to as an “inclined surface”) of a triangular prism including a side facing a right-angled portion in the right triangle is arranged in an inclined direction with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 9011.

  The display monitor 90130A is provided on the inclined surface of the base member 90129A. The orientation of the display monitor 90130A is inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 9011. FIG. 122 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame to which the main board is attached is released from the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 122, the display monitor 90130A has a display monitor 90130A between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 903 to which the main board 9011 is attached is released from the outer frame 903A. It arrange | positions so that it may face the front seeing from an open part.

  When the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130A arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode faces the front as seen from the open portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. Is arranged. For this reason, when the store clerk or the like conducts the confirmation work of the role combination (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 903 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

[Second Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 123A is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 123A, in the second display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129B is provided on the back side of the main substrate 9011, and a display monitor 90130B is provided on the base member 90129B. The display monitor 90130B is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129B and the main substrate 9011.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the main board 9011 is attached to the back surface of the game board 902 (see FIG. 55) provided in the gaming machine frame 903. The base member 90129B has a plate shape and is erected on the back surface of the main substrate 9011. Further, the main substrate 9011 and the base member 90129B are substantially orthogonal to each other. The display monitor 90130B is provided on the side surface of the base member 90129B. For this reason, the display monitor 90130B is arranged so that the surface on the opening portion side of the door frame in the standing portion standing on the main board 9011 provided on the gaming machine frame 903 faces the opening portion of the door frame. Has been placed. The display monitor 90130B is arranged at a position protruding from the back surface of the main substrate 9011.

  The display monitor 90130B arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode is arranged in a direction protruding from the back surface of the main substrate 9011 so as to face in a direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The main board 9011 is attached to the back surface of the game board 902 provided on the gaming machine frame 903. For this reason, when the store clerk or the like conducts the confirmation work of the role combination (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 903 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

  In the first and second display monitor arrangement modes, the base members 90129A and 90129B are accommodated in the substrate case 90202, but the base members 90129A and 90129B may be formed so as to protrude to the outside of the substrate case 90202. Good.

[Third display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 123 (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 123 (B), in the third display monitor arrangement mode, an embedded inclined surface 9011K is formed on the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The embedded inclined surface 9011K is formed to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 9011.

  The embedded inclined surface 9011K is formed as a part of the print base material on the main substrate 9011. A display monitor 90130C is provided on the embedded inclined surface 9011K of the main substrate 9011. The display monitor 90130C is provided on the embedded inclined surface 9011K, so that when the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the front is viewed from the opening between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. It is arranged to face. The main board 9011 and the display monitor 90130C are housed in the case 90202.

  When the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130C arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode faces the front as viewed from the open portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. Is arranged. For this reason, when the store clerk or the like conducts the confirmation work of the role combination (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 903 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

[Fourth Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 124 (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 124A, in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 90129D from the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 are provided on the back surface of the main substrate 9011. Each of the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 is provided with a first display monitor 90130D1 to a fourth display monitor 90130D4. A display monitor 90130D is formed by the first display monitor 90130D1 to the fourth display monitor 90130D4. The display monitor 90130D is accommodated in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129 and the main substrate 9011.

  The first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 have a common shape. This shape will be described using the first base member 90129D1. The first base member 90129D1 has a triangular prism shape whose bottom surface is a right triangle. The first base member 90129D1 has the same shape as the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode, but is smaller than the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode.

  Specifically, the inclined surface of the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode has a size equivalent to the size of the four 7 segments and the lower right dot (see FIG. 104A). On the other hand, the inclined surface of the first base member 90129D1 has a size equivalent to the size of one 7 segment and the lower right dot. On the first display monitor 90130D1 provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 90129D1, one seven segment and the lower right dot can be displayed.

  The first base member 90129D1 is disposed at a position slightly to the left of the substantially central position in the height direction of the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The second base member 90129D2 is disposed on the right side of the first base member 90129D1, and the third base member 90129D3 is on the right side of the second base member 90129D2 opposite to the left side on which the first base member 90129D1 is disposed. Is arranged. The fourth base member 90129D4 is disposed on the right side, which is the opposite side to the left side on which the second base member 90129D2 is disposed in the third base member 90129D3. Thus, the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 are arranged in parallel along the substantially horizontal direction.

  A second display monitor 90130D2 is provided on the inclined surface of the second base member 90129D2. Similarly, a third display monitor 90130D3 and a fourth display monitor 90130D4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the third base member 90129D3 and the fourth base member 90129D4. The content corresponding to the first display portion 9029A of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 104A is displayed on the first display monitor 90130D1 provided on the first base member 90129D1.

  The content corresponding to the second display portion 9029B of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 104A is displayed on the second display monitor 90130D2 provided on the second base member 90129D2. Content corresponding to the third display portion 9029C of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 104A is displayed on the third display monitor 90130D3 provided in the third base member 90129D3. The content corresponding to the fourth display portion 9029D of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 104A is displayed on the fourth display monitor 90130D4 provided on the fourth base member 90129D4.

  When the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130D arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode faces the front as seen from the open portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. Is arranged. For this reason, when the store clerk or the like conducts the confirmation work of the role combination (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 903 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

[Fifth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 124 (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 124B, in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 90129E from the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are provided on the back surface of the main board 9011. A first display monitor 90130E1 to a fourth display monitor 90130E4 are provided on each of the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4. A display monitor 90130E is formed by the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4. The display monitor 90130E is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129 and the main substrate 9011.

  Each of the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 has a shape common to the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. The first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 are the same as the first display monitor 90130D1 to the fourth display monitor 90130D4 provided on the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4. 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are provided respectively.

  The first base member 90129E1 is disposed above the substantially center position in the width direction of the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The second base member 90129E2 is disposed below the first base member 90129E1, and the third base member 90129E3 is disposed below the second base member 90129E2. The fourth base member 90129E4 is disposed below the third base member 90129E3. Thus, the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged side by side along the substantially vertical direction. Thus, the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction.

  A first display monitor 90130E1 is provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 90129E1. Similarly, a second display monitor 90130E2, a third display monitor 90130E3, and a fourth display monitor 90130E4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the second base member 90129E2, the third base member 90129E3, and the fourth base member 90129E4, respectively. Yes. The first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 provided on the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 include a first display portion 9029A to a fourth display portion of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. The contents corresponding to 9029D are displayed. Since the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction, the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 are also arranged in the vertical direction. For this reason, the four-digit displays on the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

  When the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130E arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode faces the front as viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. Is arranged. For this reason, when the store clerk or the like conducts the confirmation work of the role combination (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 903 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

[Sixth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 125 (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 125 (A), in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129F is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 that houses the main substrate 9011, and a display monitor 90130F is provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129F. Yes. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130F is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130F may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

  The base member 90129F has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Further, the display monitor 90130F provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129F includes four seven segments and a lower right dot (see FIG. 104A). The substrate case 90202 includes a substrate case main body 90202A and a lid 90202B. The base member 90129F is provided in the substrate case 90202 across the substrate case main body 90202A and the lid 90202B of the substrate case 90202.

  The display monitor 90130F arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 and arranged along the left-right direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 903 can be visually recognized from the outside only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the store clerk or the like performs the confirmation work of the role (relation ratio) ratio, the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 903 but only slightly opens the role (relation ratio) role ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio.

[Seventh display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 125 (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 125 (B), in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129G is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 for housing the main substrate 9011, and a display monitor 90130G is provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129G. Yes. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130G is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130G may be arranged in the horizontal direction. Similarly to the base member 90129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129G is provided on the substrate case 90202 across the substrate case main body 90202A and the lid 90202B of the substrate case 90202.

  The base member 90129G has a triangular prism shape whose bottom surface forms a right triangle, and the height direction of the base member 90129G is arranged along the depth direction of the gaming machine 901. A right-angle portion of a right-angled triangle that forms the bottom surface of the triangular prism is arranged on the right side that is the opposite side of the left side that is the side on which the gaming machine frame 903 is opened. Therefore, the upper surface of the base member 90129G is an inclined surface that descends from the side (right side) opposite to the side (left side) where the gaming machine frame 903 opens to the side where the gaming machine frame 903 opens. A display monitor 90130G is provided on this inclined surface.

  The display monitor 90130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 and arranged along the left-right direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 903 can be visually recognized from the outside only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the store clerk or the like performs the confirmation work of the role (relation ratio) ratio, the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 903 but only slightly opens the role (relation ratio) role ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio.

  Further, the upper surface of the base member 90129G provided with the display monitor 90130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode faces from the side opposite to the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened to the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened. It is an inclined surface that falls. Therefore, when the display monitor 90130G is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the display monitor 90130G can be easily viewed. Therefore, it is possible to more easily check the role combination (relation ratio) ratio.

[Eighth display monitor layout]
FIG. 126 (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 126A, in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129H is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 for housing the main substrate 9011, and a display monitor 90130H is provided on the left side surface of the base member 90129H. It has been. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130H is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130H may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

  The base member 90129H has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. In addition, the display monitor 90130H provided on the left side surface of the base member 90129H includes four seven segments and a lower right dot (see FIG. 104A). The substrate case 90202 includes a substrate case main body 90202A and a lid 90202B. The base member 90129H is provided on the substrate case 90202 across the substrate case main body 90202A and the lid 90202B of the substrate case 90202.

  The display monitor 90130H arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 and arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 90130H can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the store clerk or the like performs the confirmation work of the role (relation ratio) ratio, the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 903 but only slightly opens the role (relation ratio) role ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio.

[Ninth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 126 (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 126 (B), in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129I is provided on the right regular surface of the substrate case 90202 for housing the main substrate 9011, and a display monitor 90130I is provided on the right side surface of the base member 90129I. Is provided. Similarly to the base member 90129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129I is provided in the substrate case 90202 across the substrate case main body 90202A and the lid 90202B of the substrate case 90202.

  The base member 90129I has a triangular prism shape whose bottom surface forms a right triangle, and the height direction of the base member 90129I is arranged along the depth direction of the gaming machine 901. The right angle portion of the right triangle that forms the bottom surface of the triangular prism is arranged on the right side. For this reason, the left side surface of the base member 90129I is an inclined surface that approaches the right side as it goes downward from above. A display monitor 90130I is provided on this inclined surface. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130I is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 90130I may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

  The display monitor 90130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 and arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 90130I can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the store clerk or the like performs the confirmation work of the role (relation ratio) ratio, the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 903 but only slightly opens the role (relation ratio) role ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio.

  In addition, the left side surface of the base member 90129I provided with the display monitor 90130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is an inclined surface that approaches the right side as it descends. Therefore, when the display monitor 90130I is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the display monitor 90130I can be easily viewed. Therefore, it is possible to more easily check the role combination (relation ratio) ratio.

  In addition, each of the display monitors 90130A to 90130I arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode has the display monitor installation angle with respect to the open portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. You may provide in the adjustment means which makes adjustment possible. The adjusting means includes, for example, a fixing portion fixed to the base members 90129A to 90129I or the embedded inclined surface 9011K, and an attachment portion that is movable with respect to the fixing portion. Any one may be attached. The adjusting means may be a manually operated type that allows a store clerk or the like to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 903, or an electric type that operates a motor or actuator provided in the adjusting means. But you can. In the case of an electric type, a person who can operate from an office or the like via a communication device or the like may be used.

  The range in which the attachment portion can be moved may be, for example, a movement range associated with movement in the up / down / left / right directions, or a movement range associated with rotational movement around an arbitrary rotation axis. Moreover, the movement range which combined the movement range accompanying these movements may be sufficient. The display monitor 90130A to 90130I is provided in the adjusting means that can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the open portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame, so that the gaming hall where the gaming machine 901 is installed You can make adjustments according to your wishes.

  In addition, in said 1st display monitor arrangement | positioning aspect-9th display monitor arrangement | positioning aspect, although the arrangement | positioning of the display monitor was shown, respectively, you may combine these arrangement | positioning aspects. For example, the display monitor may be arranged from the upper surface to the left side of the substrate case 90202 by combining the eighth display monitor arrangement mode and the ninth display monitor arrangement mode.

[A gaming machine with a blade-type variable winning ball device]
In the above example, a variable display game (special game) that performs variable display is executed, and the so-called big hit game state is controlled when the display result of variable display in the variable display game (special game) is a big hit. A digital pachislot machine was explained. On the other hand, as a so-called honey-type gaming machine in which the big hit gaming state is controlled by passing the gaming ball through a specific area (V area) provided inside the openable / closable blade-type variable winning ball apparatus. Good. Hereinafter, an example in which the present invention is applied to a honeycomb type gaming machine will be described. Hereinafter, the difference between the game machine 901 and the common type will be mainly described, and common description may be omitted.

  FIG. 127 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a blade-type variable winning ball apparatus, and FIG. 128 is a front view of the variable winning ball apparatus provided on the game board as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 127, a pachinko gaming machine 90501 has a glass door frame 90502 formed in a frame shape. A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 90503 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 90502. Below the hitting ball supply tray 90503, there are an extra ball receiving tray 90504 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 90503, and the speed at which the hitting ball launching device launches the game balls (ie, the strength of the spring that plays the game balls). And a hitting ball operating handle (operating knob) 90505 for adjusting the height).

  The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball fired from the ball striking device by rotating the operation knob 90505. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 90505 to the right, the speed of the game ball fired from the ball striking device gradually increases, and when the speed exceeds a predetermined speed, the game ball fired Enters the left area of the game area 90507 from above through the hitting rail. When the operation knob 90505 is further rotated to the right, the launched game ball enters the right area of the game area 90507 from above. Therefore, by changing the rotation amount with the operation knob 90505 rotated to the right, it is possible to adjust the momentum of the game ball launched from the hit ball launching device, and to adjust the area where the game ball is to be shot. .

  A game board is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 90502. The game board is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board and various parts attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 90507 partitioned by guide rails is formed on the front surface of the game board.

  A wing-type variable winning ball apparatus 90520 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 90507. Below the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, a first starting winning port 90511, a second starting winning port 90512, and a variable winning ball device 90515 that forms a third starting winning port 90513 are provided. A winning ball that has entered the first starting winning opening 90511 is detected by the first starting opening switch 90511a, and a winning ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 90512a is detected by the second starting opening switch 90512a. Led to. In addition, a winning ball that has entered the third starting winning opening 90513 that can be awarded when the variable winning ball apparatus 90515 is opened is detected by the third starting opening switch 90513a and guided to the back of the game board. The variable winning ball device 90515 is opened by a solenoid 90515a. Hereinafter, the first start winning port 90511, the second start winning port 90512, and the third start winning port 90513 may be collectively referred to as a “start winning port” or may be represented as a start winning port 90511, 90512, 90513. . Further, the first start port switch 90511a, the second start port switch 90512a, and the third start port switch 90513a may be collectively referred to as “start port switches” or may be represented as start port switches 90511a, 90512a, and 90513a. . When a game ball wins at the start winning opening, a predetermined number, for example, 5 game balls are paid out as a prize ball. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins at the start winning opening may be common or may be different for each start winning opening. For example, when the game balls are won at the first start winning opening 90511 and the second start winning opening 90512, the number of payout balls is five, and when the game balls win at the third start winning opening 90513 The number of payouts may be two.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch, the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 90520 is controlled to open and close once or twice. By opening / closing control, the left open door 90576A on the left side moves to the left from the initial position, and the right open door 90576B on the right side moves to the right from the initial position, whereby the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520 is in the open state. When the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B return to the initial positions, the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520 is closed. The state in which the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520 performs the opening operation in response to the winning detection of the start port switch is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 90520 may be referred to as an accessory. The game board is provided with various bonuses. Hereinafter, the bonus means a blade-type variable winning ball device 90520.

  An effect display device 90509 such as an LCD for effect display is provided on the back side inside the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520. The effect display device 90509 variably displays (changes display) the effect symbol as identification information. In this embodiment, the effect display device 90509 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

  A special symbol display 90508 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the right side of the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520. The special symbol display 90508 is constituted by, for example, a 7 segment display.

  Above the special symbol display 90508, there is provided a special symbol start memory display 90518 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls, that is, the starting memory number, in which a game ball has entered the start winning opening. The special symbol start memory display 90518 displays up to four start memory numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol start memory display 90518 increases the number of lit LEDs by 1 each time there is an effective start winning in the start winning opening 90511, 90512, 90513. Each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 90508, the number of LEDs that are lit is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the special symbol start memory display 90518 shifts the lighting state each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 90508. As will be described later, since the start memory number is also displayed on the effect display device 90509, the special symbol start memory display 90518 may not be provided.

  On the left side of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 90520, a normal symbol display 90510 that variably displays a normal symbol is provided. When a game ball passes through the gate 90532 provided on the right side of the game area 90507 and is detected by the gate switch 90532a, the normal symbol display 90510 displays a normal symbol (in this example, a numeric display with a 7-segment LED). Variable display starts. In this embodiment, “7” is stopped and displayed at the end of variable display in the case of winning, and other than “7” is stopped and displayed in the case of losing. In the case of winning, the variable winning ball apparatus is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. Note that the normal symbol hit probability is, for example, 12/13. Above the normal symbol display 90510, a normal symbol start memory display 90541 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of balls passed through the gate 90532 is provided. Each time the gate 90532 is passed, the normal symbol start memory display 90541 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 90510 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  On the right side of the variable winning ball device 90515, there is provided a large winning opening through which the open / close plate 90516 is opened by a solenoid 90521 in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The opening / closing plate 90516 is means for opening and closing the special winning opening. The winning ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 90523. When game balls win the big prize opening, a predetermined number, for example, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A decorative lamp blinking and displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 90507, and an out port 90526 for collecting the game balls that have not won a prize is provided at the bottom.

  In addition, two speakers 90527 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 90507. A top frame lamp 90528a, a left frame lamp 90528b, and a right frame lamp 90528c are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 90507. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520) in the game area 90507. The top frame lamp 90528a, the left frame lamp 90528b, the right frame lamp 90528c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  The game ball launched from the hit ball launching device enters the game area 90507 through the hit ball rail, and then falls in the game area 90507. When the hit ball enters the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch, if the variable display of the symbol can be started, the special symbol starts variable display on the special symbol display 90508 and the effect display device 90509 produces the effect symbol. Starts variable display. If the variable display of the symbol is not in a state where it can be started, if the number of start winning memories which is the reserved storage of the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display 90508 is not the upper limit, the number of starting winning memories is increased by one. That is, the number of LEDs to be turned on in the special symbol start memory display 90518 is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbols (“0” to “9”) on the special symbol display 90508 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. If the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a big hit symbol (specific display result: specifically, for example, “3”, “7”), the first big hit gaming state (without starting operation state) of the big hit gaming state The game goes to the jackpot game state to be started. In addition, when the small hit symbol (specifically, “1”, “2”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “8”, “9”), it shifts to the starting operation state. To do. In the starting operation state, when a game ball wins a special area provided inside the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 90520, the state shifts to a second big hit gaming state (a big hit gaming state started after passing through the starting operation state). . Note that the gaming state before the transition to the big hit gaming state is a normal state. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the state shifts to a normal state or a short time state (a state in which the variable winning ball device 90515 is easily opened by shortening the average variation time of special symbols and production symbols). To do. The short-time state can be continued until the variable winning ball device 90515 is released a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, and the transition condition to the big hit gaming state is satisfied until the variable winning ball device 90515 is released 100 times. The gaming state shifts from the short-time state to the big hit gaming state. In addition, when the variable winning ball device 90515 is released 100 times without satisfying the condition for transition to the big hit gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the short-time state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in this embodiment, the gate 90532 is provided on the right side of the game area 90507. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the case where the time is controlled, it is better to launch the game ball (so-called right hit) aiming at the right side of the game area 90507 so that the game ball passes through the gate 90532. It will be advantageous. Further, as shown in FIG. 54, in this embodiment, the big prize opening is provided on the right side of the game area 90507. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the big hit game, the game ball is fired (so-called right hit) aiming at the right side of the game area in order to win the game ball at the big prize opening. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the game is not in the short-time state or the big hit game (in the normal state), it is assumed that the game ball is launched (so-called left-handed) aiming to the left of the game area 90507.

  A left gate 90517 is provided to the left of the game area 90507, and a game ball that has passed through the left gate 90517 is detected by the left gate switch 90517a. A right gate 90519 is provided to the right of the game area 90507, and a game ball that has passed through the right gate 90519 is detected by the right gate switch 90519a.

  In this embodiment, when a transition of a predetermined gaming state is performed, control for shifting the gaming state is performed based on the passing of the game ball through the left gate 90517 and the right gate 90519. Specifically, in this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is derived and displayed, or when a game ball wins a specific winning opening 90566 in the blade type variable winning ball device 90520, the big hit game is started immediately. Instead, the big hit game is started based on the game ball passing through the gate. In this embodiment, since the big winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area 90507 (right-handed during the big hit game), the big hit is based on the passing of the game ball through the right gate 90519. A game is started. Note that the big hit game is not started based on the passing of the game ball through the left gate 90517 or the right gate 90519, but when the big win symbol is derived and displayed, or the specific winning in the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 The big hit game may be started immediately when a game ball is won in the mouth 90566, or the big hit game may be started after a predetermined time has passed.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the big hit game is finished, a transition to a state in which a new variation display can be started based on the passing of the game ball through the left gate 90517 and the right gate 90519 is made. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the normal state, it is left-handed and in the short-time state, it is right-handed. Therefore, when the game is controlled to the normal state after the big hit game, the game ball has passed through the left gate 90517 Based on this, the state is shifted to a state in which a new variation display can be started. Transition to a state where display can be started. In addition, it is not shifted to a state in which a new variation display can be started based on the passing of the game ball through the left gate 90517 or the right gate 90519, but when the big hit game is ended or the big hit game is ended. When a predetermined time elapses from the start, a transition to a state in which a new variable display can be started may be performed.

  Next, the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520 will be described. When the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B are opened by the driving of the opening / closing motor 90575, the blade-type variable winning ball device (right) 90520 is in a state where a game ball can enter. The game ball that has entered the accessory 90520 passes through a passing port or the like and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 90520. In FIG. 128, a state in which the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B are closed and the game ball cannot enter the accessory 90520 (is difficult to enter) is indicated by a solid line, and the left open door 90576A and the right open door A state in which 90576B is opened and the game ball can enter the accessory 90520 (easy to enter) is indicated by a virtual line.

  A left movable member 90577 and a right movable member 90578 are provided on the left and right sides of the accessory 90520, respectively. The portion that moves in the left movable member 90577 is the left movable portion 90577A, and the portion that moves in the right movable member 90578 is the right movable portion 90578A. The left movable portion 90577A is moved by the left movable portion drive solenoid 90577B, and the right movable portion 90578A is moved by the right movable portion drive solenoid 90578B. The left movable portion 90577A and the right movable portion 90578A move in the vertical direction, respectively.

  A special winning opening 90566 that forms a specific area is provided at the bottom of the accessory 90520. Further, in the back of the position at which the special winning opening 90566 is provided in the accessory 90520, there is provided a breakout opening, and inside the accessory 90520, there is a passage for distributing the game balls to the specific winning opening 90566 or the removal opening. Is provided. The specific winning opening 90566 is provided with a specific area switch 90566A. A game ball won in the specific winning opening 90566 is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, and a gaming ball won in the outlier is detected by the outlier area switch. Is done. When a game ball wins the specific winning opening 90566 and the extra opening, a predetermined number, for example, 10 gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins at the specific prize opening 90566 and the extra opening may be the same or different. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning a game ball in the specific prize opening 90566 may be set to 10, and the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning a game ball in the margin may be set to three. Further, when a game ball enters the outlet, no prize ball may be paid out (the number of prize balls is 0).

  It is possible to shift to the second big hit gaming state on condition that the game ball that has entered the accessory 90520 wins the specific winning opening 90566 and is detected by the specific area switch 90566A. Further, when a game ball that has entered the accessory 90520 wins a winning slot, it is not possible to shift to the second big hit game state.

  An example of how the game proceeds in the gaming machine 90501 will be described. In the gaming machine 90501, in the normal state, when a game ball wins any of the first start winning opening 90511, the second starting winning opening 90512, and the third starting winning opening 90513, one of the big hit, the small hit, and the off A lottery (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “hit lottery”) is executed. As a result of the big hit lottery, the big hit, the small hit or the out is determined. Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, and the symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 90508.

  If the result of the big win lottery is determined, after the special symbol display 90508 stops and displays the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the big hit), the gaming state changes from the normal state to the big hit gaming state (first It is transferred to the jackpot game state. In the big hit game state, the big winning opening by the opening and closing plate 90516 is controlled to be opened and closed 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round opening allowance time is 29 seconds). In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is fixed at 16, but the number of rounds (for example, any one of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, and 16 rounds) may be determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, the accessory 90520 is not controlled to the open state. Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a big hit, the accessory 90520 may be controlled to be in an open state.

  When the result of the big win lottery is determined to be a small hit, after the special symbol display 90508 stops and displays the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the small hit), the accessory 90520 is controlled to be in an open state. A starting operation is started. In the starting operation state, the accessory 90520 is opened for 0.9 seconds. The number of times of opening (number of times of opening) is once, twice or three times. In the start-up operation state, when a game ball wins an accessory 90520, and a game ball wins a specific winning opening 90566 and is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, a V winning is generated. When a V prize is generated, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state (second big hit gaming state). When the game ball enters the outlet and no V prize is generated, the game does not shift to the second big hit game state. In other words, they are disconnected and maintain the normal state.

  When the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be out of place, after the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the outage) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 90508, the accessory 90520 is controlled to be in an open state. Absent. In this case, the gaming state does not shift to the big hit gaming state, and the normal state is maintained.

  There are two types of big hits: non-temporal and big hits. In any case, when the change of the special symbol is finished, the game goes directly to the 16 round big hit game state (first big hit game state) without going through the starting operation state. Later, the gaming state shifts to the short-time state (in the case of a non-temporal big hit, the gaming state after the big hit game is a normal state).

  There are three types of small hits, the first small hit to the third small hit. The first small hit is a small hit when the accessory 90520 is opened once in the starting operation state, the second small hit is a small hit when the accessory 90520 is opened twice, and the third small hit is an accessory. 90520 is a small hit that opens three times. In addition, in the case of detachment, the accessory 90520 does not perform the opening operation.

  In addition, when the winning combination 90520 performs the opening operation in the first small hit or the second small hit, the second big hit is a non-timeless big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state is finished, Transition to the state. In addition, the second big hit in the case of winning a V when the accessory 90520 performs the opening operation at the third small hit becomes a short-time big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state is finished, the second big hit is shifted to the short-time state.

  In addition, the gaming machine 90501 is provided with a main board and a display monitor similar to the main board 9011 and the display monitor 9029 provided in the gaming machine 901. The ratio is calculated, and the calculated role ratio is displayed on the display monitor. The display monitor is arranged in front of the main board on the main board so as not to hinder the visibility. This is the same as the gaming machine 901 described above. In addition, the calculation sequence, display procedure, and the like of the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, and the like are the same as those of the gaming machine 901 described above.

  The combination (ream ratio) and the combination ratio in the gaming machine 90501 can be obtained by the above expressions (1) and (2). The number of prize winning balls for the gaming machine 90501 is determined by the winning of the game ball with respect to the large winning opening provided with the variable winning ball device 90515, the specific winning port 90566 and the off-side opening in the blade type variable winning ball device 90520, and the opening / closing plate 90516. The total number of game balls to be paid out.

  In addition, the number of consecutive winning winning balls in the gaming machine 90501 is the number of game balls paid out by winning a game ball with respect to the big winning opening provided with the opening / closing plate 90516 when the first big hit gaming state is executed. Refers to the total number. In addition, when the second big hit game state is executed, the game balls paid out by winning a game ball with respect to the big winning opening provided with the opening / closing plate 90516 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “big winning opening winning”). It may be the total number, and the game ball paid out by winning the big winning opening and the specific winning opening 90566 in the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 90520 at the time of the V winning that has been a trigger for the transition to the second big hit gaming state and the deviation. It may be the total number of game balls to be paid out by winning a game ball for the mouth (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an “opportunity win”).

  In the opportunity prize, “when winning the V win that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state” may be when the blade-type variable prize ball device 90520 in which the V prize has occurred or when the V prize has occurred. A series of opening due to winning at the start winning opening that triggered the opening of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus may be included. For example, when the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520 is opened by the winning of a game ball to the third start winning port 90513 where the number of opening of the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520 is 3, and there is a V prize at the time of the opening. This opportunity prize may be a prize of a game ball for the specific prize opening 90566 and the off-edge of the blade type variable prize ball apparatus 90520 at the time of opening three times.

  In addition, when the number of consecutive prize winning balls is the total number of game balls to be paid out by winning a grand prize winning and a winning prize, winning for the specific winning slot 90566 and the offending slot of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 90520 becomes an opportunity prize. It depends on whether or not a V prize that triggers the transition to the second big hit gaming state occurs. For this reason, the total number of game balls to be paid out by winning the specific winning opening 90566 of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 90520 and the outlier (hereinafter referred to as “temporary memory opportunity winning ball number”) is temporarily stored, and the second big hit game When the V prize that triggers the transition to the state occurs, the temporary memory opportunity prize ball number may be added to the number of consecutive feature winning prize balls as the total number of game balls to be paid out by the opportunity prize. Good. The timing for adding the temporary storage opportunity winning ball to the number of consecutive winning character winning balls may be an appropriate timing. For example, the timing may be the timing of counting the number of game balls to be paid out by winning the grand prize winning prize by shifting to the second big hit gaming state, or counting the number of game balls to be paid out by winning the big prize winning prize. When starting, it is good also as a timing just before displaying a game combination (continuous ratio) on the display monitor 9029 during or after counting the number of prize balls of the game ball paid out by the big prize opening prize.

  In addition, after storing the temporary storage opportunity winning ball, when the V winning that triggers the transition to the second big hit gaming state does not occur, the temporary storage trigger winning ball may be deleted. When a game ball is won at the specific winning opening 90566, a V winning that has triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state has occurred, so the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520 is substantially disengaged. You may make it memorize | store once the total number of game balls paid out by the winning with respect to a mouth. For example, the determination that the V winning that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state does not occur is, for example, that no V winning has occurred after a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520. can do.

  In addition, as with the above-described gaming machine 901, the short-term combination (ream), the short-term combination, the accumulated combination (ream), and the accumulated combination ratio are displayed on the display monitor. And so on. Further, the display monitor may be attached to the main board in the same manner as the gaming machine 901 described above. In addition, the display monitor may be arranged in various manners as described in the attachment manner to the gaming machine 901.

  The above gaming machine 90501 is a gaming machine including a blade-type variable winning ball device 90520. In a gaming machine equipped with such a blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, a combination (community ratio) and a combination ratio are displayed on the main board. The display monitor is provided on the main board for controlling the game so that the visibility is not hindered. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to game nails (fault nails), windmills and the like provided on the game board.

  Further, in the gaming machine 90501 provided with the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio are calculated in a manner different from that of the gaming machine 901. Also in the gaming machine 90501 provided with such a blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, it is possible to calculate a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio and display them on a display monitor attached to the main board.

  Also, in the gaming machine 90501, among the starting winning holes for opening and closing the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, the variable winning ball device 90515 is used as the third starting winning port 90513. It may be only those that are not provided with variable winning ball devices such as the mouth 90511 and the second start winning opening 90512. Further, the start winning opening may be only the variable winning ball apparatus such as the third starting winning opening 90513.

  Note that the number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball in the third start prize opening 90513 is added to the number of prize winning prize balls used for calculating the ratio, but the first start prize opening 90511 and the second The number of prize balls to be paid out by winning a game ball at the start winning opening 90512 is not added to the number of winning combination winning balls and the number of winning consecutive winning balls.

  Further, in the gaming machine 90501, a big hit lottery is executed by winning a game ball at the start winning opening, but even if winning at the start winning opening, the big win lottery is not executed, and the variable winning ball apparatus 90520 is always opened. It is good also as a mode in which operation | movement is performed. Also, instead of the big hit lottery, the lottery for the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 90520 may be performed, or both the big hit lottery and the lottery for the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 90520 may be performed. . In addition, in the lottery for the number of times of opening, in addition to lottery of times such as once, twice, and three times, 0 may be included as an object of the number of times of opening.

  The gaming machine 90501 is set to a big hit gaming state (a first big hit gaming state and a second big hit gaming state). There is a prize opening. On the other hand, it is good also as an aspect with which only the blade | wing type variable winning ball apparatus was provided, without providing a big winning opening, while having set the big hit game state. In this case, in the big hit gaming state, the blade-type variable winning ball device may perform an opening / closing operation or an opening operation for a certain time.

  Further, in an aspect in which only the blade-type variable winning ball device is provided, V winning may be set as the continuation condition of the big hit gaming state. For example, when shifting to the big hit gaming state, the continuation of the next round may be determined when the highest continuation round is set and a V prize is awarded during one round.

(Modification regarding display control of winning information and display items)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, an item related to the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 9041A and 9041B, a pass gate designation command for designating which gate the game ball has passed through is sent from the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) to the production control board 9012 (production). By transmitting to the control CPU 90120), the effect control CPU 90120 can count the number of times that the game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B, and display it in the first area α.

  For example, the number of times the gate has passed today (corresponding to A1), today's gate, by the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general prize opening designation command designating which of the first to fourth general prize openings has been won Gate pass ratio (corresponding to A2), low base state gate pass count (corresponding to B1), low base state gate pass ratio (corresponding to B2), high base state gate pass count (corresponding to C1), high base The gate passage ratio in the state (corresponding to C2), the number of gate passages in the setting period (corresponding to D1), and the gate passage ratio in the setting period (corresponding to D2) can be totaled and displayed in the first area α. . In addition, these items can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α for each gate (for each of the gates 9041A and 9041B).

  (2) Further, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the grand prize winning command from the game control microcomputer 90100, so that it can count the number of prizes received at the big prize winning and can win the prize winning prize. The number of awarded prize balls based on the total number can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

  For example, by the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating which of the first to fourth general prize openings has been awarded, Equivalent) ”,“ Today ’s winning prize ratio (corresponding to A2) ”,“ Today's winning ball award (corresponding to A3) ”,“ Today ’s total “Percentage of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize winnings with respect to the number of prize balls (corresponding to A4)”, “Number of winning prizes for the winning prizes during the set period (corresponding to D1)” , “Award ratio to the big prize opening in the setting period (corresponding to D2)”, “Number of winning balls awarded based on the winning in the big winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D3)”, and “ Granted based on winning a prize in the winning period during the set period for the number of awarded balls The percentage of winning balls number (corresponding to D4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  Here, “the ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize winnings with respect to today's total prize balls (corresponding to A4)” or “the prize balls awarded during the set period” When the ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning a prize winning in the set period with respect to the number (corresponding to D4) is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), the fact is notified. You may make it do. For example, a message such as “the prize winning ball ratio exceeding the reference value (60%)” may be displayed in the first area α.

  Also, the number of prize balls given to the total number of winning balls based on winning at the second start winning opening controlled by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B and the opening / closing control by the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 are controlled. When the total ratio with the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the big winning opening is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 70%), the fact may be notified. For example, in the first area α, a message such as “the prize winning ball ratio exceeds the reference value (70%)” may be displayed.

  (3) In the above embodiment, together with the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side, the effect control CPU 90120 receives each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters each entry area. Although the example in which the number of game balls entering the respective entry areas is tabulated is described based on the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side of the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side, each entry area is entered. The number of game balls entered is counted or the effect control CPU 90120 enters a game ball into each entry area based on each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters the game entry area. It is also possible to count the numbers.

  It should be noted that the number of game balls entering the counter area (the counter value corresponding to each switch) counted by the game control microcomputer 90100 or the effect control CPU 90120 on the main board 9011 side is transmitted to the effect control CPU 90120. Thus, the image can be displayed on the image display device 905. For example, by outputting a command designating the total number of entries into each entry area from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 can enter each entry area based on the command. The number of approaches can be specified and displayed in the first area α.

  It should be noted that the display devices provided on the main board 9011, such as the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, indicate the number of entries into each entry area counted on the game control microcomputer 90100 side. You may make it display on. Further, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening does not reach a predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B You may make it alert | report by performing the specific display different from the display result of the variable display of a special symbol. Note that the display device provided on the main board 9011 on which the aggregated results are displayed is not limited to the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, or the like, and displays the aggregated results. It may be a display device provided exclusively for. The display device may have any form such as a lamp, LED, 7 segment, liquid crystal display device, EL panel, light guide plate, and the like.

  The value of each counter (number of entries into each entry area) stored in the RAM 90102 can be determined by, for example, the game state flag (probability change state, time reduction state, etc.) stored in the RAM 90102 by the game control microcomputer 90100. Displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B when a reset operation for resetting the flag (according to the gaming state for playing) is performed by the game hall side (for example, a store clerk). Alternatively, it may be output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012 and displayed on the image display device 905 for a certain period of time. The reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 9011. The reset button is provided on the back side (game island side) of the gaming board 902, and the gaming board 902 is rotated forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903 using the hinge mechanism of the gaming machine frame 903. By doing so, a reset button provided on the back side of the game board 902 can be operated.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the example in which the winning number information (D1 to D4) in the counting period set by the player can be displayed in the first area α has been described. A counting period is set in the gaming machine (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is stored or set by an operation on the game hall side), and the number of winnings in the set counting period Information (corresponding to D1 to D4) may be displayed in the first area α. For example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (for example, 60 times / 60 minutes). In that case, you may make it alert | report that.

  (5) In addition, when a winning at a specific winning opening does not occur for a predetermined period, the fact may be notified to the first area α. For example, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening has not occurred for 10 minutes, a message “No general winning for 10 minutes” may be displayed in the first area α. The predetermined period may be set by an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030), or an operation on the player side (for example, an operation using the operation button 9030). It may be possible to set by.

  (6) It should be noted that the above embodiment is also applied to a gaming machine including a sorting device in which the winning ratio to the start winning opening and the general winning opening is a specific ratio (for example, 1: 1). The number-of-wins information related to the number of winnings at each winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117434 has a configuration in which game balls received by a sorting device are alternately distributed to a first start winning opening and a second starting winning opening. By providing the distribution device, it is possible to alternately distribute the game balls received by the distribution device to the start winning port and the general winning port. The above embodiment is also applied to the gaming machine having a configuration in which the distribution device alternately distributes the game balls to the start winning opening and the general winning opening, and the first winning amount information related to the winning numbers to each winning opening is applied. It can be displayed in area α. However, since the number of wins to the general prize opening is automatically determined according to the number of wins to the start prize opening, the ratio of the number of wins to the general prize opening to the number of wins to the start prize opening is displayed as described above. There is no need to let them.

  (7) In FIG. 99, the counting period can be set according to the player's operation, but the winning number information is reset according to the player's operation, and the counting of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You may do it. For example, when the player performs an operation to start counting, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is reset to 0, and thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 issues a general winning opening specifying command. Each time it is received, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α may be increased by one.

  Further, the aggregation period once set may be changed according to the player's operation before the set period elapses. For example, although the aggregation period is initially set to 30 minutes, in order to quickly know the aggregation result, the player may perform a resetting operation before the set period elapses to shorten the aggregation period to 10 minutes. In addition, although the aggregation period was initially set to 10 minutes, in order to know the aggregation results for a longer period, the player performs a resetting operation before the set period elapses and extends the aggregation period to 30 minutes. Also good. Further, the set aggregation period may be extended in accordance with the player's operation after the set period has elapsed. For example, after 10 minutes, which is the set counting period, has elapsed and the counting results for 10 minutes have been displayed once, the player performs an extension operation to grasp the counting results for a longer counting period, The totaling period may be extended by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, both a 10-minute totaling result and a 60-minute totaling result including 10 minutes may be obtained).

  (8) In the first area α in the demonstration screen displayed on the image display device 905 or in the state where the game is being performed (the state where the game end determination is not made and the demonstration screen is not displayed). The image explaining whether each winning opening provided on the game board surface is the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, or the general winning opening may be displayed. In addition, the number of winning balls at each winning opening may be notified.

  (9) In the above embodiment, the game hall setting has priority over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may have priority over the game hall setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is at the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. When the operation button 9030 is pressed while an icon including the characters “display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 58 (2) so that the image display device 905 can display the information, the number-of-wins information is displayed on the image display device 905. (Display control in FIGS. 95 and 96 is executed) When the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “do not display” is selected on the selection screen in FIG. You may make it not display on the apparatus 905 (the display control of FIG. 97 is performed).

  In addition, it is also possible to determine whether or not to display the winning information according to the order of the accepted setting operation, with the game hall setting and the player setting being the same priority. In other words, it may be determined whether or not the winning number information is displayed with priority given to the setting operation (last setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 58 (1) to (3) thereafter. When set, the winning information is displayed (display control in FIGS. 95 and 96 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens shown in FIGS. 58 (1) to 58 (3) are set so that the winning information is not displayed, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is moved to the second position (display position) after that. In such a case, the winning number information is displayed (display control in FIGS. 95 and 96 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the setting for not displaying the winning number information on the player setting screens of FIGS. 58 (1) to (3) thereafter. In such a case, the winning information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 97 is executed). Further, even when the player setting screens shown in FIGS. 58 (1) to 58 (3) are set to display the winning number information, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is moved to the first position (non-display position) after that. ) Is not displayed (the display control in FIG. 97 is executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by operating the display changeover switch 9032 by the store clerk of the game hall, and the player operates the operation button 9030. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number-of-wins information on the image display device 905 by operating, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and by operating the display changeover switch 9032, While it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905, the player cannot set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, FIG. 58 (1) to FIG. 58). (There is no setting screen on the player side as shown in (3)). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display winning number information on the image display device 905 only on the game hall side.

  On the other hand, it is possible to set whether or not the winning number information is displayed on the image display device 905 by operating the operation button 9030 by the player (and the store clerk). There may be no means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided) that allows only the side to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible for the player and the game hall clerk to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). . In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation for the player and the game hall.

  (10) It should be noted that the winning number information regarding the number of winnings received at each winning mouth (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. Is displayed on the image display device 905 only in the maintenance mode in which is set to the display position (second position), and the operation portion of the mode switch 9031 is in the non-display position (first position). In the mode, the image display device 905 may not be displayed. That is, it may be handled in the same manner as the information in the winning number management table shown in FIG.

  As described above, the number-of-award information relating to the number of winnings received at each winning mouth described in FIG. 98 (general winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, etc.) It may be information that can be displayed on the image display device 905 only when it is performed and that the player cannot normally see. For example, a state where a player can play a game (for example, a state where a demo screen is displayed), a state where a game end determination is not performed (a state where a special game is being executed, a general game, etc.) In a state where the game is executed, including a big hit gaming state), etc., is information that is not displayed on the image display device 905, and a demo screen is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the start of power supply to the gaming machine. Display only before a game is performed), or when a manipulation for stopping the power supply of the gaming machine is performed, the display can be performed only for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). good.

  (11) Also, the winning number information regarding the number of winnings received at each winning mouth (general winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, etc.) described in FIG. 98 and the like is either in the maintenance mode or the game mode. Even in this mode, display on the image display device 905 may be possible. In such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the number-of-wins information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, only in the first area α. The winning number information may be displayed. That is, the display area of the number-of-wins information may be different between a period in which no game is played and a period in which a game may be played.

  Also, in the maintenance mode, the total number of winning information is displayed for all items, whereas in the game mode, some items (items set by the operation of the game hall or the player, or Information on the number of winnings in a predetermined main item) may be displayed. That is, the items of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which the game is not performed and the period in which the game may be performed.

  (12) In the game mode, during the period in which the demonstration screen is displayed due to the game end determination being performed, the number-of-wins information can be displayed in the entire first area α and second area β. On the other hand, the number-of-wins information may be displayed only in the first area α during the period in which the game end determination is not performed and the game is determined to be in progress. In other words, the display area of the winning information may be different between the period in which it is determined that the game is not being performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

  In addition, during the period when the demonstration screen is displayed due to the game end determination being performed, the total number of winning information is displayed for all items, whereas the game end determination is not performed and the game is not performed. During the period determined to be medium, the winning information of some items (items set by the operation of the game hall or the player or predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the items of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which it is determined that no game is being performed and the period in which it is determined that a game is being performed.

  (13) In the above embodiment, with respect to the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, 4th symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning information ( 95 and 96) and the setting for not displaying the winning information (FIG. 97) are not changed (shared), while the other images (background images) are set to display the winning information and the number of winnings. The visible range is different depending on the setting for not displaying information. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and as shown in FIG. 100, the setting for displaying winning amount information (FIG. 100 (a)) and The display position and display range (image size) of all the images including the background image other than the winning number information may be made common with the setting for not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 100B). . Thereby, the control burden by the display / non-display setting of the winning number information can be reduced.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (image size) of the decorative symbols are set to display winning number information (FIGS. 95 and 96) and not to display winning number information (FIG. 97). However, the display position and display range of the decorative symbols may be made different according to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 101, in the setting for displaying the number-of-winning information (FIG. 101A), the setting for not displaying the number-of-winning information than the interval between the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (FIG. The intervals between the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in b)) may be widened. That is, when the winning number information is not displayed, variable display of decorative symbols may be executed using the entire screen. In this example, a decorative symbol display area 905L when the winning information is not displayed is included in the first area α. As described above, when the winning number information is not displayed, variable display or stop display of the decorative symbols in the first area α may be allowed. Thus, you may make it raise interest by performing an effect using the whole screen.

  (15) In the above embodiment, as the gaming machine error, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and radio wave abnormality are exemplified, but not limited to these, the gaming machine error includes front door opening abnormality and payout mechanism abnormality. (Abnormal prize ball, etc.), illegal prize winning in the big prize opening (abnormality in which a prize winning is detected even though the big prize opening is not open), or malfunction of various members of the pachinko gaming machine 901 Etc.

[Other variations]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Note that the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-described production forms may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-described production forms and the following modifications are shown. You may make it combine arbitrarily the control and structure of a game machine which were made.

  In the above embodiment, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 9041B due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the flow direction of the game balls are placed in the third general winning port 9050C and the fourth general winning port 9050D. It shall be possible to win any one. By adopting such a configuration, even when the game ball does not pass through the gate 9041B in the probability variation state or the short-time state, it is possible to expect a prize to enter the general prize opening provided on the downstream side of the gate 9041B. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 9041B may win a prize in either the third general winning port 9050C or the fourth general winning port 9050D at a higher rate than the game balls that have passed through the gate 9041B. . By adopting such a configuration, even when the frequency of game balls passing through the gate 9041B is low in the probability variation state or the short-time state, it is possible to expect winning in a general winning opening provided on the downstream side. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest. Furthermore, a specific production | presentation is performed based on the winning to a general winning opening, and a game entertainment interest can be raised more.

  In the above embodiment, executing a specific effect at a different rate depending on the gaming state includes executing the specific effect only in a certain gaming state, and not executing the specific effect in other gaming states. . Further, in the above embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect at a different rate depending on the game period, the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game period, and the specific effect is not executed in other game periods. included.

  In the above embodiment, in the first state, it is possible to execute the effect only in the first state in order to execute the effect at a higher rate than in the second state different from the first state. In the second state, not including an effect is also included. Here, the classification between the first state and the second state includes the classification according to the number of reserved memories, the classification according to the execution period of the special figure game (the special figure game), in addition to the classification according to the gaming state described above. Whether or not variable display is being executed), according to the type of variation pattern (for example, whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with reach effect, or , Whether the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with pseudo-continuous effects), a classification according to a specific performance timing (for example, before the reach state is established in the variation pattern with reach effects) Or whether it is before or after execution, or whether it is before or after execution of pseudo-continuous production in a variation pattern with pseudo-continuous production). .

  In the first effect form to the twelfth effect form, the specific effect may be executable only in any one of (1) the normal state and (2) the probability variation state or the short time state. For example, (1) the specific effect may be executed only in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect may not be executed in the probability variation state or the short time state. Further, in the thirteenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form, any one of (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change and (2) a period outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change. The specific effect may be executable only in one case. For example, (1) The specific effect can be executed only in the period after the reach state is established in the reach change, and (2) In the case of the period outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change The production may not be executed.

  In the first effect form to the twelfth effect form, depending on whether the gaming state is (1) the normal state, or (2) the probability variation state or the short time state, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the execution state is executed. Although the type of the specific effect is different, when the big hit game state is controlled, whether or not the specific effect is executed and whether the specific effect to be executed is based on the same effect execution conditions as when the game state is the normal state. The type may be determined, and the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the common effect execution condition when the probability variation state or the time saving state is in effect. . In addition, the game state classification is not limited to (1) normal state, (2) probability variation state or time-short state, for example, (1) high base state, (2) It may be classified as being in a high base state, or may be classified as (1) a big hit gaming state or (2) a big hit gaming state.

  In the thirteenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form, the game period is (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change, or (2) outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change. Depending on whether it is a period or not, the presence or absence of execution of a specific effect and the type of specific effect to be executed are determined, but not limited to such a game period classification, for example, (1) Number of reserved memories Or (2) the number of reserved storages is a period of 2 or more, (1) whether or not the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed, (2) It may be a section indicating whether or not the decorative symbol variable display is not executed.

  Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, it may be classified as (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good.

  In the first to fourth effect forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth effect forms, only one of the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed as the specific effect. May be executable. That is, when the winning condition is established, one of the change result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect that matches a predetermined condition is executed (for example, the change result notice effect is executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less). In the case where the number of stored memories is 2 or more, a pre-reading notice effect may be executed), or both of them may be executed simultaneously. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect is an effect that changes the mode of the display information (display part) corresponding to the hold storage, the above-described change result notice effect (sound effect only, or sound effect and accessory effect) The pre-reading notice effect can be executed simultaneously, and the player can grasp that both the change result notice effect and the pre-reading notice effect have been executed. Further, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied becomes a big hit symbol, the change result notice effect is preferentially executed, and the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied If there is a hold memory that is determined to be a big hit in the determination at the time of starting winning, although it is a symbol that is off, it is preferable to preferentially execute the pre-reading notice effect.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not to display the number of winnings with the operation button 9030 is set only during the period determined by the effect control CPU 90120 to be in the non-game state (only when the demonstration screen is displayed). Although the example which becomes possible was demonstrated, it is not restricted to such a form, it does not depend on a game state (for example, a normal state, a probability change state, a time-short state, a big hit game state), and the execution state (special symbol) of a special game Whether or not variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memories of special figure games), the execution status of ordinary figure games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed, and the number of reserved memories of ordinary figure games) ), Whether or not to display the number of winnings may be set by the operation button 9030. That is, whether or not the number of winnings is displayed by the operation button 9030 even during a period in which the game is performed, for example, a period in which the decorative symbol variable display is executed or a period in which the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. It may be settable. In such a configuration, when it is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, regardless of the gaming state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot gaming state) The execution status of the game (whether or not the special symbol variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memory of the special symbol game), the execution status of the normal game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, The total number of winnings in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of reserved games stored in the usual game.

  In the above embodiment, there is no restriction on the period during which the display changeover switch 9032 can be operated. Therefore, if the glass door frame 903a can be opened on the game hall side, the display changeover switch 9032 is operated. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. Not only in such a form, you may make it restrict | limit the period in which setting operation in the game hall side is possible. For example, as a configuration in which the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided, the setting screen shown in FIGS. 58 (1) to (3) can be used when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the game hall side. It is assumed that selection and determination are performed with the operation button 9030. In such a configuration, depending on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot game state), or the execution status of a special figure game (whether or not a special symbol variable display is executed) 58 (1) to 58 (1) to FIG. 58 in accordance with the number of special-purpose games stored) and the execution status of ordinary games (whether or not variable display of ordinary symbols is being executed or the number of reserved memories of ordinary games). The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, the period during which the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the period during which the probability change state or the short-time state is controlled, the period during which the special figure game is being executed, the period during which the number of reserved memories in the special figure game is not 0, etc. The setting screen shown in 58 (1) to 58 (3) may not be displayed, and the setting operation on the game hall side may be prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only when the game hall side displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening by setting the display changeover switch 9032 that cannot be operated by the player (the operation unit is set to the second position). , A setting screen (FIGS. 58 (1) to (3)) for enabling the player to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed. Not only in the form, but as a configuration in which the display changeover switch 9032 that can be operated only on the game hall side is not provided, whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be set on both the player side and the game hall side Common setting screen (the same as the screens (1) to (3) in FIG. 58) for selecting and deciding whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning a prize by operating the operation button 9030. Screen) may be displayed. In the configuration in which such a common setting screen is displayed, even if the game store clerk is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the player subsequently determines the number of winnings in the general winning opening. In the case of the setting to be displayed, the number received in the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the setting received later.

  In addition, when the display changeover switch 9032 that can be operated only by the game hall side is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening (the operation unit is set to the second position), and the operation button 9030 is used for general operation. The information display unit 905 displays common information (for example, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings for each general winning opening stored in the display control table) when the number of winning winnings is set to be displayed. You may make it let it. In such a configuration, even when the setting is made so that the common information is not displayed by switching the display changeover switch 9032, when the setting is made so that the common information is displayed by the operation of the operation button 9030 after that, Common information may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the settings received later.

  In the above-described embodiment, a limit may be provided for a period (game state) in which the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed. For example, in the period during which the decorative symbol variable display is executed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed during the period from when the reach state is established until the finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. . Further, in a predetermined gaming state such as a probability change state or a short time state, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a form, regarding which period (gaming state) the number of winnings in the general winning a prize can be displayed or not displayed by the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game hall side. It may be settable, or may be settable by setting means (for example, operation button 9030) on the player side.

  In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the player inputs the player ID (for example, the ID of the recording medium owned by the player or the personal identification ID registered on the website) by the operation button 9030. As a result, game data including the number of winnings in the general winning opening after the player ID is entered can be counted, and the operation button 9030 is operated when the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is finished. Thus, the game data aggregated after the player ID is input may be output to the image display device 905 as a two-dimensional code. The player captures the two-dimensional code (information that can identify the player ID and the game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, so that the information management server connected to the information terminal and the Internet And the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code. The game data managed in is updated. Since the player can access the information management server through the information terminal and check his / her stored game data (game data associated with the player ID), as a result, the player wins the general prize opening. The number can be grasped. In such a form, whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 905 may be set by a setting means on the game hall side (for example, the display changeover switch 9032), or setting means on the player side (For example, the operation button 9030) may be settable.

  In the case of such a form, a privilege may be given to the player according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening stored for each player ID in the information management server. For example, when the number of winnings in the general winning award exceeds a predetermined number, a background image or application software that can be used on the information terminal is given as a privilege to the player with that player ID. Also good. In addition, points corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening may be given to the player, and the information management server may manage the number of points owned by the player in association with the player ID. The player may be able to exchange part or all of the possession points for benefits.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening has been described, but the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed, and the game ball wins in the general winning opening. You may alert | report that it did. For example, a winning notification message may be displayed on the image display device 905 at the timing when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and a winning notification sound effect or sound is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Anyway. In the case of such a configuration, similarly to the above embodiment, whether or not to notify that the game ball has won the general winning opening is set by the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game hall side. It may be possible, or may be set by setting means (for example, operation button 9030) on the player side.

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning situation at the general winning opening may be notified. Specifically, the image display device 905 receives the number of winnings and the winning frequency for each general winning opening (the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls fired to the game area, or the general winnings per hour). The number of winnings to the mouth) may be displayed, or the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed according to the number of winnings to the general winning mouth and the winning frequency. In addition, when a winning at the general winning opening occurs, the winning at the general winning opening may be notified by voice from the speakers 908L and 908R. By using such voice notification, it becomes easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency at the general winning opening. Further, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the hitting operation handle, the operation button 9030, etc. may be vibrated. By using such a bodily sensation notification, it becomes easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency at the general winning opening.

  The number of winnings and the winning frequency at each general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905 and also output to a management device such as a hall computer connected to the pachinko gaming machine 901 so as to be able to play games. It is possible to manage the number of prizes received at each general prize opening for each machine. This information can be used for maintenance of the gaming machine, for example.

(2) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a sound effect may be output when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and a different sound effect from when winning in another winning opening such as a start winning opening Should be output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be made different for each general winning opening. Further, in such a configuration, the sound effect may not be output when a specific general winning opening is won.

(3) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the execution ratio and the production mode of the notice effect may be changed. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display that is executed after the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, the execution ratio and the effect mode of the notice effect change, and a predetermined variable, for example, a predetermined variable Until the number of times of display is executed, it is preferable that the changed execution ratio and effect mode are continued.

(4) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball has won the general winning opening, and a predetermined variable display number, for example, is executed for a predetermined period. Until then, it is better to continue the music after the change. In addition, when the number of winnings in the general winning award reaches a predetermined value, a specific music piece (for example, a big hit music piece) may be output. Also, based on the fact that a game ball has won the general prize opening or that the number of winning game balls to the general prize opening has reached a predetermined number, the player reproduces from a plurality of songs (BGM). The music (BGM) may be selectable.

  Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the music being played may be continuously output. For example, when the game is controlled in the big hit game state, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the music in the big hit game may be continuously output even after the big hit game state is finished. Moreover, based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening, a stage change that changes the background image of the decorative design and the music (BGM) may be executed. Note that the stage (background image and music) of the transfer destination may be made different depending on which of the plurality of general winning awards is won.

(5) In the above embodiment, the specific effect executed based on the winning to the general winning opening is described as an example of the change result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect related to the display result of the special figure game. Not limited to such a form, the specific effect may be an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game. For example, an effect may be provided in which a general winning opening where a game ball is not winning among a plurality of general winning openings is displayed, and a character appears when a gaming ball wins the general winning opening.

(6) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, even if a game ball is launched into the game area, the game ball does not win the general prize opening for a predetermined period, or the winning frequency at the general prize opening is less than the threshold value. In some cases, a specific notification such as displaying on the image display device 905 that a winning in a general winning opening has not occurred may be executed. In addition, when a game ball is not fired only in a specific general winning slot among a plurality of general winning slots for a predetermined period, even though the game ball has been fired in the gaming area, or in a specific general winning slot When the frequency is less than the threshold value, a specific notification such as displaying that the winning for the specific general winning opening has not occurred on the image display device 905 may be executed.

(7) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when a simultaneous performance is executed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), depending on the number of winnings in the general winning opening until the simultaneous performance is performed, or simultaneously You may make it perform a specific production | presentation according to the prize-winning to a general winning opening during a production period. In addition, the decorative design may be changed according to the winning in the general winning opening during the variable display of the decorative design, the stop design may be changed, or a sliding effect may be executed.

(8) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, each time a game ball wins a general winning opening, the object displayed on the image display device 905 is incremented by one to recognize the winning and the number of winnings in the general winning opening. It may be easy. Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, only the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening is cumulatively added, and the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening. When the number reaches the predetermined number, a specific effect such as displaying “100 breakthrough!” On the image display device 905 may be executed. In addition, when the timing when the number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number is a period in which a gaming machine error is reported based on fraud detection or failure detection, It is assumed that the notification of the gaming machine error is given priority over the specific effect, and the specific effect that has been put on hold after the notification of the gaming machine error is ended.

(9) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, a winning sound is output, and during the notification of the gaming machine error, the notification sound of the gaming machine error is given rather than the winning sound. You may make it output preferentially. In addition, every time a game ball wins in the general winning opening, a winning display is performed on the image display device 905, and during the notification of the gaming machine error, the display of the gaming machine error is given priority over the winning display. You may make it let it.

(10) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game is controlled to the big hit game state, the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening May be added to the number of award balls paid out based on the above, and displayed on the image display device 905 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state]. In the case of such a configuration, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is added to the displayed [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state]. At the same time, it is preferable that the number of prize balls to be paid out is added based on the winning of a game ball to the general prize opening. That is, the increase in the number of prize balls per display update may be apparently increased. In addition, the [number of winning balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball at the winning jackpot, and [in the jackpot gaming state according to the winning timing of the game ball at the general winning mouth] The display may be updated according to the individual winning timing, such as updating the number of prize balls paid out.

(11) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of prize balls may be varied according to the general winning opening. For example, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B in the left gaming area 9010A, ten winning balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening in the right gaming area 9010B. When a game ball is won in 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, five prize balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, it may be possible to execute an effect in which a game ball is awarded to a general winning opening. For example, in a form in which a specific effect is executed by winning a game ball in each of a plurality of general winning openings as in the sixth effect form, the seventh effect form, and the fourteenth effect form, An image display device 905 informs the general winning opening where the game ball has not won among the general winning holes, and performs an effect that suggests to the player to aim at the general winning opening where the game ball has not won. It is good to make it. Moreover, in the form in which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game balls have won in a specific order in the plurality of winning holes as in the eighth effect form and the sixteenth effect form, It is preferable to notify the player of the order of winning by the image display device 905 so that the player can grasp the order. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A of the eighth effect form, first, “Aim at the first general prize opening!” Is displayed, and after the winning to the first general prize opening 9050A is confirmed, the next "Aim for the first start prize opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning to the first start prize opening is confirmed, finally "Aim for the second general prize opening!" After winning the general winning opening 9050B is confirmed, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) In the case where the game area 9010 is provided with a guide path for a game ball toward the general winning opening, and the entrance sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guide path. Based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the entry sensor, it is possible to execute an effect of informing in advance that the game ball will win the general winning opening. Thereby, the possibility that the player misses the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening can be reduced. In addition, a certain period is secured from the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening until the payout of the winning ball is executed, and the production based on the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening is executed within that period. You may do it.

(14) When a stage on which the game ball can roll is provided below the image display device 905, a general winning opening and an entrance to a guide route connected to the general winning opening are provided on the stage. It may be configured so that the player is interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general winning opening or the entrance to the guide route.

(15) You may make it perform the production | presentation in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display apparatus 905 is updated for every prize-winning to a general winning opening. For example, when the character grows up for each prize winning in the general winning opening and reaches a predetermined number of winnings (when the character grows up to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege etc.) is executed. You may do it. In addition, an effect that increases the gauge is executed every time a prize is awarded to the general winning opening, and when a predetermined number of winnings is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege) Etc.) may be executed. In this form of presentation, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. You may be made to do.

(16) In the above embodiment, the type of specific effect (variation result notice effect, prefetch notice effect) to be executed differs depending on the gaming state when the winning conditions are established, and is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Although the example in which the sound is different has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be varied depending on the gaming state. In the probabilistic state and the short time state, there are many cases where the effect by the game effect lamp 909 and the music to be played are flashy to improve the interest compared to the normal state, so the aspect of the specific effect is also more You may make it a flashy aspect which is easy to understand for a player.

(17) When a certain number of game balls have been fired in the game area 9010, but the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency are less than the reference value, the player is usually informed Information on gaming machines that are difficult to perform, such as a latent probability change state, a limiter, etc., may be notified.

(18) In the above embodiment, the example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is satisfied has been described. However, the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory) If the winning condition is satisfied when the total number of the number and the number of the second reserved storage) is 0, neither the fluctuation result notice effect nor the prefetch notice effect can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game (for example, the appearance of a specific character or the reproduction of specific music) as the specific effect.

(19) In addition, when the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the winning condition is satisfied when the number of reserved memories (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is also 0 Alternatively, the execution of the specific effect may be suspended, and then the specific effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the special figure is executed, or at the timing when the number of stored memories becomes 2 or more. In other words, the specific effect is not immediately executed based on the establishment of the winning condition, and the specific effect that has been suspended based on the start condition of the special game or the start condition of the special game is satisfied. You may make it perform.

(20) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings in the general winning award in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the game ball is not won in the general winning opening (for example, “the number of winnings in the general winning opening is small. Message ") may be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, only for the period when the information for the store clerk (winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is in the maintenance mode in which the image display device 905 is displayed. It may be displayed on the image display device 905 that the game ball does not win the winning opening. A game shop clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. Regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, when the number of winnings in the general winning award for a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the image display device 905 displays that the game ball does not win in the general winning award. Anyway. Similarly to the display control of the number of winnings to the general winning a prize, based on the setting by the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030, when the number of winnings to the general winning award in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, You may make it display on the image display apparatus 905 that a game ball does not win a winning opening.

(21) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings in the general winning award in the predetermined period is larger than the predetermined number, the game ball is excessively won in the general winning opening (for example, “ The message “There are too many winnings” may be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, only for the period when the information for the store clerk (winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is in the maintenance mode in which the image display device 905 is displayed. It may be displayed on the image display device 905 that the game ball is excessively won at the winning opening. A game shop clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the winning information stored in the winning number management table of the effect control board 9012 is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the gaming information management device that manages the gaming information, and the gaming information The management device manages the winning number information of each gaming machine. The game control microcomputer 90100 outputs a general winning signal when the gaming control microcomputer 90100 detects a winning of a game ball to the general winning opening (for example, outputs one pulse signal for each winning). By doing so, the game information management device may manage the number of winnings in the general winning opening for each gaming machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. In addition, the game information management device, as game information, the number of winnings in a general winning opening per predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) or the number of winnings in a general winning opening per predetermined number of balls (for example, 6000 shots). Alternatively, the winning rate for the general winning opening (the number of winnings for the general winning opening ÷ the number of shots) may be calculated and managed for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above embodiment, the production control CPU 90120 has been described with respect to an example in which the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 905 is increased every time the general winning opening is won. You may make it the aspect of the object currently displayed on the image display apparatus 905 change for every prize-winning to a winning opening. For example, the facial expression of the character displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening.

(24) In the above embodiment, when in the maintenance mode, the information in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning mouth). However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and is notified by voice notification using the speakers 908L and 908R, or by turning on / off the game effect lamp 909, decoration LED, and 7 segments. May be. Further, the present invention is not limited to the form of notifying all the information of the winning number management table, and only the information on winning mouths in which the number of payouts, winning ratios, etc. are not in a predetermined reference range (or within the reference range) is notified. You may do it.

(25) In the above embodiment, when in the maintenance mode, the information in the winning number management table is displayed as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning mouth) as shown in FIG. Although an example of notification (display) in a manner unrelated to the performance performed in the game has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the notification may be performed in a form according to the aspect of the performance performed in the game. good. By notifying in the mode according to the mode of production, it is only necessary to confirm the notification mode of which type of model information compared to the case of notifying only by the table data as shown in FIG. Can be easily grasped. The effect executed in the game may be any effect such as a demonstration screen effect, a notice effect, a reach effect, or a big hit effect, and is not limited to the effect displayed on the image display device 905, and may be a sound. Or an effect by a lamp. In addition, informing in a manner according to the production mode, for example, a character appearing during a notice production or reach production reads out information in the winning number management table, outputs a sound, Regardless, display and sound output may be performed so that the resident character displayed on the image display device 905 reads the information in the winning number management table and reads the notice or the explanation of the game. Moreover, the information of the winning number management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game without being limited to the character image.

(26) In the above embodiment, the operation means such as the mode changeover switch 9031 operated to display the information in the winning number management table as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning mouth). However, although an example in which the player is inoperable and is provided at a position where only the game shop clerk can operate, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the player and the game shop clerk are inoperable. Thus, the game machine may be provided at a position that can be operated only by related persons such as an inspector, an inspector, and a manufacturer. Further, it may be provided at a position where it can be operated by a person other than the above-mentioned player.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with 10 counters with a maximum of 2 bytes is used as a storage area for storing information related to game winning. However, a counter with a maximum of 3 bytes or a counter of 4 bytes at maximum Can also be provided. At this time, the above-mentioned role ratio (%) and role combination (continuity ratio) (%) are displayed on the above-described display monitor 9029 based on the total number of acquired balls of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. The calculation method for this is not limited to the method described above, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 129, when the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls, and the number of consecutive winning balls are counted by a counter composed of a maximum of 4 bytes, the upper 16 bits are used for calculation. You may go. By the way, if it is assumed that the number of acquired balls is 30000 per day by a 4-byte counter, 429483225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (number of acquired balls per day) = 1431611.2075, 143161.2075 / 365 days = 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total for 392 years.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104A, an example in which the display monitor 9029 is provided in the central portion on the main substrate 9011 accommodated in the substrate case 90201 has been described. May be provided at other positions.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 130A, a main board 9011C without a display monitor and a display board 9011D are provided separately from the main board 9011C, and the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are connected by a harness 9011E. A display monitor 9029 may be provided on the display substrate 9011D. In this case, the main board 9011 </ b> C receives the combination (link ratio) displayed on the display monitor 9029, the calculation of the combination ratio, and the reception of data used for the calculation. The main board 9011C transmits information relating to the calculated combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, and control for displaying them to the display board 9011D via the harness 9011E. The display substrate 9011D may display the combination (community ratio) and the combination ratio on the display monitor 9029 based on the data transmitted from the main substrate 9011C.

  The main substrate 9011C and the display substrate 9011D are housed in a substrate case 90201A which is a caulking substrate case. Caulking pins 9011B are attached to the substrate case 90201A in the same manner as the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. Since the caulking pins 9011B are provided, the main substrate 9011C and the display substrate 9011D are completely enclosed in the substrate case 90201A, and an illegal act on the main substrate 9011C is prevented. Similarly to the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 104A, the substrate case 90201A is provided with holes and heat dissipation holes, and is provided with a predetermined seal. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to obstruct display on the display monitor 9029.

  As shown in FIG. 130B, the display substrate 9011D may be provided outside the substrate case 90201B which is a caulking substrate case, and the main substrate 9011C may be enclosed in the substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display substrate 9011D is connected to the main substrate 9011C by a harness 9011E.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 130C, the display substrate 9011D may be sealed in the substrate case 90201C, and the main substrate 9011C may be sealed in the substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display substrate 9011D is connected to the main substrate 9011C by a harness 9011E. Similarly to the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 104A, the substrate case 90201C is provided with holes and heat dissipation holes, and is provided with a predetermined seal. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to obstruct display on the display monitor 9029. Note that the substrate case 90201C enclosing the display substrate 9011D may not be a caulking substrate case, or may be a caulking substrate case.

  As shown in FIG. 130D, a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. Also good. Here, the label 9011R may be arranged at a position where a part of the display monitor 9029 is hidden. As described above, since the part of the display monitor 9029 is hidden by the label 9011R, for example, when the glass door frame 903a is opened, the player cannot easily see the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio. Can be. Even when the label 9011R is pasted, it may be pasted at a position where the display monitor 9029 is not hidden.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the movable accessory, an electrical accessory such as a large winning opening (attacker) that is opened and closed by a solenoid or a second starting winning opening (electric chew) is used. Instead, a so-called mechanical accessory that opens and closes by its own weight may be used as a movable accessory. Further, although the 7-segment LED is used as the display monitor 9029, a dot display, a display screen, or the like may be used instead of the 7-segment. Moreover, it is good also as a liquid crystal display device, organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, etc. instead of LED. In addition, the display monitor 9029 is provided with a four-digit display unit of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D, but the number of digits is not limited to four digits, and may be another number of digits. For example, it may be 2 digits, or 8 digits or 10 digits.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is opened regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 9029, for example, the display of the combination (continuity ratio), the combination ratio, etc. There is a case to deal with error cancellation. For example, a supply mechanism for supplying game balls (supply balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 902 to pay out game balls. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball clogging occurs, the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 may be opened to eliminate the ball clogging and perform error cancellation. When the error is canceled by opening the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 9029, the combination (ratio) or ratio of the display monitor 9029 Etc. may not be displayed.

  In addition, at this time, in order to prevent the display of the combination (relation ratio), the ratio, etc. on the display monitor 9029, no error has occurred in the display of the combination (relation ratio), the ratio, etc. As a condition. The error with respect to the display of the role combination (ream ratio), the role ratio, and the like here is, for example, detection of abnormal operation determined in step S90101 shown in FIG. 116 or winning information within business hours determined in step S90104. Acquisition or detection of a predetermined number of winnings or more for the attacker per unit time determined in step S90106 may be performed. Players can see information such as association (ratio), ratio etc. on the condition that there is no error in the display of such association (link ratio), ratio, etc. The situation can be suppressed.

  Further, regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 9029, the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is opened to cancel the error, and after the error cancellation is completed, the role of the display monitor 9029 is shown. Alternatively, it may wait for a predetermined period of time, for example, 1 minute, until the ratio is displayed, and display it after the predetermined time has elapsed. After canceling the occurrence of an error, the cause of the error cannot be completely removed, and the same error often occurs. By displaying the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, etc. on the display monitor 9029 after a predetermined time has elapsed, even when such an error occurs, the player can receive information such as the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, etc. The situation where it is seen can be suppressed. The predetermined period here can be arbitrarily set, and may be a time longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or may be a time shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Further, a predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of a ball jam in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of a failure of the image display device 905, the predetermined period of the ball jam in the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

  The main board 9011 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 9029, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as “error display”) for displaying an error. This error indicator is preferably arranged at a position away from the display monitor 9029. Specifically, the display monitor 9029 may be disposed at a position on the right side 1/3 of the main board 9011, and the error indicator may be disposed at a position on the left side 1/3 of the main board 9011. Further, in order to make the display monitor 9029 easier to understand, the position of the display monitor 9029 on the main substrate 9011 may be printed on the substrate case 90201 by characters, or a sticker may be attached to the substrate case 90201. You may keep it. The display monitor 9029 may be provided on a payout control board that is a part of the main board 9011.

(29) In the above embodiment,
We explained that the ratio (%) and the combination (linkage) (%) were calculated using a pachinko machine as an example and displayed on the display monitor. However, in the slot machine, the ratio (%) and combination in the pachinko machine Values corresponding to ream (ream ratio) (%) may be calculated, and these values may be displayed on a display monitor provided in the slot machine. The display monitor can be provided on the main board of the slot machine, for example, similarly to the above gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1.

  As for the role ratio and the role combination (relation ratio) in the slot machine, for example, a payout of a game value (game value, hereinafter also referred to as “medal”) associated with the progress of the game of the slot machine is a character mounted on the slot machine. It is calculated based on whether or not the machine is in operation and whether or not the slot machine is equipped with an accessory other than the first type special accessory as an accessory.

  For example, Type 1 Special, Type 2 Special, and Normal are set as an accessory, and Type 1 Special is not installed in the slot machine. When only other items such as objects are mounted, the combination ratio is calculated by the number of medals paid out during the operation of the item with respect to the total number of medals paid out. In addition, if the slot machine is equipped with only the first type special character as a character and no character other than the first type special character is loaded, the combination of the medal is the total payout of medals. It is calculated by the number of medals to be paid out during the operation of the combination with respect to the number.

  Hereinafter, an example of a method for calculating the combination (run ratio) (%) in the slot machine will be described. Here, an example will be described in which the first type special combination is in the special gaming state and only the first type special combination is mounted as the combination. The slot machine can start changing the symbol by setting the number of bets, and a winning occurs according to the result of the changing symbol. For winnings in slot machines, shift to a special game state that increases the probability of occurrence of a prize-winning with the addition of gaming value, a re-game winning that allows the change of symbols to be started without setting the number of bets, and a prize-winning There is a bonus prize. Here, the combination (%) of slots in the slot machine is the cumulative value of gaming value obtained by awarding a prize based on the result of the change in the symbol during the period in which the symbol is changed a predetermined number of times ( The total amount of gaming value obtained as a result of the awarding of winnings as a result of changes in symbols during the period of transition to the special gaming state (corresponding to the total number of balls acquired in the pachinko gaming machines mentioned above) It is expressed as a ratio of the number of consecutive winning balls in a pachinko machine). For example, in a period in which 6000 symbols are changed, if the number of medals, which is an example of the gaming value obtained in the period, is 16000, the prize is awarded in the period when the game state is shifted to the special gaming state. When the number of medals obtained by the above is 9000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9000 by 16000 is the consecutive (relation ratio) (%).

  In addition, the main board in the slot machine is provided, for example, at the back of the outer frame. Therefore, when the main board is viewed from the outside of the slot machine when the door frame (front door) of the slot machine is opened, the main board is different from the gaming machine 901. Since the reel and the like are stored in the outer frame of the slot machine, the outer frame of the slot machine is often larger than the pachinko gaming machine. Further, due to its structure, the main board in the slot machine is often attached to the back of the outer frame (the inner side surface of the back plate). For this reason, when the door frame of the slot machine is opened, there is a possibility that there is not enough light reaching the main board. Therefore, when a display monitor is attached to the main board, the information displayed on the display monitor ( For numerical values and characters, it is preferable to display brightly with a large amount of light.

  Further, in the slot machine, a display monitor is arranged so that it can be easily seen from an oblique direction with respect to the main board provided in the back of the outer frame. For example, when the door frame is opened from the outer frame, the arrangement that is easy to visually recognize from an oblique direction is an arrangement that faces the front as viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. By arranging the display monitor in this way, when the store clerk etc. performs the work of checking the role ratio, the store clerk or the like slightly opens the gaming machine frame 903 without greatly opening it. It is possible to confirm the role ratio (relation ratio) by simply doing. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

  When the door frame is opened from the outer frame, the arrangement facing the front as viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame has an inclined surface like a base member 90129A shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to set it as the aspect which attached the display monitor to the inclined surface of the base member in which the surface faced the open part between a door frame and an outer frame. Alternatively, the inclined surface may be a buried inclined surface formed on the main substrate. In addition to these, a display monitor may be provided on a base member such as one of the base members 90129A to 90129I on which the display monitors 90130A to 90130I are provided. When a display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor may be provided directly on the main board so that the main board and the display monitor are accommodated in the board case, or the display monitor is provided outside the board case containing the main board. May be provided.

  In addition, these display monitors may be provided in an adjustment unit that can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. By adjusting the display monitor to the adjustment means that can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the open part between the door frame and the outer frame, it is possible to adjust according to the desire of the game hall where the slot machine is installed. It can be carried out. The adjusting means may be a manual type or an electric type.

  The main board of the slot machine is provided at the back of the outer frame, but may be provided at other positions. For example, it may be provided on the right side as viewed from the player side inside the outer frame, or may be provided on the left side. When it is provided on the right side of the outer frame, it is provided on the side corresponding to the open part between the door frame and the outer frame. be able to.

  Also, in the slot machine, a main board may be provided on the back side of the door frame as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine. However, there is no slot machine equivalent to a game board of a pachinko machine, and the door frame is provided with a visual window for visually recognizing the reel, so the main board is placed at a position avoiding this visual window. What is necessary is just to provide. Also, in a pachinko gaming machine, instead of providing a main board on the back side of the game board, a main board may be provided in the back or left and right sides of the outer frame as in a slot machine.

  In addition, although the example which displays on the display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided in the main board | substrate was shown the calculated combination ratio (%) and continuous combination (continuous ratio) (%), not only this but payout control You may make it provide a display monitor in other board | substrates, such as a board | substrate, a game board surface, and the frame (base frame) for game machines. In addition, the display is not limited to a dedicated display monitor for displaying the role ratio (%) and the role combination (connection ratio) (%), but an existing display device (for example, the image display device 905, for displaying an error). 7-segment display, a credit display in a slot machine, a payout number display, etc.) may be used to display predetermined information such as a winning ratio (%) and a winning combination (continuous ratio) (%).

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the slot machine described above, the predetermined information is a combination (continuous ratio) and a combination ratio (cumulative combination (continuous ratio) and cumulative combination ratio), but may be other information. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the predetermined information may be the number of game balls paid out (= number of prize balls). Further, in the slot machine, the machine discount (= (medal payout number / medal insertion number) × 100) or the difference between the medal insertion number and the medal payout number may be used. Further, these numerical values may be information calculated for each predetermined number of games and each predetermined number of medals. Further, predetermined information such as a combination (continuity ratio), combination ratio, and machine discount may be calculated for a predetermined period, for example, 400 games or 6000 games, and the predetermined information for each number of games may be displayed. In this case, the predetermined period may be displayed together.

  Some slot machines have so-called settings. The setting means a numerical value obtained by dividing the probability in the slot machine according to the stage. For example, six stages from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided. Information such as the role (ratio) and role ratio displayed on the display monitor as the predetermined information may be displayed for each setting, or the setting may be displayed when displaying for each setting. Also good.

  Some slot machines can execute one game with different numbers of inserted medals (number of bets). For example, one game can be executed by selecting the number of inserted sheets (the number of bets) for executing one game from one to three and inserting the selected number of medals. In such a slot machine, information such as a combination (competition ratio) and a combination ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each inserted number (number of bets). There are also slot machines in which the required number (the number of bets) varies depending on the game state. For example, there is a slot machine in which the required number of inserted cards is 2 when the gaming state is in bonus, and the required number of inserted cards is 3 when the gaming state is not in bonus. In such a slot machine, it is possible to display information such as a combination (community ratio) and a combination ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information for each relationship between the gaming state and the number of inserted games.

  Also, in the slot machine, as the predetermined information, in addition to the combination (combined ratio) and ratio calculated based on the normal bonus, special bonus, etc., for example, the slot machine gaming status is advantageous other than during bonus. When sections and unfavorable sections are set, the ratio between the number of medals paid out in these advantageous sections and the number of medals paid out in the advantageous sections and non-favorable sections is displayed. Also good. In addition, the display monitor includes, as predetermined information, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as “the number of advantageous section games”) and the number of games in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section, in addition to the combination ratio. A ratio (hereinafter referred to as “advantage / non-advantage ratio”) may be displayed. The number of continuation games and the advantageous / non-advantage ratio of the advantageous section may be displayed on a dedicated display monitor different from the combination ratio (continuous ratio), or may be displayed with a time difference using a common display monitor. Good. For example, using a common display monitor, the number of advantageous section games → advantageous / non-advantage ratio → short-term role association (continuous ratio) → short-term role ratio → cumulative combination (continuous ratio) → cumulative role ratio → number of advantageous section games → It may be displayed in the order of.

  Further, the number of advantageous segment games may be the number of games in the advantageous segment being continued during the advantageous segment, or may be the predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3000 G in the past. Or it is good also as the number of games of the advantageous section performed on the predetermined period, for example, the day. The advantageous / non-advantage ratio may be a predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3000 G in the past, or may be an advantageous / non-advantage ratio for a predetermined period, for example, that day.

  Further, the ratio between the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals in the advantageous section and the ratio of the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals in the non-advantaged section may be displayed. In short, the ratio between medals paid out in the advantageous section and medals paid out in the non-favorable section may be calculated and displayed. There are various ways of thinking about the relationship between the advantageous section and the non-favorable section. By reducing the medal payout ratio in the advantageous section, fluctuations in increase / decrease in medals can be reduced. Further, in order to prevent the advantageous section from being too long, a predetermined restriction may be provided on the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined number of games, an upper limit of medals paid out in the advantageous section, a machine discount in the advantageous section, and the like. .

  The advantageous section is a section in which the ratio of the number of paid-out medals to the number of inserted medals (machine discount) is higher than that of the non-favorable section. Since the machine discount is high, this is an advantageous section for the player. Advantageous sections include normal bonuses and special bonuses in operation, as well as during replay time (RT), assist time (AT), and assist replay time (ART). Can do. The machine discount in the advantageous section often exceeds 100%, but may be less than 100% (so-called reduced RT, etc.). If the machine discount in the advantageous section is less than 100%, the medals will be consumed as the game continues, but the player will be able to compete against the unfavorable section in that the medal consumption rate will be lower. It will be advantageous.

  The term “during replay time” refers to, for example, a state where the winning probability (winning probability) of replay is higher than in a state other than during replay time. During the replay time, since the replay probability is higher than during the non-replay time, the consumption of medals can be reduced, so that the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

  During the assist time, for example, when a condition device that displays a winning combination on the active line when a predetermined condition such as a predetermined operation procedure is satisfied, the operation procedure is navigated. . The navigation of the operating procedure includes, for example, navigation of the stop order when stopping the three reels in a predetermined stop order, or navigating the pattern when stopping and displaying a predetermined pattern. There is. During the assist time, the operation procedure is not navigated in any state other than during the assist time, so it is uncertain whether or not the operation procedure is executed, but during the assist time, the operation procedure navigates. Therefore, as long as the player follows the navigation, the winning combination can be aligned with the active line. Therefore, the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

  During the assist replay time is a state in which the replay time and the assist time are executed simultaneously. The slot machine is designed so that the game progresses by increasing / decreasing medals by combining these advantageous sections and non-advantage sections. Here, for each advantageous section such as during a bonus, during a replay time, during an assist time, and during an assist replay time, although there are advantages over a non-advantageous section, there are cases where the degree of advantage is small.

  The advantageous sections for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be all or part of them. For example, in a slot machine in which a plurality of advantageous sections are provided as the advantageous sections, the advantageous sections for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be only the advantageous sections in which the machine discount exceeds 100%. Moreover, even if it is an advantageous section of the same kind, you may make it change whether it is set as the advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information by transition conditions. For example, in a slot machine that shifts during the replay time immediately after the bonus is ended and after a predetermined number of games, for example, 1000 games have elapsed after the bonus is ended, the replay that has shifted immediately after the bonus is ended An advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed during the time as the predetermined information is used, and the ratio displayed as the predetermined information is calculated during the replay time after 1000 games have passed since the bonus period ended. For this reason, it may not be an advantageous section.

  During the replay time shifted to immediately after the bonus is over, the player who has won many medals in the bonus is in a so-called chance replay time that gives him a chance to acquire further medals. On the other hand, during the replay time after 1000 games have passed since the bonus time ended, the player who lost many medals is given a relief replay time that gives relief of the lost medals. An advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information during such a chance replay time, and an advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information during the relief replay time You may make it not.

  Further, when calculating other values such as a combination (continuity ratio), a combination ratio, or a machine discount in the slot machine, a predetermined number of medals, for example, three medals are inserted and one game is executed. The calculation may be performed on the assumption that three medals have been paid out. Alternatively, the re-game may be regarded as a game that has not been played, and other numerical values such as a combination (continuity ratio), a combination ratio, or a machine discount in the slot machine may be performed.

  Also, the ring buffer provided in the RAM 90102 in the pachinko gaming machine stores the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. On the other hand, the ring buffer in the slot machine may store, for example, the number of medals to be paid out in an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section for each predetermined number of medals paid out. The number of medals to be paid out between the section and the non-advantage section may be stored. The predetermined number here may be, for example, 500 or 1000. Other appropriate numbers may be used. Further, the predetermined number of games may be 100 games or 400 games. If the maximum payout number of medals paid out in one game is 15, the maximum payout number of medals paid out in 400 games is 6000. Therefore, the maximum payout number in 400 games can be stored with a margin in a 2-byte storage area.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub-side) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., one change is made when the change is started. Although an example in which a pattern designation command is transmitted has been shown, a variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) is so-called in the case where the first command is not reached, such as the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, the presence or absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command (for example, a previous variation pattern designation command) indicating the variation time and variation mode (for example, the previous variation pattern) of the second stop) is transmitted. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern designation command) indicating a variation time or a variation mode (for example, a post-variation pattern) after reaching reach (after the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. .

  In this case, the effect control board may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing may be selected by the effect control board. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. Thus, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  Only one type of out-of-order symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “-”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. . Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various production operations including, etc. can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. Alternatively, it may be distributed in a pre-installed manner in a storage device such as a computer device. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the number of prize balls (general prize balls) and the number of ordinary electric prize balls (electric chew prize balls) by winning at the first start opening (heso) and the general prize opening (sode) to be counted. Number), special electric role award ball number (attacker ball number) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. However, in place of this format, the present invention can adopt a format having only two types of total totals as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. Specifically, it has a total cumulative storage RWM9010000 and a total cumulative storage RWM901001, and is related to a game winning prize in order to display a connection ratio (synonymous with “combinations (continuation ratio)” in the above embodiment) and a ratio. Information (the number of award balls (general award ball number) by winning a prize at the first start gate (heso) and the general prize opening (sode), the number of ordinary electric award balls (the number of electric chew award balls), the special electric role award ball Number (attacker ball number)) is accumulated and stored in RWM9010000 and 901001. Furthermore, by deleting the information related to game winnings at a predetermined trigger on the total cumulative storage RWM9010000, the ratio and role calculated based on the total from the timing of deletion to the present are the short-term ratio and It can be displayed as a short-term role ratio, and the link ratio and role ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative storage RWM901001 can be displayed as a cumulative link ratio and a cumulative role ratio. With this configuration, it is only necessary to have a plurality of storage areas for accumulating and storing information related to game winnings, and a process for storing and updating a certain amount of information like a ring buffer is unnecessary. This is preferable.

  As a predetermined trigger, for example, power ON / OFF can be triggered. According to this, it is possible to tabulate information related to winning a game from power ON, that is, it is possible to display a daily run ratio and a role ratio as a short-term run ratio and a short-term role ratio. In this case, if the RWM901002 is provided to save the accumulated value of the total accumulated storage RWM9010000 when deleted, the accumulated value of the RWM901002 is displayed as a short-term linkage ratio and a short-term role ratio. It is preferable because the short-term consecutive ratio and short-term role ratio for one day before the introduction can be displayed. By using a real time clock or the like as a predetermined opportunity, for example, it is possible to accurately total short-term continuous ratio and short-term role ratio such as one day or one hour.

Moreover, as a predetermined opportunity, it can be set as the opportunity regarding a game, such as a setting change, a door opening, or a touch sensor detection of a handle | steering-wheel. According to this, even if it is not a period of one day as when the power is turned on, it is summarized (for example, between setting change and setting change or between door opening and door opening). It is preferable because the role ratio can be displayed. Further, the same effect can be obtained even if the predetermined trigger is triggered when the number of times the demo screen is displayed or the number of big hits reaches the predetermined number.
Note that two regions may be formed in the RWM region of the memory space instead of the configuration having two RWMs such as the RWMs 9010000 and 901001.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the format shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 132 can be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, in the RWM area of the memory space, an area 9020000 for summing up information related to game winnings, an area B1 for storing cumulative results of information relating to winnings in the 6000th game, and a cumulative result in the 12,000th game are stored. Region B2, 18000... A region B10 is provided for storing a cumulative result of information related to winning of the 60000th game. In the area 9020000, information related to the winning of the game is added and updated, and on the condition that the number of the winning balls is 6000th, it is related to the winning of the game accumulated and stored in the area 9020000. Information (the number of award balls (general award ball number) by winning a prize at the first start gate (heso) and the general prize opening (sode)) Number (attacker ball number)) is stored in the area B1. Further, on the condition that the number of prize balls has reached 12000, the information stored in the area B1 is moved to the area B2, and the information regarding the game winnings accumulated in the area 9020000 is stored in the area B1. Remember. In this way, the information of the area 9020000 is put into the area B1 every 6000th, and the information of the other areas is shifted. In addition, after the number of prize balls reaches the 66,000th, control is performed so that the information related to winning a game stored in the area B10 is erased and the information in the area B9 is transferred to the area B10.

  By configuring in this way, the connection ratio and role ratio calculated based on the total of the area 9020000 can be displayed as the cumulative connection ratio and the cumulative role ratio. Also, by subtracting the value of the area B10 from the area 9020000, the latest 60000 pieces (that is, approximately 10 hours) can be displayed as the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term winning ratio. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B1 from the area 9020000, the latest 6000 (ie, approximately one hour) run ratio and role ratio can be displayed as the short-term run ratio and the short-term role ratio.

  Further, instead of the configuration as shown in FIG. 132, only the region B10 may be provided as shown in FIG. According to this, it is not possible to obtain a detailed connection ratio and role ratio of about 1 hour, but since the latest 60000 pieces (approximately 10 hours) of short-term connection ratio and short-term role ratio can be displayed, the capacity is also increased. Less is preferable.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the format shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 134 can be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, it has a total cumulative storage RWM9030000 and a total cumulative storage RWM903001. In order to display the linkage ratio and ratio, information on the game winning a prize (first start opening (heso) and general winning opening (sode) ) Are awarded to RWM 9030000 and 9030001, and the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electoral prize balls (number of Chu Chu prize balls), and the number of special electoral prize balls (number of attacker prize balls)) Try to remember.
The total cumulative storage RWM9030000 accumulates and stores from the first prize ball number, whereas the total cumulative storage RWM903001 waits without storing the first to 60000 prize balls. In addition, the cumulative number of prize balls from the 60001th is stored. According to this, the difference between the total cumulative storage RWM9030000 and the total cumulative storage RWM903001 is 60000, and the total cumulative storage RWM903001 is subtracted from the total cumulative storage RWM9030000. It can be displayed as a short-term ratio or a short-term ratio. In addition, the linkage ratio and the role ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative storage RWM9030000 can be displayed as the cumulative linkage ratio and the cumulative role ratio.

  In the above embodiment, the format shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 135 can be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, it includes cumulative counters 9040000 and 904001, and a total cumulative counter 9040002. In the total cumulative counter 9040002, information related to game winnings (first start port (hevel) and general) is displayed in order to display a connection ratio and a role ratio. The number of award balls (general award balls), normal electric role award balls (electric chew award balls number), special electric role award balls (attacker award number))) Accumulate and store from the first number. The run ratio and role ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative counter 9040002 can be displayed as a cumulative run ratio and a cumulative play ratio.

On the other hand, by using the two counters of the cumulative counters 9040000 and 904001, the continuous ratio and the winning ratio for 60,000 are displayed as the short-term consecutive ratio and the short-term winning ratio. More specifically, first, the cumulative counter 9040000 starts counting from the first prize ball number, and is cleared when the number of prize balls reaches 60000. On the other hand, the cumulative counter 904001 starts counting from the 30,000th and clears when the number of prize balls reaches the 90000th. Then, when trying to calculate the short-term run ratio and short-term role ratio for 60000 pieces, for example, the 30000th to 60000th pieces are calculated based on the total of the cumulative counter 9040000, and the 60001th to 90000th pieces. Is calculated based on the total of the cumulative counter 904001.
In this way, the cumulative counters 9040000 and 904001 are tabulated so that the number of award balls is shifted by 30,000, so that when displaying the short-term run ratio and the short-term role ratio, at least within 30000 pieces, That is, it is possible to display the short-term consecutive ratio and short-term role ratio within five hours. This is preferable because it is possible to suppress an increase in capacity and to display a relatively short-term continuous ratio and short-term role ratio.

(Performance display)
In addition, in the gaming machine 901, performance information (described later) can be displayed instead of or in addition to the display of the combination (connection ratio) and the combination ratio. Hereinafter, displaying performance information is also referred to as performance display. In the gaming machine 901, for example, performance display is performed on a display monitor (such as the display monitor 901130 shown in FIG. 163, which will be described later) provided on the main board 9011.

  136 and 137 are explanatory diagrams related to performance information. FIG. 136A illustrates an example of performance information items displayed on the gaming machine 901. The gaming machine 901 can display the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value as performance information, as shown in the item name column of FIG. 136 (A). The real-time base value of the item number “bL” is a base value (real-time value during measurement) for every 60000 outs in a normal state. More specifically, the real-time base value is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls being measured until the number of game balls used (launched) in the normal state reaches 60,000 (0 to 59999) ( %). The previous cumulative base value of the item number “b6” is a base value for every 60000 outs (cumulative value measured last time) in the normal state. More specifically, the previous cumulative base value is the number of game balls used (launched) in a normal state and is a value indicating the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the previously measured number of 60000 game balls. .

  The normal state in the performance display is a state managed or controlled by the game state flag described above. Specifically, it is a state in which both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off (except that the round gaming flag is on). That is, in the performance display, a state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are off is referred to as a normal state. The probability variation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation state. The time reduction flag is a flag indicating whether or not the time reduction state is set. The round gaming flag will be described later.

  In addition, although the normal state in the performance display has been explained that all of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are in the off state, The display when the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are all off may be set as the normal state. For example, the items B1 to B4 in FIG. 98 may be counted when all of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are in an off state. Further, for example, in connection with FIG. 104 (B), it has been described that the combination (run ratio) and the combination ratio may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the normal state (probability change flag, time reduction flag, You may make it calculate and display a combination (continuity ratio) and a combination ratio in the case where all of the round gaming flags are off).

  FIG. 136 (B) shows values that are aggregated (updated) on the game control microcomputer 90100 side for performance display. The base value shown in FIG. 136 (A) is calculated based on the value shown in FIG. 136 (B). Specifically, the base value is based on the number of winning balls for all winning holes (the number of winning balls by winning the first general winning opening 9050A, the winning number of the second general winning opening 9050B) with respect to the number of shots (60000). The number of winning balls, the number of winning balls by winning the third general winning port 9050C, the number of winning balls by winning the fourth general winning port 9050D, the number of winning balls by the first starting winning port, the number of winning balls by the second starting winning port, This is the ratio (%) of the number of winning balls from the big prize opening. That is, in the gaming machine 901, each value shown in FIG. 136 (B) is totaled in the normal state, and the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value shown in FIG. Calculate and display.

  FIG. 136 (C) shows a display mode of performance information. In the gaming machine 901, performance information is displayed on a display monitor provided on the main board 9011 in the display mode illustrated in FIG. Specifically, when displaying the real-time base value, the gaming machine 901 displays “bL.” Indicating that the real-time base value is in the upper two digits out of all four digits (flashing or lighting). , Numbers (%) or “-” in the range of “00” to “99” are displayed (lighted) in the lower two digits of all four digits. The lower two digits of the total four digits are the original real-time base value, but the real-time base value may be displayed by displaying all four digits including the upper two digits. In addition, when displaying the previous accumulated base value, the gaming machine 901 displays (blinks or lights) “b6.” Indicating that the previous accumulated base value is displayed in the upper two digits among all four digits. Numbers (%) or “-” in the range of “00” to “99” are displayed (lit) in the lower two digits of all four digits. The lower 2 digits of the total 4 digits are the original previous cumulative base value, but the previous cumulative base value may be displayed by displaying all 4 digits including the upper 2 digits.

  FIG. 137 (A) shows a section (total section, evaluation section) corresponding to the total number of outs (total number of fired parts). The “factory shipment test section” in FIG. 137A is a section having a total number of outs of less than 300. The “first section” is the first section among the sections managed for each total out number of 60000 pieces (0 to 59999 pieces). The “second section” is the second section among the above sections. The “third section” is the third section among the above sections. In FIG. 137 (A), subsequent sections are omitted.

  FIG. 137 (B) to FIG. 137 (F) show display modes of performance information corresponding to each section (and the number in the section). In each of FIGS. 137 (B) to 137 (F), the display mode of the real-time base value is shown on the left side, the display mode of the previous cumulative base value is shown on the right side, It shows that it will be switched.

  FIG. 137 (B) shows a display mode of performance information displayed in the factory shipment test section shown in FIG. 137 (A). In the factory shipment test section, as shown in FIG. 137 (B), a real-time base value in which the upper two digits are “bL. (Flashing)” and the lower two digits are “-(lit)”, and the upper The previous cumulative base value in which the two digits are “b6. (Flashing)” and the lower two digits are “-(lit)” is displayed alternately every 5 seconds. Note that the radial highlighting shown in the upper two digits “bL.” On the left side and the upper two digits “b6.” On the right side of FIG. 137 (B) is blinking. It shows that. The same applies to FIGS. 137 (C), 137 (D), 137 (E), 158, and 159.

  FIG. 137 (C) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is 0 to 5999 in the first section shown in FIG. 137 (A). When the total number of outs is 0-5999 in the first section, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), the upper 2 digits are “bL. (Flashing)” and the lower 2 digits are numerical values. Real time base value that is lit (%) (“32 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 137C) and the upper two digits are “b6. (Flashing)” and the lower two digits are “-( The previous accumulated base value that is “lit” is displayed alternately every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 137 (D) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is between 6000 and 59999 in the first section shown in FIG. 137 (A). When the total number of outs in the first section is from 6000 to 59999, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), the upper 2 digits are “bL. (Lit)” and the lower 2 digits are numerical values. Real-time base value that is lit (%) (“33 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 137 (D)) and the upper two digits are “b6. (Flashing)” and the lower two digits are “-( The previous accumulated base value that is “lit” is displayed alternately every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 137 (E) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is 0 to 5999 in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 137 (A). When the total number of outs in the second and subsequent sections is 0 to 5999, as shown in FIG. 137 (E), the upper 2 digits are “bL. (Flashing)” and the lower 2 digits are A real-time base value that is lighting of a numerical value (%) (in the example of FIG. 137 (E), “34 (lighting)”), the upper two digits are “b6. (Lighting)”, and the lower two digits are numerical values (% ) (In the example of FIG. 137 (“E”), “33 (lighting)”) is alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 137 (F) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is 6000 to 59999 in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 137 (A). When the total number of outs in the second and subsequent sections is from 6000 to 59999, as shown in FIG. 137 (F), the upper 2 digits are “bL. (Lit)” and the lower 2 digits are Real-time base value that is lighting of numerical value (%) (in the example of FIG. 137 (F), “34 (lighting)”), the upper two digits are “b6. (Lighting)”, and the lower two digits are numerical values (% ) (“33 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 137) is alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of the gaming machine 901 when performing performance display will be described. FIG. 138 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 139 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 138. The gaming machine 901 in the case of performing the performance display described above may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, for example.

  In FIG. 138, reference numeral 90700 near the front end of the guide rail (near the exit of the game ball) is a fired ball detector provided with a fire detection sensor 90700A (see FIG. 139). FIG. 138 shows an example in which the launch ball detector 90700 is arranged near the exit of the guide rail, but other positions of the guide rail (for example, near the center of the guide rail (for example, the same height as the normal symbol display 9020) Position), a position closer to the guide rail hitting device (near the entrance, etc.), etc. It should be noted that the game effect lamp 909, operation buttons 9030, and the like are partially different in appearance, but in FIG. 138, the same components as those in FIG. 54 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. ) Will be omitted.

  In FIG. 139, reference numeral 901130 is a display monitor that displays performance information. Reference numeral 90700A is a firing detection sensor. Note that in FIG. 139, the same components as those in FIG. 102 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 102, and description of these components (the same components as those in FIG. 102) is omitted.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine 901 when performing performance display will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 147.

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart illustrating an example of special figure processing (also referred to as special symbol process). In the special figure process shown in FIG. 140, the CPU 90103 executes a state control process (step S901101A). The state control process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes a start winning determination process (step S901102). In the start winning determination process, for example, the CPU 90103 determines the presence or absence of the start winning based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 9022A or the second start opening switch 9022B, and determines whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is executed. The transmission setting of various commands (holding memory number notification command, start winning determination result specifying command, etc.) is performed.

  Subsequent to the start winning determination process in step S901102, the CPU 90103 selects one of the processes in steps S901110 to S901117 in accordance with the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102). And run.

  The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B is determined based on the presence / absence of the hold data (holding storage). Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result is set to “big hit” using the random number for determining the special figure display result, and if it is determined to be “big hit”, the random number for determining the big hit type is used. Which jackpot type is to be determined, and a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is determined. In the special symbol normal process, when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) is set to the on state, and “big hit” is set. Then, if determined, the value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control buffer setting unit in the RAM 90102). In the special symbol normal process, for example, when a confirmed special symbol is determined, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S901111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In the variation pattern setting process, processing for determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types using a random number for variation pattern determination is performed. In the variation pattern setting process, for example, when a variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In the special symbol change process, a process of changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, a process of measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts changing, and the like are performed. . In the special symbol variation process, when the elapsed time since the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S901113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop and display the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable symbol display result for a predetermined time (special symbol fixed display time). Etc. are performed. In the special symbol stop process, when the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” or “4” with reference to the jackpot flag. Specifically, when the big hit flag is on (when the confirmed special symbol is a big hit symbol), the big hit flag is cleared and turned off, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (when the confirmed special symbol is a missing symbol), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S901114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In the big hit release pre-processing, the process of waiting until the end of the execution time of the fanfare effect (also called the big hit start time effect) executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 elapses (the big hit start time effect waiting time) elapses. In addition, after the elapse of the big hit start production waiting time, the setting for making the big winning opening open is performed. In the pre-opening process, the special figure process flag value is updated to “5” when a setting is made to open the big winning opening.

  The big hit release process in step S901115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, a process for determining whether or not a condition for returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state is established (elapse of the big winning opening opening upper limit time or the upper limit number of winnings), or after the condition is established Settings are made to return the grand prize opening to the closed state. When the setting for returning the big prize opening to the closed state is performed in the big hit opening process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S901116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the post-hit opening process, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round for opening the big winning opening has reached a predetermined number is performed. In the processing after the big hit release, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the predetermined number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. Update to

  The big hit end process in step S901117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a process of waiting until the end of the execution time of the ending effect (also referred to as a jackpot end effect) executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 (a jackpot end effect waiting time) elapses, etc. Is done. In the big hit end process, when the big hit end presentation waiting time elapses, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the state control process executed in step S901101A of FIG. In the state control process shown in FIG. 141, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S902001). When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S902001 (step S902001; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round game flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) is on. Is determined (step S902002). As described above, the round game flag is one of the flags that define the normal state. If the round game flag is ON in step S902002 (step S902002; YES), the state control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the round game flag is off in step S902002 (step S902002; NO), the CPU 90103 is on whether the state change switching wait flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) is on. It is determined whether or not (step S902003). The state change switching waiting flag is a flag provided for setting the state change switching waiting time (described later) only once when the round game flag is off.

  If the state change switching waiting flag is OFF in step S902003 (step S902003; NO), the CPU 90103 sets a state change switching waiting time (step S902004). Specifically, the CPU 90103 has a predetermined value as a timer initial value of a state change switching waiting time timer value which is a stored value of a state change switching waiting time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the state change switching wait time. The state change switching wait time set in the process of step S902004 is shorter than the big hit start stage effect wait time set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 142). As will be described in detail later, time T1 in FIG. 148 is a big hit start production waiting time, and time T2 in FIG. 148 is a state change switching waiting time.

  Subsequent to step S902004, the CPU 90103 sets a state change switching wait flag to an on state (step S902005). Then, the state control process ends.

  If the state change switching wait flag is ON in step S902003 (step S902003; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S902006). In the process of step S902006, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S902004 has timed out (whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). That's fine. If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed in step S902006 (step S902006; NO), the state control process ends.

  If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S902006 (step S902006; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the state change switching wait flag to turn it off (step S902007), and turns the round game flag on. Set (step S902008).

  Subsequent to step S902008, the CPU 90103 performs setting for ending the time reduction state or the probability variation state (step S902009). In the process of step S902009, the CPU 90103 executes a process of clearing the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag to turn it off. In the process of step S902009, when a value (other than 0) is set to the probability variation count value that is the stored value of the probability variation counter provided in the RAM 90102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 90102). May execute a process of initializing the probability variation count value to “0”. Further, in the processing of step S902009, when a value (a value other than 0) is set to the short time count value that is the stored value of the short time counter provided in the RAM 90102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 90102). May execute a process of initializing the count value of time reduction to “0”. Note that the time reduction counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of executions or the remaining number of times) of a special game in which time reduction control or high opening control is performed. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of executions or the remaining number of times) of the special figure game for which the probability variation control is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S902009, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S902015). Thereby, a change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the effect control board 9012 side. Then, the state control process ends.

  In the state control process shown in FIG. 141, a game state designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state has changed or not. However, when the game state has changed (for example, a time-saving state or The gaming state designation command may be transmitted only when the probability changing state changes to the normal state. On the side of the effect control board 9012, the current gaming state is specified based on the gaming state designation command transmitted from the main board 9011. Instead, the current gaming state is based on the hit start designation command or the like. May be specified. The same applies to the state control process shown in FIG.

  When the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S902001 (step S902001; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S902010). If the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S902010 (step S902010; NO), the state control process is terminated.

  When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S902010 (step S902010; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S902011). If the round game flag is OFF in step S902011 (step S902002; NO), the state control process is terminated.

  If the round game flag is on in step S902011 (step S902011; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the round game flag and turns it off (step S902013).

  Subsequent to step S902013, the CPU 90103 performs setting for starting the time reduction state or the probability change state (step S902014). In the processing of step S902014, the CPU 90103 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state according to the big hit type (value stored in the big hit type buffer; the big hit type buffer value), and counts the number of times of probable variation according to the big hit type. Set the initial value to the value and the count value for the short time count. For example, in the case of a probabilistic big hit in which the probability change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit, after the end of the big hit, the probability change flag and the short time flag are set to the on state. In addition, for example, in the case of a probabilistic big hit where the probable change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit or the 100th special game is over, the probable change flag and the short time flag are turned on. The initial value is set to 100 as the probability variation count value and the initial value is set to 100 as the short time count value. Also, for example, after the big hit, until the next big hit or until the 30th special drawing game is over, the probabilistic state and the short time state continue, and after the 31st special drawing game, until the next big hit In the case of a probable big hit where the time-saving state continues until the special game is completed 100 times, the probability-changing flag and the time-saving flag are set to the on state, the initial value of 30 is set as the probability changing number count value, and the number of time reductions The count value is set to 100 as an initial value. Also, for example, after the big hit, the time-short flag is set to ON in the case of a non-probable big hit where the time-saving state continues until the next big-hit or the 100-time special game is over. The count value is set to 100 as an initial value. Also, for example, after the big hit is completed, nothing is done in the case of a non-probable big hit that is neither in the probability variation state nor in the time reduction state (the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are not set to the ON state, and the probability variation count value is also shortened. No value is set for the count value).

  Subsequent to step S902014, the CPU 90103 executes the process of step S902015 described above, and ends the state control process.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S901113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 142, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not a special figure fixed display flag provided in, for example, a game control flag setting unit is on (step S902291). Here, the special figure fixed display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S902295 in response to the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game being derived and displayed.

  When the special figure fixed display flag is OFF in step S902291 (step S902291; NO), the CPU 90103 performs setting for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol (step S902292). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control board 9012 (step S902293). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 sets a special figure fixed display time which is a fixed special symbol stop display time (step S902294). Specifically, the CPU 90103 has a predetermined value as a timer initial value of a special figure fixed display time timer value which is a stored value of a special figure fixed display time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the special figure confirmation display time.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S902294, the CPU 90103 sets the special figure confirmation display flag to the on state (step S902295), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

  When the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S902291 (step S902291; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S902296). In the process of step S902296, for example, it is determined whether or not the special figure fixed display time timer set with the timer initial value in step S902294 has timed out (whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer value has become 0). Good. If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S902296 (step S902296; NO), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S902296 (step S902296; YES), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag to turn it off (step S902297), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. Determination is made (step S902298). If the big hit flag is on (step S902298; YES), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S902299). Specifically, the CPU 90103 is configured as a timer initial value of the jackpot start presentation waiting time timer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot start presentation waiting time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set a predetermined big hit start production waiting time. Subsequent to step S902299, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S902300). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the big hit flag to turn it off (step S902301), and sets the big hit start time flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) to the on state (step S902302). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-hit opening process (step S902305), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  If the big hit flag is OFF in step S902298 (step S902298; NO), it is determined whether or not the time-short state or the probability variation state is to be ended (step S902306). In the processing of step S902306, the CPU 90103 updates each count value according to whether or not a value (other than 0) is set for the probability variation count value or the time variation count value, and displays the time variation state or the probability variation state. It is determined whether or not to end. For example, when a value is set for the short-time count value (for example, a special game that has been digested after the end of a non-probable big hit in which the short-time state continues until the next big hit or 100 special figure games have been consumed. Is less than 100 times, etc.), the time count count value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the updated short-time count value matches a short-time end determination value (for example, “0”), and when the updated short-time count value does not match the short-time end determination value. Determines that the time-short state is not terminated. Also, for example, when the probability variation count value and the short time count count value are set (for example, the probability variation state where the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue until the next big hit or 100 special game games are completed. For example, when the special-figure game digested after the big hit is less than 100 times, etc., the probability variation count value is decremented by 1 and updated, and the short-time count count value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the updated probability change count value matches the probability change end determination value (for example, “0”), and when the updated probability change count value does not match the probability change end determination value. Determines that the probability variation state is not to be ended, and determines that the probability variation state is to be terminated if they match, and whether or not the updated time count count value matches a time reduction end determination value (for example, “0”). If the updated time reduction count value does not match the time reduction end determination value, it is determined not to end the time reduction state. If the CPU 90103 determines that the probability variation state is to be terminated, the CPU 90103 clears the probability variation flag to turn it off, and if it is determined to terminate the time reduction state, the CPU 90103 clears the time variation flag to turn it off.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S902306, settings for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 are performed (step S902307). Thereby, a change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the effect control board 9012 side. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated (initialized) to “0” (step S902308), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 142, the game state designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state has changed or not. However, when the game state has changed (for example, the time-saving state). The gaming state designation command may be transmitted only when the probability changing state changes to the normal state. Note that, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the current game state is specified based on the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, but instead of this, effect control is performed independently of the main board 9011 side. The current gaming state may be specified by counting the number of executions of variable display on the substrate 9012 side.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit release pre-processing executed in step S901114 of FIG. In the big hit release pre-processing shown in FIG. 143, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit start time flag is on (step S902131). Here, the big hit start flag is set to the on state in response to the big hit flag being on in the special symbol stop process (step S902302 in FIG. 142).

  If the big hit start flag is not on in step S902131 (step S902131; NO), a big prize opening determination process (see FIG. 145) is executed (step S90220), and the process proceeds to step S902138. As described above, in addition to the big hit opening process in step S901115, the big winning opening determination processing is executed in the post-hit opening process in step S901114, thereby preferably detecting a winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value. be able to. For example, over-winning can be suitably detected while waiting for the next opening (during step S902138 (YES)). The special winning opening determination process will be described later.

  Although it has been described that the addition of the number of winning balls when a game ball has won a predetermined number or more of winning balls per unit time has been won, over winning is not excluded. In other words, even if there is a winning exceeding the above-mentioned “winning upper limit judgment value”, if the number of winnings in the excess is within a range generally assumed as an over winning (for example, up to about +3), a winning ball (actual payout) , Reflected in performance information). Exclusion from the addition of the number of winning balls is due to fraud, and the excess winning number is outside the range generally assumed as an over winning.

  If the big hit start time flag is ON in step S902131 (step S902131; YES), it is determined whether or not the big hit start presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S902132). In the process of step S902132, for example, whether or not the big hit start presentation waiting time timer for which the timer initial value was set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process has timed out (the big hit start presentation waiting time timer value becomes 0). Whether or not) may be determined.

  If the big hit start production waiting time has not elapsed (step S902132; NO), the big hit release pre-processing is terminated.

  If the big hit start time waiting time has elapsed (step S902132; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the big hit start time flag (step S902134). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the special winning opening opening number counter (step S902135). Specifically, the special winning opening opening count value is initialized to “1”. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 reads the jackpot type buffer value (step S902136), and sets an opening control pattern corresponding to the read jackpot type buffer value (step S902137). That is, the opening control pattern of the special variable winning ball device 907 (big winning opening) is set according to the jackpot type determined in the special symbol normal process. In the opening control pattern, for example, a big winning opening opening upper limit time for each round is set.

  Following the process of step S902137 or the process of step S90220, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the next release is being waited for (step S902138). That is, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval period until the next prize opening is opened as the next round. In the processing of step S902138, for example, whether or not the round start waiting time timer in which the timer initial value is set in step S902366 of the big hit release processing has timed out (whether or not the round start waiting time timer value has become 0). Can be determined. If it is waiting for the next opening (step S902138; YES), that is, if the interval period has not ended, the big hit pre-release processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is not waiting for the next opening (step S902138; NO), that is, if the interval period ends, the CPU 90103 controls the opening of the big winning opening (step S902139). For example, the CPU 90103 sets the opening time for opening the big winning opening based on the opening control pattern set in step S902137 and the count value in the big winning opening opening number counter, and the big winning opening is opened. Set as follows. Specifically, in the process of step S902139, for example, the CPU 90103 steps as a timer initial value of an opening time timer value that is a stored value of an opening time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). In the opening control pattern set in S902137, the maximum winning opening opening upper limit time of the corresponding round (upper limit time for opening state) is set. In the process of step S902139, the solenoid 9028 for the special prize opening door may be set to the on state by transmitting a solenoid driving signal via the solenoid circuit 90111. In the case of the first round (when the special jackpot release pre-processing is executed following the special symbol stop processing), since the round start waiting time (interval period) is not set (because it is zero), the step In the processing of S902138, it is immediately determined that the next release waiting is not in progress.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S902139, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a special winning opening open notification command to the effect control board 9012 (step S902140). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5” (step S902141), and the big hit release pre-processing is terminated.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit release process executed in step S901115 of FIG. In the big hit opening process shown in FIG. 144, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big winning opening opening upper limit time has elapsed (step S902121). If the big winning opening opening upper limit time has not elapsed (step S90221; NO), the big winning opening judgment processing is executed (step S90220).

  FIG. 145 shows the big hit release pre-processing (step S901114) of FIG. 143, the big hit open processing (step S901115) of FIG. 144, the big hit release post processing (step S901116) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening determination process performed by.

  In the special winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 145, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the detection signal transmitted from the count switch 9023 has been turned on (step S90221). If the count switch 9023 is not turned on (step S9021; NO), the special winning opening determination process is terminated.

  If the count switch 9023 is on (step S9021; YES), transmission setting of a big prize opening prize notification command for notifying the effect control board 9012 of the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening is performed. (Step S90222). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is “5”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release processing (step S90223). If the value of the special figure process flag is not “5” corresponding to the big hit release process (step S90223; NO), the big prize opening determination process is terminated.

  If the value of the special figure process flag is “5” corresponding to the big hit release processing (step S90223; YES), the winning number counter stored in the RAM 90102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 90102) is stored. The winning number count value, which is a value, is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S90224). Then, the special winning opening determination process is terminated. When the process of step S90224 is performed in the special winning opening determination process, a prize ball payout process is executed in the prize ball process. Also, as shown in FIG. 136 (B), if any of the probability variation flag, the hourly flag, and the round game flag are in an off state, the number of winning balls by the big prize opening is updated in relation to the performance display. . However, as shown in FIG. 141, at least during the period from the start of the first round (closing the big prize opening door → opening) to the end of the final round (opening the big prize opening door → closing) Since the flag is in the on state, not the off state, the number of prize balls by the special winning opening is not updated during the period.

  Returning to FIG. Following the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 145, it is determined whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined winning upper limit determination value (eg, “10”) (step S902126). If the winning upper limit determination value has not been reached (step S902126; NO), the big hit release process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the big winning opening opening upper limit time has passed in step S90221 (step S902121; YES), or when the winning upper limit judgment value is reached in step S902126 (step S902126; YES), the big winning opening is opened. Is controlled (step S902127). That is, the CPU 90103 determines that the current round game is to end, and sets the special winning opening to be closed. For example, what is necessary is just to set so that transmission of the drive signal with respect to the solenoid 9082 may be stopped. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the winning number counter and initializes the winning number count value to “0” (step S902128). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6” (step S902129), and the big hit release process is terminated.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit release post-processing executed in step S901116 of FIG. In the post-hit-opening process shown in FIG. 146, the CPU 90103 first executes the big prize opening determination process shown in FIG. 145 (step S90220). In this way, in addition to the big hit opening process in step S901115, the big winning opening determination processing is also executed in the processing after the big hit release in step S901116, thereby suitably detecting a winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value. be able to.

  After executing the big prize opening determination process shown in FIG. 145, the CPU 90103 updates the special prize opening number-of-openings count value to be incremented by 1 (step S902364). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the updated big winning opening opening count value has reached the maximum value (step S902365).

  In step S902365, the “maximum value” to be compared with the updated winning prize opening number count value is a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. That is, since the winning prize opening number count value to be compared with the “maximum value” is updated (step S902364), the initial value of the winning prize opening number count value is “1” (FIG. 143). S902135) The “maximum value” needs to be a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. For example, in the case of a big hit of 6 rounds (when the upper limit number of rounds is 6), the “maximum value” is “7”, and in the case of a big hit of 16 rounds (when the upper limit number of rounds is 16), The “maximum value” is “17”. It should be noted that instead of the updated large winning opening opening count value, it may be compared with the maximum winning opening opening count value before updating and the “maximum value”. In this case, the “maximum value” may be set as the upper limit number of rounds.

  If the winning prize opening opening count value is other than the maximum value (step S902365; NO), a round start waiting time (interval time) is set (step S902366). Specifically, for example, the CPU 90103 has a predetermined value as a timer initial value of a round start waiting time timer value that is a stored value of a round start waiting time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the round start waiting time.

  Subsequent to step S902366, the CPU 90103 performs setting to transmit a notification command after opening the big prize opening to the effect control board 9012 (step S902367). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” (step S902368), and the processing after releasing the big hit is completed. In this way, by repeatedly executing the processing of steps S901114 to S901116 shown in FIG. 140 and the like until it is determined by the processing of step S902365 that the updated winning prize opening number count value is the maximum value, A plurality of rounds can be executed in which the big winning opening is opened in the big hit gaming state. Further, by setting the round start waiting time in the process of step S902366, the next release waiting is performed in the process of step S901114 shown in FIG. 140 and the like until the round start waiting time elapses (in FIG. 143). Step S902138; YES), the next round can be started after a desired interval period.

  If the winning prize opening number count value is the maximum value in step S902365 (step S902365; YES), the big hit end presentation waiting time is set (step S902369). Specifically, for example, the CPU 90103 is a timer initial value of the big hit end presentation waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the big hit end presentation waiting time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). As described above, a waiting time at the end of a predetermined jackpot is set.

  Subsequent to step S902369, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a hit end designation command to the effect control board 9012 (step S902370). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7” (step S902371), and the processing after releasing the big hit is completed. In this manner, by setting the big hit end presentation waiting time in the process of step S902369, according to the end of the ending presentation executed on the side of the presentation control board 9012 (step S902321 in FIG. 147; YES), FIG. The special symbol normal process of step S90110 shown in 140 can be executed.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit end process executed in step S901117 in FIG. 140. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 147, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S902321). In the process of step S902321, for example, whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time timer for which the timer initial value was set in step S902369 of the big hit release post process has timed out (the big hit end presentation waiting time timer value becomes 0). Whether or not) may be determined. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S90221 (step S902321; NO), the big prize opening determination process shown in FIG. 145 is executed (step S90220), and the big hit end process is ended. In this way, in addition to the big hit opening process of step S901115, the big winning opening determination processing is also executed in the big hit end processing of step S901117, so that a winning exceeding the winning upper limit determination value (over winning) is suitably detected. Can do.

  When the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S902321 (step S902321; YES), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” (step S902325), and the execution of the big hit end processing is ended.

  As described above, the operation of the gaming machine 901 when performing performance display has been described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 147. According to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. After the symbol is stopped and displayed, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, but the round gaming flag is turned on before the first round is released. This will be described in detail below.

(A) End of fanfare effect → First opening of special variable winning ball apparatus After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (special symbol confirmation display time), the CPU 90103 performs the execution time of the fanfare effect in the special symbol stop process. Is set (step S902299 in FIG. 142), and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Further, in the pre-hit release pre-processing, the CPU 90103 opens the special winning opening after the elapse of the waiting time (step S902132 in FIG. 143; YES) (step S902139 in FIG. 143). That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is in a closed state before the end of the fanfare effect, and is in a first open state after the end of the fanfare effect.

(B) Set round game flag to ON state → end of fanfare effect When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, the CPU 90103 sets a state change switching waiting time (see FIG. 141). Step S902004) After the elapse of the state change switching waiting time (step S902006 in FIG. 141; YES), the round gaming flag is set to the on state (step S902008 in FIG. 141). Then, as described above, the state change switching waiting time is a time shorter than the big hit start production waiting time (fanfare production execution time). That is, the round game flag is turned on before the end of the fanfare effect.

  From (A) and (B) above, the round game flag is set to ON, the end of the fanfare effect, and the first opening of the special variable winning ball device 907. That is, the round game flag is turned on before the first round is released.

  In addition, as described above, a gaming state in which the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be thrown for performance display is referred to as a normal state. Specifically, the normal state includes a probability variation flag, a time-short flag, a round game, and the like. All of the middle flags are in a gaming state in an off state (see FIG. 136). Accordingly, at least when the round game flag is in the on state, the normal state is not met. Therefore, at least when the round game flag is in the on state, the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be thrown are not collected for performance display. That is, at least when the round game flag is in the ON state, the number of winning balls and the number of shots are not reflected in the performance display.

  According to (A) and (B) above, since the round game flag is on at the stage before the opening of the first round, the number of winning balls and the hit balls from the stage before the opening of the first round at the latest. The number is not reflected in the performance display (more accurately, it is not reflected). It should be noted that the expression “at the latest” means that the game state during the execution of the special figure game prior to the special figure game in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is a probabilistic state or a short time state (that is, at least the probability variation flag or the short time flag) If one of them is on), a stage prior to the above "a certain stage before the opening of the first round" (for example, a stage during execution of a special figure game before the special figure game in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) This is because the number of award balls and the number of shots are not already reflected in the performance display.

  FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like. In the figure, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905. The lower side of the display of the image display device 905 is, in order from the top, the detection timing of the game ball by the launch ball detector 90700 (launch detection sensor 90700A), the state of the special variable winning ball device 907 (big prize opening door) (open state) , Closed state), and the winning timing (game ball detection timing by the count switch 9023) to the big winning opening.

  As shown in FIG. 148, a jackpot symbol (shown as a confirmed decorative symbol “777” in the image display device 905 in the figure) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game (more specifically, as shown in FIG. 142). When the special figure confirmation display time elapses) and the big hit start presentation waiting time (shown as fanfare production in the figure) ends, the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 releases the first time (in the figure, the 1R release). As shown in FIG. Note that the jackpot effect in the image display device 905 is an effect performed during the execution of the big hit release process (FIG. 144). In addition to the effect performed during the execution of the big hit opening process (FIG. 144), the effect performed during the execution of the big hit release post-processing (FIG. 146) may also be referred to as a big hit effect.

  Timing t1 shown in the lower part of FIG. 148 is the timing at which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. Timing t3 is the timing at which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is released for the first time after the big hit start stage production waiting time ends. A time T1 between the timing t1 and the timing t3 is a big hit start production waiting time set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 142). The timing t2 and the like will be described later.

  FIG. 148 schematically shows a state where three game balls (game ball a, game ball b, game ball c) launched by the hitting ball launching device are detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A. The game ball a is detected by the firing detection sensor 90700A at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t1 (for example, during reach production), and is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, the closed prize winning door door). A game ball that has flowed down the front side). The game ball b is a game ball that is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at the timing t2, picked up by the big winning opening door at the timing t3 (the moment it is opened), and detected by the count switch 9023. The game ball c is a game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at a timing slightly later than the timing t2, picked up by the winning opening door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, and detected by the count switch 9023.

  A time T2 between the timing t1 and the timing t2 is a state change switching waiting time set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 141). Note that the game ball b detected by the firing detection sensor 90700A at the timing t2 flows down the game area 9010 at the slowest possible flow speed after being detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A, and the winning prize door immediately after opening. It is assumed that the game ball is picked up by the player and detected by the count switch 9023. In other words, the game ball detected by the firing detection sensor 90700A at a timing earlier than the timing t2 is not detected by the count switch 9023. That is, the timing t2 is the earliest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the moment of opening can be detected by the firing detection sensor 90700A.

  That is, game balls detected by the count switch 9023 exist among the game balls detected by the firing detection sensor 90700A before the grand prize opening door is opened (for example, during the execution time of the fanfare effect) (for example, game) A game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at any timing of the time T3, such as a ball c), or a game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A before the grand prize opening door is opened by the count switch 9023. In order to prevent the game balls that can be detected from being reflected on the performance display, the round gaming flag is set to ON at timing t2 (at the time T2 has elapsed) (step S902008 in FIG. 141).

  If the round game flag is set to ON at timing t3 (when it is not reflected in the performance display from the opening timing of the grand prize opening door), for example, at time T3 like the game ball c. The game ball detected by the firing detection sensor 90700A at any timing is reflected in the performance display as the number of balls to be hit, but is not reflected in the performance display as the number of award balls when winning the big prize opening. Inconsistency occurs and accurate performance display cannot be performed. On the other hand, if the round gaming flag is set to the ON state at the timing t2 (at the time T2 has elapsed), the above-described problem is solved.

  Note that although the timing t2 has been described as the earliest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big prize opening door at the moment of opening can be detected by the firing detection sensor 90700A, the timing t2 is not limited thereto. For example, the timing t2 may be an average timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening is detected by the firing detection sensor 90700A, or a timing later than the average timing. May be. That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T2) set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 141) takes into consideration the flow time of the game ball (launch ball detector 90700 → special variable winning ball device 907). If it is. However, in order to perform performance display more accurately, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned earliest timing as the timing t2. The same applies to FIG. 151.

[Modified example of the launch ball detector]
FIG. 149 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 150 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. The gaming machine 901 in the case of performing performance display may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, for example.

  In FIG. 149, reference numeral 90701 above the first passage gate 9041A is a first firing ball detector including a first firing detection sensor 90701A (see FIG. 150). All the game balls passing through the left game area 9010A pass through the first firing ball detector 90701. That is, the first firing ball detector 90701 (first firing detection sensor 90701A) detects all game balls that pass through the left game area 9010A. Reference numeral 90702 above the second passage gate 9041B is a second firing ball detector including a second firing detection sensor 90702A (see FIG. 150). All the game balls passing through the right game area 9010B pass through the second shot ball detector 90702. That is, the second shot ball detector 90702 (second shot detection sensor 90702A) detects all the game balls that pass through the right game area 9010B.

  FIG. 149 shows an example in which the shot ball detectors 90701 and 90702 are arranged above the pass gates 9041A and 9041B. However, if all the game balls can be detected, other positions (for example, pass gates 9041A and 9041B) are shown. , Etc.) may be arranged in the lower part of the projection ball detector 90701, 90702. Note that in FIG. 149, the same components as those in FIG. 138 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 138, and description thereof is omitted here.

  In FIG. 150, reference numeral 90701A denotes a first launch detection sensor. Reference numeral 90702A denotes a second firing detection sensor. 150, the same components as those in FIG. 139 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 139, and the description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 139) is omitted.

  Note that the operations shown in FIGS. 140 to 147 are also applied to the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 149 and 150. In other words, special chart processing when performance display is performed in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, and special processing when performance display is performed in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. This is the same as diagram processing.

  FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 149 and 150. In FIG. 151, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905. The lower side of the display of the image display device 905 is, in order from the top, the detection timing of the game ball by the shot ball detectors 90701 and 90702 (fire detection sensors 90701A and 90702A), the special variable winning ball device 907 (the big winning door). The state (open state, closed state), the winning timing to the big winning opening (the detection timing of the game ball by the count switch 9023) are shown.

  In FIG. 151, three game balls (game ball a, game ball b, game ball c) launched by the hit ball launching device are detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A). The state of being done is shown schematically. The game ball a is detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t1, and is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, in a closed state). A game ball that has flowed down the front door of the grand prize opening door). The game ball b is detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A) at the timing t2, picked up by the big prize opening door at the timing t3 (the moment it is opened), and detected by the count switch 9023. Game balls to be played. The game ball c is detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, and is picked up by the winning opening door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3. A game ball detected by the count switch 9023.

  Note that the first launch ball detector 90701 (first launch detection sensor 90701A) and the second launch ball detector 90702 (second launch detection sensor 90702A) can simultaneously detect a game ball, but simultaneously detect a game ball. Even in this case, each game ball detected at the same time can be captured (counted) as the number of balls to be shot. For example, each game ball detected at the same time may be captured as the number of shot balls, for example, by shifting the execution timing of the process executed after detection (the process of counting).

  As shown in FIGS. 148 and 151, the arrangement position of the launch ball detector 90700 shown in FIG. 138 is different from the arrangement position of the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 shown in FIG. As described above, the time until the game ball fired by the hitting ball launcher in the configuration of FIGS. 149 and 150 is detected by the first launch ball detector 90701 (or the second launch ball detector 90702) is shown in FIG. In the configuration of FIG. 139, it is longer than the time until the game ball launched by the hitting ball launcher is detected by the shot ball detector 90700. In addition, the time until the game ball detected by the first shot ball detector 90701 (or the second shot ball detector 90702) in the configuration of FIGS. 149 and 150 reaches the arrangement position of the special variable winning ball device 907 is as follows. In the configuration of FIG. 138 and FIG. 139, the time required for the game ball detected by the shot ball detector 90700 to reach the arrangement position of the special variable winning ball device 907 is short.

  Therefore, the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. 151) set in the case of the configurations of FIGS. 149 and 150 is the state change switching waiting time (in FIG. 148) set in the case of the configurations of FIGS. 138 and 139. Longer than the time T2).

  Note that the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 (or the parts including the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 (referred to as part A)) are placed on the game board 902. On the other hand, it may be detachable. In addition, the game board 902 includes a part A and one or more parts other than the part A, and the part A may be detachable with respect to one or more parts other than the part A. For example, in FIG. 149, a portion including the first firing ball detector 90701 and the second firing ball detector 90702 (a portion above the broken line P in the drawing) may be removable.

[Modification using out-sphere detector]
FIG. 152 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 153 is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. For example, the gaming machine 901 for displaying performance may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 152 and 153.

  In FIG. 152, reference numeral 90710 in the broken line is an out sphere detector including an out sphere detection sensor 90710A. The out-sphere detector 90710 is arranged at a position where it cannot be visually recognized from the front side, but for convenience of explanation, in FIG. 152, a broken line is used for illustration. Reference numeral 9052 denotes an out port. Enter the winning entrances (first general winning port 9050A, second general winning port 9050B, third general winning port 9050C, fourth general winning port 9050D, first starting winning port, second starting winning port, large winning port). The game balls that did not exist are taken into the out port 9052.

  The out ball detector 90710 detects all the game balls that have been launched into the game area 9010 by the hitting ball launching device. That is, the game balls fired in the game area 9010 are the winning ports (first general winning port 9050A, second general winning port 9050B, third general winning port 9050C, fourth general winning port 9050D, first start winning port, The second start winning opening, the big winning opening), or is taken into the out opening 9052 without entering the winning opening. The game balls that have entered the winning port and the game balls that have been taken into the out port 9052 are finally collected in one path on the back surface (or inside) of the game board 902. Since the out-ball detector 90710 is arranged on the above-described path, it detects all the game balls launched into the game area 9010 by the hitting ball launching device.

  152 shows an example in which the out ball detector 90710 is arranged at the center in the left and right direction (below the out port). However, if all the game balls can be detected, other positions (for example, the right side in the left and right direction). The out-sphere detector 90710 may be disposed on the left side or the left side in the left-right direction. 152, the same components as those in FIG. 138 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 138, and the description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 138) is omitted.

  In FIG. 153, reference numeral 90710A denotes an out sphere detection sensor. Note that in FIG. 153, the same components as those in FIG. 139 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 139, and description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 139) is omitted.

  Note that the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 152 and 153 executes the state control process (FIG. 154) in step S901101B instead of the state control process (FIGS. 140 and 141) in step S901101A. Other special drawing processes (the processes shown in FIGS. 142 to 147) are also applied to the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 152 and 153.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of a state control process executed in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 152 and 153. In the state control process shown in FIG. 154, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S902202). When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S902202 (step S902202; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S902202). If the round game flag is OFF in step S902202 (step S902202; NO), the state control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the round game flag is on in step S902202 (step S902202; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the state change switching wait flag is on (step S902020).

  If the state change switching wait flag is OFF in step S90202 (step S902020; NO), the CPU 90103 sets a state change switching waiting time (step S902024). Specifically, the CPU 90103 sets a predetermined state change switching waiting time as a timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value that is a stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer. The state change switching waiting time set in the process of step S902024 is shorter than the big hit end presentation waiting time set in step S902369 of the jackpot release post-processing (FIG. 146). Although details will be described later, time T4 in FIG. 155 is a big hit end stage waiting time, and time T5 in FIG. 155 is a state change switching waiting time.

  Subsequent to step S902024, the CPU 90103 sets a state change switching wait flag to an on state (step S902020). Then, the state control process ends.

  If the state change switching wait flag is ON in step S90202 (step S902020; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S902026). In the process of step S902026, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S902024 has timed out (whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). That's fine. If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed in step S902026 (step S902026; NO), the state control process ends.

  If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S902026 (step S902026; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the state change switching waiting flag to turn it off (step S902020), and clears the round gaming flag. An off state is set (step S902028).

  Subsequent to step S902028, the CPU 90103 performs setting for starting the time reduction state or the probability variation state (step S902029). Note that the process of step S902029 is the same as the process of step S902014 of the state control process (step S901101A) illustrated in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S902029, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S902020). Thereby, a change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the effect control board 9012 side. Then, the state control process ends.

  When the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S902202 (step S902020; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S902030). If the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S902030 (step S902030; NO), the state control process is terminated.

  When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S902030 (step S902030; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S902020). If the round game flag is on in step S902203 (step S902032; YES), the state control process ends.

  If the round game flag is OFF in step S902031 (step S902001; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the big hit start presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S902032). In the process of step S902032, the jackpot start in which the timer initial value is set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 142 is the same as the process of step S902132 in the jackpot release pre-process (step S901114) shown in FIG. It may be determined whether or not the hour production waiting time timer has timed out. If the big hit start production waiting time has not elapsed in step S902032 (step S902032; NO), the state control process is terminated.

  If the big hit start production waiting time has elapsed in step S902032 (step S902032; YES), the CPU 90103 sets the round gaming flag to the on state (step S902033).

  Subsequent to step S902033, the CPU 90103 performs setting for ending the time reduction state or the probability variation state (step S902034). Note that the process of step S902034 is the same as the process of step S902009 of the state control process (step S901101A) illustrated in FIG.

  Following the process of step S902034, the CPU 90103 executes the process of step S902035 described above, and ends the state control process.

  FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 152 and 153. In FIG. 155, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905. On the lower side of the display of the image display device 905, in order from the top, the state of the special variable winning ball device 907 (large winning opening door) (open state, closed state), the winning timing at the large winning opening (game by the count switch 9023) Sphere detection timing), the detection timing of the game ball by the out ball detector 90710 (out ball detection sensor 90710A) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, the final opening (illustrated as the final R opening in the figure) is finished, and the big hit end effect (illustrated as the ending effect in the figure) is performed.

  Timing t4 shown in the lower part of FIG. 155 is the timing at which the final opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 ends (timing at which the big prize opening door is closed). Timing t4 is also the start timing of the ending effect. Timing t6 is the end timing of the ending effect. The time T4 between the timing t4 and the timing t6 is the big hit end presentation waiting time set in step S902369 of the big hit release post-processing (FIG. 146). The timing t5 and the like will be described later.

  FIG. 155 schematically shows how three game balls (game ball d, game ball e, game ball f) launched by the hit ball launching device are detected by the out-ball detection sensor 90710A. . The game ball d is picked up by the grand prize opening door at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t4, detected by the count switch 9023 at a timing slightly later than the timing t4, and an out-ball detection sensor at a timing earlier than the timing t5. It is a game ball detected by 90710A. The game ball e is picked up by the grand prize opening door at timing t4 (moment of closing), detected by the count switch 9023 at timing later than timing t4, and detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at timing t5. It is a game ball. The game ball f is a game ball that is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, a game ball that has flowed down the front side of the closed big opening door), and more than timing t5 (and more than timing t6). It is a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at a late timing.

  A time T5 between the timing t4 and the timing t5 is a state change switching waiting time set in step S902024 of the state control process (FIG. 154). Note that the game ball e picked up by the big winning door at timing t4 moves to the position detected by the out ball detecting sensor 90710A at the slowest possible speed after being picked up by the big winning door (while moving) The game ball is detected by the count switch 9023) and detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A. In other words, game balls detected by the out-ball detection sensor 90710A at a timing later than the timing t5 are not detected by the count switch 9023. That is, the timing t5 is the latest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the moment of closing can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A.

  That is, the game balls detected by the count switch 9023 exist among the game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after the grand prize opening door is closed (for example, during the execution period of the ending effect) (for example, A game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at any timing of the time T5, such as a game ball d), even if it is a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after the grand prize opening door is closed. In order to prevent the game balls that can be detected by 9023 from being reflected in the performance display, the round gaming flag is cleared to OFF at timing t5 (at the time T5 has elapsed) (step S902028 in FIG. 154). That is, until the timing t5 (time T5), the in-round game flag is maintained in the ON state and is not reflected in the performance display.

  If, however, the round game flag is cleared to OFF at timing t4 (when the performance display is reflected from the closing timing of the grand prize opening door), the prize winning opening will be given before timing t4. When the game ball detected by the out-ball detection sensor 90710A after the timing t4 (game ball launched at a timing slightly earlier than the game ball d) wins the grand prize opening, the number of prize balls is displayed in the performance display. Although not reflected in the above, there is a mismatch that the number of shot balls is reflected in the performance display, and the accurate performance display cannot be performed. On the other hand, if the round game flag is cleared to the OFF state at the timing t5 (at the time T5 has elapsed), the above-described problem is solved.

  In addition, although timing t5 demonstrated that the game ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the moment of closing is the latest timing which can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, timing t5 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t5 may be an average timing at which the game ball picked up by the big prize opening door at the moment of closing is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, or at an earlier timing than the average timing. There may be. That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) set in step S902024 of the state control process (FIG. 154) takes into consideration the moving time of the game ball (special variable winning ball device 907 → out ball detector 90710). If it is. However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable that the latest timing is the timing t5.

  FIG. 156 is a configuration example of the out sphere detector. The out sphere detector 90710 described above may be, for example, as shown in FIG. An out ball detector 90710 illustrated in FIG. 156A includes a main body 90720 and a harness 90730. The main body 90720 detects an opening (passing portion) 90721 through which a game ball that has entered one of the winning holes or a game ball taken into the out port 9052 passes, and an out-ball detection that detects a game ball that passes through the opening 90721. A sensor 90710A and a connection portion 90722 are provided. The harness 90730 includes a signal line 90734 having connection portions (connection portions 90732 and 90733) connected to both ends, a connection portion (connector) 90732 for connection to a connection portion 90722 on the main body 90720 side, and a main board 9011 side. A connection portion (connector) 90733 for connecting to a predetermined connection portion (not shown) provided is provided. Note that FIG. 156 (A) (also in FIG. 156 (B)) shows a state where the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 are connected. Note that the out-sphere detector 90710 (harness 90730) and the main board 9011 can be attached to and detached from each other at the connecting part (the connecting part 90733, the connecting part on the main board 9011 side). In addition, the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 may be detachable at the connection portion (connection portions 90722, 90732).

  The game balls that have entered any of the winning openings or the game balls that have been taken into the out opening 9052 are finally collected in one path and all pass through the opening 90721. When the game ball that has passed through the opening 90721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, a detection signal indicating that the game ball has been detected is output to the main board 9011 side via the harness 90730. Note that the game balls detected by the out ball detector 90710 are counted (counted) as the number of shot balls, and the out ball detection sensor 90710A may be referred to as a count switch.

  Note that the out-ball detector 90710 may be connected to the harness 90730 when the harness 90730 is disconnected from the main body 90720 (when the connection portion 90722 on the main body 90720 side and the connection portion 90732 on the harness 90730 side are not properly connected). Etc. are disconnected (the signal line 90734 is disconnected halfway, the signal line 90734 is disconnected between the connection part 90732, the signal line 90734 is disconnected between the connection part 90734, etc.). It is configured to output to the substrate 9011 side. Accordingly, the CPU 90103 can detect a missing harness or the like by monitoring a signal input from the out ball detector 90710 in the error detection process described above. For example, the CPU 90103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected when an ON signal is input for a predetermined time or longer.

  Further, at least a part of the detection signal output from the out-ball detector 90710 when the game ball passes through the opening 90721 may be configured with a predetermined on / off pattern. When at least a part of the detection signal is composed of a predetermined on / off pattern, the CPU 90103 can detect signal corruption due to noise or the like by monitoring a signal input from the out-sphere detector 90710.

  Further, the out-sphere detector 90710 may include a clasp 90740 having a screw hole 90741 as shown in FIG. 156 (B). Alternatively, the out-ball detector 90710 (main body 90720) may be capable of being attached with a clasp 90740. The clasp 90740 is an example of a fixing member for fixing the main body 90720 to the gaming machine 901 or the like, and any clasp can be used as long as the main body 90720 can be fixed to the gaming machine 901 or the like. Also good.

  The harness 90730 (at least a part of the connection portions 90732, 90734, and the signal line 90734) may be protected by a cover or the like. The main body 90720 and the harness 90730 may be separate. That is, the main body 90720 of the out-ball detector 90710 may be connectable to a harness 90730 which is a separate body.

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error notification processing for errors related to performance display. FIG. 158 is an example of a display mode for reporting an error related to the performance display. In the error notification process shown in FIG. 157, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not a reception abnormality related to the reception of the detection signal output from the out-sphere detector 90710 has been detected (step S901200).

  If there is an abnormality in the out-ball detector 90710 (for example, missing harness, disconnection, garbled signal, etc.), the CPU 90103 detects out-ball detection in a process (the above-described error detection process) different from the error notification process. A reception abnormality related to reception of the detection signal output from the device 90710 is detected. For example, the CPU 90103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected when the ON signal continues for a predetermined time. Further, at least a part of the detection signal output from the out-sphere detector 90710 is configured with a predetermined on / off pattern, and the CPU 90103 receives a received signal different from the predetermined on / off pattern. If there is, it may be determined that the signal is corrupted.

  If no reception abnormality is detected in step S901200 (step S901200; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not a reception error flag provided in the RAM 90102 (for example, a game control flag setting unit) is on (step S901200; NO). Step S901201). If the reception error flag is on in step S901201 (step S901201; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the reception error flag to turn it off (step S901202), and proceeds to step S901205. If the reception error flag is off in step S901001 (step S901001; NO), the process of step S901202 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S901205.

  If a reception abnormality is detected in step S901200 (step S901200; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not a reception error flag is on (step S901203). If the reception error flag is off in step S901203 (step S901203; NO), the CPU 90103 sets the reception error flag to the on state (step S901204), and proceeds to step S901205. If the reception error flag is ON in step S901203 (step S901203; YES), the process of step S901204 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S901205.

  Following one of steps S901201 (NO), step S901202, step S901203 (YES), and step S901204, it is determined whether the reception error flag is on (step S901205).

  If the reception error flag is off in step S901205 (step S901205; NO), the CPU 90103 controls to display the performance in the normal mode (normal mode) (step S901206). In the process of step S901206, the CPU 90103 performs control so that the performance display is performed according to the display modes illustrated in FIGS. 137B to 137F. Then, the error notification process ends.

  If the reception error flag is on in step S901205 (step S901205; YES), the CPU 90103 controls to display the error notification mode (step S901207). In the process of step S901207, for example, the CPU 90103 performs control so that display according to the display mode of FIG. In the display mode of FIG. 158 (A), the upper two digits are “-(flashing)”, and the lower two digits are “-(lit)”. Then, the error notification process ends.

  In the case of a reception abnormality related to reception of the detection signal by the out ball detector 90710, the number of shot balls (FIG. 136 (B)) is naturally not updated, but the number of winning balls ( Also, FIG. 136 (B)) is not updated. That is, the CPU 90103 performs the same as in the case of the role combination (ream ratio) and role ratio related processing (FIG. 114, etc.), the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first switch. Each game information is acquired (received) by detecting a game ball by any one of the general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, but in a situation where the number of hit balls is not updated, the winning is achieved. The prize ball number adding process based on the information is not performed.

  According to the error notification process shown in FIG. 157, the upper two digits are normally displayed as “bL. (Blinking, lighting)” or “b6. (Blinking, lighting)” (FIG. 137 (B)). (FIG. 137 (F)), “-(lighting)” is displayed when reception is abnormal (FIG. 158 (A)). That is, when reception is abnormal, the upper two digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in normal times. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal by looking at the display of the upper two digits.

  Note that the display mode illustrated in FIG. 158A is an example. For example, in the processing of step S901207, control may be performed so that display is performed according to the display mode of FIG. 158 (B) instead of the display mode of FIG. 158 (A). As in FIG. 158 (A), the upper two digits in FIG. 158 (B) are display modes that are not displayed in normal times. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal by looking at the display of the upper two digits.

  Further, for example, in the process of step S901207, control may be performed so that the display in the display mode of FIG. 158 (C) or FIG. 158 (D) is performed. “E. (blinking)” in the upper 2 digits of FIG. 158 (C) and “Er. (Blinking)” in the upper 2 digits of FIG. 158 (D) are reminiscent of “Err”. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that there is an abnormality by looking at the display of the upper two digits (or the upper second digit).

  Further, in FIGS. 158 (A) to 158 (D), the lower two digits are “-(lit)”, but the lower two digits may be “-(flashing)” or other display. An aspect may be sufficient.

  When the display is normal, that is, in the display by the processing of step S901206, the display contents are as shown in FIGS. 137B to 137F according to the section shown in FIG. 137A and every 5 seconds. However, in the display by the processing of step S901207, it is always 5 seconds from the start of the display even if a reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. Display content does not change even after elapse. That is, the display when it is abnormal is simpler than the display when it is normal. Accordingly, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is not normal (or abnormal) without causing confusion or extra burden.

  FIG. 159 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to the performance display. The display in FIGS. 158 (A) to 158 (D) described above is displayed even if a reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. 137 (A) or 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of display. Even when the content does not change but is abnormal, according to the section shown in FIG. 137 (A) and every 5 seconds, for example, as shown in FIGS. 159 (A) to 159 (E), The display content may be changed. The display modes of FIGS. 159 (A) to 159 (E) are different from the display modes of FIGS. 137 (B) to 137 (F) in that the lower two digits are blinking. According to the error notification mode of FIG. 159, since the display content changes depending on the section, in addition to being not normal, the section at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) (the section shown in FIG. 137 (A)), The real-time base value at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) and the previous cumulative base value can also be recognized.

  In order to prevent the player from showing the real-time base value or the previous cumulative base value when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the lower two digits indicating the real-time base value in FIGS. 159 (B) to 159 (E) 159 (D) and 159 (E), the lower two digits indicating the previous cumulative base value may be, for example, “Er. (Flashing)”. That is, in FIGS. 159 (A) to 159 (E), the lower two digits may be "-(flashing)" or "Er. (Flashing)". According to the display mode, in addition to being not normal, it is possible to recognize a section at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) (section shown in FIG. 137A).

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 157, when the error (abnormality) is resolved, the normal mode display (step S901206) is restored, but when the error is resolved, the error notification is not performed without returning to the normal mode display. The display of the mode (step S901207) may be continued. In addition, when the error is resolved, the display is returned to the normal mode, but the notification that the error has occurred may be continued.

  As a first example, after the error is resolved, the lowest-order (fourth digit) dot is blinked (or lit) in the display of the normal mode (FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (F)). Also good. As a second example, a display monitor different from the display monitor 901130 (for example, one digit) is arranged on the main board 9011. After the error is resolved, the display monitor 901130 returns to the normal display. At the same time, a display monitor different from the display monitor 901130 may continue to notify that there was an error (for example, “E. (blink)”).

  The first example is exactly the same as the normal mode display when the error has been resolved (except for the blinking (lighting) of the lowest dot informing that an error has occurred). In the display mode of the first example, in order to provide the information provided (displayed) in the display of the normal mode (except for the lowest dot, the display of the normal mode) Because it is the same), it is expressed that the display is restored to the normal mode. In addition, the display monitor (a display monitor different from the display monitor 901130) for notifying that there has been an error in the second example, as with the display monitor 901130, does not clear the display when the power is cut off. To do. In other words, information indicating that an error has occurred is prevented from being cleared due to a power failure such as a power failure.

  It should be noted that, in the aspect of displaying the performance information as well as the above-described aspect of displaying the role combination (ream ratio) and the role ratio, the clear switch is connected to the main board 9011 and stored in the RAM 90102 by the operation of the clear switch. The data used for the performance display may be cleared. The clear switch in the mode for displaying the performance information is operated when the performance display calculation has to be performed again, such as when a failure occurs in the performance information calculation. When the clear switch is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 9011 in addition to clearing the data, as in the manner of displaying the ratio) and the role ratio.

  When the clear switch is operated in the mode for displaying the performance information, the error display is performed in the same manner as when the clear switch is operated in the mode for displaying the role (link ratio) and the mode for displaying the role ratio (FIGS. 114 and 115). The warning table may be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode (display mode shown in FIGS. 158 and 159). When the clear switch is operated when there is a reception abnormality, both error display and warning display may be performed. For example, an error display and a warning display may be displayed in order. In the case of performing performance display according to the display mode shown in FIG. 159, for example, error display (real-time base value), error display (previous cumulative base value), and warning display may be displayed in order.

  Further, in the aspect of displaying the performance information in the same manner as the above-described aspect of displaying the combination (continuity ratio) and the combination ratio, an error indicator may be provided on the main board 9011 separately from the display monitor 90130. Good. In the case where an error indicator is provided on the main board 9011 in addition to the display monitor 90130, the error indicator is preferably arranged at a position away from the display monitor 9029. Note that in the configuration in which the display monitor 90130 and the error indicator are provided on the main board 9011, when reception abnormality occurs, information indicating the reception abnormality is displayed on the error indicator, and the display monitor 90130 also displays FIG. You may display by the display mode shown in FIG.

In addition, when reception abnormality occurs, for example, a predetermined error display may be performed on the first special symbol display device 904A on the second special symbol display device 904B or the like so that the reception abnormality can be recognized. It may be. In addition, a predetermined error display may be performed on the image display device 905 by transmitting an abnormality detection designation command for designating that a reception abnormality has occurred, or the game effect lamp 909 is lit and blinks in a predetermined pattern. Alternatively, predetermined sounds (including voice) may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R.
In addition, by transmitting information indicating that a reception abnormality has occurred, an information display device (for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a call lamp provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901) Device) or an information management device (such as a hall computer) may recognize that there is a reception abnormality.

  Other devices, etc. (error display, first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905, game effect lamp 909, speakers 908L, 908R, information display device, information management device The display monitor 90130 may erase the display regardless of whether or not the reception abnormality can be recognized. In other words, when reception abnormality occurs, for example, all four digits of the display monitor 90130 are all turned off (the “off” means not always displayed but not displayed in “flashing”). Alternatively, one digit (or two digits or three digits) of all four digits of the display monitor 90130 may be turned off. That is, the display at the time of reception abnormality (display by the process of step S901207) at least restricts the display at the time of normality (display by the process of step S901206) (display for recognizing that it is a reception abnormality). As long as the performance display is limited, or the display is limited by deleting part or all of the performance display).

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing (game control timer interrupt processing) performed by the CPU 90103. In the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 160, the CPU 90103 first executes an error detection process (step S9010), and notifies an error when an error (abnormality) is detected (step S9011). In the processing of steps S9010 and S9011, for example, the CPU 90103 monitors a signal output from the out sphere detector 90710, detects an abnormal reception of the signal output from the out sphere detector 90710 (step S9010), and receives an abnormal reception. Is detected on the display monitor 901130 or the like (step S9011).

  Subsequent to step S9011, the CPU 90103 executes random number update processing (step S9012). In the random number update processing in step S9012, the CPU 90103 updates, for example, game random numbers (for example, big hit determination random numbers, big hit type determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) used on the main board 9011 side. Subsequent to step S9012, the CPU 90103 executes special figure processing (special symbol process) (step S9013). In the special drawing process in step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes various processes shown in FIGS. 140 to 147, FIG. 154, and the like, for example.

  Subsequent to step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes performance information update processing (steps S9014A and S9014B). Details of the performance information update processing will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes performance information display processing (step S9015). In the performance information display process of step S9015, for example, the CPU 90103 displays the performance information updated in the performance information update process (steps S9014A and S9014B) on the display monitor 901130 as shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S9015, the CPU 90103 executes prize ball processing (step S9016). In the prize ball processing in step S9016, the CPU 90103, for example, calculates the number of prize balls based on detection signals from various switches, and controls the payout mechanism so that the calculated number of game balls is paid out. Subsequent to step S9016, the CPU 90103 executes general symbol processing (normal symbol process) (step S9017). In the normal symbol processing in step S9017, the CPU 90103 controls, for example, the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 9020 and the operation of the movable blade in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Subsequent to step S9017, the CPU 90103 executes information output processing (step S9018). In the information output process of step S9018, the CPU 90103, for example, includes an information display device (for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) Various information such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information, abnormality information, etc. is output to an information management device (such as a hall computer). Then, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Note that the processing of steps S9010 to S9018 shown in FIG. 160 has described a part of the processing executed in the game control timer interrupt processing, and the CPU 90103 performs steps S9010 to S9018 in the game control timer interrupt processing. (For example, a switch process for inputting (determining) the state of a detection signal input from various switches, a process for transmitting an effect control command from the main board 9011 side to the effect control board 9012 side, etc.) can be executed. is there.

  In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 139, in the above switch processing, the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D, and the firing detection. A detection signal from the sensor 90700A or the like is output to the CPU 90103. In the case of the configuration in FIG. 150, instead of the firing detection sensor 90700A, detection signals from the first firing detection sensor 90701A and the second launch detection sensor 90702A are output to the CPU 90103. In the case of the configuration in FIG. 153, the detection signal from the out-sphere detection sensor 90710 </ b> A is output to the CPU 90103 instead of the firing detection sensor 90700 </ b> A.

  In addition, the execution order of steps S9010 to S9018 of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 160 is an example. Accordingly, for example, the CPU 90103 may execute the information output process prior to the random number update process, or may execute the normal process immediately after the special figure process.

  Further, the grouping (units of each process) of each process such as the error detection process (step S9010) and the error notification process (step S9011) is an example. Therefore, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 157, the CPU 90103 may execute the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) as one process. In the error notification process of FIG. 157, the process of step S901206 (the process of controlling performance display according to the normal mode) is replaced with the performance information display process (step S9015) of the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. Equivalent to.

  The relationship between the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 160 and the error notification process of FIG. 157 will be supplemented. As described above, the error notification process in FIG. 157 may be regarded as a combination of the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) in FIG. , For reasons of convenience of explanation (for the purpose of explaining that the display mode (normal mode, error notification mode) of the display monitor 901130 differs depending on whether there is an abnormality) .

  FIG. 160 shows the game control timer interrupt process when performance information is displayed, but the game control timer interrupt process when displaying a combination (continuity ratio) and role ratio is the same. That is, the performance information update process (step S9014A) in FIG. 160 is a process for updating the role (relation ratio) and the role ratio, and the performance information display process (step S9015) is a role (relation ratio) and the role ratio is displayed. What is necessary is just processing. The relationship between the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 160 and the processes shown in FIGS. 114 to 117 is similar to the game of FIG. The relationship between the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) in the control timer interrupt process and the error notification process of FIG. 157 is the same.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S9014A) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S9014B) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  The CPU 90103 executes the performance information update process (S9014A) in FIG. 161 in a mode in which the state control process (step S901101A) in FIG. 141 is executed. In other words, the performance information update process (S9014A) in FIG. 161 is performed by the firing ball detector 90700 (launch detection sensor 90700A), or the first launch ball detector 90701 (first launch detection sensor 90701A) and the second launch ball detector. Implemented in a configuration with 90702 (second firing detection sensor 90702A). On the other hand, the CPU 90103 executes the performance information update process (S9014B) of FIG. 162 in a mode in which the state control process (step S901101B) of FIG. 154 is executed. That is, the performance information update process (S9014B) in FIG. 162 is executed in a configuration including the out sphere detector 90710 (out sphere detection sensor 90710A).

  In the performance information update process (S9014A) of FIG. 161, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is on (step S9020). If the probability variation flag is not on in step S9020 (step S9020; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is on (step S9021).

  If the time flag is not on in step S9021 (step S9021; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S9022). In the case of the start of the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 148 and FIG. 151, the round gaming flag is the state change switching waiting time set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 141) (FIGS. 148 and 151). In step S902008 after the elapse of time T2), the state changes from the off state to the on state, so whether or not the process of step S9022 is after the elapse of the state change switching waiting time (time T2) at the start of the big hit gaming state. It can be said that it is judged.

  If the round game flag is not on in step S9022 (step S9022; NO), that is, if the state change switching waiting time (time T2) has not elapsed, the CPU 90103 displays the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be hit. The base value, which is performance information, is calculated by addition (step S9023). In the process of step S9023, for example, the CPU 90103 adds the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening specified from the detection results (detection signals) of various switches of various winning openings (FIG. 136 (B)), and the firing detection sensor. Based on the detection result (detection signal) such as 90700A, the number of shot balls is added (FIG. 136 (B)), and then the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 136 (A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S9014A) ends.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is turned on in step S9020 (step S9020; YES), the time reduction flag is turned on in step S9021 (step S9021; YES), or if the round game flag is turned on in step S9022 ( Step S9022; YES), without performing the process of Step S9023, the performance information update process (Step S9014A) is terminated.

  In the performance information update process (S9014B) of FIG. 162, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is on (step S9030). If the probability variation flag is not on in step S9030 (step S9030; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is on (step S9031).

  If the time flag is not on in step S9031 (step S9031; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S9032). In the case of the end of the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 155, the round gaming flag is set after the elapse of the state change switching waiting time (time T5 in FIG. 155) set in step S902024 of the state control process (FIG. 154). Since the on state is changed to the off state in step S902028, the process of step S9032 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time (time T5) is before the end of the big hit gaming state. I can say that.

  If the round game flag is not on in step S9032 (step S9032; NO), that is, after the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed, the CPU 90103 displays the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be hit. The base value that is the performance information is calculated by addition (step S9033). In the process of step S9033, for example, the CPU 90103 adds the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of various winning openings (FIG. 136 (B)), and detects the out ball. Based on the detection result (detection signal) of the sensor 90710A, the number of shot balls is added (FIG. 136 (B)), and then the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 136 (A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S9014B) ends.

  On the other hand, if the probability change flag is turned on in step S9030 (step S9030; YES), the time reduction flag is turned on in step S9031 (step S9031; YES), or the round game flag is turned on in step S9032 ( Step S9032; YES), without performing the process of Step S9033, the performance information update process (Step S9014B) is terminated.

  According to the performance information update process (step S9014A) in FIG. 161 and the performance information update process (step S9014B) in FIG. 162, when the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are all off, the performance The number of prize balls and the number of balls to be a base for display are added. As shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the performance information update process (step S9014A) of FIG. 161 and the performance information update process (step S9014B) of FIG. It is the same in that the base value, which is performance information, is calculated by referring to the flag state, adding the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be hit, but both are in the state of the round game flag and waiting for a change in state. Since the relationship with time is different (specifically, in the performance information update process (step S9014A) in FIG. 161), the round game flag is in an off state before the time T2 elapses, and the performance information update process (step S9014B) in FIG. Then, after the elapse of time T5, the round game flag is in the off state), which is described with separate drawings.

  The processes shown in FIGS. 160 to 162 are based on the detection results (output results of various switches of various winning awards, firing detection sensors) when all of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are off. The output result of 90700A etc. is reflected (added) as performance information, and the detection result by the switch process is not reflected as performance information when at least one of the probability variation flag, the short time flag, or the round game flag is on. This is the process. In other words, the game ball is detected in the switch process regardless of the state of the flag, but it is determined whether to reflect the detection result as performance information according to the state of the flag. However, if both the probability variation flag, the hourly flag, and the round game flag are in the off state, the number of winning balls and the number of shots are reflected as performance information, and the probability variation flag, the time flag, and the round game flag are reflected. If at least one is in the ON state, other processes may be used as long as the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be hit are not reflected as performance information. For example, when all of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are in the off state, the switch processing related to the number of shots (the firing detection sensor 90700A, the first firing detection sensor 90701A, the second firing detection sensor 90702A, the out ball detection) (Detection by sensor 90710A) is executed, and when at least one of the probability change flag, the time-short flag, or the round game flag is in the ON state, the switch processing related to the number of shot balls may not be executed. That is, it may be a process of determining whether or not to execute a switch process related to the number of shot balls according to the state of the flag. Note that the switch processing related to the number of winning balls (detection by the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D, etc.) is actually performed. Therefore, the switch processing related to the number of winning balls is executed regardless of the flag state, and whether the detection result is reflected in the performance information as in the processing shown in FIGS. You may determine according to a state.

  FIG. 163 is an example of an arrangement position of the out sphere detector. FIG. 163 (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which a gaming machine frame 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902 is released from the outer frame 903A. A main board 9011 and the like are mounted on the back side of the game board 902. A base member 901129 is provided on the main board 9011, and a display monitor 901130 is provided on the base member 901129. The display monitor 901130 is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 901129 and the main substrate 9011.

  Note that the display monitor 901130 shown in FIG. 163A (also the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 163B) has a center on the left and right sides of the back surface of the main substrate 9011 and an upper side on the top and bottom, as shown. Although it is arranged, the display monitor 901130 may be arranged at another position on the back surface. For example, the rear surface of the main substrate 9011 may be arranged at the center in the left-right direction and at the lower side in the up-down direction. In addition, when it arrange | positions above the back surface of the main board | substrate 9011, when a display clerk etc. stand and confirms the display content, it is easy to see the display content. Further, when the display contents are arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main board 9011, it is easy to see the display contents when a store clerk sits or bends and confirms the display contents. In addition, various wirings (signal lines) may exist above the main board 9011 of the game board 902. Then, it is assumed that such wiring is bent or a bundle is removed and covers the main substrate 9011. When the display monitor 901130 is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main board 9011, it is more convenient that a bent wiring is not covered with the display monitor 901130 as compared with the case where the display monitor 901130 is arranged on the upper side. Although related to the above, the display monitor 901130 shown in FIG. 163A (the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 163B is also similar) is similar to the display monitor 90130A shown in FIG. The mode of arrangement is the same. However, the appearance of the display monitor 901130 and the manner of arrangement on the main board 9011 are not limited to those shown in FIG. For example, the display monitor 901130 may have an appearance such as the display monitors 90130B, 90130C, 90130D, 90130E, 90130F, 90130G, 90130H, and 90130I shown in FIGS.

  In FIG. 163 (A), the game board 902 (for example, the bottom, the lower part, etc. of the game board) has a winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A, second general winning opening 9050B, third general winning opening 9050C, fourth. An opening (a hole at the exit of the game ball) for discharging the game ball that has entered the general winning port 9050D, the first starting winning port, the second starting winning port, or the big winning port) or the game ball taken into the out port 9052 to the outside ) 902A is provided. In addition, passages a, b, and c indicated by broken lines are passages (ball collection passages) through which game balls that have entered the winning opening and game balls that have been taken into the out opening 9052 pass. Whether it is a game ball that has entered the winning port or a game ball that has been taken into the out port 9052, it passes through one of the passages a, b, and c, and is finally discharged to the outside from the opening 902A. Is done.

  The out ball detector 90710 is provided on the game board 902 side as shown in FIG. Specifically, the out ball detector 90710 is provided at a position where a game ball discharged from the opening 902A can be detected. That is, like the opening 902A, the out ball detector 90710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball taken into the out port 9052.

  The game balls detected by the out ball detector 90710 are collected by a ball receiving member 901700 provided on the outer frame 903A side (game island side). In addition, the signal line 90734 of the out-sphere detector 90710 is connected to the main substrate 9011. That is, the game ball discharged from the opening 902A of the game board 902 passes through the opening 90721 of the out-ball detector 90710 and is collected on the game island by the ball receiving member 901700. Further, the game ball passing through the opening 90721 is detected by the out-ball detection sensor 90710A, and a detection signal is output to the main board 9011.

  Note that an opening (game ball outlet hole) 901701 is provided at the bottom of the ball receiving member 901700 (portion where the game ball rides), and although not shown, the bottom is inclined toward the opening 901701. doing. That is, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving member 901700 from the gaming machine 901 (opening 90721) passes through the opening 909011, and is discharged to the outside (lower side) of the ball receiving member 901700.

  Note that as shown in FIG. 163 (B), the out-ball detector 90710 may be provided on the outer frame 903A side (game island side). In the example of FIG. 163B, the out ball detector 90710 is provided at a position where a game ball discharged from the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 can be detected. That is, as with the opening 907011, the out-ball detector 90710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball taken into the out-port 9052, and the opening of the ball receiving member 901700 A game ball discharged from 901701 is detected. Note that the clasp 90740 is not illustrated in FIG. 163B.

  FIG. 163A shows an example in which the out ball detector 90710 is installed using the clasp 90740, but the out ball detector 90710 may be installed using a fixing member other than the clasp 90740. The same applies to the example of FIG. 163B.

  In FIGS. 163A and 163B, the out ball detector 90710 is an external component, but the game board 902 or the like may include the out ball detector 90710 from the beginning. For example, in FIG. 163A, an out-ball detector 90710 may be provided below the opening 902A of the game board 902 (the same position as in FIG. 163A). Further, an out-ball detection sensor 90710A may be provided in the opening 902A of the game board 902 (the opening 902A of the game board 902 corresponds to the opening 90721 of the main body 90720). The same applies to the example of FIG. 163B.

  Although FIG. 163 (A) shows three passages (passages a, b, and c), the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball that has been taken into the out opening 9052 eventually reach the opening 902A. If it is a thing, the number and shape of a channel | path are not limited to the example shown to FIG. The same applies to the example of FIG. 163B.

  Note that the state change switching waiting time (time T5 in FIG. 155) set in the process of step S902024 in FIG. 154 is the time required until the game ball picked up by the big winning door is detected by the count switch 9023, The time required for the game ball detected by the count switch 9023 to be detected by the out-ball detection sensor 90710A is affected. Specifically, as the required time is shorter, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) can be shortened (not necessarily shortened).

  Accordingly, for example, in order to shorten the state change switching waiting time (time T5), in the configuration of FIG. 163A, the time until the game ball detected by the count switch 9023 is discharged from the opening 902A is shortened. You may do it. Specifically, the length of the passage (for example, passage a) through which the game ball detected by the count switch 9023 passes is shortened or the game ball that has passed through the passage is immediately inclined to enter the opening 902A. And guidance may be provided. Note that in the structure in FIG. 163B, instead of or in addition to the above, the time until the game ball discharged from the gaming machine 901 (opening 90721) reaches the opening 907011 of the ball receiving member 901700 is short. What should I do. As an example, the inclination of the bottom of the ball receiving member 901700 may be increased.

  Note that the opening 902A of the game board 902 and the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 may be widened so that the game ball does not get clogged and so that the game ball flows quickly. A plurality of openings may be provided, or the ball receiving member 901700 may be provided with a plurality of openings.

  When the opening 902A of the game board 902 is widened, a plurality of out-ball detectors 90710 (out-ball detection sensors 90710A) are provided so that game balls discharged from the widened opening 902A can be detected without omission. It may be. The same applies to the case where the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 is widened. Further, when a plurality of openings are provided in the game board 902, a plurality of out-ball detectors 90710 (corresponding to the respective openings) so that the game balls discharged from the respective openings can be detected without omission. An out-sphere detection sensor 90710A) may be provided. The same applies to the case where a plurality of openings are provided in the ball receiving member 901700.

  When a plurality of out-ball detectors 90710 (out-ball detection sensor 90710A) are provided, a game ball can be detected at the same time. For example, the execution timing of processing executed after detection of one of the simultaneously detected balls is shifted. Each of the game balls detected at the same time may be captured as the number of shot balls.

As described above, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS.
A launching device (for example, a hitting ball launching device or the like) for launching a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) to a game area (for example, the game region 9010 or the like) is provided, and an advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, first or second) The special symbol display devices 904A and 904B for deriving and displaying the decisive special symbol that will be a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, the deriving display of the definite decorative symbol that will be the big hit combination in the image display device 905, the passing of a game ball in a specific area, etc.) A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.) advantageous to the player based on
Detecting means capable of detecting a game medium launched into the game area (for example, a fire ball detector (FIG. 138) provided on the guide rail, and a fire ball detector 90701, 90702 (FIG. 149) provided in the game area) Etc.) and
Variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) that can be changed to an open state in which the game medium launched into the gaming area can win a prize;
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 906B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 9050A to 9050D serving as a general winning region, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on winning a special variable winning ball device 907
A determination means capable of determining whether or not the player is in the advantageous state (for example, a CPU 90103 that determines whether or not the gaming state is based on a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like, specifically, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag is all off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of balls to be struck) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth) For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 163) capable of displaying (for example, performance display, etc.).
The variable winning means is
Change to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 148 and FIG. 151, based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at timing t1, The door changes from closed to open)
The determination means includes
A predetermined period before the variable winning means changes to the open state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 148 and 151, a time T3 before the timing t3 at which the big prize opening door changes from the closed state to the open state). From the timing t2, etc., it is determined that the player is in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 141, the round game flag is turned on at the timing t2 when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses. Etc.).

  Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, a game ball (for example, a game ball in FIG. 148) detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A or the first launch ball detector 90701 (second launch ball detector 90702) at any timing of the time T3. c)) is not included in the performance display calculation, an accurate base value can be calculated.

Also, the above gaming machine 901 is
Variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, an image display device 905, etc.) for performing variable display and deriving and displaying the display result;
The state (for example, the state at the timing t2) before the predetermined period from the change to the open state is
A special state after the display result of the variable display executed by the variable display means is derived and displayed (for example, a state where a fanfare effect is being executed in the image display device 905 as shown in FIGS. 148 and 151, etc.) It is.

  Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. In other words, the predetermined information is not included without including a game ball (such as the game ball c shown in FIGS. 148 and 151) that is fired after the change stop (after the stop display) and may win the special variable winning ball device 907. (Performance information) can be calculated.

  In the above embodiment (FIGS. 141, 148, 148, etc.), the round game flag is turned on from the off state during execution of the fanfare effect after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The round game flag may be changed from the off state to the on state before the execution of (such as during the execution of the reach effect). For example, if the execution time of the fanfare effect is short (for example, 2, 3 seconds, etc.), a game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 is detected before the start of the fanfare effect. Since it may be detected by 90700A or the first launch ball detector 90701 (second launch ball detector 90702), a game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 is not included in the performance display. In addition, the round game flag may be changed from the off state to the on state before the fanfare effect is executed. Specifically, for example, the special game variation time may be referred to and the round game flag may be set to the on state at a timing before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The round game flag may be changed from the off state to the on state at the start of execution of the fanfare effect.

In the above gaming machine 901,
The detection means is detachable (for example, as shown in FIG. 149, the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 include the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702, respectively. The portion above the broken line P is detachable.

  Thereby, even if it does not have a detection means, it can respond. In addition, maintenance becomes easy.

In the above gaming machine 901,
The detection means includes
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 902 etc.) that forms a game area (for example, the first shot ball detector 90701 and the second shot ball detector 90702 are shown in FIG. 149). The portion above the broken line P is configured as a unit).

  This facilitates maintenance. In addition, different models can be used in common.

In the above gaming machine 901,
The game area includes
There are a left game area (for example, left game area 9010A) and a right game area (for example, right game area 9010A) as areas through which the game medium launched by the launching device can pass,
The unit (for example, a portion above the broken line P in FIG. 149)
Left-side detection means (for example, a first launch ball detector 90701) that detects a game medium that passes through the left game area, and right-side detection means (for example, second launch) that detects a game medium that passes through the right game area. Sphere detector 90702).

  As a result, it can be detected regardless of where the game area is fired.

In the above gaming machine 901,
The detection means includes
It is provided upstream of any winning area provided in the gaming area in the flow path of the game medium (for example, as shown in FIG. 138, the launch ball detector 90700 is a normal winning ball apparatus 906A, It is provided above the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D, and the special variable winning ball device 907. Also, as shown in Fig. 149, the first shot ball detector 90701 and the second shot ball The detector 90702 is provided above the ordinary winning ball device 906A, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D, and the special variable winning ball device 907).

  Thereby, it can detect reliably.

In addition, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS.
A launching device (for example, a hitting ball launching device or the like) for launching a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) to a game area (for example, the game region 9010 or the like) is provided, and an advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, first or second) The special symbol display devices 904A and 904B for deriving and displaying the decisive special symbol that will be a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, the deriving display of the definite decorative symbol that will be the big hit combination in the image display device 905, the passing of a game ball in a specific area, etc.) A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.) advantageous to the player based on
Variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) that can be changed to an open state in which the game medium launched into the gaming area can win a prize;
Variable winning control means (for example, a CPU 90103 for executing the special figure processing shown in FIG. 140) capable of performing a round game for changing the variable winning means to the open state a predetermined number of times;
Game media that have passed through any of the winning areas provided in the gaming area (first general winning port 9050A, second general winning port 9050B, third general winning port 9050C, fourth general winning port 9050D, first start winning prize) In order to discharge game balls won in any of the mouth, the second start prize opening, or the big prize opening) and game media that did not pass through any of the winning areas (game balls taken into the out port 9052). (For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (A), the position at which the game ball discharged from the opening 902A of the game board 902A can be detected or the ball receiving member 901700 as shown in FIG. 163 (B)). A detection means (for example, an out-ball detector 90710) provided at a position where the game ball discharged from the opening 901701 can be detected and the game medium passing through the flow path can be detected;
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 906B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 9050A to 9050D serving as a general winning region, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on winning a special variable winning ball device 907
A determination means capable of determining whether or not the player is in the advantageous state (for example, a CPU 90103 that determines whether or not the gaming state is based on a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like, specifically, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag is all off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of balls to be struck) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth) For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 163) capable of displaying (for example, performance display, etc.).
The variable winning control means is
The round game is started based on the fact that the advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, the big winning opening door is controlled from the closed state to the open state based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped),
The determination means includes
Until a predetermined period elapses after the predetermined number of round games are finished and the variable winning means is changed to the closed state (for example, as shown in FIG. 155, the big prize opening door is changed from the open state to the closed state). From the timing t4 to the timing t5 when the time T5 has elapsed, etc.), it is determined that the state is advantageous (for example, as shown in the state control processing of FIG. 154, the timing at which the state change switching waiting time (time T5) elapses. For example, the round game flag is cleared to the off state at t5).

  Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, the game ball detected by the out-ball detector 90710 at any timing of the time T5 (for example, the game ball d in FIG. 155) is not included in the calculation of the performance display. A simple base value can be calculated.

In the above gaming machine 901,
The state when the predetermined period elapses (for example, the state at the timing t5) is
A special state after the predetermined number of round games have ended (for example, a state where an ending effect is being executed in the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 155).

  Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. In other words, even for a game ball detected by the out ball detector 90710 during the ending effect, there is a possibility that a game ball (such as the game ball d shown in FIG. 155) that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 can be won. Since it is not included in the calculation of the predetermined information (performance information), accurate predetermined information can be calculated.

  In the above embodiment (FIGS. 154, 155, etc.), the round gaming flag is changed from the on state to the off state during the execution of the ending effect after the final round. The round game flag may be changed from the on state to the off state during the first variable display in the big hit. For example, when the execution time of the ending effect is short (for example, 2, 3 seconds, etc.), a game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 is detected as an out ball detector 90710 after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, the round gaming flag is changed from the on state to the off state after execution of the ending effect so that the game balls that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 are not included in the performance display. May be. Specifically, for example, the state change switching waiting time set in step S902024 of FIG. 154 may be made longer than the big hit end effect waiting time. Note that the round game flag may be changed from the on state to the off state at the end of execution of the ending effect.

In the above gaming machine 901,
The detection means is detachable (for example, the out-sphere detector 90710 can be attached / detached by a clasp 90740 as shown in FIG. 156B).

  Thereby, even if it does not have a detection means, it can respond. In addition, maintenance becomes easy.

In the above gaming machine 901,
The detection means includes
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 902 or the like) that forms a game area (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 is a game board 902 as shown in FIG. 163 (B)). It is configured as a unit that can be placed in).

  This facilitates maintenance. In addition, different models can be used in common.

In addition, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS.
A gaming machine that can execute a game and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.)
Detection means (for example, the out ball detector 90710 shown in FIGS. 156, 163, etc.) capable of detecting a game medium (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) used in the game;
A signal line (for example, a signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 156) to which a detection signal from the detection unit is transmitted;
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, and the like);
An abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, the CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 157);
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 906B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 9050A to 9050D serving as a general winning region, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on winning a special variable winning ball device 907
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like, specifically, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag is all off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of balls to be struck) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth) For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 163) capable of displaying (for example, performance display, etc.).
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection unit, the display by the information display unit is limited (for example, an error is notified and the performance display is limited as shown in FIGS. 158 and 159).

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the information display means from performing inaccurate display. Note that, for example, if an illegal act such as removing the harness 90730 (connection portion 90732, 90733) is performed to show the performance display value well, at least the performance display by the display monitor 901130 is limited. It is possible to prevent a situation in which numbers due to fraudulent acts are displayed as if they were valid.

In the above gaming machine 901,
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection unit, the display state by the information display unit is changed to indicate that the abnormality in the reception state has been detected (for example, as shown in FIGS. 158 and 159) For example).

  Thereby, it can confirm, without providing a new display means.

In the above gaming machine 901,
The abnormality detection means can detect disconnection of the signal line (for example, can be detected by monitoring a signal input from the out-sphere detector 90710),
It is possible to notify the outside (for example, a game effect lamp 909, speakers 908L and 908R, a card unit display device, a calling lamp device, a hall computer, etc.) that the disconnection of the signal line has been detected.

  Thereby, it can recognize, without performing door opening operation | work.

In the above gaming machine 901,
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 is configured as a unit that can be placed on the game board 902 as shown in FIG. 163B).

  This facilitates maintenance. In addition, different models can be used in common.

  136 to 163 show a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine for displaying performance, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. Is a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are rotated according to the player's stop button operation. (For example, a slot machine equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus)).

  For example, a slot machine that displays performance is a slot machine that can execute a game and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a bonus) that is advantageous to the player, and a game medium (for example, a medal) used in the game And a detection line (for example, a inserted medal sensor that detects a inserted medal) and a signal line (for example, a detection signal from the inserted medal sensor) that transmits a detection signal from the detection unit. A signal line to be output to the main board side of the machine), receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board of the slot machine, a predetermined connecting portion provided on the main board side), and the detection signal An abnormality detection means (for example, a CPU on the main board of the slot machine) and a predetermined condition are satisfied (for example, a combination of specific symbols on each reel (a role) In a predetermined state different from the advantageous state, and a payout means (for example, a hopper motor for paying out a medal stored in a hopper tank from a medal payout outlet) Predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media detected by the detection means and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, information indicating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts, etc.) ) Can be displayed (for example, a display unit provided on the main board of the slot machine), and when the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality in the reception state, the information display unit displays the information. It may be a slot machine that restricts (for example, notifies an error and restricts display of information indicating the ratio).

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 18c On-hold storage display unit 18d Active display unit 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
901 Pachinko machine 902 Game board 903 Game machine frame 903a Glass door frame 903A Outer frame 904A, 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R Speaker 909 Game effect lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Audio control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A, 9022B Start switch 9023 Count switch 9029 Display monitor 9030 Operation button 90100 Game control Microcomputer 90101, 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 Random number circuit 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 CPU for effect control
90123 Display control unit 901000 Movable accessory

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to a variable display in a mode involving operation, and capable of changing a display mode of the specific display;
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display;
A detection means capable of detecting a game medium used in the game;
A signal line through which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted;
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal;
An abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal;
A payout means for paying out game media based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Information capable of displaying predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state Display means,
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection unit, the display by the information display unit is limited,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific display means can change the display mode of the specific display at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display when the suggestion effect is executed.